Home

M3 Operation Guide

1. B Keyboard assembly 3 Ribbon controller A M3 M sound module section This is the M3 M sound module You can use the M3 M attached to the KYBD 61 73 88 keyboard assembly or use the M3 M by itself as a MIDI sound module with an external MIDI keyboard or controlled from your computer B KYBD 61 73 88 keyboard assembly This is the KYBD 61 73 88 keyboard assembly Connect it to the M3 M For details on how to connect this to the M 3M and how to use it please see Keyboard assembly Manual 1 SW1 and SW2 These are used to control the M3 M s programs or effect parameters or to turn the joystick or ribbon controller s lock function on off The actual functions that are being controlled will depend on various program and effect parameters 2 Joystick You can control the M3 M s program parameters or effect parameters by moving the joystick up down left right The actual functions that are being controlled will depend on various program and effect parameters
2. DrumTrack DRUMS PROGRAM PROGRAM HD 2 osc 1 Insert Master Final Effect C Fx1 _ _ mFxi C mFx2 Coxs _ KARMA Module A MS1 Multisample 2 MS1 Multisample Drum Kit MS2 Multisample MS3 Multisample MS4 Multisample AMP2 PITCH2 FILTER2 pRiveR2 DrumTrack DRUMS PROGRAM COMBINATION Insert Master Final Effect on ee TIMBRE1 PROGRAM TIMBRE9 PROGRAM IFX 1 MFX 1 fant SPE TIMBRE2 PROGRAM TIMBRE10 PROGRAM C mFx2 TIMBRE3 PROGRAM TIMBRE11 PROGRAM TFX E TIMBRE4 PROGRAM TIMBRE12 PROGRAM Cirxs _ TIMBRES PROGRAM TIMBRE13 PROGRAM KARMA Module A L TIMBREG6 PROGRAM TIMBRE14 PROGRAM L TIMBRE7 PROGRAM TIMBRE15 PROGRAM TIMBRES8 PROGRAM TIMBRE16 PROGRAM _ KARMA Module B KARMA Module C KARMA Module D Drum Track SEQUENCER MIDI TRACK 1 16 Insert Master Final Effect n TRACK 1 PROGRAM TRACK 9 PROGRAM IFX 1 C MFX 1 A TRACK 2 PROGRAM TRACK 10 PROGRAM C MFx2_ PROGRAM a ad TRACK 3 PROGRAM TRACK 11 PROGRAM IEX Progra Procran TRACK 4 PROGRAM TRACK 12 PROGRAM ioe 2 N TRACK 5 PROGRAM TRACK 13 PROGRAM f kd TRACK 6 PROGRAM TRACK
3. Velocity Bottom jagi Top are ae 4 If Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trig specify the Latch setting Latch specifies whether the Drum Track pattern will continue playing even after you take your hand off the keyboard Off If the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch is on the LED will blink the pattern will start when you play the keyboard note on The pattern will stop when you release the keyboard note off On If the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch is on the LED will blink the pattern will start when you play the keyboard note on The pattern will continue when you release the keyboard note off The pattern will stop when you turn the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch off the LED will go dark Use KARMA Latch Switch The on off status of the KARMA LATCH switch will correspond to the above Off and On modes of operation You will probably want to use this in conjunction with KARMA s Latch operation 5 If Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trig specify the Keyboard Zone and Velocity Zone Ww tes E gt om a 189 190 Drum Track function These settings specify the range of keys and velocities that will trigger the Drum Track pattern when you play the keyboard or receive a note on Selecting a Drum Track program Here s how to select the Drum Track program You can also make this selection in the Prog P0 Play Main page see page 18
4. PAGE EXIT Eo Playing Programs and Combinations gt Vox Organ Siw 7 A Pipe Organ Mixtul BeSe Gospel BRS I AB4G Jazz Organ DistAI B184 Rock Pere Organ ee I AG72 M1 Pere1 Organ l 6120 Jazzy Med Orgar A I 4838 Full Organ KAR Ce S Ballade Organ I Baes Pere 1 2rd Orgall C824 Positive Organ I BG24 Church PositivelI C84 Smoke House Org g7 gt Jazz Pero Organ I CeS6 Jump to Sub Cancel OF The Category Program Select menu will appear showing a list of the programs for each category Press the tabs located at the left and right to select the desired category Then press a program in the menu to select it You can press the A switch or V switch to select the program of the next or previous number When you ve chosen the program you want to play press the OK button or the ENTER switch Categories also have sub categories and you can press the Jump to Sub button of the Category Program Select menu to choose programs from a sub category list Selecting combinations 1 Press the MODE COMBI switch the LED will light to enter Combination mode 2 The upper left of the display shows the name of the current page Combi P0 Play This is the page in which you will normally play combinations Play the keyboard or strike the pads to hear the sound Note If you moved to another page etc by pressing the display pressing the EXIT switch a maximum of three times will take
5. WwW Connection for the M3 M If you re using an external MIDI keyboard to control the M3 M make connections as follows If you re using the M3 Editor make connections as shown in the following illustration Computer USB cable H fg MIDIIN M3 M I Mibi out mee sa loooo UT MIDI keyboard If you re using the M3 Plug In Editor or a DAW you can connect your MIDI keyboard via your computer as shown in the following illustration instead of using the connections shown in the illustration above If you connect to your computer via MIDI you ll need a commercially available MIDI interface Computer USB cable od MIDI USB USB B 2 Make the necessary settings in the M3 s Global mode For details please see Global mode settings on the M3 on page 32 3 Make the necessary settings on your computer For details please see M3 Editor Plug In Editor Manual PDF Using the M3 Editor Plug In Editor via a USB connection Here are some examples of how to use the system with the M3 Editor Plug In Editor connected via USB If you want to mix the M3 s audio signals with the audio signals sent from your host application via your audio in
6. These settings can be made in the same way as in Program Effects settings on page 155 M You can use MIDI to control dynamic modulation Dmod for each effect the post IFX pan CC 8 and Send 1 and Send 2 An asterisk is shown at the right of ChO1 Ch16 for the channel number of timbres routed to IFX If you ve routed multiple timbres that have differing MIDI channel settings this specifies the channel on which they will be controlled Master effects and Total effect These settings can be made in the same way as on page 156 fe You can control these effects via MIDI on the Ctrl Ch The specified MIDI channel will control dynamic modulation Dmod for the Master and Total Effect Effect settings in Sampling mode In Sampling mode you can sample from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 or S P DIF IN jacks while applying an effect to the external audio input source It s also possible to apply effects to a multisample and resample the result Routing Routing of an external input 1 Access the Sampling P0 Recording Audio In Setup page Audio In Setup i SAMPLING PS Recording input Level Pan Bus Select Fs Bus AUS Bus Sendi Send Input 1 127 an O GE of orr putz 127 R27 LR por Gor pno aaa Sampling Setup source Bus gt L R Trigger gt Sampling START S Metronome Precount E gt Off H 5 Resample E gt Manual Pre Trigger REC OGA ms EE i eca
7. KARMA function settings in Combination mode In Combination mode and Sequencer mode you can use four KARMA modules modules A B C and D In a combination you can use the four KARMA modules and the sixteen timbre programs in a variety of ways for example separate phrases or patterns can play programs such as drums bass guitar and strings KARMA function settings for a combination are made in the various pages of Combi P7 1 KARMA1 and 7 2 KARMA2 Here we will explain the procedure for setting the major parameters such as Run and Solo settings the selection of a GE and MIDI I O settings For other parameters please see Editing the parameters of each KARMA module on page 178 and 7 1b GE Setup on page 163 of the Parameter Guide Switching the KARMA function on off Each time you press the KARMA ON OFF switch the KARMA function will be turned on or off When on the switch LED will be lit The on off status is saved when you write the combination When the KARMA function is off all KARMA modules A B C and D will be off When the KARMA function is on the KARMA modules will operate as specified by their Run and Solo settings Run and Solo settings 1 Access the Combi P7 1 KARMA1 GE Setup A D page Note You can make these settings in the Combi PO Play KARMA GE page COMBI P 1 FARMATI Load GE Opt J 25 50 GE setup A WMOLERERAU
8. 195 Preparing a user pattern ccc cee eens 195 Converting to a Drum Track pattern 195 Other functions common to all MOdES ccccsccccsccesccee 197 Editing NAMES ccc ccc eee e eee 197 Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2 198 Setting the functions of Realtime Controls DUG 30 cow aadawnawewesuada E A 198 Using tap teMPO cee cc cece eee cee eee 199 Resetting controller values 00 eee ee 199 SHON CUTS aar sand hacen pans aaule tune E 200 Appendices ssseeeee 201 Restoring the factory settings 201 Loading the preloaded data 05 201 Installing options cccecececeees 202 Cautions when installing an option board 202 Available option boards for the M3 203 Verifying installation ccc cece eens 203 Installing the options and replacing the calendar AY eg orate a pa one Gate ea EIA 204 Troubleshooting ccccececcscececs 208 Power supply veo dcndweweesdawdwewesadswseucauns 208 DISDIAY eessrevrinianisrner ii 208 Audio input and output 0c ee eee 208 Programs and Combinations 66 210 DONS oboe e ae oe an eae os ao ee ae 210 SATOMI ea E E E O EE EEA 211 KARMA function oa6i0cnedresavcatasaesatiacaans 211 Drum Track function ccc cc eee eee ees 212 COME Ol asa su cawe ETa I RENN 212 Drami K be eandicnseenend EEE O g ER 212 EOC cans E E R AIEA EAE 212
9. COME Pe Play 1 A gt G0 Towards The Sun J 035 50 Control Assign Tone Adjust Timbre ERI im Auta Load ERS 0SC1 Transpose 12 Rel 68 1 Zz 1 ae 1 H Filtr Fitr Fitr Tsp Tsp Tune Tune DR Fe Reso EG I TD TD TE ee TD es ee TB 12 87 8000 8016 PROG 18 d 18 Fitch tre 3 Select the Timbre whose parameters you d like to adjust 4 Edit the controls as desired In addition to editing the values you can also change the assignments of Tone Adjust parameters to the sliders and switches For details please see Using Tone Adjust on page 49 Effects Effects are covered in their own section of the manuals so we won t go into too much detail here Insert Effects Insert Effects let you send either individual Oscillators or the entire Program through up to 5 effects in series You can use any type of effects from distortions and compressors to choruses and reverbs The Insert Effect output can be routed to the MAIN L MONO and R jacks as well as to each INDIVIDUAL jack Two double size effects 154 St Mltband Limiter 170 Early Reflections can be used in IFX1 4 plus one normal effect for a maximum of three effects You can also use one double size effect and up to three normal effects for a total of up to four effects For details please see Insert effects on page 155 Master Effects There are two Master Effects which are accessed through Send
10. Load GE Options Auto RTC Setup m Use RTC Model m Reset Scenes Clear RTC Setup Q keep RTC Setup Cancel OK Load GE Options specifies whether the settings of the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches settings will be automatically set initialized or maintained when you select a GE In this example we ve opted to automatically set the slider and switch functions to the standard settings for the RTC Model of the selected GE so that you ll be able to control the phrase or pattern immediately 3 Use GE Select to select the GE used by the KARMA module Use Tempo to set the tempo of the pattern or phrase generated by the GE The M3 provides numerous preset GEs that can be used for a wide range of instruments playing techniques and musical styles GE Category Select shows the category of the GE that s selected for the KARMA module All GEs are organized by category You can press GE Category Select to open the Category GE Select page and choose a GE by category and sub category see GE Category Select on page 6 of the Parameter Guide Copying KARMA function settings from an other program You can use the Copy KARMA Module menu command to copy the KARMA function settings EG selection KARMA module parameter settings etc from another program 1 Press the menu button to open the menu and choose Copy KARMA Module Copy KARMA Module F rom
11. Troubleshooting Sampling Can t record your performance using Tone Adjust Changes you make using Tone Adjust are recorded as system exclusive data Did you check the Global mode MIDI Filter Enable Exclusive check box PG p 384 RPPR does not start Is the Seg PO Play REC RPPR setting checked gt p 97 Are Assign Pattern Select and Track set correctly p 97 If the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI parameter set to Internal or Auto PG p 380 SMF you loaded in Media mode won t play correctly Execute the menu command GM Initialize to initialize the settings gt PG p 282 Set Bank Map to GM 2 gt PG p 374 Sampling Can t sample Are the audio input settings correct e For details please see Audio input and output Audio inputs don t work properly p 209 Is there free space in memory PG p 324 p 415 e In order to sample to RAM memory you must allocate sufficient space for sampling PG p 345 p 350 e If you re sampling to a USB storage device select another USB storage device PG p 109 p 350 e Delete unneeded samples PG p 345 e Save important samples on external media and then delete them from memory gt PG p 353 If you re sampling to external USB storage device did you select recordable media Is the Trigger setting correct PG p 12 p 321 In Sampling mode if you are resampling with Resample set to Auto has the sample to be resam
12. A Of 15 2 6 l 3 7 l 4 8 O c O D o TRACK KARMA wor 6 MODULE LATCH 2 Access the Prog P0 Play Control Surface page In this page you can view and edit the control surface settings This is a convenient way to adjust your sound since you can see the parameter assignments and the precise values Note The control surface is active regardless of the page that is shown in the display OSC Play Mute Menu PRO P Play l A gt nal BPM Dense Motionations Contrl assig E DSC Mix i2050 1 E OSC Flay Mute O5C1 OsC2 DrumTrk o OSC Volume KARMA TE Control Audioln ad Volume 3 Use sliders 1 2 and 3 to adjust the volume of oscillators 1 and 2 and the drum track Note For single oscillator programs you won t be able to control oscillator 2 4 If the display indicates OSC Play Mute you can press switches 1 2 or 3 to switch the Play Mute status of oscillators 1 and 2 and the drum track 5 Press the menu button and choose Panel SW Solo Mode The menu will close and the OSC Play Mute indication in the display will change to OSC Solo 47 48 Playing and editing Programs Alternatively you can switch between OSC Play Mute and OSC Solo by holding down the ENTER switch and pressing numeric key 1 6 If the display indicates OSC Solo you can press switches 1 2 or 3 to switch the Solo on off status of oscillators 1 an
13. A32 U A3 Drumkit UAGS2 C4 m Assign Ofsi gt Off Lvi 00 Bottom Yel B01 xfdfOrt E Lin Bottom Yel A01 xfdfor E Lin Bottom Yel 061 wfd 0r E Lin Poy Param EG Miner d Split J 4 Use the Drum Kit parameter at the top of the page to select the Drum Kit that you wish to edit amp GM drum kits 144 GM 152 GM cannot be selected here It is not possible to edit or write a GM drum kit If you wish to modify the settings of one of the drum kits 144 GM 152 GM you can use Copy Drum Kit to copy it to 000 INT 143 U G and then edit the copy 5 Use the Key parameter to select the note that you wish to edit To select a key you can use any of the standard VALUE controllers the slider dial numeric keypad etc As a shortcut you can also hold down the ENTER switch and play a note on the keyboard This Key selection applies to all five Drum Kit editing pages 6 Use the Assign check box to specify whether the key will have its own settings or use the same settings as the next higher note If Assign is checked the key will have its own settings This is the default If Assign is not checked the key won t have its own settings Instead it will use the same settings as the next higher note except that the drumsamples will be played at a lower pitch
14. Index will be 001 008 This indicates that there are eight indexes and that the first index is selected Press the Create button several times Each time you press it an index will be created The keyboard display will indicate the zone and original key location of each index Note The index that is created when you press the Create button will be created according to the PO Recording Preference page Create Zone Preference settings These settings can also be made in P3 Multisample Edit page Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Creating multisample indexes and sampling PO Recording 2AMFPLIHG F Recording WCreate fone Preference Position gt Right to Selected Index Tey Original Key Position gt Bottom EREC Sample Preference m Auto Loop On m Auto 12dB On Metronome Setup Bust Output Select L R Level 1 Ei rence Status Surface Immediately after the power is turned on Position will be Right to selected index Zone Range will be 1 Keys and Original Key Position will be Bottom so that indexes will be created as shown below This is convenient when you want to sample multiple takes of a phrase or rhythm loop in a single operation Index EEN a1 2 Preference i Zone Range J 128 68 9682 NewMsS__ ___ Gaz If you set Zone Range to 12 Keys indexes will be created at intervals of one octave Aas Index ERM Aad 003 Mews Zs 5 Select Index
15. KARMA module MIDI I O channel settings The MIDI input output channel setting for each KARMA module and the MIDI channel setting of each timbre together determine how the KARMA modules will play the timbres Use the Combi P7 1 KARMA1 GE SetupA B C and D pages to set the MIDI I O If a KARMA module s MIDI output channel matches the MIDI channel of a timbre the phrase or pattern generated by that KARMA module if it s operating will play that timbre For details on making these settings please see KARMA function settings in Combination mode on page 176 See 7 1 1c MIDI I O on page 164 of the Parameter Guide GE Generated Effect selection Just as for a program you can use the GE Select field to select the GE used by each module See KARMA function settings in Combination mode on page 176 When you ve selected a GE use Tempo to specify the tempo of the GE s phrase or pattern Use KARMA T Sig to specify the time signature of the pattern or phrase generated by the GE If you select GE TS the time signature specified by the GE for each module will be used with any other setting the time signature of all GEs will change temporarily KARMA module parameter settings For details on editing KARMA module parameters please see KARMA function settings in Combination mode on page 176 171 172 Using KARMA KARMA function settings This section explains how to make settings f
16. Note The above step assumes that your USB device supports hot plugging If you are using a device that does not support hot plugging connect it with the power turned off amp While the M3 is accessing the USB device do not connect another USB device or disconnect the connected device Doing so may damage your data 4 Press the MODE MEDIA switch to enter Media mode 5 Press the Media Info tab and then execute the menu command Scan USB device If you are using a removable disk insert the media After you exchange media in your USB device press the display to make the M3 detect the media When the media has been detected information about the media will appear on the display amp Make sure that the USB storage device containing your WAVE files and the media in the USB CD R RW have been detected amp When writing data to CD R RW media the media containing the WAVE files must have free space equal in size to the WAVE files you are writing Before you execute this operation make sure that the drive containing the WAVE files contains enough free space Creating audio CDs Part 1 2ch Mix to Media If you re starting with Songs you ve created in Sequencer mode you ll first need to bounce the Songs to WAVE files on the USB storage device commercially available hard disk etc 1 In Sequencer mode select the first song that you want to burn to the CD 2 In the 0 7 Sampling Audio In page sample
17. ON OFF switch off and then on again and then play the keyboard Settings in Combination and Sequencer modes Linking the KARMA performance with the Drum Track pattern start stop In Combination mode and Sequencer mode the KARMA function can operate up to four KARMA modules simultaneously Start stop for each KARMA module can be synchronized with the Drum Track pattern start stop Here we ll explain how to make settings in Combination mode Settings for Sequencer mode are the same as in Combination mode 1 Access the Combi P0 Play KARMA GE page COMBI PS Play BEA InitCombi ARE J 126 00 Auto RTC Setup KARMA st Load GE Options eeeTchi ResetScenes TSi GE TS ModuteLy Crum 1363 16 Beat 1 411 Kits 1 RTC Model l DF1 Drum Ferg 1 E irum H gt Arrpegio DM gt Arregio 1282 saa 16 Beat 1 CA Kit Arp Model 1 Up Arp Model 61 Up E Run m Rur _ Run _ Run O Solo _ Solo C Solo C Solo C Linkto DT Link to DT C Link to DT C Link to DT Frog Prog Mirer Mirer l ae heie ie erie J 2 Turn on select the Link to DT setting for the KARMA module s that you want to link with the Drum Track pattern start stop EJ gt helodic dtone Trance When you turn on at least
18. Program mode page structure Select and play programs Simple KARMA editing Audio input settings and resampling settings Editing from the control surface Basic program settings such as voice assign mode Drum Track settings X Y control settings SW1 2 and slider function settings Pad note and velocity settings P2 OSC Pitch Oscillator selection and pitch settings P3 1 Filter1 Filter 1 tone settings Q P3 2 Filter2 Filter 2 tone settings Amp 1 2 volume settings P4 Amp EQ Amp 1 2 driver and pan settings 3 band parametric EQ settings P5 LFO LFO settings P6 AMS Common KeyTrack P7 1 KARMA1 Overall settings for KARMA and settings GE Setup Module for each module P7 2 KARMA2 KARMA realtime parameter settings and GE RTP Perf performance parameter settings Oscillator output bus and master effect send level settings Insert effect routing selection and settings P1 Basic DT Ctrls AMS Mixer settings Common keyboard tracking settings Master effect routing selection and settings Total effect selection and settings P9 MFX TFX For details on how to access each mode and page please see Basic operations on page 22 Sampling or resampling can be performed in Program mode For details please see Sampling in Program Combination and Sequencer modes on page 122 Since you can apply the M3 s internal effects to the external audio inputs a wide rang
19. Protecting the memory If one or more of the Memory Protect check boxes are checked operations such as writing loading or song recording will be prohibited for the corresponding type of memory GLOBAL P Basic Setup System Preference E System Preference Bank Map System oT System Clack gt Internal Select the mode Power On Mode Reset that is selected at power on m Beep Enable Beep setting _ Auto Optimize RAM ilemory Prot ct C Program C Drum Kit Memory protect settings _ Combination C KARMA GE C Song e T al A i Check j Audio input settings Audio input settings used in common for Program Combination and Sequencer modes In the Global P0 Basic Setup Audio page you can make settings that will apply in modes other than Sampling mode you can select the input source for analog digital audio signals and adjust the input level bus and master effect send levels To use these settings check the Use Global Setting parameter in each mode GLOBAL P Basic Setup Input Input Level Parn Input 27 Lonn Gor por Gor asa jase Eae Input 2 ce Riz Oor Gor Gor aaa npe SoLo_ Bus Select FR Bus AUA Bus Sendi Sends Output L R Bus Indiv Out Assign off _ ff olor A MIDI Basic Routing MIDI related settings for the entire M3 In the Globa
20. T eee pudon rete rac Track 2 amp Popup 3 Let s start by listening to song S000 Verify that song S000 is selected If another song is selected press the song name display area Song Select to highlight it Then press the numeric key 0 and then the ENTER switch 4 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch The LED will blink and the song will begin playing back 5 If you want to stop playback mid way through the song press the START STOP switch once again 6 Let s listen to the next song Press the song name display area Song Select Press numeric key 1 and then press the ENTER switch Song S001 will be selected Alternatively you can press the round button Song Select popup located at the left of the song name and a list of song names will appear Press one of the song names to select a song 7 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to begin playback To stop playback press the START STOP switch once again amp The demo song will not be retained when the power is turned off but you can load it again at any time Playing back a cue list Songs can be assigned to a cue list and will playback in the specified order You can also specify the number of times that each song will be repeated Here s how to play back the demo songs assigned to a cue list 1 Access the P11 Cue List page Press the PAGE SELECT switch to access the S
21. This page shows and reflects the control surface data Since you can view the parameter assignments and the precise value this is convenient when adjusting the sound 3 Use sliders 1 8 and switches 1 8 to adjust the sound Note You can assign the main parameters of the program to the controllers See Tone Adjust on page 19 of the Parameter Guide For example 1 Select Program INT A120 Smooth Operators 2 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN TONE ADJUST switch the LED will light 3 Access the Prog P0 Play Control Surface page This page mirrors the Control Surface It s very useful with Tone Adjust since it shows you the parameter assignments exact values and so on 4 Look at the assignments for sliders 5 6 and 8 Slider 5 is assigned to F A EG Attack Time slider 6 is assigned to F A EG Decay Time and slider 8 is assigned to F A EG Release Time 5 Raise each of the three sliders so that they are about 4 5 of the way to the top The display should show their values as between 60 and 70 This means that you have edited the filter EG and amp EG attack delay and release to longer values 6 Play a few notes Notice that the sound has changed from an electric piano into a soft pad Next let s add just a bit of pitch modulation to make the sound more rich 7 Notice the assignment of slider 2 Slider 2 is assigned to OSC1 Filter LFO1 Int A OSC1 filter LFO1 intensity It will ad
22. You can even use one of the pads that was being merged if you like After pressing the destination pad you re done VALUE slider ae When a program number is selected in Prog PO Play page or when a combination number is selected in Combi PO Play page you can use the VALUE slider to modulate Program and effects parameters Damper Pedal Damper Pedal Sustain The damper pedal is also sometimes called the sustain pedal It acts like the similarly named pedal on an acoustic piano when you hold down the pedal notes will continue to sustain even when you lift your hands off of the keyboard Damper Switch vs Half Damper You can use either a standard footswitch such as the Korg PS 1 or a special half damper pedal such as the Korg DS 1H as the Damper If you use a footswitch it will work like a normal synthesizer sustain pedal notes will sustain forever as long as the pedal is held down A half damper pedal is a special type of continuous foot pedal normal foot pedals won t work properly for this application It offers more subtle control of sustain which can be especially useful for piano sounds The off and full on positions of the half damper work just like the footswitch but intermediate positions modulate the release time to increase sustain without making it infinite The M3 will automatically sense when a half damper is connected to the rear panel DAMPER input For proper operation you will also ne
23. 30 dB r i 1 7 Faf Fre Trigger REC 885 ms 36 ua Audio I A J f Recording Level dE i 5 8 Chain To Chair 2 SEE No Effect 3 2 SEE No Effect 4 2 SOE No Effect 5 gt GGE Mo Effect o E F4 10 Select IFX1 use the numeric keys to input 7 0 and press the ENTER switch to select 070 Reverb Hall Press IFX1 On Off to turn it on 11 Speak into the mic and verify that reverb is applied You can use the IFX1 page to edit the effect settings 12 Make sure that the Bus that follows IFX1 is set to L R 13 In the P0 Recording Recording page select Index If you want to create a new index press the Create button Adjust the recording level For details please see Adjust the recording level on page 114 Record 1 Press the SAMPLING REC switch and then the SAMPLING START STOP switch to enter record ready mode Speak the word you want to sample Recording will start when the level exceeds the Level 30 dB setting 2 Press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to stop sampling Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Basic sampling procedure Check the sampled content 1 Play the keyboard Press the OrigKey key to hear the sound you sampled Applying an insert effect to a sample and resampling the result The process of applying an insert effect etc to a sampled sound and then sampling it once again is called resampling Automatic resampling 1 I
24. EXIT switch in dialog boxes When a dialog box is displayed this has the same function as the Cancel Done or Exit button From a powered off condition turn on the power while holding down the RESET CON TROL switch control surface 1 2 e Initializes the M3 and writes data into internal memory A message of Now writing into internal memory will appear in the display while the data is being loaded After initialization you will need to load the pre load data Execute the Global mode menu com mand Load Preload Demo Data to load the data See PG page 398 Appendices Restoring the factory settings Loading the preloaded data The original preload data is backed up in the M3 and can restore any or all of the Programs Combinations Drum Kits and Global settings to their original factory settings The original demo songs can also be re loaded at any time using this same method This is done by re loading the preload data stored within the M3 amp Never turn off the power while the data is being loaded amp Before you load the preload data go to the Global mode PO Basic Setup System Preference page and uncheck the Memory Protect settings for the data that you want to load If you execute this operation with these settings checked and the data will not be loaded amp Loading the preloaded data will overwrite the data in internal memory If you want to keep the data that is currently
25. Even if the HOLD switch is off the LED will dark there may be no sound if the center volume setting is Zero If there is no sound from the AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 jacks make sure that Bus Select or Bus Bus Select following the insert effect is set to 1 4 or 1 2 3 4 gt p 155 p 158 If a specific timbre doesn t sound in Combination mode is its Play Mute button set to Play Alternatively are all Solo settings turned off gt p 69 If a specific track doesn t sound in Sequencer mode is its Play Rec Mute button set to Play Alternatively are all Solo settings turned off p 82 Make sure that the Status is INT or BTH gt p 73 p 83 Are the Key Zone and Velocity Zone set so that sound will be produced when you play gt PG p 27 p 77 p 155 p 163 p 235 p 253 Is the Oscillator Drum Track Timbre or Track level lowered in the control surface mixer p 47 Audio inputs don t work properly Are the appropriate sources connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks or the S P DIF IN jack gt p 28 If there is no sound in Sampling mode check that Bus Select and Level are set correctly in the Sampling PO Recording Audio In Setup page gt p 112 Alternatively is SAMPLING REC turned on If there is no sound in Program Combination and Sequencer modes check that Bus Select and Level are set correctly in Global P0 Basic Setup Audio page or in the PO Play REC Sampling Audio In pages of
26. GET GTB GET 5 To switch Solo off press Solo On Off once again Press Solo On Off for both MIDI tracks 1 and 2 The display will change and the playback of tracks 1 and 2 will be muted If the Solo function is turned off for all tracks playback will be according to the Play Rec Mute settings Exclusive Solo Normally the Solo function operates in Exclusive Solo off mode where you can solo more than one track at a time as in the example above In contrast Exclusive Solo on mode allows only one track channel to be soloed at a time making it easy to switch between soloed tracks Use the Exclusive Solo menu command to specify how the Solo function will operate Exclusive Solo off You will be able to solo more than one track at a time The status of a track will change each time you press its Solo On Off button Exclusive Solo on When you press a Solo On Off button only that track will be soloed amp The SOLO setting is not stored when you save the song Tip You can turn Exclusive Solo on off by holding down the ENTER switch and pressing numeric key 2 LOCATE settings You can press the LOCATE switch to move to the registered location Initially this will move to 001 01 000 To change the registered location use the Set Location menu command Alternatively you can register a location during playback by holding down the ENTER switch and pressing the LOCATE switch When you select a so
27. IFX3 5 Use Send1 to MFX1 and Send2 to MFX2 to set the send levels to the master effects Controlling pan for each key To use separate pan settings for each key 1 Access the Prog P4 Amp EQ Amp1 Driver1 page 2 Under Pan make sure that the Use DKit Setting check box is checked When Use DKit Setting is on the Program will use the pan settings for each key of the Drum Kit 3 Access the Global P5 Drum Kit Voice Mixer page 4 Use Pan to specify the panning for each key Saving Drum Kits Once you ve spent all this time editing you ll want to save your work amp The contents of your editing in Global mode are preserved as long as the power is on but will be lost when you turn off the power If you want to keep your edits you must execute Write Drum Kits or Update Drum Kits This will save all drum kits Loading amp saving data and creating CDs Saving data Types of data that can be saved You can save the various types of data in the M3 by writing it to internal memory by saving it to a USB storage device commercially available hard disk removable disk CD R RW etc or by sending it as a MIDI data dump Writing to internal memory The following types of data can be written into the internal memory e Program Programs 000 127 in banks INT A F USER A G INT F is available only if the optional EXB RADIAS is installed e Combination Combinations 000 127 in b
28. Program 1 416 Real Suit E Piano m GE ATP Control amp Scenes m Perf RTP amp Panel Settings m Pads Cancel OF 2 Specify the copy source mode bank and number If you want to copy the GE realtime parameter settings and scene settings from the copy source program choose the GE RTP Control amp Scenes option checked If you want to copy performance realtime parameters settings and front panel settings from the copy source program choose the Perf RTP amp Panel Settings option checked If you to copy the pad settings from the copy source program choose the Pads option checked 3 Press OK to execute the copy or press Cancel if you decide to cancel Specifying the keyboard zone for the KARMA function Here s how to specify the zone of keys that will trigger the KARMA function For example you might make settings so that the keys at the bottom of the keyboard will trigger phrases and keys above this range can be played normally KARMA function settings KARMA function settings in Program mode 1 Access the Prog P7 1 KARMA1 GE Setup page See the diagram in step 1 of Selecting a GE 2 Use the Key Zones Btm Bottom and Top to specify the key zone Keys you press and note data received from MIDI IN USB B that falls within this range will be sent to the KARMA module PROG P 1 KARMAI Load GE Opt d 1 ng AN WMOLERERAMLLLARRULLLOLREAL
29. This example shows how the Thru Timbre Thru option works Select a piano program for timbre 1 a bass program for timbre 2 and a drum program for timbre 3 We ll play timbre 1 manually from the keyboard KARMA module A will be used to play a bass phrase on timbre 2 and KARMA module B to play a drum phrase on KARMA module B Make sure that the global MIDI channel is 01 1 Set the MIDI Channel see page 73 for timbres 1 2 and 3 COMBI P3 Timbre Param USER A 886 InitCombi ABGH TOS 48G6 Stereo Grand 4 Way MIDI T81 65 MEA J 126 50 I Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar tatus wT Oot n n n On n n MIDI Channel me ez EE 04 os os or fos Bank Select when Status EX For this example set timbre 1 to 01 timbre 2 to 02 and timbre 3 to 03 Since each timbre is set to a separate channel the KARMA module set to the corresponding channel will play only that timbre 2 Set the In Input Channel and Out Output Channel of each KARMA module as follows COMBI P 1 KARMA1 GF Setup MEA re Load GE Opt i d 1 26 08 GE Setup Fl gt Arpeggia CL1 Comp Lead Btm E Top E coea arp Model 1 Up Dn Thruinz Trans 06 WMOLARERAULLLORRDLLLOLREAALOLEILRAULLORRRULLOLERALLOLLEILRILLLOLRELLLOLLELE m Run _ Solo _ Link to DT _ Thru Gut Trans 88 me cal pes e KARMA module A Input Ch G ch Out Ch 02 KARMA mod
30. Utility page to convert the disc to I509660 format However depending on the state in which the disc was saved it may be converted into ISO9660 level 3 format and may still not be recognized PG p 434 Your computer is unable to read a CD R converted to ISO9660 format e If packet writing software is installed it may not be possible to read this data In this case you should either temporarily disable this software or uninstall it Can t write audio tracks Additional writing is not possible on a CD R RW disc that has been finalized Can t play back the disc on an audio CD player Did you finalize the disc e If you want to finalize the disc after writing additional data check the Execute finalize too check box when executing the menu command Write to CD Media Make Audio CD so that the disc will be finalized p 151 PG p 435 e If you only want to finalize the disc select the menu command Finalize Audio CD Media Make Audio CD and press the OK button to finalize the disc gt PG p 435 213 214 Appendices Are you using CD R media e Since some CD players are unable to play CD RW media we recommend that you use CD R media Have you tried using a different type of media e Some CD R RW media cannot be played by some CD players You may be able to play back successfully by using a different type brand of CD R RW media WAVE files Can t load Is the WAVE file in a format t
31. You can also select Index by holding down the ENTER switch and playing a pad or a note on the keyboard For this example select 001 6 Assign a sample to the Index If RAM memory already contains samples use Sample Sample Select to select the sample and assign it If you want to record a new sample you can sample it now The sample you record will be automatically assigned to the index you selected in step 5 The assigned sample will sound when you play the keyboard in the range of the index to which the sample is assigned 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to assign a sample to each index The number and order of the indexes in a multisample the range of each index and the original key position can be freely changed later if desired See Multisample editing P3 Multisample Edit on page 119 Index zone currently selected Index is reversed Original Key currently selected Original Key is displayed in red Index01 Index02 lIndex08 Keyboard range By holding down the ENTER switch and playing a note you can select the corresponding index and the specified key will be the base key and will be shown in blue Creating multiple samples In the example procedure described above several indexes were created by pressing the Create button several times and then samples were assigned to each Index As an alternative method it is also possible to create one index sample into it and then r
32. ccc ccc eri ieena 93 SONG editiert eiere en nines A 95 Using RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Record 97 Creating RPPR data ccc cece cee eee ees 97 RPPR DlayVOaCK ainis eee nada y Race REE 98 Recording an RPPR performance 4 98 Sampling in Sequencer mode 100 Creating and playing a Cue List 101 Creating a cue list cece ccc ccc eee ees 101 Converting a cue list intoasong 102 Saving your SONG cecrccccceccccecs 103 Cautions and other functions in Sequencer MOUE 4 5 sd ac epinaesee tenes seen ae 104 M3 sequencer file formats 0e cece 104 The Compare function 0 cece eee eee 104 Memory Protect scsi ssn nnee a DEA 105 ADOU MIDE seeren rer anea E ue 105 Sampling Open Sampling SyYSteM eiscrrrsscsomriss weese LOZ Sampling Overview sccecceccccecs 107 ADouUtsaMpPlNg srs iss srianan ELERTE EN 107 COMPAT s ciiuiydstenndins haser eker boekuw sade 109 Sampling and editing in Sampling mode 110 Creating multisample indexes and sampling PO RECOlGING wisi ano kera aa OES 110 Basic sampling procedure e ee eens 112 Loop Edit P2 Loop Edit 0000 116 Sample waveform data editing Pl Sample Bdits 3s ccchekeutaveniaeacdiareecanee 118 Multisample editing P3 Multisample Edit 119 Ripping P5 Audio CD ccc cece 120 Converting a multisample to a program 120 Using a s
33. e Ina layer type combination you can set two or more timbres to the same program and create a richer sound by using Transpose to shift their pitch apart by an octave or by using Detune to create a slight difference in pitch between the two e Insplit type combinations you can use Transpose to shift the pitch in semitone units of the programs specified for each key zone e If you wish to change the playback pitch of a drum program use Detune If you change the Transpose setting the relationship between notes and drum sounds will change Adjusting the BPM of multisamples or sam ples created in Sampling mode If a timbre s program uses multisamples or samples that you created in Sampling mode or loaded in Media mode at a specific BPM value you can use the menu command Detune BPM Adjust to call up a new BPM value This changes the BPM by adjusting the playback pitch For details please see Detune BPM Adjust on page 191 of the Parameter Guide Use Program s Scale Scale This specifies the scale for each timbre If you check Use Program s Scale the scale specified by the program will be used Timbres for which this is not checked will use the Scale setting COMBI PS3 Timbre Param INT A BGG Towards The Sun T 1 I BGe Steres Grand 3 Way Other UDR _v_ J 895 80 Keyboar Strings Motions Drums Orums Orums Drums Drums KARMA Timbre Off Control Mere nrm E nrm gt Nem
34. f Popup button 1 When this button is pressed a popup menu will appear showing the parameter values that are available for selection To enter the parameter value press the desired value in the popup menu When a popup menu is displayed using a VALUE controller see page 12 will close the popup menu If the popup menu is unlocked see Pin it will close if you touch a location outside the popup menu The menu will close when you press the EXIT switch regardless of whether it is locked or unlocked Popup menu Pin bd Timbre This switches the popup menu aed Ri display between locked and unlocked a4 12 When locked the pin will be shown a 13 closed and the popup menu will 06 14 remain displayed even after you A e 48 16 press a parameter value When unlocked the pin will be shown opened and the popup menu will close immediately when you press a parameter value g Popup button 2 When you press this button a tabbed popup menu will appear allowing you to perform the following selections e Bank Program Select Bank Combination Select Select programs or combinations by bank e Multisample Select Select a multisample for a program oscillator by category e Effect Select Select effects by category e Drumsample Select Select drumkit ROM samples by category e Selecta KARMA GE To close a tabbed menu press the OK button or Cancel button Scroll bar
35. 10 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to stop recording If you made a mistake or decide to re record press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to stop recording and press the COMPARE switch Then begin the pattern recording procedure again as in step 8 Control data in pattern recording amp To record control data in a pattern you should restore the control data to its normal value within the pattern If you fail to restore the normal value unnecessary control data may remain in a stuck position when you place the pattern in a song or use the RPPR function to play the pattern However the following control data will be automatically reset to the following values when the song or RPPR function finishes playing the pattern or when playback is halted 00 ero 00 ero 64 center 93 pe w WJ S w og v N 94 Creating songs Sequencer mode LFO1 depth pitch CC 77 00 zero 00 ero Using KARMA for pattern recording If the KARMA function is set to operate for the track that is selected for Track Select and record the performance of the KARMA function into the pattern Song editing You can apply a variety of editing operations to a song The available types of editing operation are listed below Song Delete Song This command deletes the currently selected song For details please see Delete Song on page 280 of the Parameter Guide Copy From Song This command copies all
36. G nse a USER A D FG 000 127 Initialized Combinations For details on the factory set combinations refer to the Voice Name List on the included CD ROM Selecting by Bank Combination Select menu You can select Combinations from a list organized by Combination bank e Press the Combination Select popup button to access the menu and make your selection The selection method is the same as in Selecting by Bank Program Select menu on page 38 Refer there for details Bank Combination Select menu Bank r Combination Select et AES Ham n Pickle gt The Orchestra I ABES Advanced SY Gro gt Beyond the Cosrul 4818 Cuban Breezes ABass amp Piano SI 4G11 Welcoming gt ProStrings sY Scl 4 12 Berimbau sY Mot Cogs In The Machil 4812 Asian DJ Gentle Guitar Siw l 4614 Tryin Mot to Losi gt The Fellowship ofl 4 15 Splain It to Me ee Cancel OK Selecting by Category Combination Select menu You can select Combinations from within a category such as keyboard organ bass and drums When shipped from the factory the preloaded Combinations are organized into 16 categories each with several sub categories There are also 2 more categories initially named User 16 and User 17 which you can use and rename as desired e Press the Category Select popup button to access the menu and make your selection The selection method is the same as in Selecting by Category Program Se
37. If the front panel KARMA LINKED and KARMA ON OFF switches are lit the KARMA performance will be linked with Drum Track start stop The way to stop the drum track will depend on the program settings it will stop either when you press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch or when you take your hand off the keyboard 3 To change the Drum Track pattern use Pattern Bank and Pattern No to select the desired pattern Note You can create your own original Drum Track patterns see page 195 4 Use Drum Track Program to select the program that will be played by the Drum Track pattern Note Only programs of category number 15 Drums can be selected Listening to the demo songs Loading the demo song data in Global mode 1 Press the MODE GLOBAL switch the LED will light to enter Global mode 2 Access the Global P0 Basic Setup page If another page is displayed press the EXIT switch 3 Press the menu button in the upper right of the display and choose Load Preload Demo Data Load Preload Demo Data Kind All P reload PCG and Demo Songs Cancel OK Quick Start 4 In the Kind field choose All Preload PCG and Demo Songs When you execute loading the preloaded data and the demo song data will be loaded amp If you ve edited a preloaded program or combination or created one from scratch executing this Load operation will overwrite your data i e your
38. If you made a mistake or want to re record you can use the Compare function press the COMPARE switch to re record as many times as you want The Multi REC check box will be unchecked when you use Compare so you will need to check it again Using the Drum Track function and the KARMA function to record on multiple MIDI tracks simultaneously You can use multi recording to simultaneously record a multi track performance using the Drum Track function and KARMA function For details please see KARMA function settings in Sequencer mode on page 180 Using the RPPR function to record on multiple MIDI tracks simultaneously You can use multi recording to simultaneously record a multi track performance using the RPPR function For details please see Using RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Record on page 97 Recording multiple MIDI tracks from an external sequencer 1 Make sure that the MIDI OUT of your external sequencer is connected to the MIDI IN of the M3 If it is not connected turn off the power make the connection and then turn the power on For details please see MIDI applications on page 638 of the Parameter Guide 2 In the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page set MIDI Clock to External MIDI With this setting the M3 will synchronize to MIDI clock messages from your external sequencer Make sure that Receive Ext Realtime Commands is checked GLOBAL P1 MIDI MIDI Setup Basic MIDI Channel E
39. In the case of the above example you could set the velocity zones of the two Timbres so that they partially overlap Then set the Top Slope and Bottom Slope so that the sound changes gradually instead of changing suddenly between velocity values of 63 and 64 MIDI settings Timbre Parameters MIDI page Status This controls the status of MIDI and the internal tone generator for each Timbre Normally if you re playing an internal Program this should be set to INT If the status is set to Off EXT or EX2 that internal sounds will not be played Off simply disables the Timbre entirely The EXT and EX2 settings allow the Timbre to control an external MIDI device COEN J 035 50 COMBI P3 Timbre Param INT amp AGG Towards The Sun TO1 I BSG8 Stereo Grand 3 Way Keyboar Strings Motion Drums Orums Orums Orums Drums wen 6x n n Ou Ow An MIDI Channel Gch Gch Gch ez e7 ee a2 or Bank Select when Status ExX l 1 8 J l 1 8 J 9 16 J 1 8 J 9 16 J For details please see Status on page 151 of the Parameter Guide Bank Select when status EX2 When the Status is set to EX2 these parameters allow you to transmit MIDI Bank Select messages for changing banks on external MIDI devices MIDI Channel Timbres that you wish to play from M3 s keyboard must be set to the global MIDI channel Your playing on the keyboard is transmitted on the global MIDI channel and will sound
40. LE P E wear ena od ieee eas 212 Pads or damper pedal do not respond correctly 213 USB Media and CD ccc cee eee eee 213 WAVE TIES 35 ac c045enicddeaydadunitharedieeraaa aus 214 Connections with a computer 214 Included CD ROM ccc cece cece eeeeees 214 Error messagesS ssessesossesosseooe 215 Error and confirmation messages 66 215 Media that can be used with the M3 223 Types of media supported by the M3 223 Operations that the M3 can perform on media 223 Specifications and options 6 224 SPECIFICATIONS 6 ccc cc cece eee e teens 224 ODTIOMS eect eet eae E ee ete es 227 MIDI Implementation Chart 228 INGOX E E E E 229 This Quick Start is provided for those who just want to get started trying out the sounds right away It explains how to set up the M3 how to select programs and control the sound and how to listen to the demo songs After you ve finished reading this Quick Start section please also take a look at the full explanations that follow Setup Here s how to connect the power cable and audio cables and how to turn on the power 1 If you purchased the M3 61 73 88 the M3 M with the KYBD 61 73 88 keyboard assembly you can use your system with the M3 M module tilted upward relative to the KYBD 61 73 88 Refer to the Keyboard assembly Manual included with the M3 61 73 88 If you purc
41. Playing and editing Combinations Creating Key Splits and Layers Splits and Layers Let s create a Combination which combines both splits and layers like the diagram below Timbre 1 Timbre 2 Timbre 3 Ti 1 Access the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page 2 Select a piano sound for Timbre 1 a brass sound for Timbre 2 and a strings sound for Timbre 3 3 Access the P3 Timbre Param MIDI T01 08 page 4 For Timbres 1 3 set Status to INT and MIDI Channel to Gch the Global Channel JOECH J 120 08 COMBI P3 Timbre Param USER 4 BAA InitCombi ABBHA TO1 I AGGE Steres Grand 4 W ay keyboar Brass Strings Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar atus MOn n n Ou n Ou Om MIDI Channel h ech ch e7 a5 os far oa Bank Select when Status E 2 5 Access the P4 Zone Delay Key Z T01 08 page 6 Set Timbre 1 s Top Key to G9 and its Bottom Key to C4 COMBI P4 4one Delay Key Z T61 fi a USER A BBA InitCombi ABR T81 48G8 Stereo Grand 4 ay Keyboar Brass Strings Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar You can also enter a note value a selecting the parameter and then playing a note on the keyboard while holding down the ENTER switch 7 Set Timbres 2 and 3 to a Top Key of B3 and a Bottom Key of C 1 Key Zone Slope In addition to hard splits in which the sound changes abruptly you can use the Slope parameters to gradually fade a sound in
42. Program Combination or Sequencer modes p 123 p 159 Is Use Global Setting set correctly gt PG p 9 p 130 p 205 If you are inputting sound to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks make sure that the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob is raised p 16 p 112 If you are inputting sound to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks is the MIC LINE switch set appropriately p 16 p 112 Is an unsupported format being input from the S P DIF IN jack e Please connect an instrument or digital audio device that is compatible with CP 1201 or S P DIP Is the correct sampling frequency being input from the S P DIF IN jack e Sampling frequencies of 48 kHz can be input If you input an unsupported sampling frequency noise will occur or a message of S P DIF CLOCK ERROR will be displayed Digital audio input is sometimes not heard for two or three seconds Can t hear an audio CD in a USB CD R RW drive connected to AUDIO INPUT Make sure that you have selected the Media mode Play Audio CD page or Sampling mode Is the output of the audio CD being input correctly e If you want to monitor the audio connect the audio output jacks or headphone jack of your USB CD R RW drive to the M3 s AUDIO INPUT 1 2 Alternatively connect the S P DIF OUT jack of your USB CD R RW drive to the M3 s S P DIF IN jack e Set Input to Analog or S P DIF according to the input you re using and set the Level and Bus Select appropriately These para
43. Q Full Format C FaT32 OF 5 In Volume Label use the text edit button to access the text edit dialog box and specify the volume label The previously specified volume label will be displayed If no volume label had been specified for the media or if anon DOS media was inserted this will indicate NEW VOLUME 6 Specify the initialization format Quick Format Normally you should use Quick Format to initialize the media Select this if the media has already been physically formatted or if you want to format media that has been UDF formatted by the M3 Since only the system area of the media need be formatted this will require less time Full Format Select this when formatting media that has not been physically formatted or media CD RW that has not been UDF formatted Note Normally it is not necessary to perform a Full Format on media that has been physically formatted at 512 bytes block Execute the Quick Format for such media Note You will normally select Full Format for CD RW media etc that has not been UDF formatted If an error message of Media not formatted appears execute Full Format Depending on the capacity of the media executing Full Format may require a substantial length of time 7 Specify the file system Use FAT16 to format media of 4 GB or less such as flash media and use FAT32 to format larger media theoretically up to 2 Terabytes Note CompactFlash cards
44. Reset All Controllers C Control Change OOO x XOOOOOOQOOQOQO0QOQO OQOOOOCOOCOOOOOOOOO X Program O 0 127 Change Variable Range EEEE K kk kk cai System Song Position Common 20Ng Select 0 i 27 0 1 Tune System Clock Real Time Command Local On Off Aux All Notes Off O ma 127 Messages Active Sense Reset x Notes P A C E Transmitted received when Global P1 MIDI Filter Program Change Aftertouch Control Change Exclusive is Enable respectively 1 When Global P1 MIDI Clock is Internal transmitted but not received The opposite for External MIDI USB FireWire 2 Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P2 Controllers The number shown here is the CC default assignment 3 RPN LSB MSB 00 00 Pitch bend range 01 00 Fine tune 02 00 Coarse tune 4 Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P1 External 1 2 5 In addition to Korg exclusive messages Inquiry GM System On Master Volume Master Balance Master Fine Tune and Master Coarse Tune are supported Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION Index Index A Aftertouch 42 Curve 129 Vibrato 56 Wah 59 Alternate Modulation 55 Amp 60 Amp EG 61 Amp Modulation 61 AMS Alternate Modulation Source 55 AMS Mixer 55 Assignable Foot Pedal 45 Assignable Foot
45. To save your data proceed as follows 1 Make sure that the media is able to save data Setting up media 2 Press the MODE MEDIA switch to enter Media mode 3 Press the Save tab to access the Media Save page 4 Use Media Select to specify the save destination 5 If the drive contains directories select the directory in which you want to save the data Press the Open button to move to a lower level of the directory structure or the Up button to move toa higher level If you want to create a new directory move to the level at which you want to create the directory and execute the Utility menu command Create Directory 6 Press the menu button to access the Save All If you ve chosen Save All PCG SNG and KSC files will be saved Save All PCG SNG and KSC To T MEW F ILE PCG SNG KSC Program Combination Drum Kit Selection Selection Selection AECOEFS AECODEFSG AECOEF SG Int ESS INTE ine USFS were usr m Global Setting m RADIAS Formant Motion m Drum Track User Pattern Cancel OF 7 Use the text edit button to enter the filename with which you want to save the data 8 Press the OK button to execute the Save operation 9 When saving is complete and you return to the Save page the display will show the file that was saved The various types of data are saved as the following files PCG file Programs combinations drum kits RADIAS f
46. Use this when you wish to see parameter values that extend beyond what can be shown on the display at one time ail Press here to scroll to left or right an Press here to scroll to the corresponding location Press here and slide to left or right to scroll to the desired location Category button When you press this button a tabbed popup menu will appear allowing you to perform the following selections e Category Program Select Category Combination Select e Category GE Select Press the OK or Cancel buttons to close the tabbed category select popup menu The Jump to Sub button will display a sub category selection menu h Menu command button Menu When this button is pressed a list of menu commands will appear The menu commands that appear will differ depending on the currently selected page You can also select up to ten menu commands by holding down the ENTER switch and pressing a numeric key 0 9 The menu will close when you press the display at a location other than the menu or when you press the EXIT switch _ __ t Menu ED command button virite Combination Fanel S Solo Mode On Exclusive Solo Menu button Copy trom Program Copy a Motion Copy Tone Adjust Reset Tone Adjust Dialog box The dialog box that appears will depend on the currently selected menu command When selecting a program or combination number in a dialog box use the VALUE controller
47. Using the Lock function on page 41 SW1 SW2 You can use these switches to control program parameters via AMS Alternate Modulation or effect parameters via DMod Dynamic Modulation They can also transpose the keyboard by octaves turn portamento on off or lock the position of the ribbon controller joystick or aftertouch Each switch can work as either a Toggle or Momentary switch In Toggle mode the assigned function is switched between on and off each time the switch is pressed In Momentary mode the assigned function is active on only as long as you hold down the switch In Program mode you can check the assignments of SW1 and SW2 on the Prog P0 Play Main page For more details please see Controller settings for the program on page 46 When you write a Program or Combination the on off status of the SW1 and SW2 switches is saved For more details please see Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2 on page 198 Using the Lock function Locking the Joystick 1 Using the standard factory sounds select Program INT A003 Real Suit E Piano and play the keyboard To select a program make sure that you are in Program mode and press the BANK INT A switch numeric key 1 6 and then the ENTER switch 2 Move the joystick away from yourself the Y direction The vibrato effect will deepen 3 While holding the joystick away from yourself press the SW2 switch When you press the switch its
48. __setect Save Items Program Bank l l l E SE m m m W D gt U E U F U G m m m m All Nothing Cancel OK In order to accurately reproduce the data you created we recommend that you check all of the boxes When you ve finished making settings press the OK button to close the dialog box 9 Press the OK button to execute the Save operation e Ifthe data fits on one volume of media The data will be saved on the specified media and you will return to the Save page e Ifthe data does not fit on one volume of media The No space available on medium dialog box will appear No space available on medium Do you want to make a divided file OF Press the OK button and the file will be divided and saved to multiple volumes of media If you don t want to divide the file press the Cancel button and re save it to larger capacity media Cancel For details please see If the data being saved does not fit on one volume of media on page 428 of the Parameter Guide 10 When saving ends and you return to the Save page the display will show the file that was saved The various types of data are saved as the following files e PCG file e SNG file e KSC file e KMP file e KSF file Note A directory of the same name as the KSC file will be created inside the directory containing the KSC file and the multisamples KMP files and samples KSF files will be created inside
49. back on the Program Select Mixer tab and set up any other Timbre parameters as desired To add finishing touches to the sound set up the Insert Master and Total Effect as desired on the P8 IFX and P9 MFX TEX pages respectively These effects can be different from those of the individual Programs in Program mode if desired In addition you can make KARMA settings on the P7 KARMA page and controller settings on the P1 DT XY Ctrls page to create the finished Combination Soloing timbres You can use the Control Surface s Solo function to hear the sound of each timbre by itself For details please see Adjusting the volume mute and solo of each timbre on page 69 Using COMPARE When you re in the process of editing a sound pressing the COMPARE switch will recall the saved version of the sound as it was before you started editing 1 While editing press the COMPARE switch the LED will light The saved sound from before you began editing will be recalled 2 Pressing COMPARE again returns you to the version you are editing and the LED will go out again Note If you edit while the COMPARE LED is lit the switch will again go dark and your previous edits will be lost Resetting individual controls The RESET CONTROLS switch lets you revert an individual slider or switch to its saved setting See page 43 Layers Splits and Velocity Switches Within a Combination you can use note n
50. do not subject the drive to physical shock or vibration while CD R RW media is being written 151 152 Loading amp saving data and creating CDs Auditioning an audio CD you ve finalized Here s how you can use a CD R RW drive connected to the USB A connector to play back an audio CD that you ve finalized amp If your CD drive does not have an audio output jack headphone jack or S P DIF OUT jack you won t be able to monitor the sound 1 Connect the audio output jack or headphone jack of your USB CD R RW drive to the M3 s AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks Alternatively you can monitor the sound by connecting the S P DIF OUT jack of your CD R RW drive to the M3 s S P DIF IN jack 2 Press the Play Audio CD tab to go to the Play Audio CD page Play Audio CD _ 00 00 0 Media ERD Track 01 81 49 4 Index 01 00 13 11 Sequencer START plays selected track Input Analog input Level Far HA Input 1 127 Lage Gor por Gor pao an Input2 p 27 Rize Gor O or Eo aaa Eaz a ve tne In Media Select select your CD R RW drive Media Select will indicate Audio CD To allow monitoring set the Input as follows INPUT1 Bus Select L R FX Bus Off AUX Bus Off Send1 Send2 000 Pan L000 Level 127 INPUT2 Bus Select L R FX Bus Off AUX Bus Off Send1 Send2 000 Pan R127 Level 127 Volume as desired Use Track to select the track and pre
51. drum programs Playing along with Drum Track patterns is often a useful way to come up with new phrases For more about the Drum Track function please see page 185 Detailed Editing with Programs KARMA settings Effects Effects are covered in their own section of the manuals so we won t go into too much detail here Insert Effects Insert Effects let you send either individual Oscillators or the entire Program through up to 5 effects in series You can use any type of effects from distortions and compressors to choruses and reverbs The Insert Effect output can be routed to the MAIN L MONO and R jacks as well as to each INDIVIDUAL jack Two double size effects 154 St Mltband Limiter 170 Early Reflections can be used in IFX1 4 plus one normal effect for a maximum of three effects You can also use one double size effect and up to three normal effects for a total of up to four effects For details please see Insert effects on page 155 Master Effects There are two Master Effects which are accessed through Sends 1 and 2 The master effects are suitable for use with effects such as reverb or delay If you choose a double size effect you ll be able to use only one effect in master effect 1 When using a double size effect master effect 2 cannot be used For details please see Master effects on page 156 Total Effect The Total Effect is dedicated to processing the main L R outputs The
52. ee FGM Multiband Limiter AGT L C R BPM Delay 3 El Multiband Limiter d Ei Ensemble i as 2 El Reverb Room 1234 S67 agon 113141516 Bank USER AGAA InitCombi UARAA T81 A868InitProgram Abik User 16 User 16 User 16 User 16 User 16 User 16 User 16 User 16 Bus Select IFz Indiv Dut Assign Oe F rO r r r rA ve Sendi HFX 1 HEE CED es ES GE Ee Use Bus Select IFX Indiv Out Assign to specify the bus to which each timbre will be output Choose IFX1 if you want to send the output of a timbre to insert effect 1 Ch 61G Send AFA2 N ro The routing insert effects and chain settings are shown graphically in the upper part of the page In this example T01 timbre 1 uses IFX1 and 2 T02 uses IFX2 T03 uses IFX3 and 4 T02 and T05 use IFX4 and T06 and T07 use IFX5 3 Use Send1 and Send2 to specify the send level of each timbre to the master effects This can be set only if Bus Select IFX Indiv Out Assign is set to L R or Off Note The actual send level is determined by multiplying this by the Send 1 or Send 2 settings for oscillators 1 and 2 within the program selected by the timbre If the program parameter Send 1 or Send 2 is set to 0 the resulting level will still be 0 even if you raise this send level If Bus Select IFX Indiv Out Assign is set to IFX1 5 the send levels to the master effe
53. maya the note that s specified for Key and verify that reverb is applied Also make sure that the Bus following IFX1 is set to L R 8 Press the SAMPLING REC switch and then the SAMPLING START STOP switch The sample assigned to Key will play automatically and resampling will begin When the sample finishes playing resampling will end The sample that was created by resampling will automatically be assigned to Sample Select Note In Sampling mode the P8 IFX Routing page Bus IFX Output Select parameter will automatically be set to L R when resampling ends This prevents an insert effect from being applied in duplicate when you monitor the results of resampling through an insert effect If you want to apply an insert effect once again re select IFX1 Parameter settings made by Auto Resample through IFX e P0 Recording Audio In Setup INPUT1 Bus Select Off Turn off the input from the INPUT 1 2 and S P DIF L R jacks Source Bus L R The sound sent to the L R will be sampled Trigger Sampling START SW After you ve pressed the SAMPLING REC switch to enter sampling ready mode resampling will begin when you press the SAMPLING START STOP switch Resample Auto The sample assigned to the index will be resampled automatically Recording Level 0 0 This is the default setting for resampling e P0 Recording Recording Save to RAM The data will be written to RAM memory Sampling Mode
54. mechanically precise beats or when you need to record a phrase that would be difficult to play by hand in realtime or when you find it difficult to play extremely complicated or rapid passages An example of step recording In this example we ll assign a bass program to MIDI Track 02 and step record the following two measure bass phrase Foo A jie 7 DE lp 1 Specify a bass program for MIDI Track 02 Use Track Select to select MIDI Track 02 and verify that you hear a bass program 2 Access the P6 Track Edit Track Edit page 3 Set From Measure to 001 With this setting step recording will begin from measure 1 SEQ P6 Track Edit Track Edit 961 Hl 000 Meter 4740 J 728 60 Manu 3000 NEW SONG gt Track z MIDI TRACK Bz Te2I AgsSHevyyO Che RPPR Hofssign Reso Hi RPPR Ch s2 RPPR Halil From Measure EE To End of Measure CEIR SmnnEimz gun mnne u 4 Press the menu button and press menu command MIDI Step Recording A dialog box will appear Step Recording Track 62 Measure 861 Beat Tick 41 608 Meter 4 4 Step Time Note Duration 085 Note Velocity Memory 899 Free Maa E BAR Meter 4 4 5 In Step Time use Select to specify the basic timing value at which you will input notes and rests Input the first C3 note as J dotted eighth note
55. modulation sources below Keyboard Track This lets you vary the volume relative to the note you play For details please see Keyboard Track on page 59 Amp Modulation Velocity Intensity is used by most programs to decrease the volume of softly played notes and increase the volume of strongly played notes and the Amp Modulation parameter adjusts the depth of this control Normally you will set Amp Modulation to positive values As this setting is increased there will be greater volume difference between softly played and strongly played notes LFO1 2 Specifies how the LFO s will produce cyclic changes in volume tremolo effect The volume will be affected by the LFO s for which you set an LFO1 Intensity LFO2 Intensity value Intensity AMS Intensity adjusts the depth by which the tremolo effect produced by the LFO will be affected when you assign an AMS LFO1 AMS LFO2 AMS For example if you set AMS to JS Y CC 02 tremolo will be applied when you move the KYBD 61 73 88 s joystick of M3 toward yourself or when CC 02 is received Amp EG The Amp EG lets you control how the volume changes over the course of a note JSG EE Eset eS Amp1 EG Vod MEG Reset _ _ AMS off Threshold 88 ie Start EER Attack 99 Break 99 Sus 99 ime Attack GG Decay 40 Slope 48 Rel 17 Curvedttack L Decay 6 Slope 6 Rel 6 EG Level Time Modulation LAMS Velocity TAMS 1 off AMS2
56. pads and other controllers sequencer and KARMA function to play or control an external MIDI sound module use a MIDI cable to connect the M3 s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDIIN connector of your external MIDI sound module if eat ie Seas EES ig L EOE i Controlling M3 s tone generator from an external MIDI device When you wish to play or control the M3 s tone generator from an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer etc use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector of M3 if PIEI SSE ig O eal MR a PT D MIDI IN j M3 MIDI OUT i MIDI keyboard i Controlling two or more external MIDI tone generators from M3 You can also use a MIDI patch bay to control multiple MIDI devices To i MIDIOUT M3 i MIDI IN Maour eS o seee l wine na aT MIDI patch bay MIDI OUT gt MIDI IN MIDI keyboard Ea OG 60 600006 MIDI tone generator Connections Connecting MIDI devices Connecting a USB device HDD CD R RW etc You can connect a USB 2 0 compatible hard disk drive
57. program changes and other MIDI messages will not be transmitted from tracks whose Status is set to EXT or BTH This means that echo back from your external MIDI sequencer will not change the program pan or volume settings of M3 tracks that are receiving the same MIDI channels 81 Sequencer 82 Creating songs Sequencer mode Control using the sliders and switches You can use the control surface to perform a variety of control You can perform this control in realtime during playback or recording For example you can adjust the volume of each track or change the cutoff or resonance You can also turn effects on off or adjust their depth or modify the phrases generated by KARMA Here we will explain how to control the volume mute and solo settings of each track For other types of editing refer to the explanations below Realtime control in Sequencer mode will affect the track selected by Track Select Control Surface SEQ P 2 Play REC Control Assign RT Control BHII 1 E Effect On Off IFs IFAS IFsd IFs MFs1i MFs2 TF Tracka1 MIDI TRACK B1 J 126 48 C RPPR Control Assign Tone Adjust Track OEE auto Load BMI 0SC1 Transpose 12 Rel 88 tsp Top tunel Tine HOE pir a gt EET e Using realtime control to edit sounds or effects on page 48 e Editing Programs with Tone Adjust on page 75 Adjusting the Volume Mute and Solo of each
58. this lets you use KARMA slider 1 to control the GE realtime parameter Swing for all modules A B C and D A B C D Choose one of these settings if you want to control the corresponding module individually Note In Program mode only MASTER can be selected and module A will be controlled KARMA Slider 1 8 SLIDERS 1 8 KARMA Switch 1 8 SWITCHES 1 8 When CONTROL ASSIGN is set to KARMA these control the KARMA module s selected by MODULE CONTROL By operating these controls you can adjust GE realtime parameters and KARMA module parameters to freely vary the phrases or patterns generated by the KARMA module Use P7 KARMA GE RTP page Perf RTP to specify the parameter that each control will affect KARMA SCENE 1 8 These switches let you store the settings of sliders 1 8 and KARMA switches 1 8 as eight different scenes KARMA SCENE 1 8 In Combination or Sequencer modes scenes can store separate settings for each module and you can use the MODULE CONTROL switch and the Scene Matrix function to control this For details please see 7 1 7a Module Control Scene Matrix on page 167 of the Parameter Guide PAD MODE switch This selects either VEL SENS velocity sensitive in which the force at which you strike a pad will affect the loudness of the sound or VEL FIXED velocity fixed in which the fixed velocity value you specify in the Pads 1 4 5 8 Setup page will always be used CHORD ASSIG
59. will be triggered simultaneously with the Drum Track pattern and will begin operating while you hold down a key or if the KARMA LATCH switch is on If the switch blinks KARMA will be triggered simultaneously with the Drum Track pattern when you play the keyboard or receive a note on and will begin operating If you turn off the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch while KARMA is operating KARMA will also stop For details on linking with the KARMA function please see page 191 PROG P Play Ja DE Load GE Opti KARMA GEME ions d 20 00 Auto RTC Setup KARMA gt GE TS UseR TCM ResetScenes T Sig gt Gated 1277 Endlessly Rising RTC Model GCi Gated CCs 1 m Link To Drum Trk Settings in the control surface You can use the control surface to control the volume play mute and solo on off status of the drum track 1 Play a Drum Track pattern See Selecting a program and turning the Drum Track function on off on page 185 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN MIXER switch to make the T1 8 LED light Press the Control Surface tab to access the Prog PO Play Control Surface page This page displays and reflects the control surface settings It s convenient to watch this page while using the control surface since you ll be able to view the parameter assignments and the precise values Note You can use the control surface for control regardless of the page that s currently shown in the d
60. with the T License of the T Engine forum www t engine org Apple Mac FireWire and Audio Units are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the US and other countries Windows XP is a registered trademark of Microsoft Cor poration in the U S and other counties VST is a trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH RTAS is a registered trademark of Avid Technology Inc or its subsidiaries or divisions All other product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders About this manual The owner s manuals and how to use them The manuals and how to use them The M3 comes with the following operation manuals e M3 Operation Guide e M3 Parameter Guide PDF e M3 Voice Name List PDF e Keyboard Assembly Operation Guide included with the M3 61 73 88 Using the M3 M Brackets included only with M3 M sold by itself e M3 Editor Plug In Editor Operation Manual PDF e EXB RADIAS for M3 Operation Manual PDF The above PDF files are located in the MANUALS folder of the included CD ROM Driver operating manuals such as for the KORG USB MIDI driver are located in the same folder as the drivers M3 Operation Guide Please read this first It explains the names and functions of each part of the M3 how to make connections basic operation an overview of each mode how to edit sounds how to record on the sequencer and how to sample This guide also explai
61. 000 samples 80 minutes at the 48 kHz sample rate Y You You can t undo this operation Are you sure Meaning Once you enter event editing even if you leave event editing without actually editing an event it will no longer be possible to execute a Compare of the previous edit If you wish to enter event editing press the OK button To cancel press the Cancel button You can t undo last operation Are you sure Meaning When you exit recording or event editing in Sequencer mode the memory area for Undo Compare function is not allocated If you wish to keep the data that was just recorded or edited press the OK button If you wish to return to the previous data i e to delete the data that was just recorded or edited press the Cancel button Meaning When editing in Sequencer mode memory area for Undo Compare function cannot be allocated If you wish to execute the edit press the OK button It will not be possible to return to the state before editing If you decide not to execute the edit press the Cancel button e In order to allocate memory area for Undo Compare function delete unneeded data such as songs tracks or patterns We recommend that you save data to media before you execute the edit operation Media that can be used with the M3 Types of media supported by the M3 Media that can be used with the M3 Types of media supported by Operations that the M3 can the M3 perform on media
62. 145 146 Loading amp saving data and creating CDs When you execute the load operation the KSC file will be loaded along with the PCG file Then use Select KSC Allocation to specify where the Multisamples and Samples will be loaded Append will load the data into locations starting with the vacant number following the Multisamples or Samples already loaded in RAM without leaving any gaps Clear will erase all Multisamples and Samples already loaded in RAM and will then load the data in the same configuration as when it was saved 6 Set PCG Contents to All When you execute the load operation all data in the PCG file will be loaded Note You can load individual banks of Programs and Combinations For details please see 1 Load PCG on page 417 of the Parameter Guide 7 Press the OK button All data from the PCG file will be loaded into the M3 amp Never remove the media while data is being loaded Loading individual banks from a PCG file The M3 lets you load Programs Combinations Drum kits user Drum Kit patterns RADIAS Formant Motions if the optional EXB RADIAS is installed individually or by individual banks This is a convenient way to rearrange Combinations in the order in which you will use them during a live performance amp Be aware that if you change the order of Programs the sounds played by Combinations may also be affected As an example here we will expl
63. 2 Set parameters for the selected index e Use Sample to specify the sample for the selected index You can also select a sample here e Use OrigKey Original Key to specify the original key of the sample e Changing the Top Key will change the upper limit of the zone Simultaneously the lower limit of the next numbered index will also change Range 119 120 Sampling Open Sampling System indicates the zone determined by the Top Key setting e Level adjusts the playback level of the sample You can use this to ensure that all samples in a multisample have a consistent level e If you check Constant Pitch all notes in the index zone will sound the sample at its original pitch e Pitch adjusts the sample pitch for each index You can use the Pitch BPM Adjust menu command to set the loop interval to the desired tempo For details please see Pitch BPM Adjust on page 367 of the Parameter Guide Ripping P5 Audio CD The M3 allows you to rip digital audio data from an audio CD inserted in a USB A connected USB CD R RW drive commercially available For details on the ripping procedure please see Destination on page 367 of the Parameter Guide Converting a multisample to a program In pages PO Recording P4 Controllers you can select and execute the Convert MS To Program menu command When you execute this command the settings of the currently selected multisample will be conver
64. 65 Selecting Combinations 0 ccc eee eee 65 Performing with KARMA and the Drum Track 67 Using controllers to modify the sound 67 Easy Combination editing e06 68 Changing the programs within the Combination 68 Adjusting the Mix ccc cece cece e ee eeees 68 Simple editing using the Sliders and Switches 69 Saving a Combination you ve edited 69 Detailed Editing with Combinations 70 Overview of editing pages cece eee 70 A suggested approach for editing 71 Layers Splits and Velocity Switches 71 MIDI settings cece ccc cc cee eee cent eens 73 Altering Programs to fit within a Combination 74 EM CCl seats eas ndaieuuierna E 75 Automatically importing a Combination into Sequencer MOdE cc cece cece eee eens 75 Creating songs Sequencer mode 77 OVGRVICW 65006 hiG RING eee Rees 77 About the M3 s Sequencer 00eeeeeees 77 Sequencer mode structure cece eee eee 77 Playing SONGS ssssssssssossesssoeeooo 80 PIaVDACK stat baie loedein ieee E a aT 80 Control using the sliders and switches 82 MIDI recording sssssessoecsecsseesoe 83 Preparations for recording eeee eee eee 83 Recording MIDI in real time 0 eee 85 Step reCOrdNO earen E cece eee RETEA 88 Recording variation srren enerne eree 89 Recording patterns
65. 73 88 Computer MIDI interface MIDI OUT _ 9800 0000 s MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN v TR ae ja OE O ee Ge CPrr EER a ia ad 1 QO00000 M3 61 73 88 Connection for the M3 M Computer MIDI interface MIDI IN DE OOOO 0900 T BADOT MIDI MIDI n un OUT uo USB Ero g MIDI USB TOUT MIDI keyboard Note If you re controlling the M3 M from a keyboard connect your MIDI keyboard via a MIDI interface 2 Make the necessary settings in the M3 s Global mode For details please see Global mode settings on the M3 on page 32 Connection and setup for the optional EXB FW If you install the optional EXB FW you ll be able to exchange audio signals and MIDI messages between the M3 and your computer from a host application in which the included M3 Plug In Editor is running Audio input output fixed at 24 bit 48 kHz 2 in 6 out MIDI input output one port in out 16 MIDI channels in out For details on installing the optional EXB FW into the M3 please see Installing the EXB FW on page 205 amp Please note the following points e The two connectors have the same function The connector that s not connect
66. AUX Bus and Ctrl Bus for the sound after it has passed through the insert effects If you ve specified a chain the settings that follow the last IFX in the chain will be valid except for Ctrl Bus Pan Sets the pan of the IFX output Bus Bus Select Specifies the output destination Normally you will set this to L R If you wish to send the sound that has passed through the insert effects to 155 156 Using Effects AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 8 select 1 4 1 2 or 3 4 Send 1 Send 2 Sets the send levels to the master effects For this example set this to 127 Ctrl Bus The FX Control Buses lets you create effects sidechains Sidechains let you control an effect with one audio signal the sidechain while the effect processes a completely different audio signal This is convenient for use with vocoders compressors and limiters gates etc For details please see FX Control Buses on page 443 of the Parameter Guide AUX Bus The sound processed by the insert effect will be sent to the AUX bus In the PO Play Sampling Audio In page you can set the Sampling Setup Source Bus to a AUX bus and sample the signal that is sent to the AUX bus Use this if you want to sample only the sound of an audio input source being processed by an insert effect and not sample the sound of the oscillator output Alternatively the direct sound from the audio inputs can be mixed with the sound processed by
67. Aago gt Aago gt Aaga gt j Abba Aaga Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Play Mute Rec Play GED GED CED CED CED see Eis penne e EL Beale Solo Prog Mier Piser PlyLoop PlyLoop EDIS Ing Frete 3 Use the numeric keys to input the number of the new song you want to create and press the ENTER switch For example press the 1 switch and then the ENTER switch A dialog box will appear If you pressed the Song Select popup to access the Song No dialog box press the desired song number to open the dialog box Create new song this song No Set Length PRJ Are you sure Cancel OK 4 Use Set Length to input the desired number of measures and press the OK button You can change the number of measures later if desired For details please see Set Song Length on page 296 of the Parameter Guide 5 Press the OK button to create the song Tip You can use the ENTER switch instead of the OK button MIDI recording Preparations for recording Track settings Since we re going to record a new song in this example we will start by explaining how to assign a program to each MIDI track and make basic settings such as volume 1 Assign a program to each MIDI track Use Program Select to assign a program to each MIDI track At this time you can press the Category popup and select programs by category You can copy various
68. Attach cover A to the sound module as described in steps 4 5 of Installing the EXB RADIAS 3 Verify the location in which you ll be installing 8 When you ve finished the entire procedure turn the EXB FW and align it so that the connector on the power and verify that the EXB FW was section of the EXB FW protrudes from the rear installed correctly See Verifying installation on panel of the sound module page 203 205 206 Appendices Installing the EXB M256 Before you proceed with installation please read the preceding Safety cautions and Cautions when installing option boards or memory amp You must leave the AC power cable disconnected until you ve finished the entire process of option board installation amp Be careful not to cut your hand on any metal parts of the sound module or option board amp The EXB M256 can be used only with compatible products manufactured by Korg It is not compatible with conventional computers Also using a commercially available memory board as a substitute for the EXB M256 will cause malfunctions Please use the correct product only as directed 1 Using your Phillips screwdriver remove the two screws from cover B and then remove cover B from the sound module amp Don t lose the screws that you remove 2 Verify the location in which you ll be installing the EXB M256 Making sure that the EXB M256 is oriente
69. Base Note E Times xB Level zo C Delay Base Note ia Times x1 0 Level e k Delay Base Note F Times Level Feedback C Delay 18 sro swi 50 amt E High Damp 98 E Low Damp 5 Input Level Omod 10a Sre Js y 01 Spread Wet Dry 58 ra src Off Amt o T T AD E TB When you move the joystick away from yourself and press the SW1 switch the feedback level will increase and the delay sound will continue for a longer time The Amt setting specifies the feedback level that will be in effect when the SW1 switch is pressed If Amt is set to 10 pressing the SW1 switch will reduce the feedback level to 0 MIDI Tempo Sync MIDI Tempo Sync lets you synchronize effects LFOs and delay times to the system tempo For details please see Tempo Synchronization on page 442 of the Parameter Guide Using the MIDI Tempo Sync function to synchro nize the delay time to KARMA tempo changes 1 Set up the effects as described under Dmod Example on page 161 2 Set BPM to MIDI 3 For L C and R set the Delay Base Note and Times as desired For this example set Delay Base Note to and Times to x1 so that the effect will be easily understandable The delay time will repeat at an interval of a 8th note PROG P IFX L C R BPM Dela BPM MDI Time Over L Delay Base Note fe Times BE Level zo C Delay Base Note faa Times kioo Level 2 k Delay Base Note fe Times kioo Leve
70. CC s to KARMA X Y and Pad controllers Switch portamento on off Control the sostenuto effect Turn the soft pedal effect on off Turn the damper effect on off Select programs or combinations up down Value Inc Dec Start stop the sequencer Punch in out on the sequencer Cue list repeat Tap tempo Control of KARMA function Switch the drum track on off Switch X Y mode or X Y motion on off The functions of controllers such as the joystick or ribbon controller See Foot Switch Assign on page 387 of the Parameter Guide Assignable Pedal You can specify the function that will be performed by an assignable pedal the optional XVP 10 Expression Volume pedal or EXP 2 foot controller connected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack e This is set by Foot Pedal Assign You can choose from the following functions Master volume Alternate modulation source Effect dynamic modulation source Portamento pitch change speed Volume expression The pan following an insert effect Pan Volume Send levels to the master effects Duplicate the function of another controller such as the joystick or ribbon See Foot Pedal Assign on page 387 of the Parameter Guide Note You can use this as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation and use it to control program parameters or effect parameters In this case set Foot Switch Assign to Foot SW CC 82 and Foot Pedal Assign to Foot Pedal CC 04 Ass
71. Computer POH tO USB device connections Connections to computers Analog audio output Connecting audio equipment Analog audio output Here s how to connect the M3 to your analog amp or mixer amp If you ve connected a stereo audio amp be aware that playing at high volume may damage your speaker system Be careful not to raise the volume excessively AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R These are the main outputs accessed by setting Bus Select to L R All of the factory sounds use these outputs and the Master and Total Effect are always routed here as well 1 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R outputs to the inputs of your powered monitor or mixer If you re using M3 in stereo use both the MAIN L MONO and R jacks If you re using M3 in mono use only the MAIN L MONO jack If you re playing back through a stereo audio amp or a radio cassette recorder that has an external input jack connect the M3 to the jacks s labeled LINE IN AUX IN or external input Use an adapter cable with the appropriate type of plug The VOLUME MAIN slider affects only the main stereo outputs and the headphones it does not affect the individual outputs or the S P DIF output Headphones 00 u Con Powered O O monitors INPUT J INPUT lu PHONES monol fR b cc AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 These are 4 additional analog outputs which ca
72. Connecting a USB device HDD CD R RW etc 33 Installing the software 0 ccc eee cece 34 Playing and editing Programs 37 Playing Programs cececceccccecces 37 Selecting PrograMs cc cece cece eee eens 37 Performing with KARMA and the Drum Track 40 Using Controllers cc ccc cece cece eee 41 Controller settings for the program 46 Easy Program editing sececcecees 47 Simple editing using the sliders and switches 47 Usinig COMPARE 226 54000s sduwdaneortedwousewerien 49 Saving your edits cece cece eee eee ees 50 Detailed Editing with Programs 51 Overview of editing pages c cece eee 51 Basic oscillator settings c cece cece eee 51 Using LFOs and Envelopes EGs 54 Using Alternate Modulation AMS and the AMS Mixers ccceee eee eeeeeees 55 Controlling Pitch ies ses caiws scene swwuwins ewewe er 56 Using Filters 0 0 cc ccc ccc cece eee eeeee 57 Using the Amp SeCtion ccc cece eee eens 60 X Y control settings cc cece cece eens 62 KARMA SettiNgS cece cece eee e cece eenees 63 Drum Track settings ccc cece eee eee eee 63 iE A Se ee ee er oe ee eee ee tree 63 Automatically importing a Program into Sequence MOdE ccc cece cece ee eens 64 Playing and editing Combinations 0 05 Playing combinations eeeceeees
73. Drum Track patterns You can write your own patterns into U000 U999 User patterns you ve created in Sequencer mode can be converted into user Drum Track patterns The Drum Track pattern will start immediately when you press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch or when you play the keyboard after pressing the ON OFF switch If you re starting the pattern by playing the keyboard you have the option of starting it by using a specific range of notes or velocities You can also link this with the KARMA function The sound of the Drum Track program can be adjusted using the drum track EQ and you can also easily change the effect routing settings Performing with the Drum Track function Using the Drum Track function in Program mode Selecting a program and turning the Drum Track function on off 1 Press the MODE PROG switch to enter Program mode and select the desired program See Selecting Programs on page 37 PROG P Play Category _ Bank INT A gt 12 MotionSunth J 128 68 Swe JS Y Lock Em C S RT Control Pattern gt Preset gt F422 Drum n Bass 11 D n B Program BaSe Electro Rock Kit The ON OFF switch will light or blink depending on the setting Trigger Mode of the program If lit The Drum Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting When you turn it off the pattern will stop This will occur if Trigger Mode is Start Immediately If blinking The Drum Track p
74. E off Fad 8 off TE Controls Assign Lt The X Y CC Control on the other hand is generated by the X Y position Normally this will only affect internal sounds and effects If you like however you can also enable a Global parameter to send these generated CCs to external MIDI devices MIDI Routing a GLOBAL P1 MIDI MIG Routing s MIDI Out C x y Y CC Control Pads MIDI Out C Pad CC Note Chord Notes KARMA External m Enable KARMA Module to MICI Out m Enable MID Into KARMA Module L Enable Start Stop Out in Prog Combi MIDI Filter m Enable Program Change m Bank Change m Combination Change m Enable After Touch m Enable Control Change m Enable Exclusive KARMA settings Based on your keyboard playing or on the note data received from MIDI IN the KARMA function automatically generates a diverse variety of phrases or patterns such as guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns You can use the KARMA sliders and the KARMA switches to freely modify these phrases or patterns The M3 is preloaded with numerous programs and combinations that cover a wide range of instruments performance techniques and musical styles and which take full advantage of the KARMA function For more about the KARMA function please see page 163 Drum Track settings While you perform using a program you can use the M3 s rich variety of drum patterns to play high quality
75. ED ED ag El TouchView MODE BANK SELECT suru ota fre 40 prase ereu xenon re gt gt JOR se ee em se ee EA LOCATE 65 66 Playing and editing Combinations e Use numeric keys 0 9 to enter the combination number and press the ENTER switch 5 Press a BANK SELECT I A U G switch to switch banks When you select a different Bank the switch s LED will light and the selected bank will appear on the left side of the display For example to select bank INT B press the BANK SELECT I B switch The I B switch will light and the name Bank INT B will appear in the left of the display Auditioning the sound To hear the combination you selected play the KYBD 61 73 88 or a MIDI connected keyboard Alternatively you can strike the M3 M s pads to hear the program Overview Combination Banks With the factory settings the M3 contains 384 preloaded combinations that are GM2 compatible In addition to these you can store sounds that you create as well as optional sound libraries giving you a total of 1 792 combinations Combinations are organized into fourteen banks as shown in the following table Combination bank contents Bank Combi No Explanation INT A C 000 127 USER E 000 031 Factory Combinations INT D
76. ER MIDI Basic ff Note Receive E All m Local Control On Convert Position E PreMltl C External USB MIDI Clock _ Internal External MIDI m Receive Ext Realtime Commands SEQ Mode Track MIDI Out for Master Param MIDI out Control Change DrumTrack Prog MIDI ch 148 L Prog MIDI Out 3 Create a new song in Sequencer mode and in the P0 1 Play REC Preference page check the Multi REC check box Set Recording Setup to Overwrite auto SEQ P 1 Play REC Preference 001 01 000 neer v4 J 12000 Oru 5000 NEW SONG Track 1 MIDI TRACK B1 Reso Hi C RPPR T81 A006 Steren Grand 4 Way Ch601 RPPR Ho ssian MiRecording Setup Overwrite Q Overdub O Manual Punch In m Multi REC MiMtetronome Setup Sound Only REC Bust Output Select L R Level 127 Precount Measure 2 Aner par Miner Miner Fly i EE oop Sampling Prefe Us Cee Pe ae bee a 4 Press Play Rec Mute to select REC for the tracks you want to record Q Auto Punch In For the tracks you don t want to record select Play or Mute Tip You can also control the Play Rec Mute setting from the front panel mixer section or from the P0 2 Play REC Control Surface page For details please see Control using the sliders and switches on page 82 SEQ P 1 Play REC Program T41 83 001 01 0O Meter 44 J 12060 Gran O
77. ETH gt ETH gt ETHE ETHE ETHE ETHE ETH MIDI Channel MOM o gt os oa fos oe i male when Status Ex2 ray fas e Use Status to specify whether each track will play the internal and or external sound generator Normally when using the M3 as a 16 timbre sound module you will select INT or BTH 83 z o WJ w gt o Vv 7a 84 Creating songs Sequencer mode INT During playback the M3 s internal tone generator will play the MIDI data recorded on that track When you operate the M3 s keyboard or controllers you will be playing and controlling the track selected by Track Select MIDI data will not be transmitted to an external device EXT EX2 BTH During playback the MIDI data recorded on that track will be transmitted from MIDI OUT to play an external sound module When you operate the M3 s keyboard or controllers MIDI data will be transmitted to play and control the external sound module selected by Track Select The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must be set to match the MIDI Channel of M3 tracks that are set to EXT EX2 or BTH If Status is set to BTH both the external tone generator and internal tone generator will be sounded and controlled e Use MIDI Channel to specify the MIDI channel for each track Normally you will set MIDI Channel to a different channel 1 16 for each track Tracks that are set to the same MIDI channel will sound simultaneously when you reco
78. I A I E U A U D 000 063 U E e Combination Bank I A I C U E 000 031 e Drum Kit OOO INT 031 INT e Global Setting e Demo Song S000 S005 S008 5015 Only when executing All Preload PCG and Demo Song Note Demo song data will be erased when the power is turned off If the EXB RADIAS is installed In addition to the above data the following items will also be loaded e Program Bank I F e Formant Motion 1 16 For details please see EXB RADIAS for M3 Manual PDF 201 202 Appendices Installing options Please read this before you begin installation Safety precautions A N Warning e Before installing an option be sure to disconnect the power supply cable and the connecting cables to any peripheral devices Failure to do so could cause electrical shock or may damage the device e When installing repairing or replacing an option you must perform only those actions that the Owner s manual directs and no other e Do not apply excessive force to the electronic components or connectors on the circuit board s of an option or attempt to disassemble them This could cause electric shock fire or malfunction AN Caution e Before touching the option touch a metal component of the device into which it will be installed to discharge any static electricity that may be present in your body Static electricity may damage the electronic components e Danger of exp
79. If you re unsure you can check this yourself 1 Access the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Basic page 2 Check that the Oct Octave parameter near the top of the page is set to 0 8 With a setting other than 0 8 the relationship between the keys and the Drum Kit sound map will be incorrect Make sure that Memory Protect is disabled Before you start editing go to the Global PO Basic Setup System Preference page and look in the Memory Protect section Make sure that Drum Kit is not checked if so you won t be able to make any edits Drum Kits may be used by more than one Program When you edit a Drum Kit all Programs that use that Drum Kit will be affected To avoid changing the factory voicing you may wish to copy Drum Kits to empty locations in the USER banks before editing Backing up a Drum Kit Global mode does not have a Compare function that returns the edited result to the state prior to editing Before you begin editing a user Drum Kit it s a good idea to use Copy Drum Kit to copy that Drum Kit to a vacant number Creating a Drum Kit Specifying the key to which you will assign a drumsample 1 Select the Program that you wish to use while editing the Drum Kit For details please see Drum Program selecting above 2 Press the MODE GLOBAL switch to enter Global mode 3 Access the Global P5 Drum Kit Sample Setup page KEY Assign Drum Kit F few i Select
80. If using velocity crossfade switching the multisample will use twice as many voices as usual 51 52 Playing and editing Programs Program Basic P1 1 Common LFO P5 8 OSC1 LFO1 P5 1 OSC1 LFO2 P5 2 OSC1 Basic P2 1 Filter1 A B P3 1 1 Amp1 Driver1 P4 1 Amp Mod P4 2 OSC1 Pitch P2 2 Filter Key Track P3 1 2 f Filter1 Mod P3 1 3 Filter1 LFO Mod P3 1 4 Filter1 EG P3 1 5 Amp1 EG P4 3 OSC1 AMS Mix P6 1 2 Osc 1 OSC 2 Pitch EG P2 8 Common KeyTrack P6 7 8 3Band EQ P Controllers P1 6 DrumTrack P1 3 4 Pads P1 7 8 Tone Adjust P0 8 ee it patia t batant a Mat ee ee t pa ee ee ee eee eT ee ee eT eT TCL ee eC ha a l l a all Master Effect Routing P8 1 AUDIO OUTPUT Ose he L MONO R Insert Effects Master Effects Individual Outputs AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 AUX Bus FX Control Bus lt Oscillator Pitch gt lt _ Filter A Amplifier A E gt 240 Effects _ _ ______________ gt P1 1 P2 2 etc indicate the on screen pages and tabs used when editing on the M3 Polyphonic monophonic playing The Voice Assign Mode selects whether the Pr
81. If you re controlling the triggering by playing the keyboard the drum track will receive on the global MIDI channel Transmit The drum track will transmit on the MIDI channel specified by the Drum Pattern Output setting of each combination Set this to match the MIDI channel of the timbre you ve specified for the drum program If the timbre s Status is EXT or EX2 the note data etc of the Drum Track pattern will be transmitted Drum Track function settings Drum Track function settings in Sequencer mode Drum Track function settings in Sequencer mode The parameters for the Drum Track function are structured in the same way as in Combination mode Assign the Drum Track program to the desired track 1 16 However while a combination triggers the Drum Track pattern on the global MIDI channel a song triggers the Drum Track pattern on the MIDI channel specified by Drum Pattern Input Normally you ll set this to Tch With the Tch setting the MIDI channel of the track selected by Track Select will automatically be used as the trigger channel For details please see Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum Track program on page 186 SEQ P1 DT SR Ctris Drum Pattern Pattern Preset Pa Pop amp Balad 1 Std Shift HIDI Channel Input Output TA l Trigger gt Start Immediately Drum Track Sync E off ice Nazie d ie J sig J iers ed sD In Sequencer mode you can use the Dru
82. Insert a space at Delete all characters and exit the text edit box the cursor location of the text press the Cancel button 2 We ll use M3 Program01 as an example e Press the Clear button e Press the Shift button to switch to uppercase characters and press M e Press the Shift button once again to switch to lowercase characters and press the characters 3 e Press the Space button e Press the Shift button to switch to uppercase characters and press P e Press the Shift button to switch to lowercase and enter the remaining characters Note In Media mode there are some limitations on the characters that can be entered 3 Press the OK button to close the dialog box You will return to the page in which you were before accessing the text edit dialog box 197 198 Other functions common to all modes Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2 SW1 and SW2 are the two switches above the joystick and ribbon These on off switches can perform a number of different functions such as modulating sounds or effects or locking the modulation values of the joystick ribbon or aftertouch Also each one may work either as a toggle or as a momentary switch In Toggle mode each press alternates between on and off in Momentary mode the switch only changes for as long as you hold it down Each Program Combination and Song stores its own settings for what the switches will do and whether each switc
83. KARMA Copy from Combination Combination gt l t Towards The Sun m iF MMF ETF m Multi REC Standby Cancel OF Select the copy source combination Turn IFXs MFXs TEX and Multi REC Standby on checked Press OK to execute the copy 3 The settings of the combination s timbres 1 16 will be copied to MIDI tracks 1 16 Effect settings KARMA settings and all other common parameters will be copied to the tracks of the song 4 Choose Track Select Select a track whose MIDI channel matches the global MIDI channel Press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn the KARMA function on and play the keyboard and or pads to make the KARMA function begin playing in the same way as it did in the copy source combination Depending on the track you selected in Track Source the performance may not be the same as when you were playing the combination Be sure to select the track whose MIDI channel is the same as the global MIDI channel 5 Perform multi track recording Make preparations for recording as described in Multi multitrack recording on page 87 Turn Multi REC on checked SEQ Pa 1 Play REC Program 181 66 0601 61 Q Meter 474 J 69568 Manu 25000 NEW SONG Tracka MIDI TRACK 1 Reso E Hi T61 1 B060 Stereo Grand 3 Way Chk l RPPR HoAssian Category gt 00 gt 03 12 Fi gt 15 gt 15 FID gt 15 Reuboar die Motion Drums Drums Dru Drums Drums Bank Pr
84. LED will light up and the modulation effect at this point will be maintained 4 Release the joystick and play the keyboard The modulation will stay the same as it was when SW2 was pressed Moving the joystick away from yourself will not affect the sound 5 Press the SW2 switch once again to release the Lock function Al 42 Playing and editing Programs Locking the Ribbon Controller Make sure that the INT A003 Real Suit E Piano program is selected 1 Press the SW2 switch The LED will light up 2 Touch the ribbon controller and move your finger left and right Movement in the X direction will brighten the tone and movement in the X direction will darken the tone 3 Lift your finger up from the ribbon controller The sound will remain as it was when you last touched the ribbon 4 Press the SW2 switch once again to release the Lock function Press the tab labeled Main to go to the P0 Play Main page In the upper right hand portion of the display notice that SW2 is assigned to JS Y amp Ribbon Lock This means that SW2 is assigned to control the Lock function for both the joystick s Y axis and the ribbon controller The switch operates as a toggle Many Programs and Combinations use this assignment You can also lock both the ribbon and the joystick at the same time 1 Move the joystick in the Y direction Press the SW2 switch to turn on the Lock function 2 3 Move your finger on
85. Media mode Save Exclusive all remaining internal memory was used up To solve this problem e If you are receiving two or more sets of exclusive data transmit them separately to the M3 Meaning In Media mode you attempted to load more sample waveform data than there was free memory capacity To solve this problem e In Sampling mode execute Delete sample to create free space in the sample waveform data area and re load the data Memory Protected Meaning The internal program combination song drum kit wave sequence KARMA GE is protected Meaning The song was protected when you executed Auto Song Setup e In Global mode turn off write protect and execute the write or load operation once again MIDI data receiving error Meaning While receiving MIDI System Exclusive data the format of the received data was invalid for example because the size of the data was incorrect Multisample L and R are identical Meaning Since the destination save location Land R multisample numbers are the same the editing operation could not be executed To solve this problem e Select a different multisample number for the L and R of the destination save location N No 48kHz Clock Now switching system clock source No 48kHz Clock is detected from S P DIF clock master device The System Clock cannot be changed to S P DIF Meaning If the EXB RADIAS is installed the Global mode PO Basic Setup System Preference Sys
86. Name List PDF KORG MIDI driver M3 Editor Plug In Editor etc Options Appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice October 08 227 Music Workstation Sampler Date 2007 1 13 M3 MIDI Implementation Chart Basic Default Memorized Channel Changed Memorized Messages x Altered 2k 2k ok 2k 2 ok 2k 2k ok ak 2k ok ak 2k Note 0 127 All note numbers 0 127 can be transmitted Number True Voice ee ee ee So by the KARMA function or as sequence data Velocity Note On O 9n V 1 127 Note Off Aftertouch Polyphonic Key Polyphonic aftertouch transmitted Monophonic Channel only as sequence data Pitch Bend 0 32 1 2 16 18 4 5 7 8 10 11 12 13 64 65 66 67 70 79 80 81 82 83 93 91 92 94 95 14 22 31 102 109 110 117 118 119 6 38 96 97 98 99 100 101 0 119 0 119 0 119 120 121 Bank Select MSB LSB Joystick Y Y Ribbon Value Slider Pedal Portamento Time Volume IFX pan Pan Expression Effect Control 1 2 Damper Portamento Sw Sostenuto Soft Sound Realtime Sliders 1 4 74 71 79 72 Switch 1 2 Foot Switch Controller Send 1 2 Effect ON OFF IFXs MFXs TFX KARMA Controllers Pad1 8 X Y Mode X Y Data Entry Increment Decrement NRPN LSB MSB RPN LSB MSB Realtime Sliders 5 8 XY Assign Seq Data KARMA GE data output C Seq when received External Mode SWs Sliders Pads C 4 All Sound Off
87. Only selected only the note events will be converted Press the OK button or the ENTER switch to execute If you decide not to execute press the Cancel button or the EXIT switch As described in Using the Drum Track function in Program mode on page 185 set the Drum Track Pattern Bank to User and set Pattern No to the user Drum Track pattern you converted Then play the Drum Track pattern Program 522 Combination Preset 4 Pattern Drum Track 100 User Pattern Pattern Convert to Drum Track Pattern Sequencer memory Internal memory saved inside the M3 Pattern EEG Uae PATTERN aa J 146 08 only REC Resa Hi E ae USED IH SONG TRA iii Se save on external USB E EE EP ee media USED IH RPPR A EE Be Be 2 ee ee on L Edit J Hame A r o 3 Select the user pattern that you want to convert to a Drum Track pattern ped tes E gt om a Set Pattern to User and use Pattern Select to select the desired pattern 4 Choose the menu command Convert to Drum Trk Pattern to access the dialog box 195 Drum Track function 196 Other functions common to all modes Editing names You can modify the name of an edited program combination song drum kit multisample or sample etc You can also modify the category names for programs and combinations These renaming operations can be
88. Out in Prog Combi You can set up M3 so that starting and stopping KARMA in Program and Combination modes will also control start and stop on external MIDI devices such as sequencers and drum groove machines such as the KORG Electribe series To do so 1 2 Go to the Global MIDI page Under MIDI Routing Setup turn on Enable Start Stop Out in Prog Combi In Program and Combination modes playing a note on from the keyboard or pads to trigger the GE selected fora KARMA module will also cause the MIDI system realtime message Start to be sent at the trigger timing After the Start message has been sent turning off KARMA ON OFF will send the MIDI system realtime Stop command Drum Track function Overview What is the Drum Track function The Drum Track function makes it easy to play the M3 s high quality drum programs using a wide variety of Drum Track patterns It provides a convenient way for you to hear Drum Track patterns while you try playing various phrases on a program or combination or working out the outline of your song Then when you ve come up with some ideas you can use the Auto Song Setup function to immediately start recording in Sequencer mode Regarding the Drum Track patterns you can use preset patterns that cover a wide range of musical styles as well as user patterns that you yourself created Preset P001 P522 Preset Drum Track patterns User U000 U999 User
89. P2 Loop Edit page Uncheck Loop Now the sample will not loop even if you hold down the C2 key SALLE P2 Sail Edit Sample ARAA NEWFILE Start ponaeanaa _ Loop C Rey C 1206 Loops Gageageda Loop Lock LoopTune 48 gt zoom End aaa2222 E Use Zero ET 2 Now we ll specify that looping will be turned off for each newly recorded sample Access the P0 Recording Preference page Uncheck Auto Loop On If Auto Loop On is checked the Loop setting will automatically be turned on when you sample so that the sample will loop Record the next sample 1 In the P0 Recording Recording page select Index and press the A switch to select 002 2 Press the SAMPLING REC switch and then the SAMPLING START STOP switch Speak into the mic saying the word s you want to sample Example So When you ve finished speaking press the SAMPLING START STOP switch 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 several times more to record a few more samples Example Easy To Sample With M3 Listen to the recorded result 1 Play the keys one after another Play the keys starting at C2 in semitone steps The samples you just recorded will play one after another For example if you sequentially play the keys from C2 through F 2 you will hear It s So Easy To Sample With M3 The multisample you created can be used as a program or combination See C
90. Parameter Guide and Move Measure on page 299 of the Parameter Guide If you want to edit or add to the recorded data you can use the Event Edit function For details please see Event Edit on page 289 of the Parameter Guide MIDI recording Recording variation Recording variation Recording the sound of a Combination or Program Here s how you can easily copy the settings of a Combination or Program and then record using that sound When you re performing in Program or Combination mode you can use the Auto Song Setup function to automatically set up the settings of that program or combination into a song Alternatively you can use the Sequencer mode menu commands Copy From Combi and Copy from Program to set up a song in a similar way Auto Song Setup function The explanation of the Auto Song Setup function given here follows the procedure from Combination mode 1 Enter Combination mode 2 If you change any of the settings in the combination in the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page Such as panning volume and KARMA setting you must first save the edited settings using Update Combination or Write Combination 3 Hold down the ENTER switch and press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch The Setup to Record dialog box will appear 4 Press the OK button to perform the Auto Song Setup The M3 will automatically switch to Sequencer mode and the combination s settings will be applied to anew s
91. Playing and editing Programs When you select a different Bank the switch s LED will light and the selected bank will appear on the left side of the display For example to select bank INT B press the BANK SELECT I B switch The I B switch will light and the name Bank INT B will appear in the left of the display e Each time you press the I G switch the bank will alternate as shown below G gt g 1 gt g 2 gt g 3 gt g 4 gt g 5 gt g 6 gt g 7 gt g 8 gt g 9 gt g d gt G gt g 1 gt Auditioning the sound To hear the program you selected play the KYBD 61 73 88 or a MIDI connected keyboard Alternatively you can strike the M3 M s pads to hear the program Overview Program Banks Selecting by Bank Program Select menu You can select Programs from a menu organized by Program bank 1 Press the Program Select popup button The Bank Program Select menu appears Bank Program Select menu Bank Program Select I 4G8S Stereo Strings Lel 4811 l 4684 Studio Standard l A 2 A05 Attacking Synth l 4613 Hib Acoustic Bass 1 A814 dazzPere Organ i gt Full Brass Sectio gt Vibrato Flute R amp B Planet Whale s world 5 gt Huggy lead Space Gliders With the factory settings the M3 contains 512 preloaded programs and 256 programs and 9 drum programs that are GM2 compatible In addition to these you can store sounds that you create as well as optional sound librari
92. Programs Combinations and Drum Kits Here we ll explain how to load all data from a PCG file containing Programs Combinations Drum kits Global settings and Drum Track patterns in a single operation amp When loading Programs Combinations Songs or Drum Kits you must make sure that the Global mode memory protect setting is unchecked See Memory protect on page 142 Note Please see page 142 for details on the media from which you can load data 1 Make sure that the media is ready for you to load data See Media setup on page 143 2 Access the Media Load page Press the Load tab 3 Press the PCG file containing the program and combination data you want to load so that the file is highlighted e Press Media Select to select the media e If there are directories press the Open button to move to a lower level or press the Up button to move back to the higher level 22 4M 61 61 2686 66 06 88 NEW FILE PCG al NE FILE WAWY 188K 61 41 2886 66 86 68 ili Make Flay tor 4 Press the Load button Alternatively choose the menu command Load Selected E ROD NEW OLUME A dialog box will appear O Load HEWW FILE SNG too m Load HEWW FILE KSC too PCG Contents O G Select KSC Allocation O Append fe Clear Cancel OK 5 If you also want to load programs that use user multisamples check the Load KSC too check box
93. SL Slider 1 5 Use Polarity to specify the polarity of control Ml yy For this example specify When you set CONTROL ASSIGN to KARMA and operate slider 1 the Transpose setting will change in semitone steps over a range of 24 to 0 with 12 as the center value Note If you set Param Parameter to Transpose Octave the change will occur in steps of one octave over a range of 24 to 0 with 12 as the center value If you select Transpose Octave 5th the change will occur in alternating steps of an octave or a fifth over a range of 24 to 0 with 12 as the center value For example if this parameter is at the Min setting and a C3 note is sounding moving slider 1 from 000 toward 127 will cause a pitch change of C3 gt G3 gt C4 gt G4 gt C5 Dynamic MIDI setting Dynamic MIDI lets you use an M3 controller or a MIDI control message to control a specific parameter of the KARMA function You can specify up to eight controllers Source and what they will do Destination For details please see Dynamic MIDI Sources amp Destinations on page 621 of the Parameter Guide Naming the KARMA RTC sliders 1 8 and switches 1 8 1 Access the Prog P7 2 KARMA2 Names page PROG P7 2 KARMA2 SWH 8 2 461 Rhythm Pattern RhuPatn ER gt B53 Duration Control Durcntr 46 515 Velocity Accents WelaAcet 5 324 Note Range NtRange 6 938 Bend Start Bndstax 7 456 Repeat Repetitions A
94. Setup parameters Musical data Time signature Tempo When you change the setting during realtime recording this will be recorded as musical data This allows the starting settings to be modified during the playback Musical data MIDI RPN data can be used to change the starting settings during playback Other parameters You can adjust parameters during realtime recording and record these changes as MIDI System Exclusive messages This means that the settings at the start of playback can change as the song progresses For details on Control Change messages and RPN please see Control change on page 640 and Using RPN Registered Parameter Numbers on page 644 of the Parameter Guide For details on MIDI System Exclusive messages please see About system exclusive messages on page 645 of the Parameter Guide Song recording and editing Song recording is performed on tracks You can record MIDI tracks in either of two ways realtime recording or step recording For realtime recording you can choose one of six recording modes You can edit MIDI tracks by using Event Edit operations to modify the recorded data or insert new data and by using Track Edit operations such as Create Control Data which inserts pitch bend aftertouch or control change data Patterns There are two types of patterns preset patterns and user patterns Preset patterns Patterns suitable for drum tracks are preset in intern
95. Stereo The sound of the internal L R channels will be sam pled in stereo e PO Recording Preference Auto 12dB On On The 12 dB setting will automatically be turned on for the samples you record 115 116 Sampling Open Sampling System e P8 IFX Routing Bus Select IFX1 amp Be aware that if you change the Bus Select setting from Off to L R or IFX1 5 the volume level sent to the AUDIO OUT L MONO and R jacks and the headphones may rise excessively Manual Resampling As an alternative to automatically resampling as described above Automatic Resampling you can simply sample the sounds that you play from the keyboard Manual Resampling e In Sample Sample Select assign the sample that you will resample and set Resample to Manual Set Trigger to Note On and set Sample Mode to Stereo as desired Then set Source Bus P8 IFX Routing Bus Select and effects press the SAMPLING REC and START STOP switches and then press the key to which the sample you want to resample is assigned resampling will begin When you want to stop resampling press the SAMPLING START STOP switch Loop Edit P2 Loop Edit You can edit the playback address at which the sample will be looped The P2 Loop Edit page lets you do the following things e You can specify the looping addresses by editing Start End and Loop Start while watching the waveform Functions like Zoom In Out Use Zero and Grid make editing easy
96. Switch 45 Assignable Pedal 133 Assignable Switch 132 Audio CD Create 150 Audio equipment Connection 27 AUDIOINPUT 16 28 152 154 158 159 Audio input setting 131 AUDIO OUTPUT 16 27 155 Auto punch in 86 Auto Song Setup 64 75 89 180 B Band Pass filter 58 Band Reject filter 58 Bank Combination 66 Program 38 Bank select 40 67 73 Bank Combination Select 66 Bank Program Select 38 Beep 130 Boost 61 Bottom panel 17 BPM 74 117 C Calendar 148 Calendar battery 203 207 Category 39 66 Category Name 134 Category Combination Select 66 Category Program Select 39 Combination 65 Edit 68 70 Effect 157 Select 65 Common FX LFO 162 Common LFO 54 COMPARE 49 71 104 109 Connection Audio equipment 27 Computer 30 MIDI device 33 USB device 33 Control Surface 10 42 186 Controller setting 46 Convert Cue List 102 Drum Track pattern 195 Multisample 120 Copy Cue List 101 Drum Kit 136 Effect 155 From Combination 89 From Program 89 From Song 102 Index 119 KARMA Module 172 Key Setup 137 Oscillator 53 Pad 44 Pattern 96 Pattern To Track 84 Scale 133 Song 95 Track 93 95 Cue List 78 101 Convert 102 Cutoff Frequency 58 D Damper pedal 29 45 Data filer 144 Delay Timbre 75 Detune 74 Digital audio devices Connection 130 Display 17 203 Dmod 161 Double Program 51 Double size effects 156 Drive 61 Drum Kit 53 135 Create 136 Edit 135 Select 53 Drum Pro
97. The diagram shown is for M3 61 They will do something like the functions shown below Standard Joystick functions Controller Move the joystick ed Normally controls Name Pich bend down Fitch bend up Up away from yourself Backwards JS Y Filter LFO wah towards yourself 3 Ribbon controller You can control the M3 M s program parameters and effect parameters by touching or sliding your finger on the ribbon controller The actual functions that are being controlled will depend on various program and effect parameters 4 TO MODULE TO MODULE 2nd connectors Use the included cable to connect the M3 M and the keyboard assembly When they are connected you can use the keyboard assembly s keyboard SW1 and SW2 switches joystick and ribbon controller to control the M3 M The KYBD 61 73 88 keyboard assembly has two TO MODULE connectors main and sub allowing you to connect two devices that are compatible with the KORG Komponent System For details on connections please see Keyboard assembly Manual W me e i 10 Introduction to the M3 M3 M Front panel 10 MIX PLAY MUTE SOLO LE a E L E L e EN EA EA EA EA E E BANK SELECT KT EXIT PAGE ouchView 6 7 8 1 VOLUME MAIN slider This
98. To do SO 1 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch The Update Program dialog will appear 2 Press OK to write the program Saving to a USB storage device You can manage your data by saving programs on a USB storage device commercially available For details please see Saving to media Media Save on page 142 Detailed Editing with Programs Overview of editing pages Detailed Editing with Programs Creating your own Programs You can create original sounds by editing a preloaded program or by editing an initialized program The programs EDS you create can be saved in banks INT A INT E or USER A USER G For details please see Saving your edits on page 50 You can also create Programs using RAM multisamples that you have sampled or loaded from media In addition you can play a Program and resample your performance or sample an external audio source while listening to the sound of a Program Note When the M3 is in its factory set state EDS Programs are the only programs that can be used If you install the optional EXB RADIAS you ll be able to use RADIAS Programs Here we will explain EDS Programs For more about RADIAS Programs please see EXB RADIAS for M3 Manual on the CD ROM Overview of editing pages PO Play is where you select and play programs make quick edits using the Control Surface and adjust the KARMA settings The other pages let you modify the sound in more detailed ways
99. Track on page 296 of the Parameter Guide Copy Track This command copies musical data from the copy source track to the specified track For details please see Copy Track on page 296 of the Parameter Guide Bounce Track This command combines the musical data of the bounce source and bounce destination tracks and places the combined data in the bounce destination All musical data in the bounce source will be erased For details please see Bounce Track on page 296 of the Parameter Guide Erase Measure This command erases the specified type s of musical data from the specified range of measures The Erase Measure command can also be used to remove only a specific type of data Unlike the Delete Measure command executing the Erase Measure command does not cause the subsequent Song editing Recording patterns measures of musical data to be moved forward For details please see Erase Measure on page 296 of the Parameter Guide Delete Measure This command deletes the specified measures When the Delete Measure command is executed the musical data following the deleted measures will be moved towards the beginning of the sequence For details please see Delete Measure on page 297 of the Parameter Guide Insert Measure This command inserts the specified number of measures into the specified track When you execute the Insert Measure command the musical data following the insert location will be move
100. Trk Pattern on page 307 of the Parameter Guide Load Drum Track Pattern Loads the specified user Drum Track pattern into a user pattern For details please see Load Drum Track Pattern on page 308 of the Parameter Guide Using RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Record Creating RPPR data Using RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Record This section explains how to assign a pattern to a key and how to record and play an RPPR based performance Creating RPPR data 1 Create a new song and choose a drum program for MIDI track 1 2 Access the P10 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page In this page the RPPR function is automatically turned on 3 Select the key to which the pattern will be assigned 4 Select C 2 Hold down the ENTER switch and play a key Note C2 and lower keys are used to stop playback and cannot be assigned 5 Check Assign for C 2 6 Set Pattern Bank to Preset and set Pattern Select to P00 7 Set Track to Track01 The selected pattern will be played according to the settings program etc of the track you select here RPPR Setup a J 126 06 l 4684 Studia Standard Kit SEQ P18 Pattern RPPR S000 NEW SONG Track MIDI TRACK B1 _ EAE RPPR Setup KET Assign Mode Manual G gt C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync gt Beat Pattern Preset Paa1 Pop amp Balad 1 Std Revert Track Track 1 MIDI TRACK G1 to last assigned s
101. Use the popup button at the left to select J You can choose from the range o whole note A 32nd note Mtn Input a dotted note by selecting buttons at right with the popup You can specify 3 to input a triplet If you want to use the unmodified length of the note that s selected at the left choose Note Duration indicates the length that the note itself will sound Smaller values will produce a staccato note and larger values will produce a legato note For this example leave this setting unchanged Note Velocity is the velocity playing strength and larger values will produce a louder volume Set this to Key If you select Key for this parameter the velocity with which you actually play the keyboard will be input 6 On the keyboard press and then release the first C3 note that you want to input The data you input will appear in the display as numerical values In the upper right Measure 001 Beat Tick 01 000 will change to Measure 001 Beat Tick 01 360 The next note you input will be placed at this location 7 Input the remaining notes as described in steps 5 and 6 You ve already input the first C3 note In addition to the methods described in steps 5 and 6 you can also use the following input methods e To input a rest press the Rest button This will input a rest of the Step Time value e To modify the length of a note you can modify the Step Time value befo
102. Wah 1 _ Link To Drum Trk Select RTC Model GY1 Gated Vel Pat 1 h Audion Surface 2 In the display press the GE Category Select popup button to access the GE Select menu 3 Select a category from the left and right tabs and select a GE from the menu The selected GE will be highlighted and will become active If you now play the keyboard this GE will generate a phrase or pattern While this menu is displayed you can select and play these GEs without pressing the OK button 4 If you are satisfied with the program you selected press the OK button to close the menu Alternatively you can select a GE by choosing GE Select in the display and operating the VALUE slider or VALUE dial Alternatively you can press the GE Select popup button and select a GE from the GE Select menu 5 Use Tempo to set the tempo of the pattern or phrase generated by the GE Use KARMA T Sig to specify the time signature of the GE phrase or pattern If you set this to GE TS the time signature specified by the GE will be used With any other setting the time signature will be changed temporarily Editing KARMA module parameters For details on editing the parameters of a KARMA module please see KARMA function settings on page 172 Performing with the KARMA function in Combination mode In Combination mode up to four KARMA modules can be operating si
103. Wet Dry Only the Wet processed signal will be output The output signals from the Master Effects are routed to the L R bus with the output level specified by Return1 and Return2 These output signals are mixed with the output signals from the bus specified by Bus Select P8 Routing page in each mode L R or with the output signals from the bus specified by Bus Select P8 Insert FX Setup page in each mode L R then routed to the total effect Selecting 000 No Effect will mute the output The processed signal will be output in one of the following ways according to the type of effects Mono In Mono Out P Wet Mono In Stereo Out Stereo In Stereo Out fas coe Total Effect The total effect TFX is stereo in stereo out The Dry unprocessed side of the Wet Dry parameter sends the stereo input sound directly to the stereo output The way in which the Wet processed side is output depends on the type of effect as follows Mono In Mono Out pie H Wet Mono In Stereo Out E mr 4 Stereo In Stereo Out ffet US 4 153 154 Using Effects Note The Parameter Guide includes block diagrams for each individual effect which include the effect s input output structure See PG page 458 Effects in each mode Program mode For programs of EDS you can use insert effects to process the final sound in the same way that you use the Filter Driver Amplifier and EQ equalizer to process the
104. When moving a measure the edit operation could not be executed because a pattern had been put in the destination end measure or the source start measure and had not been opened e Open the pattern Pattern exists in destination or source track Open pattern Meaning A pattern has been placed in the track that you specified as a destination or source for editing If you wish to open the pattern and execute the events of the pattern will be copied press the OK button If you wish to execute without opening the pattern press the Cancel button Pattern used in song Continue Meaning When editing the specified pattern has been placed in a track If you wish to execute press the OK button If you decide not to execute press the Cancel button Program Type conflicts Meaning This message will appear when you execute Copy Tone Adjust if the copy source and copy destination program types are different You can t copy between EDS and RADIAS type programs R Rear sample Root Rear sample is empty Meaning When you executed Link in the Sampling mode Sample Edit page the sample that you specified as the rear sample is empty e Specify a sample that contains data as the rear sample and execute once again Root directory is full Meaning You attempted to create a file or directory in the root directory of the media but this would exceed the maximum number of root directory entries e Either delete an existing
105. X Y Motion please see X Y controller on page 43 You can also use a foot switch to control the MOTION START STOP switch function 9 MODE switches M3 has six different operational modes each one optimized for a specific set of functions Press one of these switches the LED will light to enter the corresponding mode COMBI switch This selects Combination mode Since a combination consists of multiple programs in a split or layer configuration it can produce more complex sounds than a program In Combination mode you can play or edit these combinations PROG switch This selects Program mode Programs are the basic sounds you play In Program mode you can play or edit programs SEQ switch This selects Sequencer mode for recording playing and MIDI tracks SAMPLING switch This selects Sampling mode for recording and editing audio samples and multisamples GLOBAL switch This selects Global mode for making overall settings and Drum Kits and more MEDIA switch This selects Media mode In this mode you can save or load data using a USB storage device connected to the USB A connector You can also edit WAVE files on a USB storage device or create an audio CD 10 BANK SELECT switches I A I B I C I D I E I F l G U A U B U C U D U E U F U G switches Use these switches to change banks when selecting Programs or Combinations The LEDs in the switches light up to show the current bank In
106. Zone Delay Key Z T01 08 page will appear COMB P4 Zone Delay Key Z T81 838 T a j j j AAAA a R SSS EEE EEE me m SS e E E a e ey a aaaaaE EEND ol Saeeeeeeeeeeerreeeeeeee ees ak INT A BER Towards The Sun TS1 BeG8 Stereo Grand 3 W ay Keyboar Strings Motions Orums Orum Orums Drums Drums B Go ae ae cs A a8 Gea ee ee c Note The page that appears will be the page of the tab you selected most recently Using the PAGE SELECT switch numeric keys 0 9 switches to move e Hold down the PAGE SELECT switch and use numeric keys 0 9 to specify the page number you want to view The specified page number will appear The page that appears will be the page of the tab you selected most recently Note In pages consisting of multiple pages such as P5 1 P5 2 P7 1 P7 4 P8 1 and P8 2 the first page P5 1 P7 1 or P8 1 will be selected Using the EXIT switch to move to page 0 e You can press the EXIT switch to return to page 0 from any page Selecting tabs e You can access tabbed pages by pressing the tabs shown in the bottom line of the display This example shows the Program T01 08 page through Mixer T01 08 page of Combi P0 Play COME Pe Flay Mixer 181 88 i Bank INT A gt 00 Kecbaard 4 695 06 21000 Towards The Sun T61 6008 Stereo Grand Way keyboar Strings Motion Drums Orums Orums Orums
107. a song or pattern e Sampling alternatively are you in sampling standby mode e Playing aCD e Playing a WAVE file In Combination or Sequencer modes can t edit the value of Timbre Track parameters such as MIDI Channel or Status Some parameters can t be edited while notes are playing either locally or from MIDI If the damper pedal is held down or if its calibration is incorrect notes may be sustaining even if they aren t audible e Are you using a damper pedal with a polarity that does not match the Damper Polarity setting Global P2 Controllers Foot Controllers gt PG p 387 e n some cases this problem can be solved be executing the menu command Half Damper Calibration Global P0 Basic Setup PG p 399 No beep sounds when you touch the display Check the Beep Enable check box Global PO Basic Setup System Preference gt p 130 PG p 375 Audio input and output No sound Are connections made correctly to your amp mixer or headphones gt p 26 Is the connected amp or mixer powered on and is its volume raised Is Local Control turned on e In Global P1 MIDI check the Local Control On check box gt PG p 379 Is the VOLUME MAIN slider raised p 13 Is the Master Volume assigned to Foot Pedal Assign and is that pedal volume lowered p 132 Is the X Y control be controlling volume and is the HOLD switch on the LED will light with the volume lowered p 43
108. amount A V switches Use these when you wish to make small changes in the value Numeric keys 0 9 ENTER switch switch switch These switches are convenient when you know the exact value that you want to enter Use the 0 9 and decimal switches to enter the value and then press the ENTER switch to confirm the entry Basic Information Basic operations The switch inverts the sign of the parameter value the decimal switch inserts a decimal for entering fractional values By holding down the ENTER switch and playing a note on the keyboard you can enter the following value ENTER switch keyboard note name or velocity input You can use the M3 s keyboard to specify the value of a parameter when you need to enter a note name or a velocity value Hold down the ENTER switch and play the note that you want to enter the corresponding note name or velocity value will be entered This function is unavailable while a menu command is open since the ENTER switch will be functioning as the OK button When the Global P5 Drum Kit page is shown you can hold down the ENTER switch and play a note to access the settings assigned to that note If a velocity related parameter is selected this action will enter the velocity value Other BANK SELECT I A I B I C I D I E I F l G U A U B U C U D U E U F U G switches Use these switches to change banks when selecting Programs or Co
109. and Micro Drives of 4 Gbytes or less will be formatted as FAT16 8 Press the OK button to format or press the Cancel button if you decide to cancel When you press the OK button a message will ask you for confirmation Press the OK button once again to execute the Format operation amp You must format a CD R RW disc if you want to use it for packet writing or if it has previously been used by another device You do not need to format a CD R RW disc that you will use to create an audio CD amp You must use the M3 to format the media The M3 will not correctly recognize media that has been formatted by another device Setting the date and time M3 has an internal calendar which is used to record the date and time when you save data You can set the date and time by using the Media Utility page s Set Date Time menu command You will need make these settings after you purchase the M3 and after you replace the calendar backup battery 1 Press the MODE MEDIA switch to enter Media mode 2 Access the Media Utility page Press the Utility tab 3 Open the menu and select the Set Date Time command The following dialog box will appear Year BAER Month B2 Day aL Hour EE Minute EE Cancel Second EE OF 4 Use the VALUE controllers to set the correct year month day hour minute and second Media utility File copying deleting and formatting Media Utility 5 Press the OK butto
110. and use the grid to edit the waveform to match the tempo 1 Choose the Grid menu command Select the On Set Resolution as desired Press the OK button 117 118 Sampling Open Sampling System Eid on Q oft Resolution E Cancel OK 2 In P2 Loop Edit use Grid to specify the tempo SAMPLING P2 Loop Edit ae newrs BBG L Index Bat aas Start panpanpan m Loop _ Rev C 1246 Loops panantang m Loop Lock LoopTune 60 jzcom End aaee96e0e Use Zero Grid EA The grid is displayed according to the playback pitch at the base key the key shown in blue for Keyboard amp Index You can select the base key by holding down the ENTER switch and playing a key Press the base key to play the sample and press the TAP TEMPO switch at quarter note intervals along with the phrase This will enable Tap Tempo and specify the tempo 3 Set the end address End so that it coincides with a grid line This will make the loop length match the BPM If looping is on the grid is displayed beginning at Loop Start If looping is off the grid is displayed beginning at Start 4 If you want to hide the grid display select the off in the Grid menu command Sample waveform data editing P1 Sample Edit Editing the waveform data In the P1 Sample Edit page you can do the following things e You can set the Edit Range Start and Edit Range End wh
111. any of the following methods to select a Program for each timbre e Choose Program Select use numeric keys 0 9 to input the program number and press the ENTER switch e Choose Program Select and turn the VALUE dial VALUE slider or use the A V switches e Ifthe Program Select parameter is selected the BANK I A U G switches will switch program banks If Timbre Program Select is selected the BANK switch LED of the program bank selected for that timbre will light e From the Bank Program Select menu you can view and select programs by bank e From the Category Program Select menu you can view and select programs by category e You can transmit MIDI program changes from a connected external MIDI device See Selecting Combinations from MIDI on page 66 Note Fe is shown if the optional EXB RADIAS is installed Adjusting the mix Adjusting the volume of each timbre 1 Access the Combi P0 Play Mixer T01 08 page This page shows the volume pan and Program assignments for all 8 Timbres COMB P Play Mixer T81 88 fi J Bank INT A 980 Pegboard 4 695 06 gt 000 Towards The Sun TO1 I BS8 Stereo Grand 3 Wway Keyboar Strings Motions Orums Druma Orums Drums Drums P JIJE CHb4 Chb4 Chb4 Chb4 Rari Chb4 RETS Rare are 0 Hold Balance TT DAP Ge D si Cia pt 3 2 Select the on display Volume slider for Timbre 1 Use A V the VALUE slider or the numeric keypad to set th
112. any timbre that matches this channel Normally you will set this to Gch When this is set to Gch the MIDI channel of the timbre will always match the global MIDI channel even if you change the global MIDI channel amp On some preloaded Combinations Timbres used by KARMA may have their MIDI Channels set to something other than Gch These will be timbres that play only when KARMA is on a very useful technique for creating KARMAlized Combinations For details please see KARMA function settings in Combination mode on page 176 In particular note the relationships between KARMA assignments and MIDI Channel Detailed Editing with Combinations MIDI settings MIDI filter settings For each MIDI Filter item you can specify whether or not the corresponding MIDI message will be transmitted and received The checked items will be transmitted and received COMBI P5S 1 MIDI Filter 1 1 161 465 M i aaa USER 4 gt AAA InitCombi UAAR d 120 06 T 1 AGG Acoustic Bass 1 SW Bass 5 Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Enable Programs Change Pm m m amp Enable After Touch m m m The MIDI filters don t turn the functions themselves on or off Instead the filter just controls whether or not that MIDI message will be transmitted and received S 2 v For example if portamento is on portamento will be applied to the internal M3 soun
113. as digital data Conceptual diagram of the Open Sampling System Resampling Program combinations and songs IFXs MFXs TFX AUDIO INPUT jack Analog digital Analog signal ONVertor omm CD R RW Drive Audio Input Audio CD Analog signal S P DIF IN jack Digital signal Ripping Option FireWire connector Used by combinations 4 Program and songs Level Analog waveform Time Level 48 kHz 48 000 times every second 0 0208 mS cycle lt n 16 bit 65 536 levels of data Sampled digital waveform Time The fixed intervals mentioned above are generally expressed as the sampling frequency 48 kHz kilohertz means that sampling is performed 48 000 times each second and that the interval is 1 second 48 000 times approximately 0 00002083 seconds approximately 0 02083 mS millisecond The higher the sampling frequency is the closer to the original analog signal the waveform in memory will be Each level is read and converted into digital data The accuracy at this time is determined by the bit resolution This process converts an analog signal with infinite resolution into a digital signal with finite resolution With 16 bit resolution each level is indicated in 65 536 steps the sixteenth power of two The greater the bit resolution is the closer to the original analog signal the waveform in memory will be 48 kHz 16 bit sampling is the same quality as
114. as the optional PS 1 to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack 2 After turning the power on use Global P2 Controllers Foot Controllers page Foot Switch Assign and Foot Switch Polarity to assign the function controlled by the foot switch and to specify the polarity See page 39 and page 132 Connecting a foot pedal If you connect a optional EXP 2 foot controller or XVP 10 expression volume pedal to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack you can use it to apply modulation to sounds or effects or to adjust the overall volume This pedal will always function in the same way regardless of the Program Combination or Song you ve selected You can assign the function in the Global mode 1 Connect an optional XVP 10 or EXP 2 to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jacks 2 After turning the power on use Global P2 Controllers Foot Controllers page Foot Pedal Assign to assign the function controlled by the foot pedal See page 133 29 30 Setup Connecting a computer The M3 provides USB connectors as standard equipment By connecting the M3 to your computer via USB you can use it as a controller and MIDI sound module for your DAW software By using the dedicated editor you can edit the M3 from your computer as though it were a software plug in Audio data is not transferred via the USB connector If you install the optional EXB FW you ll be able to send and receive MIDI and audio data 2 in 6 out within the dedi
115. back from the internal sequencer The playback of the internal sequencer is not sent to the KARMA modules Play ee es Se Local Sequencer 000000 Control OFF Record eA ON Generator M3 MIDI IN If you re using the M3 M by itself the controllers of the keyboard assembly are not included o MIDI OUT MIDI Filter Exclusive setting If you want the M3 to transmit and receive system exclusive data you must check the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Routing page MIDI Filter Exclusive check box Check this box if the M3 is connected to your computer and you want to edit the M3 from your computer or bi directionally You must also check this box if you re using the M3 Editor Plug In Editor By default the MIDI Filter Exclusive setting is checked Connecting MIDI devices By connecting the M3 s MIDI connectors to an external MIDI device you can transfer sound settings and performance data such as note messages between your external MIDI device and the M3 About MIDI MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and is a world wide standard for exchanging various types of musical data between electronic musical instruments and computers When MIDI cables are used to connect two or more MIDI devices performance data can be exchanged between the devices even if they were made by different manufacturers Controlling an external MIDI tone generator from M3 If you want to use the M3 s keyboard
116. by MS DOS cannot be used as a filename Illegal SMF data Meaning You attempted to load a file that was not a Standard MIDI File Illegal SMF division Meaning You attempted to load a Standard MIDI File that was timecode based Illegal SMF format Meaning You attempted to load a Standard MIDI File of a format other than 0 or 1 Inconvertible file exists Meaning A file that cannot be used with ISO9660 format exists on the media To solve this problem e Media that was formatted or written by a device other than the M3 may be impossible for the M3 to convert into IS09660 format To perform the conversion use the packet writing software that was used to format or write the media 217 218 Appendices Index number over limit Meaning When sampling into RAM in Combination Program or Sequencer mode there are too many indexes to be simultaneously converted into a multisample e Either convert the samples into a different program or multisample or use Sampling mode to delete some of the indexes before you continue sampling M Master Multisample Master Track can t be recorded alone Meaning When realtime recording a single track you attempted to begin recording with the master track as the current track e Select a MIDI for recording instead of the Master Track Measure number over limit Meaning The attempted edit operation would cause the track length to exceed 999 measures e De
117. change messages that will modify the program or effect parameters to change the sound PROG P1 Basic DT Ctris X Setup ii A T Yolume Control MIDI 53 _ Enable olume Control C Equal Power CE ee Ce Cutott w r OSC1 Center Yolume Maag Ea OSC2 Center Yolume MAA al CSS mx CC Control m Enable CC Control X Y CC Control Jj acess x E Cutoff X Y Volume Control Y Mode Split CCC TS Y E Mibi 53 CC 83 Y mibi 63 cC 83 Gea ae one Peon ppu Basic Scale dF f J h X Y control and MIDI The X Y control features interact with MIDI in two different ways through the X Y Mode and through the X Y CC Control The X Y Mode sends and receives two MIDI controllers one for the X axis and the other for the Y axis In Global mode you can assign these to any MIDI CC numbers you like The defaults are CC 118 for the X axis and CC 119 for the Y axis X Y mode or X Y motion and its MIDI control changes will control the X Y position GLOBAL P2 Controllers EY ME ARMA Controllers On OFF OTT Latch Off Scene Off Swi Off 9 SWS Off Slidert Off Slider5 Off Swe Off Swe Off Slider2 O0ff Slider6 Off SWS Off 9 SW Off Slider3 Off Slider Off off Swa Dff Slider 4 Off Slider S Off Pada CC and Note X Y six Y Mode EE Pa 1e orf Fad 5 orf OX Mode 119 Pad 2 off Pad 6 off Pad 3 off Pad 7 off Fad 4
118. change the save destination sample number Meaning The save destination sample number is temporarily being used to execute Time Stretch and therefore the Save operation cannot be executed e Change the save destination sample number Destination sample data used in source sample Can t overwrite Meaning Since the sample data at the destination save location is also used by the source sample it cannot be overwritten e Without using Overwrite specify a different sample for the destination save location Destination sample is empty Meaning The sample for editing is empty Destination song is empty Meaning The song that was specified as the copy destination or bounce destination does not exist e Execute the Create New Song command in the dialog box that appears when a new song is selected before copying or bouncing Cleanup directory Are you sure Directory is not empty Meaning When deleting a directory files or directories exist within that directory e Press the OK button to delete all files and or directories within that directory Disc full Meaning When executing command in the Media mode Make Audio CD page Write to CD there is insufficient space remaining on the USB CD R RW for the data to be written e Either write to other media or remove unneeded tracks Disk not formatted Meaning When you attempted to perform a high level format quick format of media the media had not been ph
119. color amp When the X Y MODE switch is on you won t be able to select parameters in the display Turn this switch off if you want to use the display to edit settings 2 Slide your finger over the display to modify the sound 3 If you turn on the HOLD switch the LED will light and remove your finger the effect at that position will be maintained If the HOLD switch is off the point will return to the center value no effect when you remove your finger Note You can use a foot switch to turn the X Y MODE switch on off Set Foot Switch Assign to X Y MODE For details please see Assigning the footswitch to Program Up Down on page 39 Recording an X Y motion If there are no events 1 Press the X Y MODE switch When you turn on the X Y MODE switch the switch LED will light and the display will change color 2 Press the MOTION switch to enter the record ready state 3 Continue holding down the MOTION switch touch the display and recording will begin Move your finger to record the motion 4 Recording will end when you release the MOTION switch or when the maximum event capacity is reached Recording an X Y motion 1 X Y MODE switch ORG X Y MODE HOLD MOTION 127 ElTouchView 2 3 MOTION switch 3 Display X axis If events already exist 1 Press the X Y MODE switch When you turn on the X Y MODE switch the switch LED will light and t
120. copying and inserting indexes and detailed settings such as sample level and pitch for each index Multisample editing is performed in P3 Multisample You can also do some basic edits in the P0 Recording Recording page Editing the indexes To change the number or order of the indexes use the Insert Cut Copy and Create buttons 1 Access the P3 Multisample Edit page SAMPLING P3 Multisample ieee Multisample mns O FLERE aT n lO EE TTT Multisample Setup Index Gol BBs _ Constant Pitch Sample Orig Key C2 Top Key C2 Range C 1 C2 Level 64 Pitch 808 BPM Adjust in Menu er Cut Copy Create 2 Use Multisample MS to select the multisample that you wish to edit 3 Select the Index You can also select an index by holding down the VALUE controller or ENTER switch and playing a note on the keyboard or pad 4 Press the buttons to modify the number or order of the indexes and edit them To delete the selected index press the Cut button The Insert button is used in conjunction with the Cut and Copy buttons The contents of the index that was Cut or Copied will be inserted The Create button has the same function as the Create button in PO Recording see Creating multisample indexes and sampling P0 Recording on page 110 Modifying the settings of an index 1 Make the settings described in steps 1 3 of Editing the indexes
121. crossfading layering that can use up to eight stereo multisamples up to four filters two filters each with four modes and four routings two amps five LFOs and five EGs all available simultaneously The oscillator section provides a total of 1 032 multisamples including seven stereo multisamples sampled at 48 kHz as well as 1 606 drum samples including 116 stereo drum samples giving you a total of 256 Mbytes of sample data when considered as 16 bit linear data These PCM sources are available for use in the oscillator section via four way velocity switching crossfading layering to create a broad range of expressive high quality sounds The filter section that s so vital to creative sound making lets you simultaneously use two filters for each oscillator Filter types include low pass high pass band pass and band reject notch You can use the two filters in any of four routings single serial parallel or 24 dB mode The amp section provides a driver circuit that adds edge and character to the sound The key tracking generator allows the filtering to vary according to the keyboard range you can apply subtle filtering for convincing simulation sounds or aggressive filtering that produces drastic changes in filtering as you play up or down the keyboard The M3 takes advantage of its lavish amount of available processing power to produce ultra fast and ultra smooth EGs envelope generators and LFOs EGs al
122. data received from the keyboard pads 1 8 MIDIIN or USB B and the note on off data generated by the KARMA module together with the name of the chord that was detected 1 Access the Prog P0 Play KARMA RTC page CLUE Ae KARMA RTC EA J fi 26 80 ecyNote TTT Ee eee Ty REE AORA AAAA AA AAA Naaa aa A FA Fhunky Wah 1 HEJ Duration Control EA Em ABs 5 L Go 222 Hau lais Bzr 116 B59 Heo Hoe Bz h L Durcrte VelaAcet BridStar RPIRERS BERTIE J When you play the keyboard or strike a ad 1 8 the name of the chord detected by the KARMA module will appear in the Chord field of KARMA Module Info Fl Phunky wah 1 EA Eni The CC Notes area shows the key zone of the KARMA module and the state of the control data and note on off data generated by the KARMA module See Specifying the keyboard zone for the KARMA function on page 172 me RELL ALLE DLE DLLE ELE DLL RELL TLL EELE ELLE ELE ELLE ELE ELLE ELE ELLE ELE ELLE ELE ELLE TTT 167 168 Using KARMA Using the KARMA controllers Note The state of the KARMA controllers is saved when you write the program KARMA function on off ON OFF switch The KARMA function will turn on off each time you press the ON OFF switch If it is on the switch LED will light When you play the keyboard or pads 1 8 the GE selected for the KARMA module will start generating a phrase or pattern Using the pads pads 1 8 When you press a p
123. e M Indicates the starting measure of that step e Meter Indicates the currently playing time signature This cannot be changed e The name of a cue list can be specified by the Rename Cue List menu command If you press the Copy button the selected step will be copied If you press the Insert button the copied step will be inserted 101 102 Creating songs Sequencer mode program specified for the currently playing song will sound What to do when playing back a cue list and the songs do not transition smoothly If the effect settings differ between songs and depending on the playback data within the song there may be cases in which there is a time lag between songs during playback Also the playback data at the transition between songs may not play at the correct timing In such cases use Convert to Song to convert the cue list into a single song When you play back this song there will be no time lag at the transition and the data will play at the correct timing If the effect settings differ between songs and you want to smooth the transition between songs check FX for Step 01 This way the effect settings will be made before playback begins and there will be no time lag when cue list playback is started or when switching from song to song Although it will not be possible to change effect types within the cue list you can use dynamic modulation or MIDI control changes such as Effect Control to
124. e Recording to a MIDI track e Track Edit All commands except for the menu commands Memory Status Panel SW Solo Mode On Exclusive Solo FF REW Speed and Set Location of the P6 Track Edit Track Edit page e Recording to a pattern e Pattern Edit All commands except for the menu commands Memory Status Panel SW Solo Mode On Exclusive Solo Convert to Drum Trk Pattern Erase Drum Track Pattern and FF REW Speed of the P10 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page e Song Edit P0 P5 pages menu commands Delete Song and Copy From Song Comparing after sampling The Compare operation will also apply to multisamples and samples that were sampled with Convert to enabled in Select Bank amp Sample No as described on page 284 of the Parameter Guide This means that if you want to re do your sampling you can press the COMPARE switch to return the multisample and samples to the state prior to sampling and unwanted samples will not remain amp The program will not be affected by the Compare and will not return to its prior state Operations for which Compare is not available e Editing song parameters e Menu commands other than those listed under Operations for which Compare is available above Cautions and other functions in Sequencer mode Memory Protect Memory Protect Before you record a track or pattern or edit the musical data you will need to turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode For det
125. edit the selected parameter s value This control is convenient when you want to scroll through a very long list of selections 0 9 and ENTER switches These switches are convenient when you know the exact value that you want to enter Use the 0 9 and decimal switches to enter the value and then press the ENTER switch to confirm the entry The switch inverts the sign of the parameter value the decimal switch inserts a decimal for entering fractional values Functions that use the ENTER switch in conjunc tion with another switch ENTER has a few special functions when it is pressed in combination with other switches Whenever a parameter on the display lets you enter a musical note such as G4 or C 2 or a velocity level you can enter the note or velocity directly by holding down ENTER while playing a note on the keyboard This is not available in menu command dialog boxes By holding down the ENTER switch while you press a numeric key 0 9 you can select up to ten menu commands from the current page In Program and Combination modes you can hold down the ENTER switch and press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch to use the Auto Song Setup function This imports the current Program or Combination into Sequencer mode for quick and easy recording While a dialog box is displayed the ENTER switch corresponds to the OK button The EXIT switch corresponds to the Cancel button In Sequencer m
126. function in Program mode Sampling can be performed in a similar way in Combination and Sequencer modes as well as in Program mode 1 Press the MODE PROG switch to enter Program mode and select the program that you want to use for monitoring 2 Turn the KARMA function on KARMA ON OFF switch lit play the keyboard and verify that the drum phrase plays Turn LATCH on Press the LATCH switch to make it light Also adjust the tempo J as desired 3 Press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn off the KARMA function 4 Connect your guitar to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 jack Press the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch select the LINE position and set the LEVEL knob at about the center Sampling only an external guitar sound while listening r SP DIF OUT main IN AUDI0 INPUT MIC LINE 2 MAX MIN 4 r LEVEL 1 T LINE Effect unit 208 a n A amp If you connect a guitar with passive pickups i e a guitar that does not contain a preamp you will be unable to sample it at the correct level because of the impedance mismatch Such guitars should be routed through a preamp or an effect unit Guitar 5 Access the P0 Play Sampling Audio In page 6 If Use Global Setting is checked executing the menu command Auto Sampling Setup will edit the Input settings of Global mode If this is not checked the Input settings of each program will be edited Since th
127. function you ve selected in the CONTROL ASSIGN section Front and rear panels Front panel amp There will be a slight discrepancy between the value and the controller position when you move a controller near the minimum or maximum position of the slider For details please see Program mode 0 8 Control Surface on page 14 of the Parameter Guide Combination mode 0 8 Control Surface on page 132 of the Parameter Guide Sequencer mode 0 2 8 Control Surface on page 211 of the Parameter Guide Sampling mode 0 8 Control Surface on page 325 of the Parameter Guide RESET CONTROLS switch This switch resets the controllers of the control surface or returns the settings to stored values To reset a single control hold down RESET CONTROLS switch and then move a Control Surface slider press one of the control surface switches To reset an entire page of the control surface all at once including all sliders and switches hold down RESET CONTROLS switch and then touch any of the CONTROL ASSIGN switches such as REALTIME CONTROL or TONE ADJUST For details please see Resetting controller values on page 199 3 DRUM TRACK DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch This switch turns the Drum Track function on or off When the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch is off the LED will go dark pressing this switch will make the LED light or blink If the LED lights the Drum Track pattern will start simultaneous
128. gt Fipe Organ Mixtul Bess Gospel BRS I AG4G Jazz Organ Dist Fl 6104 Rock Pere drgan 22 ATZ M1 Pere Organ IH B12 Jazzy Med Orgar Ae I 43 Full Organ KARM CABS Ballade Organ I BS S Pere 1 2rd Orgall C 24 Positive Organ Church Positives I C 4 Smoke House Org Jazz Fere Organ I C ie Jump to Sub Cancel OK In the illustration above the Keyboard category is selected The menu on the left and right shows the Programs which belong to that category 2 Press the tabs in the left and right of the display to select a different category The name of the selected category will be displayed in full in the right hand corner 3 Press one of the program names in the center area to select a program The selected program will be highlighted and the program will change Alternatively you can use the A V switches to switch programs Play the keyboard or strike the pads to hear the program you selected 4 If you want to select from a sub category press the Jump to Sub button to access the Sub Category Prog Select menu Press the left tabs to select a sub category Note You can t select tabs for a sub category that is not assigned to any program Select a program as described in step 3 above Press the OK button to confirm your selection or press the Cancel button to discard it You will return to the main category 5 When you are satisfied with the selected program press the OK button
129. holding down the ENTER switch and pressing numeric key 1 7 If the display indicates OSC Solo pressing switch 3 will change the Solo On off setting of the drum track Using the Drum Track function in Combination mode Selecting a combination and turning the Drum Track function on off 1 Press the MODE COMBI switch to enter Combination mode and select the desired combination See Selecting Combinations on page 65 COMBI P Play _ Program T81 88 EEA Bank INT A gt 58 82122 vocal j 188 05 6012 Berimbau XY Motion T S I CHS6 Brazilian Pere Kit Category gt 03 ad gt 15 gt 15 gt 02 gt ii gt 15 gt 00 Strings Vocal Drums Drums Bell Mall Leadur Drums Keyboar Bank Program INT INT IHT IHT INT INT INT INT Dass A D055 2 tase 2 Bees 4 bess 4 bees 4 Aged gt Aged String Pe Alpine Wo Brazilian Hu Style Hard Glow Leading Insane F Stereo G Par EL EL EL EL E Gl EL E Lee Len Ls en De ae Jire 2 Press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch The ON OFF switch will light or blink depending on the setting Trigger Mode of the combination If lit The Drum Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting When you turn it off the pattern will stop This will occur if Trigger Mode is Start Immediately If blinking The Drum Track pattern will be ready to start It will start when you play the keyboard or when a MIDI note on is received This will occur if Trigger Mode is Wait K
130. host application amp You cannot run multiple instances of the M3 Editor and M3 Plug In Editor on the operating system This means that you can t use this editor to edit two or more M3 units simultaneously Installing the driver and the editor software in Windows XP Note In order to install or uninstall software in Windows XP you must have Administrator privileges Consult your system administrator for details Note Before you connect the M3 to your computer via USB you must use the M3 application installer to install KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools Note Before you connect the M3 with the optional EXB FW to your computer via FireWire you must use the M3 application installer to install the KORG FireWire Audio MIDI Driver Installing the M3 application The M3 application installer will install the KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools and the M3 Editor Plug In Editor automatically 1 Insert the included CD ROM into your CD ROM drive Normally the M3 Application Installer will start up automatically If your computer is set so the installer does not run automatically double click KorgSetup exe on the CD ROM 2 Follow the on screen instructions to install the desired software such as the KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools and M3 Editor Plug In Editor Note If you intend to use the M3 Editor Plug In Editor via the USB port you must install the KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools Note If you intend to use the M3 Edito
131. in audio devices such as DAT ACD uses 44 1 kHz 16 bit sampling which is a slightly lower sampling frequency How Sampling mode is organized This section describes how sampling on the M3 is organized See the diagram below Samples and Multisamples Samples The data that is recorded sampled into internal memory or loaded from a file is referred to as a sample Digital analog convertor ample 0000 3999 Digital signal Analog signal Multisample 000 999 WAVE File or sample file Samples consist of the actual waveform data and parameters that specify how the data will be played back such as Start Loop Start and End Address Samples can be used in multisamples and drum kits The M3 can hold a maximum of 4 000 samples in its internal memory The M3 can share a single waveform among multiple samples This allows you to create multiple samples with different playback addresses from the same waveform without wasting internal memory For example suppose that you have waveform data that records a voice saying One Two Three This single piece of waveform data could be shared by three samples with the playback of sample A producing One Two Three sample B producing One Two and sample C producing Two Three For details please see Copy on page 353 of the Parameter Guide Multisamples Multisamples lay out one or more Samples across the keyboard F
132. load source combination and use To Combination lower line to specify the destination combination For this example select U A000 You can press the popup button and select from a menu or use the BANK SELECT switches and numeric keys to make a selection 4 Press the OK button to execute loading the loaded combination will be assigned to USER A000 Loading songs for use in Sequencer mode SNG As an example here we will explain how to load a song We ll assume that this song uses edited programs and programs that use multisamples you sampled In such cases it is best to load all data 1 Perform steps 1 3 under Loading all Programs Combinations and Drum Kits on page 145 Select the SNG file containing the data you want to load it will be highlighted 2 Press the Load button Alternatively choose the menu command Load Selected A dialog box will appear Loading data Loading data from media Media Load Load NEWFILE SNG m Load NEWFILE PCG too m Load NEWFILE RSC too PCG Contents an Select SNG Allocation Q Append O Clear Select KSC Allocation Append O Clear Cancel OK Note The contents and settings of the dialog box will differ depending on the type of file that you are loading 3 Check the Load PCG too check box When you execute loading the PCG file will be loaded along with the SNG file Check the Load KSC too check
133. may form inside the product Continuing to use the prod uct in this state may cause malfunctions so you should wait several hours before using the product e Do not use or store this product in locations of extremely high humidity e Do not use or store this product in excessively dusty or smoky locations Regarding the display This M3 s display is a precision device created using extremely high technology and careful attention has been paid to its product quality Although you may notice some of the issues listed below please be aware that these are due to the characteristics of LCD displays and are not malfunctions e There may be pixels in the display that are always dark unlit or always bright lit e Depending on the displayed content the brightness of the display may appear uneven e Depending on the displayed content horizontal stripes of shading may be visible e Depending on the displayed content flickering or moire patterns may be visible Data handling Incorrect operation or malfunction may cause the contents of memory to be lost so we recommend that you save important data on a CD or other media Please be aware that Korg will accept no responsibility for any damages which may result from loss of data COPYRIGHT WARNING This professional device is intended only for use with works for which you yourself own the copyright for which you have received permission from the copyright holder to public
134. mode song in Standard MIDI File SMF format e WAV and AIF files A sample you recorded can be exported written as a WAVE file or AIFF file 139 140 Loading amp saving data and creating CDs MIDI data dump You can transmit the M3 s data to an external MIDI data filer device and save the data on that external device The following types of data can be transmitted as a MIDI data dump and saved on an external data filer or other device e Programs combinations drum kits and global settings e Song and cue list e User drum kit patterns e RADIAS formant motions if the optional EXB RADIAS is installed For details please see Dump on page 400 of the Parameter Guide Writing to internal memory Writing a Program or Combination The Program and Combination settings you ve edited in the various editing pages can be saved to internal memory This action is referred to as writing a program or writing a Combination If you want your edited data to be preserved after the power is turned off you must write it There are two ways to write a Program or Combination amp Before you write data into memory you must turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode See Memory protect on page 142 amp Acombination does not contain the actual program data for each timbre but simply remembers the number of the program used by each timbre If you edit a program that is us
135. of the setting data and musical data from the specified song to the currently selected song For details please see Copy From Song on page 280 of the Parameter Guide FF REW Speed This allows you to set the speed at which fast forward or rewind will occur when you press the FF switch or REW switch For details please see FF REW Speed on page 281 of the Parameter Guide GM Initialize This command transmits a GM System On message to the Sequencer mode resetting all MIDI tracks to the GM settings For details please see GM Initialize on page 282 of the Parameter Guide Set Song Length This command changes the length of the specified song When it is executed the length of the master track will change and the number of measures played will change For details please see Set Song Length on page 296 of the Parameter Guide Tracks Step Recording It allows you to specify the length and velocity of each note numerically and to input MIDI data the pitches from the keyboard You can use the Rest button and Tie button to enter a rest or tie For details please see Step Recording on page 288 of the Parameter Guide Event Edit Here you can edit individual events of MIDI data For details see Event Edit on page 289 of the Parameter Guide Erase Track This command erases the data from the specified track It is not possible to erase the master track by itself For details please see Erase
136. on their Mixer Type setting The A B setting merges two AMS sources into one This can be handy when you need to add one more modulation source to a parameter but you ve already used up all of the available AMS slots For instance let s say that you re using an LFO to modulate Resonance and then you decide that it would be interesting to scale that parameter with an EG as well Resonance has only a single AMS input but you can easily merge the LFO and the EG together using the A B AMS Mixer 1 Assign the LFO to AMS A 2 Assign the EG to AMS B 3 Assign the AMS Mixer as the Filter Resonance AMS AMS Mixer A B example AMS A LFO AAA gt VAVVAVVVVVVVV VVA AMS B EG A B Output E mw PROG P6 AMS C KTrk MAMS Mixer 1 em AMS AHi 7 Mier Type s e Amt A T In AMSA Fol AMSB Filter EG OSC1 AMS Mix1 Amount 99 Amount 99 memanen Lerni etie Ap memanen etek Je Teke J Scaling one AMS source with another When the Mixer Type is set to Amt A x B the AMS mixer uses the AMS B input to scale the amount of AMS A For instance you can control the amount LFO1 with the Filter EG or control the amount of the Pitch EG with the ribbon AMS Mixer Amt AxB example AMS B EG Fe Amt AxB Output WWW 55 56 Playing and editing Programs Smoothing The Smoothing Mixer Type smooths out the AMS input creating more gentle transitions between values You have separate control o
137. on page 12 for details The notes and or chords assigned to the pads are stored with each Program Combination and Song There are also Global settings for use when the Control Surface is set to EXTERNAL for easy control of external sound modules or plug ins PAD MODE switch The PAD MODE switch switches the pads between being velocity sensitive so that the loudness varies depending on how hard you hit the pad and playing a single fixed velocity for each note handy if you want 11 12 Introduction to the M3 the same results every time regardless of how hard you play CHORD ASSIGN switch Use this switch to assign single notes or chord to the pads See Assigning notes and chords to pads on page 44 6 TouchView display This is a touch panel featuring the TouchView system You can select pages tabs and parameters by pressing objects shown in the display and then specify their value in the display or by using the VALUE controllers This allows quick and intuitive editing This display also functions as an X Y controller You can assign oscillator or timbre track volume program parameters or effect parameters to the X axis and Y axis and control them in realtime When you do so the color of the display will change in response to the movement of your finger You can also use X Y Motion to capture the movement of your finger and use this captured motion to control parameters 7 Contrast knob This a
138. or Sub Category popup button and make your selection from the menu 5 If you want to change the save location bank and program number press the To Program popup button select the save location from the menu and press the OK button 6 Under To at the bottom of the dialog press the popup button next to Program to bring up the save location dialog 7 Select a location to save the edited Program You can write to any location in banks INT A E and USER A G To avoid overwriting the factory sounds it s safer to use a slot in one of the empty User banks amp Important EDS Programs can only be written to EDS Banks and RADIAS Programs can only be written to RADIAS Banks For more information on the default Bank types and on how to change them please see Bank Bank Select on page 4 of the Parameter Guide 8 After selecting the location press OK 9 Press OK again to start the write process 10 If you re sure you want to write to this location press OK again After that you re done For details please see Writing a Program or Combination on page 140 Saving edits to GM Programs You can edit GM Programs but you must then save them to a Bank other than INT G the GM Programs themselves cannot be over written Shortcut SEQUENCER REC WRITE You can also use the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch to quickly update the current Program using the existing name bank number and category
139. pad to which you d like to assign the notes After pressing the pad you re done Editing notes and velocities using the display You can edit the recorded notes and velocities using the display If you like you can also enter new notes this way For details please see 1 7 Pads 1 4 Setup 1 8 Pads 5 8 Setup on page 36 of the Parameter Guide Copying and merging pads Copying one pad to another or merging two or more pads together is just like assigning notes from the keyboard As with assigning notes to the keyboard you can either play the pads first or press CHORD ASSIGN first In the interest of saving space and time only the first method is described below Copying notes from one pad to another To copy the note assignments from one pad to another 1 Press and release the pad whose notes you want to copy 2 Press the CHORD ASSIGN switch 3 Press the pad to which you d like to copy the notes The new pad will now play the same notes as the original pad Merging two or more pads together You can merge the assignments from two or more pads together as long as the total number of notes is 8 or fewer To do so 1 Press all of the pads that you d like to merge and then release them All of the pads must be held down at the same time 2 Press the CHORD ASSIGN switch 3 Press the pad to which you d like to copy the notes Pads 1 8 8 ppgpHaggpGA CHORD ASSIGN
140. page let you see these settings in greater detail In the KARMA GE page you can select the GE Generated Effect used by a KARMA module and view settings such as the time signature of the patterns that are generated Performing with the Drum Track function The Drum Track function gives you an easy way to play a wide variety of Drum Track patterns using the M3 s high quality drum programs Playing a Program or Combination along with Drum Track patterns is a convenient way to come up with phrases or work out the structure of your song 1 Select Combination mode or Program mode For this example press the MODE PROG switch to select Program mode and access the Prog P0 Play Main page If another page is displayed you ll need to press the EXIT switch up to three times PROG P Play Main 2 Bank INT A gt i Hotiongunth 3 120 00 001 BPM Dense sollonallons CD SW Swi Mod cCCHSD C SF JS Y Lock Patt i Bank No s Pae O Freset gt P422 Drum n Bass 11 D n B Drum e W Program gt l 5054 Electro Rock Kit Program 2 Press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch The ON OFF switch will be lit or blinking This will depend on the setting of the program If it s lit the Drum Track pattern will begin Press the ON OFF switch once again to stop If it s blinking the Drum Track pattern will be waiting to begin It will start when you play the keyboard or when a MIDI note on is received
141. performed in the following pages e Page Prog PO 9 menu command Write Program Program ee Combi PO 9 menu command Write Combination we Combination song Seq PO 5 menu command Rename Song Song Seq P10 Pattern Name Seq P11 menu command Cue List Sampling PO 4 menu command Sampling PO 4 menu command Sample Rename Sample Program category Global P4 Program Category sub category Combination category Global P4 Combination Category sub category KARMA GE CARTO Global P4 GE Category sub category Global P5 menu command Rename Drum Kit Drum Kit Media Save Save All Save Audio CD Track List Media Utility menu command Rename Prog Combi Seq Sampling PO menu command Select Directory Media Edit WAVE menu command WAE Pafameter Save WAVE Parameter Prog Combi Seq Sampling P8 9 Puce ESE menu command Write FX Preset 1 In the pages listed above or after selecting a menu command in these pages press the text edit button T to access the text edit dialog box Character Set Selects Text Cursor the type of character ie E e A AA SALI a Switches Space Delete between P uppercase and lowercase characters Cursor buttons Delete button Move the cursor Deletes the Cancel button OK button to left or right character to the If you are satisfied with left of the cursor the text that you input press the OK button If you Space button Clear button wish to discard your input
142. pianos strings etc You ll see the results of this setting on the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Basic page If the Oscillator Mode is set to Single or Double you can select up to four Multisamples for each Oscillator with velocity switches or crossfades If the Oscillator Mode is set to Drums you ll be able to select a single Drum Kit There are still four levels of velocity switches and layers but these are within the Drum Kit itself and not stored or edited in the Program 135 136 Settings for the entire M3 Global mode Editing Drum Kits Before you start editing Drum Program selecting Drum Kits are edited in Global mode While you re in Global mode you ll play the kit that you re editing as if you were playing it from within the Program Combination or Song which was selected before you entered Global mode So before you enter Global mode it s best to select a Program which is already set up for drums with the appropriate EG settings effects and so on Just use the Program Category select popup and choose a drum Program You ll probably want to start from Program mode press the Category popup button to access the Category Program Select menu and choose a drum kit program from the Drums category OSC1 Basic Octave setting In order for the note mappings to match the keyboard the Oscillator s Octave setting needs to be 0 8 All Drum Kit Programs should have this setting already
143. pre count and then recording will begin Play the keyboard and move controllers such as the joystick to record your performance z o WJ w gt o Vv 7a 86 Creating songs Sequencer mode 5 When you finish playing press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Recording will end and the location will return to the point at which you begin recording If you press the PAUSE switch instead of the SEQUENCER START STOP switch recording will pause When you press the PAUSE switch once again recording will resume When you are finished press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to stop recording Overdub With this method the newly recorded musical data is added to the existing data When you perform overdub recording on a previously recorded track the newly recorded data will be added to the previously recorded data It is best to select this mode if you will be recording additional control data recording a drum pattern or recording the tempo in the master track With this mode data can be added without erasing the existing performance data 1 Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Setup to Overdub MiRecording 1 a C Overwrite C Auto Punch In Overdub Q Loop All Tracks Q Manual Punch In Multi REC 3 For the rest of the procedure please see steps 3 5 of Overwrite Manual punch in Whi
144. press the Insert button amp WAVE files at a sampling frequency of 48 kHz will be converted to 44 1 kHz when they are written to an audio CD when you execute Write to CD To add the file press the Insert button You can continue adding files until you press the Exit button The files will be added to the track list in the order in which you selected them If you want to add all the WAVE files in the directory press the Insert All button When you have finished adding files to the list press the Exit button to close the dialog box Notice that the WAVE files have been added to the track list Make Audio CO Track eT Total 46 19 Free Track WAVE File Size Time ae Al ME W FILE WA 4568Hz BaH a2 NEWSOGGE WAY 42000Hz BELG BZ NEW5001 wAY 45000Hz AAMI z Clear Sampling START plays selected file Insert Cut Select ity Make Load Utility dior D Media If you select a WAVE file in this page whose sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz you can also use the Play button to play the sample To add other WAVE files to the track list press the Insert button once again If you want to add another track select the WAVE file that follows the track you want to add If you want to add the track to the end of the track list select End Then press the Insert button To delete a WAVE file from the track list select the WAVE file that yo
145. previous edits by pressing the COMPARE switch again In Sequencer mode you can use the COMPARE switch to make before and after comparisons immediately after using realtime recording or step recording to record a song or after performing a track edit operation For example this can be used effectively when realtime recording a track for a song 1 Realtime record a MIDI track Take 1 2 Once again realtime record on the same track Take 2 3 Press the COMPARE switch The LED will light and take 1 will be recalled 4 Press the COMPARE switch once again The LED will go dark and take 2 will be recalled 5 If at step 3 you once again realtime record on the same track take 3 the object of the Compare function will now be take 1 If at step 4 you once again realtime record on the same track take 3 the object of the Compare function will be take 2 In this way the Compare function lets you recall the previous recording or the previous state of event editing amp The Compare function does not work in Global mode with the exception of Sampling Media editing 4 Selecting and executing a menu commands i Menu ED command button Write Combination Fanel S Solo Mode On Exclusive Solo Menu button Copy trom Program Copy a Motion Copy Tone Adjust Reset Tone Adjust The utility functions provide commands that are specific to each page such Write save or Copy The availab
146. rap of rz O Ove PF gt GO8 No Effect cag off O gt Ye ae 3 rsa Pe HAG Mo Effect ceed off 4 ot ERES TO EAL gt GOGNo Effect a oF 2 Ov N gt vee Ot gt GOGNo Effect Re val oF Pere tes J teat Jape Taras Tapa J irs Jee 2 Select an insert effect in IFX1 5 and edit the settings 3 Access the IFX1 5 pages to edit the individual effect parameters These settings can be made in the same way as in Program Effects settings on page 155 Master effects and Total effect These settings can be made in the same way as in Program Effects settings on page 155 Routing effect settings Effect settings for the audio inputs Effect settings for the audio inputs You can use effects on the audio input when in Program Combination and Sequencer modes just as you can in Sampling mode You can apply insert effects master effects and the total effect while sampling or you can use the M3 as a four in AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF L R six out effect processor You can also use the M3 as a vocoder effect 156 Vocoder that uses an external mic input to control the internal sounds For examples of this see page 444 and 156 Vocoder on page 535 of the Parameter Guide Make these settings in the Global mode PO Basic Setup Audio page The Global mode settings will apply in Program Combination and Sequencer modes if Use Global Setting is checked For example if you wa
147. re not recording are indicated as Play or Mute 8 Press the LOCATE switch to set the location to 001 01 000 9 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch and then press a key that plays an RPPR pattern If during the pre count before recording you press a key that s assigned to an RPPR pattern the pattern will begin playing and being recorded the moment that recording begins Record the RPPR pattern playback and keyboard performance Recording an RPPR performance amp When recording the playback of patterns triggered by RPPR the timing of the recorded events may be slightly skewed If this occurs try setting REC Resolution to a setting other than Hi 10 When you are finished performing press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Recording will end and the sequencer will return to the location at which recording began If you made a mistake during your performance or would like to re record you can use the Compare function press the COMPARE switch to re record as many times as you wish 11 If you want to record other tracks un check the Multi REC See step 5 or RPPR See step 4 check boxes as necessaty 99 Vv WJ w gt oa Vv 7a 100 Creating songs Sequencer mode Sampling in Sequencer mode Sampling is still available in Sequencer mode which can be very convenient The main areas of functionality are summarized below For details please see Sampling in Program Combina
148. scale saved with its individual Program check the track s Use Program s Scale check box Tracks that are not checked will use the scale specified by Scale Type 6 Set Type to select the scale for the currently selected song SEQ P3 Track Param Other T1 08 MEA 001 01 000 reter 474 J 12000 Mau j S000 NEW SONG E Tracki MIDI TRACK A1 Reso E Hi TA1 I AGaG Steren Grand 4 way Chal RPPRNofssisn Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar KARMA Track Off Control Nem E gt nrm E gt Nem gt nem nem E gt Nem E gt nrm E gt Hemi Use Program s Scale Se e o o o o oO 0 Scale Bid C Random a Setting Category Names Setting Category Names for Programs Combinations and KARMA GE The Category Name pages let you assign names to the Program Combination and KARMA categories and sub categories See Global P4 Category on page 390 of the Parameter Guide Using Drum Kits Drum Kit Overview Using Drum Kits Drum Kit Overview What s a Drum Kit A drum kit is a collection of dr umsamples assigned to each key Drum kits have the following features e A different sound will play for each note e A drumsample one drum instrument is assigned to each key Drum samples are stored in the Rom bank Ram bank or in an EX bank e Samples you recorded on the M3 or loaded in Media mode can be selected from the RAM bank e On each note yo
149. settings from Programs or Combinations including effects KARMA settings Tone Adjust and so on See page 64 and page 74 2 When assigning a program you can use Track Select to select the track for which you are making assignments and try playing the sound 3 Set the pan and volume of each MIDI track Press the Mixer 1 8 tab or the Mixer 9 16 tab to access the Mixer T01 08 page Mixer T09 16 page SEQ P 1 Play REC Mixer 161 43 EEZ 001 61 006 Meter 474 J 20 00 man 3000 NEW SONG Tracki MIDI TRACK A1 Te1 I AGG8 Stereo Grand 4 Way Reso Hi C RFPR Ch 1 FBPPR Hofssign Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar keyboar Fan Ooo 909000 2 Mib 6 Ceb4 Ched Chb4 Cbd Chb4 Chb4 CHb4 Yolume iz Gaze eaa Gaze G22 Gzr Gz Ss ise is Cs Pee ed oe e Pan sets the pan of each track and Volume sets the volume of each track 4 Specify the tone generator and MIDI channel that will be played by each MIDI track Press the PAGE SELECT switch to access Seq Page Select and press P3 Track Param The P3 Track Param page will appear Press the MIDI 1 8 tab or the MIDI 9 16 tab to access the MIDI T01 08 page MIDI T09 16 page SEQ P3 Track Param RCo __ 661 61 Q 6Q eter 4 4 jJ i20 00 Manu 5000 NEW SONG Trakai MIDI TRACK 1 T81 A000 Steren Grand 4 W ay Ch al RPFPR MoAssian Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar ETHIE
150. slider all the way up For the minimum value move the slider all the way down Slider scaling 99 Parameter Value As Programmed 00 0 64 127 CC Value 4 You can use switches 1 8 to turn insert effects 1 5 master effects 1 2 and the total effect on off For example 1 Select Program INT A120 Smooth Operators This is an electric piano sound let s see what we can do to make it sound a bit different 2 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN REALTIME CONTROL switch the LED will light 3 While you perform slowly raise slider 1 filter frequency to about three quarters of its full range Notice how the piano becomes a sort of synth sweep 4 Next raise slider 2 filter resonance to about three quarters as well 5 Leaving slider 2 at that position try raising and lowering slider 1 With the resonance increased it now sounds like you re playing through a wah pedal Reset Next let s say that you decide that s not really what you wanted so we ll set the sliders back to their default values Although you could return the slider to its middle position and then make fine adjustments to set it precisely to the center there is an easier way 1 Hold the RESET CONTROLS switch 2 While holding RESET CONTROLS switch move first slider 1 and then slider 2 As you move the sliders their values will be reset to the default center positions 3 Release the RESET CONTROLS switch Now you re back t
151. sound from the oscillators OSC 1 amp 2 Then the master effects are used to create overall ambience such as reverb and use the total effect to make final adjustments All of these settings can be made independently for each program Combination and Sequencer modes In Combination and Sequencer modes you can use the track EQ and insert effects to process the program sound of each timbre track Then you can use the master effects to create overall ambience and use the total effect to make final adjustments In Combination mode you can make these settings for each combination and in Sequencer mode you can make them for each song In Sequencer mode you can switch between effects or modify the effect parameters and record these changes so that effects will switch automatically or effect parameters will be modified automatically as the song plays back Sampling mode In Sampling mode external audio sources from AUDIO INPUT 1 2 and S P DIF IN jacks by insert Program mode Oscillator2 Amplifier2 Insert Effect 1 5 Combination and Sequencer modes Timbre 1 MIDI Track 1 Timbre 16 MIDI Track 16 Sampling mode AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN L R gt Option FireWire L R Audio Input AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN L R Option FireWire L R effects master effects and total effect and then sampled Use the P0 Recording Audio In Setup page to make audio input settings for Sampling mo
152. switch lets you revert an individual slider or switch to its saved setting For details please see Resetting controller values on page 199 49 50 Playing and editing Programs Saving your edits Once you ve tweaked the sound to perfection you ll want to save your work To save your edits 1 Select the Write Program command from the menu at the menu right hand corner of the display You can also call up this menu command by holding ENTER and pressing 0 on the numeric keypad This brings up a dialog box which allows you to save the Program Optionally you can also select a new location change the Program s name and assign it to a sound category such as keyboard guitar etc Write Program ABH 1 T BPM Dense Motionations Category gt 12 Motion Synth Sub Category 1 Rhythmic To Prograrn gt EG OAE a Oe La De Cancel OK 2 If desired you may save just the edited content without changing the program name or the location in which the program is saved the bank and program number Proceed to step 6 3 If you want to change the program name press the T button to access the text edit dialog box You can give the Program a descriptive name using the text edit dialog box After entering the name press OK The text edit window will disappear returning you to the main Write dialog 4 If you want to change the category or sub category press the Category
153. switch on the control surface To reset a single slider or switch 1 Hold down the RESET CONTROLS switch and operate the slider 1 8 or switch 1 8 that you want to reset The slider or switch will be reset to the value stored in the Program 2 When you re done release the RESET CONTROLS switch To reset a group of controls at once e Hold down the RESET CONTROLS switch While holding down RESET CONTROLS touch any of the CONTROL ASSIGN switches such as MIXER KARMA All of the sliders and switches in the control surface will be reset to the values stored in the Program e To reset the sliders and switches for each KARMA module hold down the RESET CONTROLS switch and press the KARMA MODULE CONTROL switch e To reset the each KARMA scene hold down the RESET CONTROLS switch and press the SCENE 1 5 4 8 switch whose LED is blinking X Y controller The X Y controller generates control changes when you touch the display and move your finger X Y mode or records these movements as an X Y motion letting you control the OSC1 and OSC2 volume balance or modify the program or effect In Combination mode and Sequencer mode you can adjust the volume balance between the Programs used within the Combination or Song Playing Programs Using Controllers Using the display to control the X Y mode 1 Press the X Y MODE switch When you turn on the X Y MODE switch the switch LED will light and the display will change
154. tell various things about the selections just from the way they appear in the menu Parameters which affect only OSC1 or OSC2 are prefixed with OSC1 and OSC2 respectively Parameters which affect both Oscillators but which are specific to EDS Programs are prefixed with OSC1 amp 2 The other group of parameters at the beginning of the list are Common That is you can use them with most RADIAS Programs as well as EDS Programs Note You can use RADIAS Programs only if the optional EXB RADIAS is installed Parameters can only be assigned to one Tone Adjust control at a time If a parameter is already assigned it s grayed out 3 Select a parameter from the menu The parameter is now assigned to the control To close the list without making any changes press a location in the display outside the popup window or press the EXIT switch Using COMPARE When you re in the process of editing a sound pressing the COMPARE switch will recall the saved version of the sound as it was before you started editing 1 While editing press the COMPARE switch the LED will light The saved sound from before you began editing will be recalled 2 Pressing COMPARE again returns you to the version you are editing and the LED will go out again Note If you edit while the COMPARE LED is lit the switch will again go dark and your previous edits will be lost Resetting individual controls The RESET CONTROLS
155. the M3 s KARMA function in Program mode together with the performance of a guitar connected to the AUDIO INPUT jack Sampling can be performed in a similar way in Combination and Sequencer modes as well as in Program mode 1 Press the MODE PROG switch to enter Program mode and select the drum program that you want to resample Turn the KARMA function on KARMA ON OFF switch lit play the keyboard and verify that the drum phrase plays Turn LATCH on Press the LATCH switch to make it light Also adjust the tempo J as desired 3 Press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn off the KARMA function 4 Connect your guitar to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 jack Refer to step 4 of the procedure above See page 123 N 5 Access the P0 Play Sampling Audio In page 6 Uncheck Use Global Setting 7 In this example we ll make settings manually without using Auto Sampling Setup Since this sampling example is a combination of the two preceding examples we ll need to make several changes to the settings created by Auto Sampling Setup Make the following settings Audio Input Use Global Setting Off INPUT1 Bus Select L R Pan as desired Level 127 AUX Bus Off The input from AUDIO INPUT 1 will be sent to the L R bus RECORDING LEVEL Recording Level 0 0 This is the default setting for resampling Sampling Setup Source Bus L R The sound sent to L R bus will be sampled Trigge
156. the Sampling Audio In page to set up the volume pan bus routing and send levels for the inputs as desired For details please see Bus Select on page 10 and page 377 of the Parameter Guide Note Guitars with active pickups can be connected directly to any of the inputs Guitars with passive pickups i e guitars that do not have an internal preamp can be used with inputs 1 and 2 but the impedance mismatch will cause both a change in tone and a reduction in volume For best results route such guitars through a pre amp or effects unit before connecting them Digital audio output S P DIF OUT MAIN The same signal as the M3 s AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks can be digitally output to an audio system mixer or MTR or other device that can accept a sampling rate of 48 kHz 1 Use an optical cable to connect the S P DIF OUT MAIN jack to the external optical digital input jack of your device This will output the same audio signal as the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks Note You can t use the VOLUME MAIN slider to adjust the volume of the digital output 2 Make the appropriate System Clock setting amp When two or more digital audio devices are connected all of them must be synchronized to a single clock one device must be the master and the other devices must be slaves For example if you ve connected two M3 units via their S P DIF jacks IN and OUT you should set System C
157. the currently running Drum Track pattern In the P7 2 KARMA2 Trigger A B C D page turn Quantize Trigger on selected COMBI P 2 KARMAZ Module Parameter Trigger Contro m Guantize Trigger Delay Delay Start gt orf Hote Trigger Latch gt Any gt n Envelope Trigger Latch 1 any Oorr 2 any amp or 3 an 2 amp ort Trigger 4 i _ Update On Release Module Trigger Trigger By Module Off Cutoff Module D 0O 0O 0O SS CS a a Na a ah es ecw of ah bec oo Specifying whether the drum track will oper ate for each KARMA scene Just as you can in Program mode you can specify whether the drum track will operate for each KARMA scene in Combination mode and Sequencer mode These settings are made by the respective P7 1 KARMAT Scene Matrix page DT Run parameter Refer to the procedure for Program mode see page 192 Synchronizing the Drum Track function The Trigger Sync parameter The trigger timing of a drum track will depend on the setting of its Trigger Sync parameter On checked The trigger timing will be quantized to the nearest beat relative to the base tempo Off unchecked If Trigger Mode is Start Immediately triggering will occur at the moment you press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch If this is set to Wait KBD Trig triggering will occur at the moment you play the keyboard Synchronizing the drum track with the KAR MA fun
158. the display below 0 0 to an appropriate level 13 When you have finished making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC switch 14 Press the SAMPLING REC switch and then the SAMPLING START STOP switch to enter recording standby mode Press the LOCATE switch to reset the song playback location to the beginning of the song and press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to play back Begin playing at the point where you want to record Sampling will begin when the Threshold Level volume is exceeded 15 At the point where you want to stop sampling press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Song playback and sampling will end Sampling will also stop if the specified Sample Time is reached 16 Press the LOCATE switch to return to the beginning of the song and press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Notice that the sampled audio is played back along with the song Sampling in Program Combination and Sequencer modes Resampling a song to create a WAVE file For details on how the Compare function works for In Track Sampling please see In Track Sampling on page 126 Resampling a song to create a WAVE file Here we ll explain the procedure for resampling a song to create a stereo two channel WAVE file on a USB storage device such as a commercially available hard disk You can record a completed Song to a stereo WAVE file and then burn that WAVE file to an audio CD using the USB CD R RW drive commercially available For d
159. the sixteen timbres or MIDI tracks INPUTS The control surface will control the volume play mute and solo of the analog audio input and the S P DIF audio input and the FireWire L R audio input if the optional EXB FW is installed 13 12 14 15 16 The LEDs at the right of this switch indicate whether you ve selected timbres or tracks 1 8 or 9 16 or INPUTS Press the MIXER switch to change the selection REALTIME CONTROL switch Switches 1 8 will turn the effects on off Sliders 1 8 will modify the sound or effects EXTERNAL EXTERNAL lets you use the control surface to transmit MIDI messages to external MIDI devices TONE ADJUST TONE ADJUST gives you hands on access to sound editing using the sliders 1 8 and switches 1 8 In Combination and Sequencer modes it also lets you edit Programs within the context of the Combination or Song without making any changes to the original Program data KARMA switch Sliders 1 8 and switches 1 8 will control the KARMA function Alternatively they will switch between KARMA SCENES 1 4 and 5 8 see page 11 MIX PLAY MUTE SOLO IFX 1 5 MFX1 2 TFX SWITCHES 1 8 These switches will control the function you ve selected in the CONTROL ASSIGN section Note Use the menu command Panel SW Solo Mode On to switch these between the PLAY MUTE function and SOLO On Off function MIX VOLUMES CUTOFF EG RELEASE USER1 4 SLIDERS 1 9 8 16 These sliders will control the
160. the type of effect or on the parameter settings Please adjust the input level output level and effect parameters You need to be particularly careful when using a high gain effect After a sample edit has been executed or after a stereo sample has been recorded a small noise may be heard This has no effect on the audio data that was edited or sampled When using the MIDI Tempo Sync function to control the delay time of an effect noise may occur in the delay sound This noise is due to discontinuities in the delay sound and is not a malfunction Some effects such as 017 Stereo Analog Record generate noise intentionally It is also possible to create oscillation using a filter with resonance These are not malfunctions Note that if you use the following effects with the routing described below a feedback loop will be created possibly producing a loud noise Please use caution If the signal from an oscillator or timbre track output or the signal after an insert effect is sent to the FX Control bus and that signal is output directly with this output sent to the FX Control bus a loud noise may be output It is also possible that a DC component will be output at the maximum level producing silence e When using the 002 Stereo Limiter or 005 Stereo Gate and the Envelope Source of these effects is set as either FX Control 1 or FX Control 2 and Trigger Monitor is On e When using 156 Vocoder with the Modulator S
161. this either to MN Mono or LGT Legato Conversely set this to Poly if you wish to force a monophonic program to play polyphonically For details please see Force OSC Mode on page 152 of the Parameter Guide OSC Select Normally this should be set to BTH Both If the timbre is using a Program whose Oscillator Mode is Double and you want only OSC1 or OSC2 not both to sound set this to OSC1 only OSC1 will sound or OSC2 only OSC2 will sound Portamento Normally this should be set to PRG If the Program uses portamento but you d like to disable this for the current Combination set this parameter to Off Conversely if you want to force the portamento to be on or just to change the portamento time set this to a value of 001 127 The portamento will change to use the newly specified time Timbre Parameters Pitch COMB P3 Timbre Param Pitch T81 838 7 j F a INT amp AAA Towards The Sun J 695 50 TO1 I BSG8 Stereo Grand 3 Wway Ch Gch keyboar Strings Motions Drums Orums Orums Orums Drums Transpose paa eae oo paa poa on pae Detune Use BPH Adjust in Menu 8608 8888 8888 8688 8608 8888 8888 8688 Bend Range PRG 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 k 1 a J 9 16 J ra J aies Transpose Detune BPM Adjust These parameters adjust the pitch of the timbre
162. this new directory Cautions when saving If an identically named file exists on the me dia If a file with the same name already exists on the media you will be asked whether you want to overwrite If you wish to overwrite press the OK button If you wish to save without overwriting press the Cancel button re do the operation from step 6 and rename the data in step 7 before saving it Please note when saving e When using Save All Save PCG amp SNG and Save PCG to save combinations you should also remember to save the programs used by each timbre or the drum kits and RADIAS formant motions used by the programs at the same time Similarly when saving programs you should also remember to save the drum kits user Drum Track patterns and RADIAS formant motions used by the programs e If your programs or drum kits use multisamples and samples that were created in on M3 we recommend that you use Save All to save the data When you use Save PCG or Save Sampling Data to individually save a program or drum kit or a multi sample or sample that you created we recommend that you save them under the same filename in the same directory When you use Load PCG to load a PCG file the identically named KSC file will also be loaded so that the correct multisamples samples will correspond automatically Time required when saving data e The length of time required will depend on the amount of data Using the M3 as
163. to choose a scene you can instantly recall settings for the eight sliders and eight switches Even if you switch scenes the changes you make using KARMA sliders 1 8 and KARMA switches 1 8 are remembered until you select another combination When you write a combination your slider and switch settings are saved in the respective scene 1 8 Name display for the KARMA sliders 1 8 and KAR MA switches 1 8 Just as in the equivalent page of Program mode the Combi P0 Play KARMA RTC page displays the sliders and switches assigned to the combination and their names In the combination the name shown in square brackets is the category of the program selected for the Performing with KARMA Performing with the KARMA function in Combination mode timbre being controlled by the KARMA sliders 1 8 and KARMA switches This tells you the timbre whose phrase is being controlled by the KARMA sliders 1 8 and KARMA switches If multiple timbres are being controlled simultaneously this will indicate MULTI Module amp GE Name Control Timbre Category Name Selected Switch Slider Realtime Control name E Master Bass Sy Velocity Accents Onir_3 Bar 58 Cid dae Scene Chord Name Module ID Parameter Value Parameter No KARMA module Run and Solo settings In Combination mode up to four KARMA modules can be operating simultaneously If the KARMA function is off all KARMA modules will be stopped If the KARMA function i
164. track You can also edit the mixer parameters directly from the Control Surface eight Tracks at a time 1 Press the MIXER switch under CONTROL ASSIGN so that the T1 8 LED lights up The switch has two LEDs one for T1 8 T9 16 and INPUT These correspond to Tracks 1 8 Tracks 9 16 and the audio inputs Control Assign Switches 1 8 m Controls Sliders 1 8 LOZ OOOO PL4 MUTE SOLO Mure soo _ EE A a a a PPE TP SSON T1 8 MIX CO MIXVOLUMESC S s S SSCSC o ma E USER T9 16 FU o REALTIME CONTROL 1 9 2 10 3 11 412 5 13 6 14 715 8 16 EXTERNAL TONE ADJUST EiiliiHiIliliIiE NEIIIIHIIIIM A gt eHIilliIiIHIlIlIIM akilli iHilliiE gt oklililiiHilliiE NETLTLPIGTILIG omILIITIGTITIG oHILITITIiTItidf DRUM 0 WU ee i ee TRACK KARMA LINKED MODULE ON OFF O ON OFF Laren MODULE SCENES O O1 4 5 8 lt PRESS KARMA A 0 O20720 2 Access the Seq P0 2 Play REC Control Surface page This page displays and reflects the control surface data It s a convenient place to adjust the sound since you can view the actual parameter assignments and the exact data values Note You can use the Control Surface for control regardless of the page that is shown in the display 3 Use sliders 1 8 to adjust the volumes of Tracks 1 8 respectively 4 While the display shows Track Play Mute swit
165. type of problem may occur if a data writing operation to internal memory was not completed correctly for example if the power of the M3 was turned off while a program or other data was being written If this occurs use the following procedure to initialize the M3 s internal memory 1 Turn off the power 2 While holding down the RESET CONTROLS switch and the 1 and 2 switches located beside it turn on the power of the M3 The M3 will be initialized and data will be written into internal memory While the data is being writ ten the display will indicate Now writing into internal memory After initialization all user data will be empty and you will need to re load the preload data Execute the Global mode menu command Load Preload Demo Data to load the data gt p 201 Can t operate the display correctly On the Global P0 Basic Setup page use the Touch Panel Calibration menu command to adjust the touch panel response PG p 399 Note If you are unable to select commands from the menu do the following 1 Press the GLOBAL switch 2 Press the EXIT switch twice 3 Hold down the ENTER switch and press 4 on the numeric keypad The Touch Panel Calibration page will appear Follow the on screen instructions to re calibrate the touch panel Can t switch modes or pages If you re doing any of the following you may not be able to change modes or switch to a different page e Recording or playing back
166. used a wild card to specify the copy file name the specified file was not found Alternatively the length of the copy source path name exceeded 76 characters Meaning In Media mode when you used the Open button to open a directory the path length including the selected directory name exceeded 76 characters Meaning When executing Insert in the Media mode Make Audio CD page you attempted to use the Insert All button to add a WAVE file but no WAVE file with a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz exists in the selected directory e Check the file or directory Meaning In Media mode when loading a KCD file a WAVE file listed in the Audio Track List could not be found e The file whose Size is not shown in the Media mode Make Audio CD page is the one that could not be found Check the file or directory or delete it from the Audio Track List Front sample data used in rear sample Can t overwrite Meaning When executing Link in the Sampling mode Sample Edit page the sample data of the front sample is also being used by the rear sample and therefore cannot be overwritten To solve this problem e Instead of using Overwrite specify a different sample as the save destination I IIlegal Index Illegal file description Meaning The filename that you specified when saving a file or creating a directory contained invalid characters To solve this problem e Change the filename you are specifying Filenames not permitted
167. ve assigned these parameters to KARMA CONTROLS you ll be able to control them in realtime while you perform see Control Surface sliders amp switches on page 42 and 7 2 2b Perf RTP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Perf Real Time Parameters on page 92 of the Parameter Guide 1 Access the Prog P7 2 KARMA2 Perf RTP page PROG P 2 KARMA2 Perf RTP E 3 100 5F Perf RTP 1 2 Select 1 2 3 4 5 6 aoe 1 Group gt Hix Faram gt Transpose Min 3 BB24 Max 8080 alue 6012 m A Assign Polarity F 2 Group oO off Min o808 Max 8080 Value 8080 L fy Assign fee Polarity fe Use Perf RTP Select to switch the performance realtime parameter display mae 3 4 5 6 j 7 38 As an example let s use a KARMA slider to control the KARMA module parameter Transpose 2 Use Group and Parameter to select the parameter you want to control For this example set Group Mix and Param Parameter Transpose Turn A on checked so that the slider will control KARMA module A 3 Specify the range and value that you want to control The setting of the parameter will be assigned by default 12 in this example as described under 7 1 7a Module Parameter Control on page 85 of the Parameter Guide For this example set Min Max and Value to 24 0 and 12 respectively 4 Use Assign to assign the desired controller For this example we ll assign
168. when changing LJ TFs Off m Program KARMA m Combination Drum Track settings i Pret Stopping the Drum Track function If All KARMA DT Off is checked all KARMA functionality and the Drum Track function will be turned off Even if the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch is on the Drum Track function will not operate System preference In the Global P0 Basic Setup System Preference page you can make the following settings Settings when connecting multiple digital audio devices If you re connecting multiple digital audio devices via S P DIF set one device as the master and the remaining devices as slaves If you want the M3 to be the master set System Clock to Internal If you want the M3 to be a slave set System Clock to S P DIF Recalling the last selected mode and page at power on The state of M3 when the power is turned on will depend on the setting of Power On Mode If Power On Mode is set to Reset factory setting M3 will automatically select the Combination mode PO Play If Power On Mode is set to Memorize M3 will power on using the same mode and page that were selected when the power was turned off Sounding a beep when you press the display If Beep Enable is selected a beep will sound when you press an object in the display Uncheck this item if you don t want a beep to sound
169. will begin playing In other programs as well you can press the ON OFF switch the LED will light to turn the KARMA function on Note If the Drum Track function is on when Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trig the drum track will start playing simultaneously Adjusting the performance tempo 1 You can use the TEMPO knob or the TAP TEMPO 120 TEMPO switch to adjust the performance tempo This will change the J value located in the upper right of the display You can adjust the o tempo in a range of 40 00 300 00 The LED located above the TAP TEMPO switch will dai blink at intervals of a quarter note J As an alternative to using the TEMPO knob or the TAP TEMPO switch you can choose J in the display use numeric keys 0 9 to enter the tempo and then press the ENTER switch You can also use the VALUE controller to set the tempo The LED will blink at the tempo you specify Note The setting of the TEMPO knob is also saved when you write a program amp If the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page MIDI Clock parameter is set to External MIDI External USB or set to Auto and MIDI Clock messages are being received the display will indicate J EXT and the M3 will be synchronized to an external MIDI device In this case you won t be able to change the tempo by operating the M3 Checking note on off and key zone The screenshot shown below is a realtime display of the note
170. will be sampled Trigger Sampling START SW Sampling will start when you press the SAMPLING START STOP switch Recording Level 0 0 This is the default setting for recording an external input Save to RAM You will be sampling to RAM memory Input 1 Sampling Mode L Mono The sound of the internal L channel will be sampled in mono 9 Let s change the Trigger setting which specifies how sampling will start We ll set it to make sampling start when the audio input exceeds a specified volume e Set Trigger to Threshold and Level to 30 dB Recording will start automatically when an audio input of 30 dB or greater occurs while in record ready mode e Set Pre Trigger to 005 ms Recording will begin from a point slightly 5 ms before sampling starts so that the earliest portion of the sound is not lost Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Basic sampling procedure Audio In Setup wo E analog Level Par BUS Select FA BUS AUS BUS Sendi Send2 In ut mae Lano LR Qor or aaa aaa TIE passa 127 ROL Qo Qor aaa aaa Mi Sampling Setup l Source Bus gt L R Trigger Threshald Lewel 30 dB Fre Trigger REC EET m Tesar Audio In ing i F8 Recording Recording Level E Adjust the recording level 1 Use the rear panel LEVEL knob to adjust the level appropriately If the ADC OVERLOAD AD converter input overload indication appears turn the rear panel LEVEL knob toward M
171. you back to the combination name selection Control surface X Y control COMBIP Play Category Select popup button IMBI P8 Play Program TA1 65 MEA Category Bank Ez INT A gt 00 Keyboard a 35 00 number R3000 Towards The Sun Combination Select Combination Select popup button 3 The large characters in the upper part of the display will be highlighted These are the combination number and combination name Combination Select In this state you can press the A switch or V switch to select the next or previously numbered combination You can turn the VALUE dial to rapidly scroll through the programs 4 Use the BANK SELECT I A I G and U A U G switches to select combinations of other banks With the factory settings numbers 0 127 of INT A INT C contain preloaded programs Select and play these combinations to hear their sounds 5 As in Program mode you can select combinations from the menu by bank or by category As described in steps 5 and 6 of Selecting Programs on page 2 go ahead and select and play combinations in the same way as you did for programs Using controllers to modify the sound The M3 has numerous controllers 1 The keyboard section of the M3 61 73 88 the KYBD 61 73 88 keyboard assembly provides a joystick ribbon controller and SW1 SW2 switches in addition to the keyboard and you can use these to modify the sound The result will differ fo
172. you edit in Global mode is preserved until you turn off the power but will be lost when the power is turned off To save your settings execute Write Global Setting or Update Global Setup 1 Press the MODE GLOBAL switch to enter Global mode 2 Access the Global P1 MIDI External Mode 1 page GLOBAL P1 HIDI setup lage KLE M1 mowntches ncaa eee MIDI Channel cc Switch 1 Gch Of Slider 1 Gch G08 Switch 2 Gch Slider 2 Gch avi Switch 3 Gch Off Slider 3 Gch ard Switch 4 Gch Off Slider 4 Gch arg Switch 5 Geh Off Slider 5 Gch Switch 6 Gch OF Slider 6 Ech Switch 7 Off Slider 7 Gch Switch 8 Gch Off Slider 8 External Mode 1E 3 Use Setup Setup Select to select the external control set that you want to edit 4 In the External Mode 1 page you can make settings for switches 1 8 and sliders 1 8 MIDI Channel specifies the MIDI channel on which each switch or slider will transmit CC specifies the MIDI control change that each slider or switch will transmit 5 Access the Global P1 MIDI External Mode 2 page Here you can make settings f
173. zero the master effects will not apply Send 1 corresponds to MFX1 and Send 2 corresponds to MFXz2 13 Access the Prog P9 MFX TFX Routing page PROG PS MFA TFS MF rr T gt Bb St BPM Mod Delay Sendi MFX Send2 gt ri Fexerb SmoothHall L R TF T L Mono R gt BET Stereo Comp ressor 14 In MFX1 and MFX2 select the type of each master effect Routing effect settings Using effects in Combinations and Songs The procedure is the same as when selecting an insertion effect see step 7 Note You can select a double size effect only for MFX1 See Double size effects on page 156 15 Press the On Off button to turn on the master effect Each time you press the button the master effect will be switched on off When Off the output of the master effect will be muted 16 Use Return 1 and Return 2 to adjust the output levels of the master effects Note For each effect the Wet value of the Wet Dry parameter is the output level at the effect The return value is multiplied with this Return 127 will be x1 0 to determine the actual output level of the master effect 17 Select the MFX1 and MFX2 pages and set the parameters for each selected effect For details on the Program Effects settings step 11 Total Effect 18 If you use Bus IFX Output Select to choose L R as the oscillator output or if you set the post IFX Bus Select
174. 0 Using Effects Avoiding extraneous noise G amp If audio cables are connected to AUDIO INPUTS 1 2 any noise carried by the cables will enter into the M3 mixer structure Similarly the S P DIF input may carry noise from external devices This may include hiss hum and other audio noise To avoid noise from unused audio inputs either e Set the input s Level to 0 or e Set all of the bus assignments to Off including Bus Select IFX Indiv Out Assign AUX Bus and FX Control Bus If no audio cables are connected to AUDIO INPUTS 1 2 the input signals are forced to zero preventing any additional noise amp If you want to save the edited settings in the M3 you must write them Use the Global mode menu command Write Global Setting to do this 3 If you want to use the Global mode Input settings in the other modes check the Use Global Setting option If you want to make independent settings for Programs Combinations and Songs uncheck this setting PROG P Play Sampling Audio In Input E Use Global Setting Input Level Pan Bus Select FR Bus AUS Bus Sendi Send Sampling Setup Source Bus LR Trigger E Mote On 00 a Save ta RAM Made gt stereo C E ad J aT Sample Time EE min 18 923 36 36 Dynamic modulation MIDI Tempo Sync and Common FX LFO Dynamic modulation Dmod Dynamic modulation MIDI Tempo Sync and Common FX LFO Dynamic modulation Dmod Dynamic mo
175. 00 gt 00 EAE EAE HH 00 gt 00 Drums Keuboag Reuboar Reuboar Reyboad iea Reuboan ia Bella roay o IMT IMT IMT INT IMT INT gt E Aad gt Agee gt AGG gt Aaga gt Agee gt AGG gt Agee gt AGH Studia 1 Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G c c GD 6 a a on ZD E ED E ey cy Sin E ba ae aes 2 Check the RPPR check box The RPPR function will be turned on Set the on off for each song 3 Play the keyboard and patterns will begin playing according to the RPPR settings If you wish to trigger the RPPR function from an external MIDI device use the MIDI channel that is selected for Track Select e Pattern playback for a key with a Sync setting of Beat or Measure will sync to the playback of the first pattern e If you are playing the pattern in synchronization when Sync is Beat Measure or SEQ the pattern will start accurately if you play the note slightly earlier than the timing of the beat or measure Even if you play the note slightly later than the beat or measure but no later than a 32nd note it will be considered to have started at the beat or measure and the beginning of the pattern will be compressed so that the remainder of the playback will be correct 4 To turn off the RPPR function uncheck the RPPR check box Play RPPR while a song plays back RPPR can be played in synchronization with the playback of a song Patt
176. 00 005 compressors limiter and gates 006 017 as EQ multi mode filter exciter and wah Overdrive Amp Mic 018 025 Chorus Flanger Pitch and phase modulation effects such as Phaser chorus and flanger 026 039 Modulation Pitch Shift 040 054 Delay Sata aa Reverb ER 070 076 Reverb and early reflections Mono Mono Serial 077 108 Mono Mono Mono amp Mono parallel effects that allow two Parallel mono effects to be applied to L and R 109 153 independently Double Size i 154 170 Double size effects Overdrive and amp modeling effects such as guitar bass amps and mics Other modulation effects such as tremolo and rotary speaker and pitch shifters Mono amp Mono chain effects that internally connect two mono effects in series Effect I O Insert effects Insert Effects IFX 1 5 are stereo in stereo out If you select Dry unprocessed for the Wet Dry parameter the stereo input signal will be output in stereo without being processed by the effect If you select Wet effect applied the processed signal will be output in one of the following ways Mono In Mono Out Effect T Wet Mono In Stereo Out u Effect z Effect Stereo In Stereo Out Effect Master Effects The I Os of Master Effects MFX1 and MFX2 are stereo in stereo out Send1 and Send2 determine the send level to the Master Effects Master effects will not output the Dry unprocessed signal specified in
177. 00 Mode Rate LFOZ Int 00 00 AMS E After Touch Time A40 J5 Int 00 00 Intensity 46 68 EIR SE Pitch J Basie J Pitch Zone ES Creating Vibrato You can use an LFO to create vibrato LFO1 Int or LFO2 Int sets the depth to which the selected LFO will affect the pitch With a setting of 12 00 vibrato will produce a maximum of 1 octave of pitch change JS Y Int specifies the amount of vibrato that the LFO will produce when the joystick is pushed away from yourself Intensity AMS Intensity specifies the depth of vibrato that will be applied by the LFO when modulated by the selected AMS Alternate Modulation Source For example if LFO1 AMS is set to After Touch and you set an appropriate value for Intensity vibrato will be applied when you apply pressure to the keyboard or when MIDI aftertouch messages are received Pitch EG When the Intensity value is set to 12 00 the pitch EG specified in the Pitch EG page will produce a maximum of 1 octave of pitch change To realistically simulate the slight change in pitch that occurs when a string is plucked or at the attack of a brass or vocal sound you can use the EG to create a subtle change in pitch at the attack Portamento Portamento makes the pitch change smoothly when you play the next note before releasing the previous note The Time parameter controls how long it
178. 1 16 __ Insert Effect 1 5 P8 AUDIO OUTPUT p L MONO R Insert Effects Master Effects Individual Outputs FX Ctrl BUS AUX BUS AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 Make Audio CD WAVE Stereo Resampling L R 2ch Mix USB CD R RW USB HDD Parentheses such as P7 indicate the M3 page used for editing 77 78 Creating songs Sequencer mode MIDI tracks 1 16 each consist of track parameters that specify the starting state of the track and playback data The master track consists of tempo and time signature data MIDI tracks 1 16 Setup parameters Bank Program No Play Rec Mute Pan Volume Track Play Loop Loop Start Measure Loop End Measure Play Intro EQ Bypass Input Trim Low Gain Mid Frequency Mid Gain High Gain Status MIDI Channel Bank Select When Status EX2 Force OSC Mode OSC Select Portamento Transpose Detune Bend Range Use Program s Scale Delay Mode Time Base Note Times KARMA Track On Off Control MIDI Filter Keyboard Zones Velocity Zones Track Name IFX Indiv Out Bus FX Control Bus AUX Bus Send1 MFX1 Send2 MFX2 Drum Kit IFX Patch X Y Volume X Y CC Enable RADIAS Musical data Note On Off Program Change including Bank Select Pitch Bend Aftertouch Poly After Control Change Pattern No Exclusive Message Master track
179. 1 Make sure that the M3 s power switch is in the STANDBY outward position 2 Connect the included power cable to the power connector on the M3 s rear panel 3 Plug the power cable into an AC outlet Turning the power on 1 Lower the M3 s VOLUME MAIN slider If you have connected powered monitor speakers or a stereo amp turn down the volume of these devices 2 Press the rear panel Power switch to turn on the power The display will show the model name software version The following graphic shows the factory set display The version number is subject to change without notice 3 Turn on your powered monitors or stereo amp 4 Raise the M3 s VOLUME MAIN slider to an appropriate position and adjust the volume of your powered monitor speakers or stereo amp Note The state of M3 when the power is turned on will depend on the setting of Power On Mode See page 130 MUSIC WORKSTATION SAMPLER Version W168 Options Turning the power off amp After you ve finished editing be sure to write save your changes If you edit a program and then select a different program or turn off the power the changes you made will be lost The same is true for a combination The settings you edit in Sequencer mode and Global mode are remembered as long as the power is on but will be lost when you turn off the power 1 Lower the M3 s VOLUME MAIN slider Also turn the volume of your powered moni
180. 14 procram f TRACK 7 PROGRAM TRACK 15 PROGRAM L KARMA Module A KARMA Module B KARMA Module C TRACK 8 PROGRAM TRACK 16 PROGRAM KARMA Module D Drum Track DRUM KIT Preset Drum Track Pattern User Drum Track Pattern 21 22 Introduction to the M3 Basic operations After you ve turned on the M3 here s how to perform basic operations such as selecting modes and pages 1 Selecting modes e Inorder to use a particular function on the M3 you must first select the appropriate mode Press one of the front panel mode switches to enter the corresponding mode COMBI switch Combination mode PROG switch Program mode SEQ switch Sequencer mode SAMPLING switch Sampling mode GLOBAL switch Global mode MEDIA switch Media mode 2 Selecting pages and tabs Each mode has a large number of parameters which are grouped into pages These are further subdivided by tabs into up to eight tab pages e Make sure that the desired mode is selected For details on selecting a mode see 1 Selecting modes above In this explanation we ll use Combination mode as an example Press the COMBI switch COMBI Pa Plag Category Bank INT A 348 Keyboard 2000 Towards The Sun TB1 B000 Stereo Grand 3 Way Category gt 0 gt 03 212 215 215 215 215 215 K
181. 20 and its Curve to Linear 9 You can view this split visually in the Prog P2 OSC Pitch Velocity Zone page Notice that the graphic now shows the two ranges tapering into one another Between 80 and 100 MS2 will fade out and MS1 will fade in creating a gradual velocity transition instead of a hard split 10 As necessary adjust the Level of the two multisamples in the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Basic page Copying settings between OSC1 amp OSC2 Many of the Program parameters can be set differently for OSC1 and OSC2 These include all of the parameters on e All of the tabs on the OSC Pitch page except for the Pitch EG e All of the tabs on the Filter page e All of the tabs on the Amp EQ page except for EQ e All of the tabs on the LFO page except for Common LFO e The AMS Mixer tabs You can use the menu s Copy Oscillator command to copy these parameters from one Oscillator to another You can even copy parameters from an Oscillator in a different Program This command is useful when you want to set both Oscillators to the same settings or when you want to duplicate settings you ve used before Detailed Editing with Programs Basic oscillator settings Assigning a drum kit What is a drum kit Drum kits are created or edited in Global mode To each note of the keyboard you can assign up to four drum instrument samples and use layering crossfading or velocity switching to switch betw
182. 33 amp These types of media are not included You will need to purchase them separately See page 223 Media setup This section explains how to make the M3 recognize media so that data can be saved on it Setup for using a USB storage device 1 Use a USB cable to connect the USB port of your USB storage device commercially available hard disk removable disk CD R RW to the USB A connector of the M3 Note The M3 s USB A connectors support hot plugging you can connect or disconnect the USB cable while the power is on However in order to do so your USB storage device must also support hot plugging 2 Turn on the power of the M3 3 Turn on the power of your USB storage device and use a USB cable to connect the USB port of your USB storage device to the USB A connector of the M3 Note The above step assumes that your USB device supports hot plugging If you are using a device that does not support hot plugging connect it with the power turned off Then turn on the power amp While the M3 is accessing the USB device do not connect another USB device or disconnect the connected device Doing so may damage your data 4 Press the MODE MEDIA switch to enter Media mode 5 Press the Media Info tab and then execute the menu command Scan USB device 6 Use Media Select to select your media If you are using a removable disk insert the media After you exchange media in your USB device press the d
183. 5 ch KARMA function settings KARMA function settings in Combination mode 2 Set the MIDI channels for the pads as follows Pad 1 MIDI channel 2 ch Pad 2 MIDI channel 3 ch Pad 3 MIDI channel 4 ch Pad 4 MIDI channel 5 ch 3 For each KARMA module set In Input Channel and Out Output Channel as follows KARMA module A Input Ch 2 ch Out Ch 2 ch KARMA module B Input Ch 3 ch Out Ch 3 ch KARMA module C Input Ch 4 ch Out Ch 4 ch KARMA module D Input Ch 5 ch Out Ch 5 ch 4 Turn the KARMA function off When you play the keyboard timbre 1 will sound When you press pads 1 4 timbres 2 5 will sound 5 Turn the KARMA function on When you play the keyboard timbre 1 will sound When you press pads 1 4 KARMA modules A D will each trigger a different GE which will play phrases or patterns on timbres 2 5 6 For KARMA module A turn Gch Gch Also on checked 7 Turn off the KARMA function When you play the keyboard timbre 1 will sound When you press pads 1 4 timbres 2 5 will sound 8 Turn on the KARMA function When you play the keyboard timbre 1 will sound KARMA module A for which you turned Gch Gch Also on checked will trigger its GE and play a phrase or pattern on timbre 2 When you press pads 1 4 KARMA modules A D will trigger their respective GEs and play phrases or patterns on timbres 2 5 Setting example 2
184. 6 but the Drum Trk Program page also allows you to specify the EQ detuning and bus in addition to selecting the program 1 Access the Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Drum Trk Program page PROG Pi Basic DT Ctris DrumIrk Program Drum Track Paramete ra TS Bus Select FX Control Bus gt off AU Bus ir Sendi 065 Sendz B63 4 64 kHz Hid Gain _ Auto Load Program Ed _ Bypass Input Trim 99 High Gain Mid Freq a 01 6 dB Low Gain 63 6 dB 83 8 dB II oe Basic j Scale AF Prog J Setup j lers J i d 4 2 Use Program Select to select a drum program Note You can only select programs of category number 15 Drums 3 Use Volume to specify the volume of the Drum Track program 4 Use Detune to adjust the pitch in units of one cent One cent is 1 100th of a semitone This adjusts the overall pitch of the Drum Track program Note You can adjust the pitch of each drum kit in Global P5 Drum Kit EQ adjustments for the Drum Track program You can adjust a three band EQ for the Drum Track program If you turn Auto Load Program EQ on selected the three band EQ settings specified for the program will be automatically loaded when you switch Drum Track programs Normally you will leave this selected You are free to adjust the three ba
185. 64 Mbytes of RAM built in and you can install a optional EXB M256 to add an addition 256 Mbytes Of the 64 Mbytes of RAM 512 bytes are used by the system and will not be available for sampling The amount of sampling time depends on the amount of free RAM as shown below Free RAM and approximate sampling times Approximate Sampling Time min sec telen 256 MB 46 36 23 18 amp The multisample and sample data in the RAM memory is not backed up when the power is turned off If you wish to keep this data you must save it onto a media before turning off the power When the power is first turned on memory will not contain any multisample or sample data You must first load previously saved data before you can playback or edit any sample data Installing the optional EXB M256 The EXB M256 is a memory board with 256 MB megabytes of capacity In Sampling mode you ll be able to select sample memory bank RAM2 Refer to the above table for the sampling times when using bank RAM2 In addition you ll be able to load sample files of various formats KORG WAVE AIFF AKAI S1000 53000 SoundFont 2 0 or load optional PCM expansion USB memory data For details on how to install the EXB M256 please see Specifications and options on page 224 Sampling to a USB storage device If you sample resample to a USB storage device such as a commercially available hard disk connected to the M3 s USB A connector the sampl
186. 7 185 Timbre 68 Time signature 84 93 169 TO MODULE TO MODULE 2nd connector 9 Tone Adjust 75 Assigned the parameter 49 Total effect 153 157 Track 83 Transpose 74 129 Tremolo 61 Truncate 117 U USB A connector 33 USB B connector 30 USB device Connection 33 USB storage device 33 142 Sampling 107 USB MIDI driver 34 Use Zero 117 V VALUE controller 12 23 VALUE slider 45 Velocity 42 Curve 129 Velocity crossfade 52 71 136 Velocity split 52 Velocity Switch 71 72 Vibrato 56 Volume 10 42 47 54 60 62 68 69 82 83 W WAVE file 139 145 Resampling a song 127 Waveform 54 Waveform data 118 Windows XP 35 Write 139 Drum Kit 141 Global setting 141 Program Combination 140 Write Save 24 X X Y control 43 62 X Y mode 43 X Y motion 43 Delete 44 Recording 43 Z ZOOM 117 231 232 233 IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used If you have purchased this product via the internet through mail order and or via a telephone sale you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside WARNING Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Pleas
187. 8 Sro orr arnt 8 SE T a Bs E Using KARMA Overview What is KARMA KARMA stands for Kay Algorithmic Realtime Music Architecture named after its inventor Stephen Kay The KARMA function generates MIDI data using many different algorithms seamlessly integrated to provide a powerful music generation engine Based on the notes and chords you play KARMA generates phrases and patterns in real time generating not just notes but MIDI control data as well The KARMA architecture allows the various algorithms to be reconfigured and varied in realtime as you play them For example you can create the dynamic tempo changes that occur within a harp glissando the synchronized changes in volume and tone that occur as part of a brass phrase the randomness within a drum phrase the crescendo and diminuendo of a fill in changes in phrase or tone of a techno groove complex interweaving phrases that would be impossible to play on a keyboard guitar strumming and finger picking simulations with natural sounding changes and backing grooves that follow your keyboard playing in realtime all under your control KARMA lets you produce phrases and patterns at a far more musical and flexible level than conventional arpeggiators or pattern playback functions On the M3 the KARMA function is designed to work in close conjunction with the numerous other functions giving you unbelievable performance power on stage or in the st
188. 8 kHz Option EXB FW 2 channels 24 bit 48 kHz Sample rate DAMPER Supports piano style half damper pedals as well as standard foot switches Control Inputs ASSIGNABLE SWITCH ASSIGNABLE PEDAL TO KYBD for connection to keyboard assembly MIDI IN OUT THRU 2 USB 2 0 High Speed ports supports 480 Mbps TYPE A with Mass Storage Device support for USB connecting external hard drives flash memory etc 1 USB TYPE B MIDI interface KORG FireWire Audio MIDI interface 2 FireWire connectors Option EXB FW MIDI 1 in 1 out Audio 2 in 6 out Virtualized Hardware Power AC Power Supply terminal POWER On Off switch M3XP M 673 x 202 x 82 mm 26 50 x 7 95 x 3 23 inches ees seo6 1 016 x 372 x 121 mm 40 00 x 14 65 x 4 76 inches with M3XP M folded M3XP M KYBD61 down 1 016 x 372 x 171 mm 40 00 x 14 65 x 6 73 inches with M3XP M tilted up Dimensions maeman 1 189 x 371 x 131 mm 46 81 x 14 61 x 5 16 inches with M3XP M folded WxDxH M3XP M KYBD73 down 1 189 x 371 x 207 mm 46 81 x 14 61 x 8 15 inches with M3XP M tilted up onions 1 425 x 442 x 131 mm 56 10 x 17 40 x 5 16 inches with M3XP M folded M3XP M KYBD88 down 1 425 x 442 x 207 mm 56 10 x 17 40 x 8 15 inches with M3XP M tilted up 4 8 kg 10 58 lbs M3XP M Power Consumption 35W M3XP M KYBD73 M3XP M KYBD88 Bracket M3XP M only AC cable Owner s Manuals M3 Operation Guide Accessories CD ROM M3 M3 XP lt Under gt ANDED Parameter Guide PDF Voice
189. 89 of the Parameter Guide Note If you want a Drum Track function to synchronize to the currently playing KARMA function go to the Prog P1 DT XY Crls DrumTrk Pattern page Combi Seq P1 DT XY Crls Drum Track and turn Trigger Sync on See page 193 Synchronization between KARMA modules A B C and D In Combination and Sequencer modes four KARMA modules can be running Each module has a Quantize Trigger setting that determines how that module will synchronize with the other modules Quantize Trigger Off The KARMA module will be triggered at the timing at which you play the keyboard There will be no synchronization between KARMA modules each will be triggered at their own timing Quantize Trigger On The KARMA module will synchronize to sixteenth note intervals of the timing the first triggered KARMA module that is currently running If you want to simultaneously trigger multiple KARMA modules from the keyboard or pads turn Quantize Trigger on for each of these KARMA modules Synchronization with songs patterns and RPPR performance in Sequencer mode If you want a KARMA module to play or be recorded in synchronization with the currently playing song pattern or RPPR turn Quantize Trigger on Quantize Trig Off The KARMA module will be triggered at the timing at which you play the keyboard It will not synchronize to the currently playing song pattern or RPPR Quantize Trig On The trigger timing of the KAR
190. A function will be reset and the phrases or patterns it generates will start from the beginning e If you then press the START STOP switch the sequencer and the KARMA function will both stop If you want to stop only the KARMA function press the KARMA ON OFF switch e If you want the KARMA function to start the moment recording begins press the KARMA ON OFF switch and then play the keyboard during the pre count before recording The KARMA modules will not be triggered immediately but will be triggered in synchronization with the sequencer the moment recording starts Slave operation Connect the MIDI OUT of your external MIDI device to the M3 s MIDI IN Set MIDI Clock Global see PG page 379 to External MIDI or External USB The M3 will synchronize to MIDI realtime clock and realtime command messages it receives from the connected MIDI device Note If the M3 is set to MIDI Clock Auto it will also synchronize to the external MIDI device in the same way if MIDI realtime clock messages are being received from the external device Synchronization to MIDI clock The KARMA function will synchronize to a tempo based on the external MIDI clock timing Synchronization with MIDI realtime com mands In Sequencer mode Song Start Continue and Stop messages that the M3 receives will control song playback and recording just as when you operate the front panel START STOP switch The KARMA function also will be controlle
191. A Enr pm S er ed E ee id ed EE EP Ep os TD Ep Ee Tp f A Li oft or ott Bnd Dir RPTRRYU RPETUODK i Or or Off Off Of FreMorno PitchPat NtPtChd Mtellg Bha Or Hee Hae B37 116 59 BES EET 5z Swings RhyPath DUCHI VelAccet Brdleng Endstas Aptheps RPtTran RTE J fudioln Surtaoss L RIC J AudioIns Surface The lower part of the display shows the names of the sliders and switches that are assigned in this program In the pre loaded programs the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches have already been assigned 2 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN KARMA switch Sliders 1 8 and switches 1 8 of the control surface will operate as KARMA sliders and KARMA switches 3 Operate the front panel sliders 1 8 and switches 1 8 The pattern or phrase will change accordingly You can also turn the switches on off by pressing them in the display You can operate the sliders by selecting them and then using the VALUE controller to adjust the value The type or value of the parameter being controlled by the sliders and switches is shown in the KARMA Module Info KARMA Value field This lets you see how the parameters are being affected by your slider or switch operations EE Rhythm Pattern Ag2 15 The saved value is shown at the lower right EEEE of each slider or switch On et HtSc
192. Auto mode which automatically applies the specified effect processing to the sample you specify or Manual mode which lets you play the sample manually with effects applied and resample your performance 5 You can view the sample waveform in the display and modify it using a variety of waveform editing commands menu commands loop settings time slice and time stretch Program Combination Sequencer modes 1 You can resample a performance that uses the functionality filters effects KARMA function sequencer etc of each mode 2 You can sample external audio sources via the M3 s input jacks see Sampling mode 1 and 2 above At this time you can mix the M3 s own performance with the audio signals from the external source and sample the combined result or you can monitor the performance of the M3 while sampling only the external source from the input jacks 3 In Sequencer mode when you sample an external audio source that s playing along with the song playback note data will be automatically created in a track to trigger this sample at the appropriate moment in the song This means that you can sample your vocal or guitar performance while playing back the sequencer This is called the In Track Sampling function Sampling frequency and bit resolution As shown in the diagram sampling reads the level of the analog signal at fixed intervals along the time axis and stores the levels in memory
193. BD If the front panel KARMA LINKED and KARMA ON OFF switches are lit the KARMA performance will start stop together with the drum track Adjusting the performance tempo You can use the TEMPO knob or the TAP TEMPO switch to adjust the performance tempo Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum Track program Unlike its operation in Program mode the Drum Track function in Combination mode does not have its own dedicated track timbre The program that plays the Drum Track pattern will use the timbre you specify 1 In the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page or T09 16 page select the timbre that you want to use for the drum track and then select the Drum Track program In the following illustration we ve selected timbre 10 for use by the drum track COMBI P Play Program 189 16 Cat Bank USER A gt 60 keyboard 3 120 55 gt 000 InittGomb A000 T18 1 6691 Frocessed Kit Category gt 00 gt 15 gt 88 gt 88 gt 00 gt 88 gt 00 gt 88 eanan Drums Reuboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboard Keyboar Keyboar Bank Program 2 foga gt RRL gt Aaga gt Aago gt Anao gt Adan gt Anga gt Auda Stereo G Processe Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G GD GE G3 EDEDED ENED ET ETET Frog Miner Miker KARMA KARMA Samelineg Control 2 Specify the MIDI channel of the drum track timbre Be aware that if another timbre uses the same MIDI channel that timbre will also be sound
194. C ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR a mym s Ease ZED ENHU FvreERry heoltoe The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type THE FCC REGULATION WARNING for USA This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation lf this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by o
195. C5 S Wa Swi Mod CE 20 Assign a E 2 JS Lock Control _ Gama KARMA Surface Low MidtHz Hid BIT 11 6 258k 61 5 86 6 Pattern E Preset P422 Dr im n Bass 11 D n B Program BaSe2 Electro Roche Kit Main Filter Amp EG Audion ay Category e Bank INT A gt 12 MotionSunth J 128 06 Easy Program editing Simple editing using the sliders and switches Easy Program editing Simple editing using the sliders and switches All of the M3 s programs can be edited You can start by editing a preloaded program or you can initialize a program and create your own from scratch It is a lot of work to create the sound you want by starting with an initialized program In most cases you should start with a preloaded program that s close to what you have in mind and then edit it to your taste On the M3 you can use the switches and sliders of the front panel control surface to make very effective edits simply from within the Prog P0 Play page For example you can operate the sliders to adjust the attack time or release time or to vary the cutoff or resonance You can also turn effects on off or adjust their depth or vary the phrases generated by KARMA Adjusting the EQ You can adjust a mid sweepable three band EQ in the Prog P0 Play Main page This EQ will affect both oscillator 1 and oscillator 2 1 Access the Prog P0 Play Main page 2 In the display se
196. D 61 73 88 are joined by a detachable mechanism This lets you mount other sound modules on the keyboard assembly or mount two sound modules at the same time on the keyboard assembly for flexible system creation Of course you can detach the sound module from the keyboard assembly and use it as a stand alone unit You can also tilt the sound module upward for convenient operation You ll be able to create flexible systems with future products that utilize the KKS standard Virtualized hardware functionality that lets you assign sounds just like plug in instru ments within your DAW software The bundled M3 Editor and M3 Plug In Editor software are applications that let you edit M3 sounds such as programs combinations and drum kits from your computer M3 Editor is a stand alone editor M3 Plug In Editor supports VST Audio Units and RTAS formats allowing you to use the M3 as if it were a plug in instrument in your DAW Digital Audio Workstation software or other host application If you install the optional EXB FW FireWire board you ll be able to connect a single FireWire IEEE 1394 cable to route the M3 s audio signals and MIDI messages to and from your DAW tracks via the M3 Plug In Editor This Virtualized Hardware functionality means that you can use the M3 as though it were a plug in software instrument Expandable by a rich variety of separately sold options You can expand the M3 s powe
197. DC OVERLOAD is displayed 12 Press the SAMPLING REC switch Play your guitar and the level meter will indicate the volume at which the guitar will be sampled Press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn it on play the keyboard to start the drum phrase and play your guitar while adjusting the final volume If the CLIP indication appears use the VALUE controller to lower the Recording Level slider located in the right side of the display below 0 0 to an appropriate level 13 When you have finished making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC switch Press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn off the KARMA function 14 Press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn it on and then press the SAMPLING REC switch to enter record ready mode 15 Press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to begin recording 16 When you ve finished recording press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to stop recording 17 Press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn it off 18 Listen to the sound that was sampled Select the convert destination program bank and number When you play the C2 key you ll hear the sampled sound Sampling in Program Combination and Sequencer modes Sampling a mix of the phrases generated by the KARMA function together with an external guitar sound Here we ll explain how to sample a performance generated by the KARMA function along with the sound of an external guitar In this example we will sample a phrase generated by
198. DUNA KSTATI PLER Operation Guide SBIS sass ByTouchView Fx KORG IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS e Read these instructions e Keep these instructions e Heed all warnings e Follow all instructions e Do not use this apparatus near water e Mains powered apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed on the apparatus e Clean only with dry cloth e Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions e Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat e Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet for USA and Canada e Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus e Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer e Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time e Turning off the power switch do
199. Drums P 9000 IE 9000 CH64 Chb4 Chad ose ora aera 3 Selecting a parameter and editing the value 1 Press the parameter that you want to edit It will be highlighted This is called the edit cell 2 To modify the parameter value in the edit cell use the VALUE controllers VALUE dial A V switches numeric keys 0 9 switch switch and ENTER switch Note The way in which the value will change depends on the type of parameter or object For example in the case of a check box object you can switch the value by pressing that object You can use the PROG SELECT switches to specify the bank for programs etc or hold down the ENTER switch and press a note on the keyboard to enter a note or velocity value keyboard input 3 For parameters that are mapped to the control surface you can use the MIX PLAY MUTE SOLO switches or MIX VOLUMES sliders to edit the values Note You can use the COMPARE switch to compare the sound you re editing with the original unedited sound VALUE controllers VALUE dial Use this dial to edit the selected parameter s value This control is convenient when you want to scroll through a very long list of selections VALUE slider This slider increases or decreases the value of the selected parameter in the same way as the VALUE dial This slider can also be used as a control source for modulation Use this when you want to change a value by a large
200. ET CONTROLS switch press the KARMA MODULE CONTROL switch to reset these settings 199 200 Other functions common to all modes KARMA SCENE 1 5 4 8 switches e You can reset a KARMA scene by holding down the RESET CONTROLS switch and pressing the SCENE 1 5 4 8 switch whose LED is blinking If you once again hold down the RESET CONTROL switch and press the SCENE 1 5 4 8 switch whose LED is lit it will return to the blinking state For a program or combination the settings will be reset to the values that are written In Sequencer mode the settings will be reset to the state in which you entered the mode or selected the song or the state immediately after you executed Copy From Combi etc Shortcuts ENTER switch numeric keys 0 9 e Accesses the menu commands in each page up to ten items ENTER switch REC WRITE switch e Accesses the Auto Song Setup function In Program or Combination mode you can press this combination of keys to automatically assign the settings of the program or combination to a song in Sequencer mode and then enter record ready mode ENTER switch keyboard e Inputs note number values or velocity values e Selects KEY in Global P5 Drum Kit Seg P10 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page e Selects base key and index in Sampling mode Note While a dialog box is displayed the ENTER switch will perform the same function as the OK button This means that you can t use this method
201. ET CONTROLS switch to reset the settings You can reset the following units of settings e An individual slider or switch one scene one module control or all See Resetting controls to their saved values on page 43 See Resetting controller values on page 199 amp If you use the RESET CONTROLS switch to reset the settings there s no way to return to the state prior to this reset Performing with KARMA Performing with the KARMA function in Combination mode Note If the KARMA SCENES switch is blinking this indicates that the KARMA display and KARMA slider settings of that scene have been edited from their saved state Selecting a GE Generated Effect When the KARMA function is on the KARMA module uses a GE to generate phrases or patterns The M3 provides a wide range of GEs that you can use for a variety of instruments playing techniques and musical styles See The structure of the KARMA function on page 163 For each of the pre loaded programs a GE that s appropriate for the sound of the program is already selected If you switch to a different GE the generated phrase or pattern will change dramatically 1 Access the Prog P0 Play KARMA GE page Ea v PROG P Play peace ho I A gt B22 Funkylicious Bass d 20 48 z Auto RTC Setup KARMA GE Load GE Options RTCM ReretScenes T Sig gt GE TS Category Selact i gt Bass Pattern GE lo 1217 Phunky
202. G Velocity AMS3 off St 88 At 88 Br 88 t 00 De 8 51 88 R1 00 At AA De 88 31 88 RI 48 t 00 De 8 51 88 Rl 88 rivers mode Jes Every instrument has its own characteristic volume envelope This is part of what gives each instrument its identifiable character Conversely by changing the volume contour for instance applying a string like Amp EG curve to an organ multisample you can produce interesting and unusual sounds Piano Drive The Drive circuit adds saturation and overdrive to the sound for everything from subtle fattening to drastic distortion Unlike an overdrive effect Drive processes each voice individually so the timbre stays the same regardless of how many voices are being played The two main parameters Drive and Low Boost work together to create the overall effect Drive controls the amount of edge and bite in the timbre Low settings will produce mild saturation and higher settings create more obvious distortion Often it s useful to increase the Low Boost along with the Drive Note even when the Drive amount is set to 0 the Drive circuit still affects the timbre If your goal is a completely pristine sound use the Bypass control instead 61 Playing and editing Programs Low Boost is a special low frequency EQ which controls the body character of the sound The specific EQ frequencies affected will change with the Drive setting Highe
203. IDI realtime com mands In Sequencer mode Song Start Continue and Stop messages that the M3 receives will control song playback and recording just as when you operate the front panel START STOP switch The KARMA function also will be controlled in the same way as when you operate the front panel START STOP switch See Synchronization with song stop Master operation Connect the M3 s MIDI IN to your external MIDI device s MIDI OUT or connect the M3 s USB B connector to your computer s USB port Set MIDI Clock Global 1 1a to Internal The connected external MIDI device will synchronize to the MIDI realtime clock and realtime commands it receives Note The same applies if MIDI Clock Auto and MIDI realtime clock messages are being transmitted For details please see MIDI Clock MIDI Clock Source on page 380 of the Parameter Guide Synchronization via MIDI clock The connected external MIDI device will synchronize to the MIDI clock of the M3 Creating a Drum Track pattern Preparing a user pattern Creating a Drum Track pattern To create a Drum Track pattern you ll use the Sequencer mode P10 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page to convert a user pattern into a user Drum Track pattern Once you ve converted the pattern in this way you ll be able to use it with the drum track in each mode These converted Drum Track patterns are held in internal memory even after you turn off the power This means
204. IN to adjust the level appropriately For the best sound adjust the level as high as possible without allowing the ADC OVERLOAD indication to appear 2 Press the SAMPLING REC switch Speak into the mic and notice that the level meter indicates the volume of the sound that will be recorded If the CLIP indication appears use the VALUE controller to lower the Recording Level slider shown in the right of the display from the 0 0 setting to an appropriate position Recording Level dE L Ro l EUT 3 When you ve finished making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC switch Record 1 Press the SAMPLING REC switch The M3 will be in record ready mode 2 Speak into the mic saying the word s you want to sample Example It s Recording will start when the level exceeds the Level 30 dB setting 3 When you ve finished saying the word s press the SAMPLING START STOP switch This completes the sampling operation The new sample will be automatically assigned to Sample Sample Select Hear the sampled result 1 The sample you just recorded will by default be assigned to Index 001 When you press the OrigKey key C2 for Index 001 you will hear the sound you just sampled You can also strike pad 1 to hear this sound Notice that the sample will loop play repeatedly if you hold down the key or pad We re going to turn looping off Turn looping off 1 Access the
205. ITCH the pedal s function is set in Global mode For details please see Specifying the function of the Assignable Switch and Assignable Pedal on page 132 9 Ww me e t 15 16 Introduction to the M3 5 S P DIF IN amp OUT These jacks provide 24 bit optical S P DIF input and output for connecting to computer audio systems digital mixers MDs etc Optical S P DIF is sometimes called TOSLINK and formally named hold your breath IEC60958 ETAJ CP 1201 Make sure to use optical cables designed for digital audio Whenever you use digital audio connections make sure that all connected systems are set so that there is one and only one word clock master You can set the word clock for the M3 using the Global page System Clock parameter For details please see System Clock on page 375 of the Parameter Guide OUT MAIN jack This optical S P DIF output carries a digital version of the main L R outputs Note That the VOLUME MAIN slider does not adjust the S P DIF output level IN jack You can use this optical S P DIF input for recording sampling and real time mixing through the built in effects It can be used simultaneously with the two analog inputs if you like 6 AUDIO INPUTS You can use the audio inputs for sampling and real time mixing through the built in effects AUDIO INPUT 1 2 These are unbalanced 1 4 phone jacks LEVEL knobs This adjusts the i
206. L MONO will carry a mono summation of the stereo signal So if you are connecting to a device which does not have stereo inputs such as a simple keyboard amp use the L MONO output INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 These 4 additional audio outputs let you isolate sounds or audio inputs for recording or complex live sound setups These can be used as stereo or mono outputs in any combination You can also use the Global P0 Basic Setup Audio page L R Bus Indiv Out Assign parameter to map the main stereo outputs to any of these output pairs if you like Note that the individual outputs are not affected by the VOLUME MAIN slider 8 Headphone jack This stereo 1 4 headphone jack carries the same signal as the Main L R outputs The headphone volume is controlled by the VOLUME MAIN slider 9 EXB FW option If you install the optional EXB FW in the M3 you ll be able to enjoy the following total recall control functionality from a host application in which the included M3 Plug in Editor is running e Send and receive MIDI data to and from the DAW software e Edit and set up the parameters of the M3 s various modes e Send and receive the M3 s 2 in and 6 out channels of digital audio If the EXB FW is installed in the M3 it will have the following specifications e Audio input output 24 bit 48 kHz fixed 2 in 6 out e MIDI input output one port in out sixteen MIDI channels in out amp Please note the followin
207. LD MOTION 5 7 inch Touch View Color Graphical Interface Color 320 x 240 pixel display X Y control function Switches COMBI PROG SEQ SAMPLING GLOBAL MEDIA Value Controllers Switches A V 10 key numeric keypad ENTER COMPARE VALUE Slider VALUE Dial User Interface BANK Switches A G U A G SEQUENCER Switches PAUSE REW FF LOCATE REC WRITE START STOP SAMPLING Switches REC START STOP TEMPO Switches TAP TEMPO TEMPO Knob Switches PAGE SELECT EXIT VOLUME MAIN Slider display contrast Frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 1 0 dB 10 kQ load Common specifications THD N 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 08 10 kQ load typical 1 4 TS Mono unbalanced Master Volume slider controls only L Mono and R 1 1kQ stereo 550Q mono L Mono only AUDIOOUTPUT Anaia INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 30 dBu typical 31 dBu typical Audio Outputs 1 4 TRS Stereo Master Volume slider link with Main output L Mono Option EXB FW Digitally output the same signals as AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L Mono R and AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 Specifications and options Options 1 4 TS Mono unbalanced MIC LINE input level switch LEVEL knob Input Impedance 10 kQ Analog Audio inputs 1 2 12 dB Input level range LINE 29 dBu 4 dBu or greater typical Audio Inputs Input level range MIC 54 dBu 17 dBu or greater typical Source Impedance 600Q Format 24 bit S P DIF IEC60958 EIAJCP 1201 o Optical S P DIF Digital Sample Rate 4
208. LLLARRULLLOLRELLLOLEIRRAULLORRRILLOLLRALLOLLEILRILLLOLRELLLOLLILE 2 Use Run and Solo to select the module s that will operate when the KARMA function is on For details please see 0 5b GE Select on page 127 of the Parameter Guide Note For the preloaded combinations when the MODULE CONTROL switch is set to MASTER KARMA switches 1 2 3 and 4 will switch Run on off for modules A B C and D Selecting a GE Here s how to select the GE used by each KARMA module See KARMA function settings in Program mode on page 172 1 Access the Combi P7 1 KARMA1 GE Setup A D page Note You can make these settings in the Combi PO Play KARMA GE page 2 Press Load GE Opt Load GE Options to access the dialog box turn Auto RTC Setup on and check the User RTC Model and Reset Scenes options Load GE Options specifies whether the settings of the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches will be automatically set initialized or maintained when you select a GE For this example we ll choose to set the slider and switch functions for KARMA modules A B C and D to the standard settings for the RTC Model of the selected GE so that you ll be able to control the phrase or pattern immediately 3 Use GE Selec
209. LOLEIRRAILLORRRULLOLLREALOLLEILRILLLOLRILLLOLLILE GE Setup El gt Harmonic CL1 Comp Lead Btm C 1 Top EER 9555 Pad Helper 08 Thru inZ Trans 80 _ Link to OT m Thru Out Z Trans F 2 J iter Jottset Trask Ji Seeds Joona Triage In the example shown above the notes from C 1 through B3 are being input to the KARMA module When you play B3 or a lower note the KARMA function will generate a phrase or pattern 3 If Thru In Z Zone and Thru Out Z Zone are on checked the notes you play on the keyboard will play in addition to the phrase or pattern generated by the KARMA function These two fields are the settings for inside and outside the key zone You can use Trans Transpose In Zone and Trans Transpose Out Zone to transpose the notes played on the keyboard in semitone steps In the example shown above the B3 and lower keys will control only the phrase or pattern generated by the KARMA function and the C4 and higher keys will be used for manual playing on the keyboard Use Trans Transpose Out Zone to adjust the pitch of the manually played region KARMA module MIDI filtering 1 Access the Prog P7 1 KARMAT1 MIDI Filter page PROG P 1 KARMAI AORAR MIDI Filter M Receive MIDI Filter After T F Bend Damper J5 Y J5 Y Ribbon Other Silransmit MIDI P Bend CC A mo m Filte site Receive MIDI Filter This specifies whether filterin
210. MA module will be quantized to a sixteenth note interval of the currently playing song pattern or RPPR Note If you want patterns played by RPPR to synchronize to the currently operating KARMA function set Sync Seg P10 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page to SEQ KARMA function settings Synchronizing the KARMA function Synchronization with Drum Track patterns performance If you want the KARMA module to synchronize to the currently playing drum track pattern turn Quantize Trigger on Quantize Trig Off The KARMA module will be triggered at the timing at which you play the keyboard It will not synchronize to the currently playing drum track pattern Quantize Trig On The KARMA module will be triggered in synchronization with the currently playing drum track pattern at the nearest sixteenth note interval Note If you want the Drum Track pattern to synchronize with the currently operating KARMA function set Sync Trigger in the Drum Track page of each mode to On Synchronization with song start stop Synchronization with a song in Sequencer mode e While the KARMA function is running pressing the START STOP switch will synchronize the KARMA function with the sequencer The KARMA function will be reset and the phrases or patterns it generates will start from the begin ning e While the sequencer is playing and the KARMA function is stopped and you change the location by pressing the LOCATE switch etc the KARM
211. MIDI MIDI Basic page set MIDI Clock to Internal Set Tempo Mode to Auto in the Seq P0 1 Play REC Program T01 08 page Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to play back Note If the correct sounds are not selected when you start playing back you may be able to solve the problem by using the menu command Event Edit P6 Track Edit to re specify the Program Change data Recording System Exclusive events Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI device or the parameter changes produced when you edit a MIDI track parameter or effect parameter can be realtime recorded on any MIDI track During playback the exclusive messages you recorded will control the track parameters and effect parameters of the song and can be sent to external MIDI devices Note You can use the menu command Put Effect Setting to Track to insert an exclusive event containing the parameter settings for an insert effect master effect or total effect into the desired location of a track so that these settings will automatically switch during playback MIDI GM XG and GS exclusive messages can be recorded on a track but the M3 s tone generator will not respond to these messages Recording internal parameter changes You can use SysEx for automation of internal M3 effects and Program parameters As an example let s record a short phrase on track 1 add an insert effect and then record parameter changes for that effect on an unused track
212. Meaning There is insufficient memory for relative parameters The number of samples in the multisamples would exceed the maximum of 4 000 e Delete multisamples or indices of multisamples to increase the amount of free memory Not enough sample memory Meaning There is insufficient sample memory for sample parameters or sample waveform data e Delete samples to increase the amount of free memory e Use the Media mode EX USB PCM page to unload a loaded PCM expansion option title or use Sampling mode to delete unneeded sample data Not enough sample multisample locations available Meaning The data you attempted to load would exceed the maximum number of multisamples or samples To solve this problem e In Sampling mode execute Delete Multisample or Delete Sample to free a sufficient number and reload the data 219 220 Appendices Not enough song locations available Meaning When loading a SNG file with Append specified you attempted to load more songs than can be loaded e In Sequencer mode execute Delete Song to increase the number of multi s that can be used and then load the song again Not enough song memory Meaning When executing the Sampling mode Time Slice or Save commands the total data for all songs occupies all of the sequence data memory area so that saving is not possible Meaning When sampling to RAM in Sequencer mode it is not possibl
213. N switch Use this to assign individual notes or multiple notes such as chords to each pad 1 8 See page 44 Pads 1 8 Pads 1 8 are velocity sensitive pads that respond to the force with which you press them When you press a pad the assign note or chord up to eight notes with a velocity setting will play You can use the pads in many ways such as using them to play drum sounds to trigger sampled sounds or as chord pads to trigger the KARMA function In the pre loaded programs and combinations the pads are assigned effective chords You can use the CHORD ASSIGN switch to easily assign your own chords MIX ee SOLO CELL MIX VOLUMES BC GE GS ee M E RESET CONTROLS CONTROL ASSIGN Ti o A KARMA Switch 1 8 J SWITCHES 1 8 VALUE m INPUTS REALTIME ji m m m m z g z 2 Z Z z ai Ca N EXTERNAL KARMA Slider 1 8 Z z m m E SLIDERS 1 8 TONE z z 7 Z z ADJUST _ E Tk 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 TRACK lt gt masto SCENES O1 4 5 8 lt PRESS KARMA 1 m O oworr Larcn MODULE 2 6 3 7 4 8 D ty 0 SCEENS 1 8 ON OFF MODULE CONTROL KARMA CHORD PADS 1 8 ASSIGN Performing with KARMA Performing with KARMA in Program mode Performing with KARMA Based on your keyboard playing or on the note data re
214. Note In order to record system exclusive messages make sure that the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Routing setting Enable Exclusive is checked Go to Global mode and verify that this is checked l MIDI Routing a MHIDI Routing x MIDI Out x y O Y CC Control Pads MIDI Out C Fad CC Note Chord Notes KARMA External m Enable KARMA Module to MICI Out m Enable MIDI Into KARMA Module L Enable Start Stop Out in Prog Combi EMIDI Fe m Enable Program Change m Enable After Touch m Bank Change m Enable Control Change m Combination Change m Enable Exclusive 1 Select the desired program for MIDI track 1 and route it to IFX1 Then record a phrase of about sixteen measures e Inthe P0 1 Play REC Program T01 08 page use Program Select to select the desired program for MIDI Track 01 GLOBAL P1 MIDI z o WJ w gt o Vv 7a 92 Creating songs Sequencer mode e Inthe P8 1 IFX Routing T01 08 page route the MIDI Track 01 Bus Select IFX Indiv Out Assign to IFX1 Then in the P8 1 IFX Insert FX Setup page select the desired effect for IFX1 e Select MIDI Track 01 in Track Select Then press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch and then the START STOP switch and record a phrase of about sixteen measures 2 Select Track 09 in Track Select and record parameter changes as desired Note For this example select an empty track If you want
215. O Hap by In a combination the area in square brackets automatically shows a portion of the category name of the program selected for each timbre controlled by the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches This lets you know the timbre whose phrase is being controlled by each KARMA slider and KARMA switches If more than one timbre is being controlled the area in square brackets will indicate MULTI Auto Assign RTC Name See Auto Assign RTC Name on page 118 of the Parameter Guide Specifying the random seeds For each GE realtime parameter group you can specify whether the random seed used to generate random values will be shared between the four KARMA modules 1 Access the Combi P7 1 KARMA1 Random Seeds page COMBI P 1 KARMAT Random Seeds MEEA Duration Cluster Velocity CE A B Pitch Drum 1 4 Start Loop Start Seed Freeze Loop Length Retrigger Each Time a Random Off f Fandom Off j Random Off Normally you will set the four modules to use separate random seeds as shown above A 1 B 2 C 3 and D 4 If you have selected the same GE for two or more KARMA modules and want them to play in unison using the identical random values you must select the same random seed for each of these modules For details please see 7 1 8 Random Seeds on page 169 of the Parameter Guide Linking KARMA settings to Combination changes KARMA settings can be saved individ
216. Patterns 1 and 2 are set to Mode Manual and have identical Sync settings Sync Off o F iF a l 7 TE Sync Beat paren HULIN at DEDI Synchronization with song stop Synchronization with a song in Sequencer mode e When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch the Drum Track function will stop as well as the sequencer e Ifyou want the Drum Track function to start simultaneously with the beginning of recording press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch during the pre count before recording if Trigger Mode is Start Immediately or play the keyboard if Trigger Mode is Wait KBD Trig The Drum Tracks will not be triggered immediately but will be triggered in synchronization with the sequencer the moment recording starts Slave operation Connect the M3 s MIDI IN to your external MIDI device s MIDI OUT or connect the M3 s USB B connector to your computer s USB port Set MIDI Clock Global see PG page 379 to External MIDI or External USB The M3 will synchronize to MIDI realtime clock and realtime command messages it receives from the connected MIDI device Note If the M3 is set to MIDI Clock Auto it will also synchronize to the external MIDI device in the same way if MIDI realtime clock messages are being received from the external device Synchronization to MIDI clock The KARMA function will synchronize to a tempo based on the external MIDI clock timing Synchronization with M
217. Program mode Linking the KARMA performance with the Drum Track pattern start stop Here s how to start stop the KARMA performance along with the Drum Track pattern 1 Access the Prog P0 Play KARMA GE page PROG P Play j l l A gt Ge ra LD J 1 20 00 z Auto RTC Setup KARMA Load GE Options pTCM ResetScenes T Sig BEN TS gt Gated 1277 Endlessly Rising RTC Model GCI Gated CCs 1 m Link To Drum Trk RTC J usin Surface 2 Turn Link To Drum Trk on selected The front panel KARMA LINKED LED will light If Link To Drum Trk is on selected the KARMA function will be linked with the drum track start stop Note You can also make this setting by using the Prog P7 1 KARMA1 GE Setup page Link to DT Link To Drum Trk parameter 3 Turn the KARMA ON OFF switch on Even when you play the keyboard or receive a note on KARMA will not be triggered 4 When you turn the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch on the drum track will start at the specified timing If Trigger Mode is set to Start Immediately KARMA will be triggered and begin operating when you turn the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch on if you re playing the keyboard or if the KARMA LATCH switch is on If Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trig operation will begin when you play the keyboard or when a note on is received If you turn the DRUM TRACK ON OFF swi
218. Program mode these switches select the Program bank In Combination mode these switches have two functions e When you re selecting Combinations they choose the Combination bank e When you re assigning a Program to a timbre within the Combination they select the Program bank In Sequencer mode when a track s Program name is selected these switches change the Program bank 11 VALUE controller When you ve selected a parameter on the TouchView display you can edit it using any of the four front panel VALUE controllers e The VALUE slider e The Inc A and Dec V switches Front and rear panels Front panel e The VALUE dial e The numeric keypad VALUE slider Use this to edit the selected parameter s value This control is convenient for making large changes to the value such as moving quickly to the minimum or maximum setting You can use the value slider as a modulation source but only when the following are true e You re on the Program mode P0 Play Main page and the big Program name is selected or e You re on the Combination mode P0 Play Program T01 08 page and the big combination name is selected In these cases only the value slider sends MIDI CC 18 and can be used as a modulation source Inc A and Dec V switches These are used to increase or decrease the parameter value by individual steps They re convenient for making fine parameter adjustments VALUE dial Use this dial to
219. RH3 Real Weighted Hammer Action 3 keyboard with a heavier feel in the lower register that lightens as you play upward allowing expressive performance with the same keyboard playing feel as a grand piano Excellent connectivity with up to four chan nels of audio input six channels of audio out put and USB A and B As audio inputs the M3 provides two channels of analog and two channels of digital S P DIF input As audio outputs it provides the two main analog channels L MONO R four independent outputs and two digital channels S P DIF There s one type B USB connector that allows MIDI to be sent and received between your computer and the M3 and two type A USB connectors for connecting USB memory or other storage media USB 2 0 is supported for high speed transfer of large amount of data You can resample to a USB storage device such as a hard disk or edit WAVE files If you connect a USB CD RW drive you can resample the songs you create and then use then to burn an original audio CD If the optional EXB FW is installed you can start up the included M3 Plug In Editor in your DAW application allowing you to send and receive MIDI messages as well as two in six out streams of digital audio data between your software and the M3 KKS KORG Komponent System allows flexi ble construction of your hardware system The M3 uses KKS KORG Komponent System in which the sound module and the keyboard assembly KYB
220. RM NEW SONG Track1 MIDI TRACK B1 Reso E Hi C RPPR TB2 4006 Stereo Grand 4 Way Ch z2 RPPR Hofssign Category wes feet oa eater fas poe fee eed ttatine Bank Program gt fade gt Ango gt Ado gt Adaa gt Anao gt Aoga gt Aoga gt Augo Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G EL ELD Ee Ge Ble Ee El Ge 5 In the P3 Track Param MIDI T01 08 and T09 16 page use MIDI Channel to specify the MIDI channel of each track Set the MIDI channel of each M3 track to match the MIDI channel of each external sequencer track Data of the matching channel will be recorded on each M3 track Make sure that Status is set to INT or BTH 6 Press the LOCATE switch to set the location to 001 01 000 7 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch to enter record standby mode 8 Start your external sequencer The M3 s sequencer will automatically begin recording when it receives the MIDI Start message transmitted by your external sequencer 9 When playback has ended stop your external sequencer The M3 s sequencer will automatically stop recording when it receives the MIDI Stop message transmitted by the external sequencer You can also stop recording by pressing the SEQUENCER START STOP switch of the M3 After this you can play back the newly recorded sequence MIDI recording Recording variation 10 In the Global P1
221. S 38 Select 37 68 83 Type 51 Protect 130 R RAM memory Sampling 107 Realtime control 48 Realtime Controls Slider Setting the function 198 Realtime recording 85 87 Rear panel 15 REC Resolution 84 Recording 83 Auto Song Setup 89 Control surface 92 KARMA 180 Multiple MIDI track 90 Parameter change 91 Pattern 93 Realtime 85 87 RPPR 98 Step 88 REMS iv Rename 197 Reset 71 199 Control Surface 43 Realtime control 48 Resonance 58 Restoring the factory setting 201 Ribbon Controller 41 Lock 42 Pitch 56 Ripping 120 RPPR 97 S S P DIF 16 28 107 130 Sample 108 118 Delete unwanted data 117 Drum kit 121 Sampling 107 AUDIO INPUT 1jack 112 123 Edit 110 Effect 114 115 158 KARMA function 122 KARMA function together with an external guitar sound 125 Save 24 139 142 Drum Kit 138 Multisample Sample 121 Program 50 Realtime control 48 Song 103 Template song 103 Track list 152 Scale 74 Create 133 SEQ Mode 81 Sequencer 77 Setup parameter 77 Shortcut 200 Single Program 51 Software 34 Operating system 34 Solo 47 69 80 82 Song 77 Create 83 Edit 95 Effect 157 Playback 80 Recording 83 Select 80 83 Specification 224 Split 71 72 Standard MIDI File 104 Status 73 83 105 Step recording 88 SW1 SW2 41 Feedback level 161 Setting the function 198 Synchronize 105 182 193 System Clock 130 T Tab 17 Select 22 Tap tempo 199 Template song 84 Tempo 84 16
222. The Combination will change when the M3 receives a program change on a channel that matches the global MIDI channel However this is affected by the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Routing Combination Change setting This setting must be checked If this setting is unchecked the For Playing combinations Performing with KARMA and the Drum Track details Combination will not change instead the Program will change for the timbre of the matching channel With the factory settings the global MIDI channel is set to channel 1 If you want to change this setting see MIDI related settings for the entire M3 on page 131 If you want to switch the Program of a timbre via MIDI set the MIDI channel of the timbre using MIDI Channel in the Combi P3 Timbre Param MIDI page When a program change message on a MIDI channel that matched the timbre s channel is received the Program will change for timbres whose Status is INT However program changes for timbres are affected by the Combi P5 1 MIDI Filter1 1 page Program Change setting The result of receiving a program change on the global MIDI channel will depend on the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Routing Combination Change setting Bank select settings You can specify the Program and Combination sound mapping for Bank Select control change messages CC 0 upper byte CC 32 lower byte Make these settings in Bank Map Global P0 Basic Setup System Preference page See PG page 374 MIDI filte
223. The amount of pitch change depends on the Pitch Slope parameter on the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Pitch page Use this setting when you want only to change the pitch such as with tom or cymbal sounds Creating a velocity crossfade For this key let s create a simple velocity crossfade between two stereo drumsamples 1 On the left side of the page make sure that DS1 and DS2 are turned On Using Drum Kits Editing Drum Kits Just press the On Off buttons to toggle them if necessary GLOBAL P5 Drum Kit 8320U a Drumkit UAas2 Sample Setup MECA C4 m Assign Drumsample etn Roms m ejond SD 12 dry ff a2 Roms ots Ott Ly1 88 Bottom el He xfd 828 amp Lin i Ofs Off Lvl 88 Bottom Yel B61 m gt 9942 SD 12 dry mf efd Off E Lin DSS Bottom Yel 601 cMHLo efd OfF E Lin 2 Similarly make sure that DS3 and DS4 are turned Off When they are turned off most of their parameters will be grayed out 3 Select RomS as the Bank for DS1 and DS2 There are three main types of Drumsample Banks Rom Ram and EX For each type you can also choose between looking at mono and stereo Drumsamples For example in the case of Rom RomM selects mono drumsamples and RomS selects stereo drumsamples Stereo drumsamples require twice as many voices as mono drumsamples Note that stereo Drumsamples will require twice as many voices as mono Drumsamples Rom Drumsamples are the built in fac
224. Total Effect is suitable for use with effect types that are applied to the entire mix such as compressor limiter or EQ You can use effects other than double size effects For details please see Total Effect on page 157 63 64 Playing and editing Programs Automatically importing a Program into Sequence mode The Auto Song Setup feature copies the current Program or Combination into a Song and then puts the M3 in record ready mode If inspiration for a phrase or song strikes you while you re playing you can use this function to start recording immediately To do so 1 Hold down the ENTER switch and press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch The Setup to Record dialog box will open and ask Are you sure 2 Press OK You will automatically enter Sequencer mode and will be in the record ready state 3 Press the START STOP switch to start the sequencer and begin recording With the default settings your program performance will be recorded on MIDI track 01 and the Drum Track performance on track 10 Playing and editing Combinations About the M3 s combinations Combinations let you split and layer up to 16 Programs at once A Combination is made up of 16 Timbres Each Timbre has a Program along with parameters for key and velocity zones mixer settings MIDI channel and controller filtering and so on Playing combinations Selecting Combinations There are several differen
225. Turn off power and replace the battery 2 Turn on power You will see this message one last time This is normal 3 Set the date and time in Media mode 4 Turn the power off and then on again Meaning The battery for the clock calendar function has run low To solve this problem e Replace the battery as described in Replacing the calendar battery on page 207 After you install the battery this message will appear once again when you turn on the power but this is not a malfunction Use the Media Utility menu command Set Date Time to set the correct date and time There is not readable data Meaning Either the file size is 0 or the file does not contain data that can be accessed by the load or open operation Alternatively the data is damaged etc and cannot be loaded or accessed This file is already loaded Meaning When loading a divided PCG file you attempted to load a file that had already been loaded e Load the PCG files that have not yet been loaded This title is already loaded Meaning You ve attempted to load an PCM expansion option title that was already loaded Track is full Meaning In the Media mode Make Audio CD page you attempted to insert a track that would make the total exceed 99 tracks e Cut unneeded tracks and then execute the Insert operation once again U Unable to create directory USB Hub Unable to create directory Meaning You attempted to create a directo
226. YBD 61 73 88 s joystick to vary the pitch are provided as additional dedicated routings separate from AMS Note that not all AMS sources may be available for some modulation destinations For details on alternate modulation and AMS please see below e Alternate Modulation Sources AMS on page 607 of the Parameter Guide e Creating Vibrato on page 56 e Pitch EG on page 56 e Filter EG on page 58 e LFO modulation on page 59 e Pan AMS and Intensity on page 61 e LFO1 2 on page 61 Using the AMS Mixers The AMS Mixers combine two AMS sources into one or process an AMS source to make it into something new For instance they can add two AMS sources together or use one AMS source to scale the amount of another You can also use them to change the shapes of LFOs and EGs in various ways modify the response of realtime controllers and more The AMS Mixer outputs appear in the list of AMS sources just like the LFOs and EGs This also means that the original unmodified inputs to the AMS Mixers are still available as well For instance if you use LFO 1 as an input to a AMS Mixer you can use the processed version of the LFO to control one AMS destination and the original version to control another Finally you can cascade the two AMS Mixers together by using AMS Mixer 1 as an input to AMS Mixer 2 Adding two AMS sources together AMS mixers will do different things depending
227. __ akey o001 02240 Restbutton _001 02 360 A akey 00 03120 pod D3key 001 03240 pod Ebkey o01 04000 Eske 001 0424 A Fake o02 oroo0 pd Restbutton 002 01 120 co Gkey 002701360 Restbutton 002 02 000__ pod F2key 002 02240 Tiebutton 002 03 000 A Fzkey 002 03240 Restbutton 002 03 360 pod Akey 002 04 000 Akey 002 0424 A Restbutton 002 04360 8 When you are finished recording press the Done button Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to play back Access the P0 Play REC Play Loop T01 08 page check Track Play Loop for MIDI Track 02 set Loop Start Measure to 001 and Loop End Measure to 002 MIDI track 02 will play measures 1 2 repeatedly 9 If you re not satisfied with the result press the COMPARE switch to return to the state prior to recording and then re record from step 4 amp When you begin step recording all data in the MIDI track that follows the measure where you began recording will be erased You need to be aware of this if you begin step recording from a measure mid way through the song If you want to copy data into a measure that already contains data perform step recording in an empty MIDI track and use the Move Measure or Copy Measure menu commands For details please see Copy Measure on page 298 of the
228. a data filer The M3 can receive MIDI System Exclusive data sent by an external device and save this data to media This is sometimes referred to as Data Filer functionality For details please see Save Exclusive on page 431 of the Parameter Guide Loading data Data that can be loaded Loading data Data that can be loaded Loading from media You can load the following data from media e PCG file Programs Combinations Drum Kits Global settings RADIAS Formant Motions if the optional EXB RADIAS is installed and user Drum Track patterns e SNG file Song and cue list e KMP file Korg Multisample Parameter file KORG format e KSF file Korg Sample File KORG format e KSC file Korg SCript file KORG format e AIF file AIFF file e WAV file WAVE file e SF2 file Sound Font file e AKAI format Program Sample file e KCD file Audio CD track list e MID file Standard MIDI file SMF format e EXL file MIDI exclusive data Loading the preloaded data and demo songs to restore the factory settings You can load the preloaded data and demo songs back into the M3 s internal memory For the procedure please see Loading the preloaded data on page 201 e Preload data Programs Combinations Drum Kits Global settings RADIAS Formant Motions if the optional EXB RADIAS is installed e Demo song data Loading data from media Media Load Loading all
229. ace on the media Please specify whether you want to save the file in divided form e Press the OK button to save the file across multiple volumes of media or press the Cancel button to cancel Not enough Drum Track pattern locations available Meaning When converting a song s user pattern to a user drum track pattern you have exceeded the number of user drum track patterns available for use e As necessary execute the Media mode Save PCG command to save your user drum track patterns In Sequencer mode execute the menu command Erase Drum Track Pattern to increase the number of available drum track user patterns Then try the conversion operation again Not enough Drum Track pattern memory Meaning When converting a song s user pattern to a user drum track pattern there was not enough free memory e As necessary execute the Media mode Save PCG command to save your user drum track patterns In Sequencer mode execute the menu command Erase Drum Track Pattern to erase other user drum track patterns and increase the amount of free memory Then try the conversion operation again Not enough memory Meaning When starting realtime recording in Sequencer mode the minimum amount of free memory such as memory for the BAR events up to the recording start location could not be allocated To solve this problem e Delete other song data etc to increase the amount of free memory Meaning When in Media mode you attempted
230. ach consist of setup parameters he When you turn off the power the settings made in located at the start location and musical data within Sequencer mode and the song data and any user the track The master track consists of tempo and time pattern data that you recorded will not be backed signature data up If you wish to keep this data you must save it on USB storage media before turning off the power or perform a MIDI data dump to save the Setup parameters amp Musical data data on an external data filer etc Each song consists of MIDI tracks 1 16 a master track various song parameters such as the song name settings for the X Y control function settings for the KARMA function Drum Track function effect settings RPPR function parameters and 100 user patterns If you wish to save the programs track parameters effects and KARMA function settings etc selected for a song as a template song use the menu command Save Template Song Up to 128 such songs can be created in the M3 Sampling memory Sample In Track Sampling function Routing P8 t MIDI Routing 1 2 i KARMA P7 Pads P1 7 8 Tone Adjust P0 8 X Y P1 2 3 4 5 Controllers P1 6 DrumTrk Prog P1 1 Audio Input PO 7 Pattern P10 1 RPPR Setup P10 Cue List P11 MIDI Track 0
231. ack in an unnatural way By executing the Crossfade Loop function you can eliminate this problem so that the loop sounds right See Crossfade Loop on page 366 of the Parameter Guide Loop settings 1 Select the sample for which you wish to make loop settings To select the sample use the Sample Sample Select or Index parameters of P2 Loop Edit page or of the PO Recording Recording page amp If you use Sample Sample Select to select the sample be aware that the assignment to the index will also change Loop 2 In the P2 Loop Edit page use the Loop check box to turn loop playback on off for the sample Looping will be turned on if the box is checked This will operate between the addresses you specify in step 3 Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Loop Edit P2 Loop Edit Loop On Start gt End Loop Start gt End Loop Start End is repeated Loop Off Start gt End SAMPLING P2 Loop Edit aoe news Sample G00 NEWF ILE Start ppaapgi z m Loop _ Rev _ 1246 LoopS G aG845653 E Loop Lock LoopTune 60 jeoom EEEN E Use Zero aee To play the sample press the key to which the sample is assigned the key range that is highlighted in Keyboard amp Index A sample waveform that was sampled with Sample Mode set to Stereo will be displayed in two levels The upper level is the L channel and the lower level is the R channel 3 Spec
232. ad 1 8 the assigned chord up to eight notes with a velocity setting will play and the KARMA function will start generating a phrase or pattern Effective chords are already assigned for the pre loaded programs You can play the pads together with the keyboard For details on how to assign chords to the pads please see Drum amp Chord Pads on page 44 Making the performance continue after you re move your hand from the keyboard or pads 1 8 LATCH switch You can make the KARMA function continue playing even after you remove your hand from the keyboard or pads 1 8 LED lit Latch is on The performance will continue even after you remove your hand from the keyboard or pads 1 8 LED dark Latch is off The performance will stop when you remove your hand from the keyboard or pads 1 8 Modifying the phrase or pattern generated by the KARMA module KARMA sliders 1 8 KARMA switches 1 8 KARMA SCENE 1 8 switches Parameters useful for controlling the phrase or pattern are already assigned to the KARMA sliders 1 8 and KARMA switches 1 8 and KARMA SCENE 1 8 switches You can operate these controllers to create a wide range of changes in the phrase or pattern that s playing 1 Access the Prog P0 Play KARMA RTC page PROG PA Play KARMA RTC J 120 50 _ccznote MIT LOG e E E AEA E A AA A A r G l A gt Ge EE El Fhunky wah 1 HET Rhythm Suing AIT 63 E
233. adjusts the volume of the MAIN OUTPUT L MONO R outputs as well as the volume of the headphone jack It does not affect any of the other outputs including S P DIF OUT MAIN the AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 or the optional EXB FW output 2 Control Surface MIXER amp MODULATION The Control Surface is located at the left of the display and consists of eight sliders eight switches and a control assign section that selects the function to be controlled You can use the Control Surface to perform a wide range of control such as adjusting the oscillator timbre track and audio input mixers editing sounds controlling the KARMA function and transmitting MIDI messages to external devices You can freely switch the Control Surface between these functions without losing the contents of your editing As explained below you can use the front panel CONTROL ASSIGN switches to switch between the various control surface functions You can also view and edit the control surface settings on the display P0 Control Surface page in each mode CONTROL ASSIGN MIXER switch T1 8 T9 16 In Program mode the control surface will control the volume play mute and solo of oscillators 1 and 2 and the Drum Track In Sampling mode the control surface will control the volume play mute and solo of the multisamples oscillators In Combination and Sequencer modes the control surface will control volume play mute and solo of
234. ails please see Protecting the memory on page 130 About MIDI Track status You can specify whether each track will use the internal M3 sounds or use an external MIDI tone generator When the Track Status P2 MIDI page is set to INT or BTH operating M3 s keyboard and controllers will sound and control M3 s own tone generator When Status is set to EXT EX2 or BTH operating M3 s keyboard and controllers will sound and control the external tone generator The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must match the MIDI Channel of the track that is set to EXT EX2 or BTH pa w WJ w ao v N keyboar Keyboar Keyboar keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar keyboar Status Ea E gt 2TH ety Ep e ore EPint ET A Ez HIDI Channel rai fae fos oa os es ar ae Bank Select when Status Ex gt maa E If you wish to use the Sequencer mode of the instrument as a 16 track multi timbral tone generator select INT or BTH For details please see Status on page 230 of the Parameter Guide Synchronizing the sequencer with an external MIDI device The record playback tempo of M3 s sequencer can be synchronized to an external MIDI device such as a sequencer or rhythm machine For details please see Synchronizing the playback of the KARMA function Drum Track function or sequencer on page 646 of the Parameter Guide 105 Creating songs Sequencer mode 106 Sampli
235. ain how a combination saved in bank INT A can be loaded into USER AOOO 1 Move to the Bank INT A directory and select the Combination that you want to load PCG file Combinations Bank INT A The procedure is as follows e Perform steps 1 3 under Loading all Programs Combinations and Drum Kits on page 145 Select the PCG file containing the data you want to load it will be highlighted and press the Open button e Press Combinations to highlight it and press the Open button e Press Bank INT A to highlight it and press the Open button e Press the scroll bar to find the Combination you want to load and highlight it in the display Alternatively you could select any file since the desired file can be selected later from the dialog box MEDIA ANE WFILE PCG Combinations Bank l A BAG Particles amp waves BAL WS Layer Keys BeS Orchestra amp Tim 8K 61 61 2666 66 86 88 8K 41 61 2666 6 66 68 8K 41 41 2666 66 66 68 Note When you press the keyboard of the M3 the selected combination will sound However the internal programs will be used as the program of each timbre 2 Press the Load button Alternatively choose the menu command Load Selected A dialog box will appear teat a combination OOOO O Combination gt l 3 Locale Five To Combination gt ME haere n hs Cancel OK 3 Use the Combination upper line to select the
236. al P0 4 Each of these can be written into their respective memory area This data can also be saved to various types of media in Media mode For details please see Writing Global settings user Drum Kits on page 141 Saving to media Media Save on page 142 amp The Compare function that lets you return to the state prior to your editing is not available in Global mode Adjusting the way in which velocity or aftertouch will affect the volume or tone You can adjust the way in which changes in velocity or aftertouch will affect the volume or tone This lets you for example make the volume of the notes more consistent even when they are played with varying dynamics Each curve has its own character so you can select the curve that is appropriate for your own playing dynamics playing style and the effect that you wish to obtain see Velocity Curve on page 372 of the Parameter Guide Velocity Curve selects the velocity curve and After Touch Curve selects the aftertouch curve 129 130 Settings for the entire M3 Global mode Bypassing the effects If the Effect Global SW IFX 1 5 Off MFX1 amp 2 Off and TFX Off items are checked the insert effects master effect will respectively be bypassed Insert effects master effects and total effect can be bypassed globally This applies to the entire M3 regardless of the mode For example if you ve connected the M3 s ou
237. al memory and can be selected for any song User patterns Each song can have up to 100 patterns When using a pattern in a different song use the Utility menu commands Copy Pattern or Copy From Song etc to copy the pattern The pattern length can be specified in units of a measure Each pattern consists of musical data for one track It is not possible to create patterns that contain multiple tracks You can use these patterns by placing them in a MIDI track Put to Track menu command or by copying them Copy to Track menu command You can also use patterns with the RPPR function of a song How Sequencer patterns are related to Drum Track patterns The patterns of the Drum Track function you use with a Program or Combination are related to Sequencer mode patterns as follows Preset patterns are a common library that can also be used by the Drum Track function User patterns cannot be directly used by the Drum Track function but they can be converted to user Drum Track patterns and used with a Program or Combination If you convert a user pattern it will be stored in internal memory and this data will not disappear even when you turn off the power Cue List The cue list allows you to playback multiple songs in succession The M3 lets you create twenty cue lists Each cue list lets you connect up to 99 songs and specify the number of times that each song will repeat The menu command Convert to Song lets you convert t
238. altime and memorized X Y MOTION function g nes for each program combination or song X Y control Oscillator volume synth parameters and effect parameters can be controlled Combination Timbre track volume synth parameters and effect parameters can be Sequencer modes controlled KARMA Modules 1 Module in Program Mode 4 Modules in Combination and Sequencer Modes plus Master control module GE 2 093 Presets 1 024 User GE KARMA Controllers ON OFF LATCH MODULE CONTROL KARMA SLIDERS 1 8 KARMA SWITCHES 1 8 KARMA SCENES 1 5 4 8 8 scenes KARMA Wave Sequence Control change Multisamples via the KARMA engine Freeze Randomize function Time Signature Control Auto RTC Real Time Control setup Preset patterns 671 patterns Held in common with sequencer preset patterns 1 000 patterns Patterns created in Sequencer mode can be converted to Drum Track User patterns drum track user patterns Trigger Mode Sync Zone settings can be specified 16MIDI Tracks amp 1 Master Track 128 Songs Resolution 480 ppq parts per quarter note Tempo 40 00 300 00 bpm 1 100 bpm resolution Up to 210 000 MIDI events Sequencer 16 preset 16 user template songs 20 cue lists Songs can be arranged consecutively or repeatedly in up to 99 Cue List function i steps A cue list can be converted back into a song 671 Presets 100 User Patterns per Song PAUPAR REES RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording 1 set per Song Korg M3 for
239. ameter This command specifies the number of measures and the time signature of the selected pattern For details please see Pattern Parameter on page 305 of the Parameter Guide Erase Pattern This command erases the data from the selected pattern For details please see Erase Pattern on page 306 of the Parameter Guide Copy Pattern This command copies the settings and musical data of the selected pattern to another pattern For details please see Copy Pattern on page 306 of the Parameter Guide Bounce Pattern This command combines the musical data of the bounce source pattern and bounce destination pattern and places the combined musical data in the bounce destination For details please see Bounce Pattern on page 306 of the Parameter Guide Get From Track This command takes musical data from a MIDI track and loads it into the specified pattern For details please see Get From Track on page 306 of the Parameter Guide Put To Track This command places a pattern into a MIDI track For details please see Put To Track on page 306 of the Parameter Guide Copy To Track This command copies the specified area of musical data from the specified pattern to a MIDI track as musical data For details please see Copy To Track on page 307 of the Parameter Guide Convert to Drum Trk Pattern Converts the specified pattern to a user Drum Track pattern For details please see Convert to Drum
240. ample in a drum kit 121 Saving multisamples and samples 121 Sampling in Program Combination and Sequencer modes ceccccecccccsecs 122 Resampling a phrase generated by the KARMA FONCION eie e ath baa E A 122 Sampling only an external guitar sound while listening to phrases generated by the KARMA TUNCHON ea E E NA 123 Sampling a mix of the phrases generated by the KARMA function together with an external guitar SOU arna aaa a e a a aaa 125 In Track Sampling ccc cece cece e eee 126 Resampling a song to create a WAVE file 127 Settings for the entire M3 Global mode 129 How Global mode is structured 129 Global settings cccccccececcccees 129 BASIC setU verrine rea E EET EENE RTEA 129 System preference cc cece eenen asas 130 Audio input settings cece cece eee 131 MIDI Basic ROUtINg cc ccc cece ee ee eee 131 External control ccc cece cece eee ee eees 131 Pedal and other controller settings 132 Assigning MIDI CC s to KARMA X Y and Pad CONTONE S vsans 5 5 ono ante da nen des tad e E nan 133 Creating user scaleS ccc ccc cece eee eens 133 Setting Category Names cece cece eee 134 Using Drum Kits ccccececccceces 135 Drum Kit Overview ccc ccc eeeeeee 135 Editing Drum Kitse cea errar ae can piade EE 136 Saving Drum KIS os 324lStslstweeeeG w
241. an insert effect sent to a AUX bus and sampled 11 Access the P8 IFX IFX page and edit the parameters of the insert effect you selected Press the IFX 1 5 tabs and edit the parameters Effect Parameters Effect On Off P Effect Preset Type Trim Bandi dB Band2 dB Band3 dB Band4 dB Laacce E e etn a 5 5 5 Ff eee oem errr 64a Fa Bands dB ere ee rer Getrag Pll Band dB fines ened dap Band dB a Wet Dry fost Wet Dry Effect 1 On Off Turns the insert effect on off This is linked with the on off setting in the Insert FX Setup page P Effect Preset Selects an effect preset The M3 s internal memory contains effect presets which are parameter settings for each effect from 001 Stereo Compressor through 170 Early Reflections Effect parameters you edit are saved as part of each program but effect presets allow you to save favorite parameter settings for each effect If you ve come up with an effect setting you like use the menu command Write FX Preset to save it as a preset so that you can easily recall it in a different program or mode For details on the individual effects please see e Dynamics Dynamic on page 461 of the Parameter Guide e EQ and Filters EQ Filter on page 465 of the Parameter Guide e Overdrive Amp models and Mic models OD Amp Mic on page 473 of the Parameter Guide e Chorus Flanger and Phase
242. an use the foot switch to turn the sostenuto or soft pedal effect on off to turn the KARMA function on off to switch programs or combinations or to control tap tempo You can use the foot pedal to control volume or modulation PEDAL f switch DAMPER 4 IN S P DIFI OUT PEDAL SWITCH DAMPER Connecting a damper pedal This pedal can provide a damper effect as you play This instrument also supports half damping Here s how to connect an optional Korg DS 1H damper pedal to the DAMPER jack and use it to control the half damper effect 1 Connect an optional DS 1H damper pedal to the DAMPER jack You ll be able to control the half damper effect if you ve connected the DS 1H If you ve connected a different switch type pedal it will function as a damper switch 2 After you turn on the power set the switch polarity and adjust the half damper response to ensure that the half damper pedal works correctly See PG page 387 and page 399 Connecting a foot switch If you connect an on off type foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 pedal switch to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack you can use it to turn the sostenuto or soft pedal effect on off to control tap tempo or to apply modulation to a sounds or an effect This switch will always function in the same way regardless of the Program Combination or Song you ve selected You can assign the function in the Global mode 1 Connect a foot switch such
243. ange to 20 and its Curve to Linear Notice that the graphic now shows the two ranges tapering into one another Between 80 and 100 DS2 will fade out and DS1 will fade in creating a gradual velocity transition instead of a hard split CETE Yd C4 m Assign GLOBAL P5 Drum Kit 8320U A Drumkit UABSZ Bottom Yelocity EEL m fade Range Et curve i aie Bottom elocity EEL sfade Range Off Curve Lin Bottom Yelocity EE Off curve amp Lin Fine tuning the sound of each sample 1 If you like adjust the Levels for the two Drumsamples This can be very useful in creating a smooth velocity split or crossfade 2 As necessary specify the tuning EG parameters and filter Access the P5 Drum Kit Sample Parameter page Adjust Tune Attack Amp EG Attack Decay Amp EG Decay Cutoff and Resonance for each drumsample 3 You can also edit the drive boost and EQ for each drumsample Access the P5 Drum Kit Drive EQ page Adjust Drive Low Boost and 3 Band EQ Gain dB for each drumsample For details please see 5 2 Sample Parameters on page 394 of the Parameter Guide 4 Repeat Specifying the key to which you will assign a drumsample on page 136 to set up each key of the Drum Kit 5 You can also copy settings from one key to another using the Copy Key Setup menu command Using Exclusive Groups 1 Access the P5 Drum Kit Voice Mixer page 2 Use the Exclusive Gro
244. anks INT A G USER A G e Global settings Global P0 Basic Setup P4 Category e User drum kits OOO INT 143 U G e User Drum Track patterns U000 U999 See page 185 e User template songs U00 U15 Song settings such as the song name and tempo track settings see PG page 196 KARMA and effect settings can be saved written to internal memory However the musical data for song tracks and patterns are not saved to internal memory Furthermore settings that govern how the musical data is played back such as Meter Metronome PLAY MUTE Track Play Loop including Start End measure and RPPR settings will not be saved either Use the Sequencer mode menu command Save Template Song to write this data for details please see Save Template Song Save as User Template Song on page 281 of the Parameter Guide e Effect presets For each effect you can write parameter settings into internal memory by using the menu command Write FX Preset amp RAM Multisamples and Samples must be saved to and loaded from media they cannot be written into internal memory This means that if you turn the power off and then on once again but do not re load the necessary RAM Multisamples or Samples any data that uses such multisamples or samples will not sound as intended This can include Combinations Programs Drum Kits and Multisamples amp Data that you edit in Sequencer or Sampling mode can only be saved to media it
245. ard Track 59 61 KKS KORG Komponent System 8 L Layer 52 71 72 LFO 54 Modulation 59 Speed 54 LFO1 LFO2 54 Link 186 Load 145 Bank 146 Preload data 201 Song SNG 146 System update data 147 Load GE Opt 172 Local control 32 131 LOCATE 81 Location 81 Loop 81 116 Loop All Tracks 86 Low Pass filter 58 M M3 Editor 34 M3 Plug In Editor 34 M3 M 9 MacOS X 36 Manual punch in 86 Master effect 153 156 Master track 78 Media 139 223 Load 145 Setup 143 Types of media 142 Media Info 152 Memory protect 142 Memory structure 135 Menu command 18 24 MIDI Channel 40 66 73 MIDI data dump 140 MIDI device Connection 33 MIDI filter 73 MIDI Program Change 40 66 MIDI Tempo Sync 161 Mode 20 Effect 154 Page structure 51 70 79 110 129 Select 22 Monophony_ 52 74 Multi multitrack recording 87 Multi REC 87 Multisample 52 109 119 Select 52 Musical data 77 Mute 47 69 80 82 N Name Edit 197 Notch filter 58 Note Number 42 O Open Sampling System 107 Option 227 Install 202 Overdub 86 Overwrite 85 P Pad 44 Assign 44 Assigning sample 111 Page Select 22 Pan 60 68 83 Panel SW Solo Mode 47 69 82 Parameter 17 23 Pattern 78 93 Perf RTP 165 Pitch 56 Pitch bend 56 Pitch EG 56 Playback 80 Polyphony 51 52 74 Portamento 57 74 Power 25 130 Power cable 25 Power On Mode 130 Preload data 201 Index Program 37 83 Edit 47 51 Effect 155 EXB RADIA
246. are received For example this is convenient when you want to play the keyboard while listening to the phrases generated by KARMA 4 Play the keyboard or pads to trigger KARMA KARMA will begin generating its performance Note If the KARMA LINKED LED is lit the performance will not begin when you simply play the keyboard or pads You must also press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch and then press a key or pad to start the drum track phrase The KARMA performance will begin simultaneously 5 KARMA has up to eight scenes When you press one of the SCENES 1 5 4 8 switches to change MIX PLAY MUTE SOLO ext x2 me ma xs mmi mm2 m s CECE T ses conTROLS LETE SWITCHES 1 8 CONTROL MIX VOLUMES ASSIGN VALUE CUTOFF _ RESONANCE EG INTENSITY EG RELEASE __USER1_ UseR2 UseRa USERA INPUTS i _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ s KARMA Slider z z z Z 7 ja SLIDERS 1 8 ie a te ida a tie jie UF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 6 14 7 15 8 16 PADS 1 8 TRACK KARMA MASTER SCENES 1 4 5 8 lt PRESS KARMA veL 1 2 O pean poor foe ee s 3 e e 9 O ON OFF 9 KARMA LINKED KARMA KARMA O SCENES 1 5 4 8 dai LED ON OFF LATCH Listening to the demo songs scenes the KARMA parameter values assigned to the KARMA switches and KARMA sliders will change instantly giving you a wide range of variety in the generated
247. as of April 2007 External USB storage media Functions available with all media The M3 supports USB external storage class devices e Saving and Loading files Media mode including hard drives flash drives magneto optical You can save and load any data stored in memory disks floppy disks etc Both MS DOS FAT16 and For details on M3 file types please see Files FAT32 formats are supported with the following directories and icons on page 405 of the capacities Parameter Guide Loading or saving divided files is FAT32 up to 2 Terabytes 2 000 Gigabytes supported for USB media FAT16 up to 4 Gigabytes e Utility operations Media mode For more information including requirements for You can copy or format media external USB storage media and details on connecting e Sampling resampling Program Combination USB devices please see Connecting a USB device Sequencer Sampling modes HDD CD R RW etc on page 33 If Save to MEDIA sampled resampled Wave lend files will be written directly to media CD R RW Internal and USB e Wave file playback Pednencer Media modes The M3 can read and write UDF format CD R RW Some limitations apply 7 disks For more information see CD R RW disks on e Audio CD creation Media mode OESP OA paR FOr ea aA e You can create audio CDs from WAVE files using The M3 can also play and record audio CDs CD DA either internal or USB CD R RW drives and read 1507660 level 1 CDs e Conver
248. ate eeeewe 138 Loading amp saving data and creating CDs ee00002139 SAVING Gala ics eer ennaa teecweteaes 139 Types of data that can be saved 139 Writing to internal Memory eee ee 140 Saving to media Media Save 06 142 Using the M3 as a data filer 0 008 144 LOAGING Cala 6 iis snare Oe ciscteeees 145 Data that can be loaded c cece eee 145 Loading data from media Media Load ccc cece cece ee eeeeeeees 145 Media utility essssssssesesosesoooo 148 File copying deleting and formatting Meaid Utility sc isco centage se EAEra EER 148 Creating audio CDs ssesscssecsoees 150 Creating and playing audio CDs Media Make Audio CD Play Audio CD 150 Creating audio CDS cece ccc cc eee eens 150 Viewing information about media Media Info 152 yi yil Table of Contents Using Effects sese 153 An overview of the M3 s effects 153 EMCCULV DGS sultanate nee ctaeuuise nes cient 153 EMCCUITO eea a teewia de eteuraeen guess 153 Effects in each Mode ccc eee ee ees 154 Routing effect settingsS ceceeceees 155 Program Effects settingS 0cceeeees 155 Using effects in Combinations and Songs 157 Effect settings in Sampling mode 158 Effect settings for the audio inputs 159 Dynamic modulation MIDI Tempo Sync and Co
249. ates Remote General Computer Name Hardware Advanced Add Hardware Wizard z The Add Hardware Wizard helps you install hardware a Add Hardware Wizard Device Manager The Device Manager lists all the hardware devices installed on your computer Use the Device Manager to change the properties of any device Biers 5 Deve ase Hardware Profiles Hardware profiles provide a way for you to set up and store Za different hardware configurations Hardware Profiles 4 In What action do you want Windows to take choose Ignore or Warn and then click OK If necessary you can change this setting back to its original state after you ve installed the KORG USB MIDI driver or the FireWire Audio MIDI driver Driver Signing Options During hardware installation Windows might detect software that has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows Tell me why this testing is important What action do you want Windows to take Ignore Install the software anyway and don t ask for my approval Q Warn Prompt me each time to choose an action Block Never install unsigned driver software Administrator option Make this action the system default Installing the KORG MIDI driver and the editor software in Mac OS X Installing the software You ll need to run the installer separately for each software item such as the KORG USB MIDI driver and M3 Editor Plug In Editor
250. attern will be ready to start It will start when you play the keyboard or when a MIDI note on is received This will occur if Trigger Mode is Wait KBD If the front panel KARMA LINKED and KARMA ON OFF switches are lit the KARMA performance will start stop together with the drum track Adjusting the performance tempo 1 You can use the TEMPO knob or the TAP tevo TEMPO switch to adjust the performance tempo This will change the J value located in the upper right of the display You can adjust the o tempo in a range of 40 00 300 00 The LED located above the TAP TEMPO switch will blink at intervals of a quarter note J As an alternative to using the TEMPO knob or the TAP TEMPO switch you can choose J in the display use numeric keys 0 9 to enter the tempo and then press the ENTER switch You can also use the VALUE controller to set the tempo The LED will blink at the tempo you specify Note The setting of the TEMPO knob is also saved when you write a program A If the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page MIDI Clock parameter is set to External MIDI External USB or set to Auto and MIDI Clock messages are being received the display will indicate J EXT and the M3 will be synchronized to an external MIDI device In this case you won t be able to change the tempo by operating the M3 lt W tes _ E gt om an 185 186 Drum Track function Selecting a Drum Tra
251. bal P0 Basic Setup System Preference page See PG page 374 MIDI filter settings You can use MIDI filters to specify whether program changes and bank select messages will be transmitted and or received Make these settings in the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Routing page See page 131 and PG page 383 Performing with KARMA and the Drum Track Based on your keyboard playing or on the note data received from MIDI IN the KARMA function automatically generates a diverse variety of phrases or patterns such as guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns You can use the KARMA sliders and the KARMA switches to freely modify these phrases or patterns For more about the KARMA function please see page 163 The Drum Track function plays a rich variety of drum patterns using the M3 s high quality drum programs You can play programs along with the drum patterns Of course phrases generated by KARMA can be synchronized with Drum Track patterns and used together with them For more about the Drum Track function please see page 185 Using Controllers The M3 provides a control surface with sliders and switches an X Y control function and pads giving you a wide range of ways in which to vary the sound In addition to a keyboard the M3 KYBD 61 73 88 provides a joystick ribbon controller and SW1 SW2 switches to let you control the sound These controls let you modify the tone pitch volume effect
252. beyond the cutoff frequency as well as a slightly more delicate resonance Many classic analog synths used this general type of filter Serial and Parallel Routing Serial gt Filter A Low Pass Filter B High Pass Parallel Filter A Low Pass ame J Filter B High Pass 57 58 Playing and editing Programs Filter Types This selects the parts of the sound which will be affected by the filter as described below With the Serial and Parallel routings you can independently set the types for Filter A and Filter B The filters will produce very different results depending on the selected filter type PROG P3 1 Filterl p _ Filter 1 E Filter Routing Single Parallel eee Serial Q 246i 4Pole ctl SE Filter B _ Bypass Type Band Pass _ Bypass Frequency 32 Trim 99 Frequency 38 Trim 199 Resonance BA AMS Int 4r Resonance 42 AMS Int 50 AMS J5 CC o1 AMS Sw 1 CC 60 Output 9 AMS Int 00 Output 99 AMS Int a0 AMSG Velocity AMSG Velocity Low Pass 12dB oct This cuts out the parts of the sound which are higher than the cutoff frequency Low Pass is the most common type of filter and is used to make bright timbres sound darker High Pass 12dB oct This cuts out the parts of the sound which are lower than the cutoff frequency You can use this to make timbres sound thinner or more buzzy Band Pass 6dB oct This c
253. ble while the power is on Note In order to use hot plugging the USB device you are connecting must also support hot plugging 8 USB devices maximum M3 has two separate USB 2 0 A ports and can support up to 8 USB devices simultaneously Note that it doesn t matter how the devices are connected even if you use hubs or different ports the maximum is always 8 devices USB Power Some USB devices get their power from the USB connection These are called bus powered devices and they are supported by M3 33 34 Setup Other USB devices may require a separate power source in addition to the USB connection in this case you ll need to use an appropriate power adaptor for the device There is a limitation to the total current supplied to all connected USB devices as defined by the USB specification If the total current consumption of the connected devices exceeds this limit the M3 may not correctly recognize the connected USB devices If this happens an error message of USB Hub Power Exceeded will appear To avoid this problem if you connect more than one USB device please use a self powered USB hub in self powered mode For details on connections and settings for your hub please refer to its documentation For details on the electrical current used by a specific USB device refer to its owner s manual Installing the software About the software The most recent versions of the applica
254. box When you execute loading the KSC file will be loaded along with the SNG file Use PCG Contents to specify the data that you want to load If you want to load all the data in the PCG file select All Use Select SNG Allocation to specify the destination to which the song data will be loaded Append will load the song into the song number that follows the song s currently existing in internal memory without leaving a vacant number Clear will erase all songs from internal memory and load the songs into the numbers from which they were saved Use Select KSC Allocation to specify where the multisamples and samples will be loaded Append will load the data into the next available vacant numbers following the multisamples and samples that are already in sample memory RAM Clear will erase all multisamples and samples from sample memory RAM and load the data in the same configuration with which it was saved 4 Press the OK button to execute loading amp Never remove the media while data is being loaded Loading M3 system update data You can update the M3 s system by downloading the most recent version of the system file from the Korg website http www korg com to your computer and loading it into the M3 For details on the procedure refer to the Korg website and to Update System Software on page 400 of the Parameter Guide Use the Global mode
255. by vacuum tubes and transistors Table of Contents Table of Contents Handling of this product cece eee iil Regarding the display cece eee e eens iil Data handling ccc ccc cece eeeee iil COPYRIGHT WARNING 0cc cece eeeees iii About this manual ccc cece eee eee ees iv a1 0 a ee eae ee ae eee ee ee eee 1 Playing Programs and Combinations 2 Listening to the demo songs 0eeeeees 5 Introduction tothe M3 7 Main FeatureS essssesoecsoecoeecsoeeooe 7 Front and rear panels ccccccsecccees 9 Front panel 0 ccc cc ccc ccc cece eee eee eeeees 9 Rear panel Bottom panel ccc cece eee 15 Objects in the display ccc cece eee ees 17 Basic Information cccecececcscecs 20 About the M3 s modes 00eeeeeeeeeees 20 Basic ODGCIAlIONS 5055505050 gwanasawres eee aeweuee 22 SQOUD E ce reeesssss bseswe eo Turning the power on off see0 25 Connecting the AC cable 0c eee 25 Turning the power ON cece ee eee eee 25 Turning the power Off cece cece eee eee 25 CONRGCIIONS 4 6 bc enaA 26 Connecting audio equipment 27 Connecting a damper pedal foot switch or foot DeGdl24apade re TI EITEL TEE EE IEE TOTE TTT 29 Connecting a COMputer cece cece eee ees 30 Connecting MIDI devices 0 cece eee 33
256. cannot be saved in internal memory About preloaded data and preset data Preloaded data refers to the data that is loaded in the M3 when it is shipped from the factory You are free to rewrite this data and with the exception of the demo songs the data will be written to the location listed in Writing to internal memory This data is stored in the M3 s system area You can reload this data into internal memory by using the Global mode menu command Load Preload Demo Data Preset data is data that cannot be rewritten by the Write operation This includes the following data e GM program banks G g 1 g 9 g d e Template drum kits 144 GM 152 GM e Preset template songs POO P15 e Preset patterns P000 P522 Saving to media CDs and USB media The following data can be saved to various types of media e PCG file Programs Combinations Drum kits Global settings RADIAS formant motions if the optional EXB RADIAS is installed and user Drum Track patterns The data that was checked in the check boxes of the Save dialog box will be saved e SNG file Song and cue list e KSC KMP KSF files Lists of sample and multisamples KSC file multisamples KMP file samples KSF file e KCD file These are track lists for audio CD tracks e EXL file System exclusive data from an external device that was saved on the M3 This allows the M3 to be used as a data filer e MID file Saves a Sequencer
257. cated editor via the FireWire connector You can connect the M3 to your computer in the following three ways e Connect the M3 s USB B connector to a USB port of your computer e Connect the M3 s MIDI connectors to your computer via a commercially available MIDI interface e Install the optional EXB FW and connect the M3 s FireWire connector to a FireWire port of your computer USB connection and setup If you connect the M3 s USB B connector to your computer you ll be able to send and receive note data and other performance information and sound settings between your computer and the M3 as MIDI messages Note The USB B connector of the M3 is only able to transmit and receive MIDI data amp Before you connect the M3 to your computer via USB you must install the KORG USB MIDI driver in your computer The driver must be installed for each USB port you use If you connect the M3 to a USB port other than the one you used when installing the KORG USB MIDI driver you ll need to install the driver again For details please see Installing the software on page 34 1 Using a USB cable connect the USB B connector of the M3 to the USB connector of your computer Connection for the M3 6 1 73 88 Computer USB cable Ho usBB M k or an m g 4 Hi UD Oo0o0oc
258. ce of the M3 s KARMA function and sequencer etc while you sample only the external audio from the input jacks In Sequencer mode you can also sample an audio source that s being played along with the song and the system will automatically create MIDI notes to play the new sample in sync with the song You might use this to record a vocal or guitar part for instance This is called In Track Sampling Resampling a phrase generated by the KARMA function You can resample the sound of a program or combination being played by yourself or by the KARMA function In this example we ll explain how to sample a KARMA generated phrase in Program mode You can sample in a similar way in Combination or Sequencer modes as well 1 Press the MODE PROG switch to enter Program mode and select the program that you want to resample 2 Turn on the KARMA function KARMA ON OFF switch lit play the keyboard and verify that a phrase is generated 3 Access the P0 Play Sampling Audio In page Sampling Audio In PROG P Play Input i Use Global Setting input Level Pari Bus Select FA BUS AURA BUS Send Send Sampling Setup M Source Bus L R Trigger Note On L Save ta RAMH Mode E Steren recording Level dE oT Contra Surface 4 If Use Global Setting is checked executing the menu command Auto Sampling Setup will
259. ceived from MIDI IN USB B the KARMA function automatically generates a diverse variety of phrases or patterns such as guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns You can use the KARMA sliders and the KARMA switches to freely modify these phrases or patterns The M3 contains pre loaded programs and combinations that take full advantage of the KARMA function covering a wide range of instruments playing techniques and musical genres In these programs and combinations the parameters most useful for controlling the KARMA function have been assigned to the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches Performing with KARMA in Program mode In Program mode you can use one KARMA module to generate a phrase or pattern appropriate for the sound of the program Selecting a Program and switching KARMA on off 1 Press the MODE PROG switch to enter Program mode and select the desired program See Selecting Programs on page 37 PROG P Play ol Bank INT A gt 48 Bass Sunth Base J 120 08 022 Funkylicious Loos ED SW Swi Mod CCHSO SW J amp Ribbon ig ERA RT Control g m Low MidtH2 Mig High aa 168 466k 81 6 67 6 DRUM TRACK Pattern gt Preset gt P4QG Hard House 6 HardHouse Program mO 1 A116 Hard House Kit As you step through the programs you ll find some programs for which the KARMA ON OFF switch LED is lit Press a key or a pad 1 8 and the KARMA function
260. cer mode PG p 143 p 222 CC control does not work Is the Enable CC Control check box checked PG p 33 p 145 p 224 Are the X Y X mode and Y mode settings appropriate PG p 33 p 145 p 224 In Combination or Sequencer mode are the Enable Combi X Y CC or Enable Seq X Y CC check boxes checked PG p 146 p 225 Have you checked the Enable Program X Y CC check box so that the CC control of a program can be reproduced in Combination or Sequencer mode PG p 146 p 222 Drum Kits The drumsample s pitch does not change You have left the Assign check box unchecked and want to play the drumsample at the adjacent right a semitone lower but the pitch does not change e If you have selected a drum program in Program mode and then want to edit the drum kit in Global mode go to the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Pitch page and set Pitch Slope to 1 0 before you enter Global mode PG p 40 Effects Effects are not applied Have you selected effect program 000 e Select an effect other than 000 No Effect for IFX1 5 MEX 1 2 or TFX When CONTROL ASSIGN REALTIME CONTROL is on have you used switches 1 8 to turn the effect off Are the Effect Global SW IFX 1 5 Off MFX1 amp 2 Off or TFX Off Global P0 Basic Setup page settings checked PG p 373 If you are in Combination and Sequencer mode and master effects are not applied when you raise the Send1 or Send2 of the timbre
261. cessful if you lower the writing speed PG p 435 Are you using blank media e If using CD R please use new media If using CD RW use the menu command Erase CD RW Media Make Audio CD to erase the contents of the media before you execute Save An M3 USB CD R RW is not recognized by an external device A CD R RW saved or copied on the M3 using packet writing is not recognized on a computer e If you install a UDF version 1 5 compatible UDF reader or packet writing software on your computer it will be possible to recognize the disc PG p 660 e Inthe case of a CD R it may be possible to make the disc be recognized by executing the menu command Convert to ISO9660 Format Media Utility page to convert the disc to I509660 format However depending on the state in which the disc was saved it may be converted into ISO9660 level 3 format and may still not be recognized In this case if you install I509660 level 3 compatible reader software or packet writing software on your computer it will be possible to recognize the disc PG p 434 A CD R RW that was saved or copied on the M3 using packet writing is not recognized by the TRITON TRITON pro TRITON proX TRITON Rack TRITON Le TR e These models do not support UDF version 1 5 and therefore will not recognize such a disc e Inthe case of a CD R it may be possible to make the disc be recognized by executing the menu command Convert to ISO9660 Format Media
262. ch lets you sample or resample while in any mode Program or Combination etc You can also perform a rich array of sample editing commands including Time Stretch and Time Slice In Sequencer mode you can perform in track sampling letting you sample while your song plays back just as if you were recording an audio track In addition to Korg format sample data you can also load sample data in a wide range of formats including WAVE AIFF Akai S1000 S3000 and SoundFont 2 0 formats for music production or performance Auto Song Setup is a function that makes it easy to record programs drum tracks or combinations along with KARMA performances as a multi track recording to create the basic tracks at the core of your song aa Ww Oo e D i Introduction to the M3 At the heart of any music production is the M3 s sequencer which lets you record 16 MIDI tracks up to 128 songs and 210 000 notes With a high resolution of 1 480 every timing nuance of your performance will be captured accurately You can use the Cue List function to create your song section by section and then play it back as a medley in the form you want Superb operability and expressiveness with X Y Control that lets the display operate as a controller eight multi pads and a control surface The M3 features a clear color 320 x 240 pixel display for excellent visibility and operability It features the Touch View graphical user inter
263. changes will be lost If you want to keep your changes you must first save them on a USB storage device commercially available connected to the M3 s USB A connector 5 Press the OK button or ENTER switch A dialog box will ask you for confirmation Press the OK button or ENTER switch once again to load the data amp Never turn off the power while data is being loaded If the Memory Protected dialog appears press the System Pref tab and clear the check mark from the Memory Protect Song setting Then load the data again Listening to the demo songs in Sequencer mode 1 Press the MODE SEQ switch the LED will light to enter Sequencer mode 2 Access the P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page If this page is not displayed you ll need to press the EXIT switch up to three times Meter Tempo SEQ P 1 Play REC Program ECEN Song Select 1G 1001 01 000 Meter s4 J 091 00 auto Popup 19 5000 Two On One Track Select r Track 1 Percussion Reso E Hi O RFFR Chl RPPR HoAssian Te E z36 Funk Kit Category Category 1 15 gt 05 03 00 oa gt 14 FAR Crum Drums Basss Basss Keyboar Keyboar FastSun Strings Bank Program Program Select INT INT INT INT STINT INT IHT IHT Baze A Aged 2 Aase 2 Casa A Aoao Ai cale 4 Ali 4 Boss Funk Kit Studio 51Fhone He Hard Syn Stereo G Custom E Warm An Analog Play Mute Rec JES c 3 3 Solo Play
264. check box and set Track Select to MIDI Track 02 When the RPPR function is on pressing a key to which a pattern is assigned will cause the assigned pattern to start playing regardless of the track that s selected in Track Select Keys to which patterns are not assigned can be played in the usual way You can play the program that s assigned to the MIDI track you select here SEQ P8 1 Play REC Program 141 85 a 1001 01 QQQ eter 474 J 12855 Man 3000 NEW SONG Tracka2 MIDI TRACK G2 Te2 AGG6 Acoustic Bass 1 5W1 Reso Hi E RPPR Ch s2 RPPE HoAssign Category 15 EEE EAE HH HH HH 2 HH HH Drums Bass 8 Reuboar Keyboar Reuboar Reuboar Keyboar Reuboar Bank Program INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT Aged 2 ees 2 Agee 2 Aaaa gt Agee 2 Aaaa gt Agee gt Agaa Studia 1 Acoustic Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G GE GO G3 GE Gs GE GE Ga ETET ETEN ETEM ENEM i i 5 Since you want the tracks you play via RPPR and the track you play from the keyboard to be recorded at the same time check the Multi REC check box See page 87 Note If Recording Setup is set to Loop All Tracks it will not be possible to select Multi REC Set the Recording Setup to Overwrite 6 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch to enter record ready mode 7 For the tracks you will be recording MIDI Track 1 2 press Play Rec Mute to make them indicate REC Make sure that the tracks you
265. ches 1 8 will change the Play Mute status of tracks 1 8 5 Press the menu button to select Panel SW Solo Mode The menu will close and the indication of Track Play Mute in the display will change to Track Solo Alternatively you can hold down the ENTER switch and press numeric key 1 to switch between Track Play Mute and Track Solo 6 While the display shows Track Solo switches 1 8 will turn Solo on off for tracks 1 8 MIDI recording Preparations for recording amp Before you begin recording make sure that the memory protect setting in Global mode is turned off For details please see Memory protect on page 142 Creating a Song Before we can begin this example we need to select an empty song where we can record 1 Press the MODE SEQ switch to enter Sequencer mode 2 Choose Song Select e g in the P0 1 Play REC Program T01 08 page You can press the Song Select popup button and choose from a list REC Resolution Tempo Meter Tempo Mode SEQ P 1 Play REC Program T 1 J Song Select 1001 61 000 Metr 444 J 120 57 ran Popup 9 000 NEW SONG ar Track Select A Tracki MIDI TRACK 1 Reso Hi C RPPR Tal ASBE Stereo Grand 4 way Ch 41 RPPR Hofssign j Category Category 48 gt 04 gt p HH HH 348 348 8H Keyboar Keyboar keybgoa iae aiae Keuboag Keyboar keybgoa pap Sam Program Select as av JE amp Popu p yi Aaaa gt Coan Aaga gt
266. cified as the Current Step Step 01 and End will be selected for ee 02 SEQ P1i Cue List SEQ P11 Cue List Mir et EE 6001 61 O66 meter 474 J 120 06 iE Manu 21C00 NEW CUELIST 00 gt Track 1 MIDI TRACK B I 4884 Studio Standard Kit STEP 41 61 SONG 466 INTRO Step CMeasurel 5 coo NEW CUELIST 00 gt Track1 MIDI TRACE 6 Apa4 Studio Standard Kit STEP Bee Bz SONG Ae MERSE Step heasure 5 bai moooi sage INTRO Pat mego S000 INTRO baz megos E S001 YERSE bos mean s002 CHORUS b 4 Maca E End bas Insert Copy Current Step baz manes E End bas haa bas Insert Copy Current Step on 2 Add a song to the Step area e Step The arrow will indicate the currently playing step indicates the currently selected Step If Select the Song for Step 02 and press the Insert you set Current Step while stopped the display button A song will be added to step 02 Use the will change VALUE controller to select S001 VERSE In the same way select the Step 03 Song and press the Insert button to add a song to Step 03 Set this to S002 CHORUS If you press Cut button the selected step will be deleted If you press the Insert button the deleted step will be inserted e When you play the keyboard the program of the track selected by Track Select will sound If a different program is selected for each song the
267. ck pattern and Drum Track program 1 Access the Prog P0 Play Main page E SW Swi Mod cECH80 swe JS Y Lock fais C S RT Control Low MigiHz Pid Patt Bank No Pattern Preset P422 Drum ni Bas Drum Track Program gt l 5054 Electro Rock Kit Program Select a Drum Track pattern Use Pattern Bank to select the preset or the user bank and use Pattern No to select the pattern number Use Drum Track Program to select the program that will play the Drum Track pattern Note You can only select programs of category number 15 Drums If you want to use an original program you created as the Drum Track program save it with Category set to 15 see page 50 Note If you ve selected an empty pattern you won t be able to turn on the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch These parameters can also be set from P1 Basic DT Ctrls Linking with the KARMA function You can link the KARMA function to the drum track start stop 1 Access the Prog P0 Play KARMA GE page 2 Turn Link To Drum Trk on selected The front panel KARMA LINKED LED will light If Link To Drum Trk is on selected the KARMA function will be linked with the drum track start stop 3 Turn the KARMA ON OFF switch on Even when you play the keyboard or receive a note on KARMA will not be triggered 4 Turn the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch on If the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch lights KARMA
268. command Preparations for In Track Sampling are now completed Let s take a look at the settings that were made Audio Input INPUTI1 Bus Select Off Pan L000 Level 127 AUX Bus 1 2 The input from AUDIO INPUT 1 will be sent to AUX bus RECORDING LEVEL Recording Level 0 0 This is the default setting for sampling Sampling Setup Source Bus AUX 1 2 The sound sent to AUX 1 2 bus will be sampled Trigger Sampling START SW Press the SAMPLING REC switch to enter record standby mode Then press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to start sampling Save to RAM The sample will be recorded to RAM memory Mode L Mono The sound of the internal left channel will be sampled in mono 10 For this example change the settings as follows Pan C64 Trigger Threshold Threshold Level as desired Sample Time as desired 11 Play your guitar at the volume that you will be recording If the display indicates ADC OVERLOAD AD converter input overload turn the rear panel LEVEL knob toward MIN to adjust the level appropriately For the best sound adjust the level as high as possible without allowing the ADC OVERLOAD indication to appear 12 Press the SAMPLING REC switch When you play your guitar the level meter will indicate the volume at which the guitar will be sampled If the display indicates CLIP use the VALUE controllers to lower the Recording Level slider in the right of
269. control the effects within the cue list for example applying reverb more deeply on certain songs or raising the LFO speed for a specific song We recommend this method if you will be using a cue list to construct the song When you execute the menu command Convert to Song the effect settings of the Step 01 song will be specified for the song that results from the conversion Even if FX is not checked there may be cases in which a time lag in the transition between songs depending on the musical data of the song Also there may be cases in which the musical data is not played at the correct timing at the transition between songs If this occurs you can edit the musical data of the song or convert the cue list to a song for playback If you use Convert to Song to convert the cue list to a song there will be no time lag during playback at the transition between songs and the musical data will be played at the correct timing Creating multiple songs for use in a cue list If you want to create multiple songs for use in a cue list it is a good idea to make the various necessary settings program and other settings for each track effect settings etc for one song e g 5000 and then use the menu command Copy From Song in Seq 1 1 etc to copy it to other songs so that the settings will be consistent pm ______ Copy Song From EMAA Without Track Pattern Events OF an Cancel am
270. ction Pan AMS and Intensity Intensity specifies the depth of the pan modulation from the selected AMS source If you set AMS to Note Number the pan will change according to the keyboard position of each note played With a setting of LFO1 or 2 the sound will sweep from side to side creating an auto pan effect Other settings allow you to move the oscillator pan by using a real time controller an envelope or other modulation sources Pan Use DKit Setting Use DKit Setting applies when Oscillator Mode is set to Drums If this is checked the Program can use a different pan position for each drum sound as specified by the Drum Kit If this is unchecked all drum sounds will use the Program s pan position The factory presets and GM drum kits use individual pan positions for the different drums so normally it s best to leave this checked Amp modulation PROG P4 Amp fEQ Se m n Amp1 Modulation eT Keyboard Track a ma LEILLLOLEOLLLOLLOLLLOLLOLELOLLOLELOLLOLEEOLLOLLAOLLOLEEILEILEEOLEILLLILEILI co Cl C2 cS Cd CS Ch oF ce cH Center C4 Key High cs Key Key Low ie Ramp EtmLo 88 LoCent 88 CentHi 60 HiTop mE Amp Modulation Velocity Intensity 38 AMS amp J54 CCG 1 Intensity 28 LFOI Intensity 87 AMS J5 Y CC 02 Intensity 36 LFoe Intensity 88 AMS J5 Y CC 02 Intensity 60 The basic volume level is set by the Amp Level parameter You can then alter this using the
271. ction Sequencer mode songs pat terns and RPPR performance If you want the Drum Track pattern to play or be recorded in synchronization with the currently operating KARMA function currently playing song pattern or RPPR performance turn Trigger Sync on Trigger Sync Off If the Trigger Mode setting is Start Immediately the Drum Track pattern will be triggered the moment you press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch If this is set to Wait KBD Trig the Drum Track pattern will be triggered the moment you play the keyboard It will not synchronize to the currently operating KARMA function or to the currently playing song pattern or RPPR Trigger Sync On Triggering will synchronize to the currently playing song pattern or RPPR performance in units of a measure Triggering will synchronize to the currently operating KARMA function in Sequencer mode if the song or pattern is stopped in units of a beat Note If you want to synchronize KARMA to the currently running Drum Track function set the Quantize Trigger parameter Prog P7 1 KARMA1 Trigger Combi Seq P7 KARMA2 Trigger A B C D Note If you want to synchronize the RPPR pattern performance to the currently running Drum Track function set the Sync parameter Seq P10 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page to Beat or Measure W tes E gt om a 193 194 Drum Track function Sync settings Key1on Key2on Key 1 off madd ddd diidigie
272. cts are set by Send1 and Send2 Insert FX Setup page following the insert effects 4 Access the Combi P8 2 IFX Routing2 page Bus Select IFX Indiv Out Assign is the same as in the Routing 1 page You can set it from either page FX Control Bus sends the output of the timbre to an FX Control bus Use this when you want the audio input to an effect to be controlled by another sound There are two FX Control buses which gives you a great deal of freedom for controlling effects freely See FX Control Buses on page 443 of the Parameter Guide AUX Bus sends the output of the timbre to a AUX bus In the PO Play Sampling Audio In page you can set 157 158 Using Effects the Sampling Setup Source Bus to a AUX bus and sample the signal that is sent to the AUX bus Use this if you want to sample only the sound of a specific timbre Insert effects 5 Access the Combi P8 1 IFX Insert FX wed page COMBI P3 1 1F Insert FX Setup fi Bank USER A000 InitCombi VARAG Insert Effect Chain To Chain Fan 5 BUS JEB Qr gt BAS Multiband Limiter 2 Ors haJ BEAL ICR BPM Delay F4 3 7 gt HES Multiband Limiter 4 a gt 30 Ensemble cade 5 i O ve err gt rA FRexerb Room cade off a oute 4 aay 6 Select an insert effect in IFX1 5 and edit the settings 7 Access the IFX1 5 pages to edit the individual effect parameters
273. d stops playback on the audio CD 16 TEMPO controls TEMPO knob This adjusts the tempo for the M3 as a whole including e KARMA e Drum Track e Songs in Sequencer mode e Tempo synced LFOs e Tempo synced BPM delay effects e EXB RADIAS modulation source if the optional EXB RADIAS is installed The LED will blink at quarter note intervals of the current tempo Note If the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page MIDI Clock parameter is set to External or if it is set to Auto and a clock is currently being received via MIDI then neither the TEMPO knob nor the TAP TEMPO switch will have any effect TAP TEMPO switch You can specify the tempo by repeatedly pressing this switch at regular intervals of the desired tempo The tempo will be entered when you press the switch twice To obtain better accuracy you should press the switch multiple times Rear panel Bottom panel Rear panel Front and rear panels Rear panel Bottom panel 4 5 6 LEVEL DAMPER SWITCH PEDAL OUT main IN max min INE 2 1 ee 0 0 OHS 0 0 g AN AN Pag ee 4 3 2 1 R mono Q a s ee M Q O ORo 0 0 eel aem ium PAN i moon ann m 2 12 910 7 11 8 1 AC Power MIDI IN connector POWER switch This connector receives MIDI data This switch turns the power on and off Before turning M3 off make sure that you ve saved any edits t
274. d 2 and the drum track Using realtime control to edit sounds or effects You can use the control surface to control the sound or effects in realtime 1 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN REALTIME CONTROL switch the LED will light 2 If desired display the Prog P0 Play Control Surface page PROG Pa Play l gt BAL BPH Dense Motionations Control Surface RS J ff 20 06 Control Assign RT Control BIF 1 2 Effect On Ott IF IFs IFs IFsd IFs MFx1 MFs2 TFA AD AD Oe D Oe oe oe oD Realtime Control Fit Fe Fit Reso Fit EG EG Rel Sid Mods Sid Hode Sid Hodr Sid Mod 3 Sliders 1 4 will be assigned specific functions corresponding to MIDI control changes Sliders 5 8 can be assigned to a wide variety of functions many of which also have corresponding MIDI CCs Often but not always slider 5 and 6 modulate synthesis parameters slider 7 controls the depth of a chorus or other modulation effect and slider 8 controls reverb depth When you move a slider it sends out the corresponding MIDI CC Also when the CC is received via MIDI or generated by KARMA the slider value changes to match the CC value Generally the sliders scale the Program s internal settings When the slider is in the center the settings are as programmed To change the setting to the maximum value move the
275. d D pages to set the remaining Master B C and D These settings are valid when Module Control is set to Master Master lets you control any parameters of modules A B C or D You can also use a single controller to simultaneously control multiple parameters in different modules for example you might use Slider 1 to control the Rhythm Swing parameter of modules A B C and D 4 Press the GE RTP A tab to select Module A 5 Set MIN MAX VALUE ASSIGN and POL POLARITY CART MUTE IT KARMA REALTIME CELL os MASTER MODULE 0 0 020 0 6 Make settings in the same way for Module B C and D The ASSIGN settings for module A B C and D are used when MODULE CONTROL is set to A B C or D respectively amp With the appropriate ASSIGN settings a GE realtime parameter of for example module A can controlled independently by Master and Module A For example you can make settings so that the Swing parameter of a drum GE on module A is controlled in MASTER by slider 1 over a range of 0 50 and in MODULE A by slider 1 over a range of 50 100 Master 0 50 Module A 50 100 In this case if you switch MODULE CONTROL between MASTER and A while using slider 1 to control the param
276. d PCG RAM and Samples cannot be performed on a divided PCG file Can t open pattern Continue Meaning When you finished recording it was not possible to allocate enough memory to open the pattern that was Put into the track When it must be opened automatically If you press the OK button the pattern data will be deleted and the recorded or edited content will be saved If you press the Cancel button the recorded content will be discarded CLIP Meaning The CLIP indication will appear if the signal level exceeds 0 dB e The signal being sampled has overloaded use the Recording Level slider to adjust the level Note When inputting from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks you will obtain the widest possible dynamic range if you adjust the MIC LINE gain select switch and the LEVEL knobs as high as possible without allowing ADC OVERLOAD to appear In addition you should set Level 0 2a to 127 and adjust Recording Level as high as possible without allowing CLIP to appear Completed Meaning Execution of the command ended normally Completed Please turn the power off and then on again Meaning Execution of Update System Software has been completed successfully Restart the system to complete the update Turn the power switch off and then on again D Destination Disk Destination and source are identical Meaning When copying or bouncing the same song track or pattern was selected for both the sou
277. d backward For details please see Insert Measure on page 297 of the Parameter Guide Repeat Measure This command repeatedly inserts the specified measures for the specified number of times When you execute the Repeat Measure command the measures will be inserted following the measure specified by To End of Measure and musical data following the inserted data will be moved backward For details please see Repeat Measure on page 298 of the Parameter Guide Copy Measure This command copies the measures of musical data specified as the From source to the beginning of the measure specified as the To location When you execute the Copy Measure command the existing track data at the copy destination will be rewritten For details please see Copy Measure on page 298 of the Parameter Guide Move Measure This command moves the specified measures of performance data to another measure When you execute the Move Measure command the performance data following the move source measures will move forward by the corresponding number of measures and the performance data following the move destination will move backward i e later in the song by the same number of measures For details please see Move Measure on page 299 of the Parameter Guide Create Control Data This command creates control change aftertouch pitch bend or tempo data in the specified region of a MIDI track or the master track For d
278. d correctly insert it diagonally into the slot of the sound module as shown in the illustration inserting it as far as it will go 3 As shown in the illustration gently press down the EXB M256 so that it lies flat When the EXB M256 clicks into place locking tabs will hold it in 4 Attach cover B to the sound module and fasten it using the two screws you removed in step 2 7 5 When you ve finished the entire procedure turn on the power and verify that the EXB M256 was installed correctly See Verifying installation on page 203 Removing the EXB M256 Before you proceed please read the preceding Safety cautions and Cautions when installing option boards or memory amp You must leave the AC power cable disconnected until you ve finished the entire process of option board installation amp Be careful not to cut your hand on any metal parts of the sound module or option board pd Remove cover B from the sound module as described in steps 1 2 of Installing the EXB M256 2 Spread the locking tabs to left and right until the EXB M256 pops up into a diagonal position 3 Pull the EXB M256 straight out and remove it from the slot 4 Re attach cover B as described in step 5 of Installing the EXB M256 Installing options Installing the options and replacing the calendar battery Replacing the calendar battery 4 Ins
279. d even if Enable Portamento SW is unchecked As another example let s say that you ve selected a bass Program for Timbre 1 and a piano Program for Timbre 2 with the goal of creating a bass piano split You could make the following settings so that pressing the damper pedal affects only Timbre 2 s piano sound 1 Access the P5 1 MIDI Filter1 1 T01 08 page 2 Un check the Enable Damper box for Timbre 1 3 Check the Enable Damper box for Timbre 2 73 74 Playing and editing Combinations Altering Programs to fit within a Combination You can make various changes to Programs within the context of a particular Combination to make them fit better with other Programs or to create particular sonic effects These changes do not affect the original Programs or how those Programs sound in other Combinations Timbre Parameters OSC COMBI P3 Timbre Param OSC 101 03 aw INT amp AGG Towards The Sun J 035 50 TO1 I BSS8 Steres Grand 3 Way Ch Gch Keyboar Strings Motions Drums Orums Drums Drums Drums Force OSC Mode D EEO res res res res amp rec Eero Pre DSC Select E gt ETHE ETHE ETHE ETHE eg gt inh gt BTH Portamento PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG PRG eee Lois J ine J ong Ji do Force OSC Mode Normally this should be set to PRG so that the sound will play as set by the original Program If you wish to force a polyphonic program to sound monophonically set
280. d in step 2 to fasten the EXB FW to the rear panel of the sound Before you proceed with installation please read the moaie preceding Safety cautions and Cautions when installing option boards or memory amp You must leave the AC power cable disconnected until you ve finished the entire process of option board installation amp Be careful not to cut your hand on any metal parts of the sound module or option board 1 Remove cover A as described in step 1 of Installing the EXB RADIAS amp If the EXB RADIAS is already installed carefully lift up cover A and temporarily disconnect the EXB RADIAS connector cable 6 Attach the cable as shown in the illustration 2 Using your Philips screwdriver remove the Firmly insert the cable as far as it will go two screws from the FW cover that blocks the amp Be careful not to touch anything other than the sound module s rear panel openings for the EXB connector of the circuit board to which you re FW and remove the FW cover The two screws you connecting the cable removed will later be used to fasten the EXB FW amp Be sure to remove the FW cover from the sound module don t leave it inside Keep the FW cover in a safe place in case you need to remove the EXB 7
281. d in the same way as when you operate the front panel START STOP switch See Synchronization with song start stop When the M3 receives a Song Position Pointer message it will change the location of the song just as when you change the song location by operating the M3 and the KARMA function will be controlled in the same way as when you change the location on the M3 In Program and Combination modes Song Start Continue and Stop messages that the M3 receives will control the KARMA function e While the KARMA function is running Song Start Continue and Song Position Pointer messages received by the M3 will reset the KARMA function causing the generated phrases or patterns to start from the beginning e Ifa Song Stop message is received the KARMA function will stop Master operation Connect the M3 s MIDI OUT to the MIDI IN of your external MIDI device Set MIDI Clock Global 1 1a to Internal The connected external MIDI device will synchronize to the MIDI realtime clock and realtime commands it receives Note The same applies if MIDI Clock Auto and MIDI realtime clock messages are being transmitted For details please see MIDI Clock MIDI Clock Source on page 380 of the Parameter Guide Synchronization via MIDI clock The connected external MIDI device will synchronize to the MIDI clock of the M3 183 184 Using KARMA Synchronization via MIDI realtime com mands Enable Start Stop
282. d layers As mentioned above unless you re in Drum mode each Oscillator has four velocity zones named MS1 High through MS4 Low This means that the Program can play different Multisamples depending on how hard you play Each of these zones has separate settings for Level Start Offset and so on Also each of the zones can fade into the next to create smooth velocity transitions Zones can even be layered together two at a time Selecting Multisamples Let s create a simple velocity crossfade between two Multisamples using just OSC1 1 Access the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Basic page 2 Set the Multisample On Off for MS1 and MS2 to On checked Set the Multisample On Off for MS3 and MS4 to Off unchecked PROG P2 05C Pitch OSC Basic fl d M0SC1 Multisamp eS MELO Roms ots Off Lvl 12 Bottom vel B88 Bank gt HAAS Brass Ensemble 4 sfd aza E Lin M52 E Roms Cfs off Lv1 127 Bottom el GaT m gt GG 6 Strings Ensemble 1 fd Off Lin Multi Mia Bottom el 01 sample xtd OfF E Lin On Off meq flows B Oct 6 8 Transpose 40 Tune 8888 Freq Ofs 88 Hz Pitch J Basio J pitch J Zone JES 3 Select RomS as the Multisample Bank for MS1 and MS2 There are three main types of Multisample Banks Rom Ram and EX For each type you can also choose between looking at mono M and stereo S Multisamples Note that stereo Multisamples w
283. de Wherever you are in Program Combination or Sequencer modes pressing EXIT three times or fewer will take you back to Program Combination Song Select where you can immediately use the numeric keys or A V switches to select a Program Combination or Song When a dialog box is open this switch cancels the settings made in the dialog box and closes the dialog box just like pressing the Cancel button If a popup menu or menu is open pressing EXIT closes the menu 14 SAMPLING switches REC switch In Sampling Program Combination and Sequencer modes pressing this switch enters the initial sampling ready mode The switch s LED will light up To continue press the SAMPLING START STOP switch as described below START STOP switch In Sampling Program Combination and Sequencer modes pressing this when the SAMPLING REC switch is lit will do one of three things depending on the setting of the Trigger parameter on the Sampling 13 14 Introduction to the M3 mode P0 Recording Audio In Setup page and P0 Sampling Audio In page e If Trigger is set to Sampling START SW sampling will begin immediately e If Trigger is set to Note On sampling will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard e If Trigger is set to Threshold sampling will begin as soon as the selected audio source reaches a preset volume level On the Sampling mode s P1 Sample Edit page pressing this switch will play the
284. de These settings apply only to Sampling mode Samples that you ve assigned as a multisample can also be processed by the insert effects master effects and total effect and then resampled Audio Input You can also input audio sources from AUDIO INPUT 1 2 and S P DIF IN jacks in modes other than Sampling mode i e in Program Combination and Sequencer modes You can apply the insert effects master effects and total effect to external audio sources from these jacks and sample them or use the M3 as a 4 in AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN L R 6 out effect processor You can also use an external mic input to control a vocoder effect 156 Vocoder and modulate the internal sounds For examples please see Example Vocoder Program on page 444 of the Parameter Guide and 156 Vocoder on page 535 of the Parameter Guide Use the P0 Play Sampling Audio In page of each mode to make audio input settings Alternatively you can check Use Global Setting and make these settings in the Global mode P0 Basic Setup Audio page Normally you will leave Use Global Setting checked Uncheck this if you want programs and combinations to use their own settings For example when writing the program as a vocoder effect program Note If the optional EXB FW is installed you ll be able to use FireWire input and output This will give you a total of 6 in and 6 out Master Effect 1 2 Return OUTPUT Total Effect L MONO R R
285. dit you should write or save your changes as necessary For example if you ve edited a program your changed will be lost if you select another program or turn off the power The same applies to a combination Settings you edit in Global mode will be remembered as long as the power is on but your changes will be lost when you turn off the power For details on the Write operations see the following pages e Programs gt p 50 e Combinations gt p 69 e Effect presets gt PG p 119 e Global settings pages 0 4 gt p 129 e Drum kits gt p 138 e User Drum Track patterns gt p 195 Preset user Drum Track patterns are saved in internal memory even when the power is turned off Patterns you create in Sequencer mode can be converted into user Drum Track patterns and saved in internal memory e User template songs PG p 281 Preset user template songs are saved in internal memory even when the power is turned off Track settings and effect settings of a song you create can be saved in internal memory by the menu command Save Template Song e For details on writing to internal memory gt p 140 Refer to the following pages for more about saving e Saving to media Media Save p 152 Note On the M3 the action of writing to internal memory is called Write and the action of saving to an external USB storage device is called Save Turning the power on off Connecting the AC cable
286. djust the volume as desired AC POWER POWER switch connector m STANDBY acy ON BANK SELECT Quick Start Playing Programs and Combinations By default Combination mode will be selected when you turn on the power Play the keyboard and you will hear the sound of bank I A combination number 000 A combination consists of up to sixteen programs that are split and or layered It also uses up to four KARMA modules simultaneously a program can use only one KARMA module letting you produce far more complex sounds than a program Although you could simply continue selecting different combinations and playing them let s start by selecting and listening to the basic sounds of the M3 programs Note If you don t hear any sound when you play the keyboard or pads Check the connections once again Also make sure that the M3 s VOLUME MAIN slider and the volume of your powered speakers or stereo amp are turned up appropriately Selecting Programs 1 Press the MODE PROG switch the LED will light to enter Program mode 2 The upper left of the display shows the name of the current page Prog PO Play This is the page in which you will normally play pr
287. djusts the contrast of the display Adjust this as necessary if the visibility is not optimal 8 X Y control X Y control lets you use movements of your finger on the display X Y mode or an X Y Motion recorded in this way to control the volume balance between OSC1 and OSC2 or between timbres tracks or to generate control changes that will modify the program or effect The X Y Volume Control and X Y CC Control settings specify the function to be controlled See Volume Control and CC Control on page 62 X Y MODE switch This turns X Y MODE on or off If you turn this on and move your finger across the display the volume or tone will change according to the function that is assigned If this is on the switch will light and the color of the display will change G amp If this is on you won t be able to select parameters in the display Turn this off if you need to modify settings For details on how to preserve the On state please see page 141 HOLD switch When you turn on the HOLD switch the LED will light the X Y MODE effect will be maintained even after you take your hand away preserving the state of that moment If this HOLD switch is off the point will return to the center value when you take your hand away MOTION START STOP switch This records or plays back an X Y Motion Recording or playback will occur while you continue pressing the switch the LED will light For details on how to play back an
288. dulation Dmod lets you use MIDI messages or the M3 s controllers to modulate specific effect parameters in real time For details please see Dynamic modulation Dmod and Tempo Synchronization on page 442 of the Parameter Guide Dmod Example As an example let s set up dynamic modulation to control an effect parameter in realtime 1 As described in the procedure for Program Effects settings on page 155 set IFX1 to 064 L C R BPM Delay Verify that you re hearing a delay effect 2 Access the Prog P8 IFX IFX1 page Using Dmod to change the delay level via the Joy stick 3 Set Input Level Dmod to 100 4 Set Source to JS Y 01 The delay sound will disappear The input level to the effect can be controlled by the joystick As you move the joystick away from yourself the delay sound will gradually increase PROG P8 IFX L C R BPM Dela BPM MDI Time Over L Delay Base Mote E Times xB C Delay Base Note ao Times xt Fk Delay Base Note jf Times pr Feedback CC Delay tio src off High Damp 98 a Low Damp Input Level bmod 38 168 sre O E Spread 50 Wet Dry 5a 50 sro orr Using Dmod to change the feedback level via SW1 5 In the P1 Basic DT Ctrls Controllers Setup page set the SW1 function to SW1 Mod CC 80 and the Mode to Toggle 6 Choose P8 Set the Feedback Src to SW1 80 and set Amt to 30 PROG a BPM MDI Time Over L Delay
289. e GE realtime parameters 2 Use VALUE MIN and MAX to specify the value minimum value and maximum value of each GE realtime parameter Ad Velocity Scale CEJ AS Hote Series Replications HE Hote Series Hote Type T Mote Series Input Sort 8 Hote Series Inversion When you select a GE the default parameter values that are preset for that GE will be assigned The values you assign here are controlled as follows by the KARMA CONTROLS you specify in the ASSIGN field SL 1 8 000 064 127 MIN VALUE MAX SLs1 1 8 000 063 MIN 064 127 MAX SW 1 8 Off MIN On MAX Dyna 1 8 Depending on Dynamic MIDI setting 3 Use ASSIGN to assign each GE realtime parameter to the desired controller 4 Use POL POLARITY to specify the polarity of control Control the parameter as shown in the table above The relationship of MIN and MAX will be inverted For example as you move a slider from 000 to 127 the value will be controlled from the MAX value to the MIN value KARMA function settings KARMA function settings in Program mode Perf RTP Perf Real Time Parameters Here s how KARMA parameters such as KARMA key zone and KARMA module parameters i e KARMA parameters other than GE realtime parameters can be assigned to controllers If you
290. e select a combination and edit the KARMA RTC parameters etc as desired Note If you want to keep the edited state of your combination execute Update Combination or Write Combination 3 Hold down the ENTER switch and press the REC WRITE switch The Setup to Record dialog box will appear 4 To execute the Auto Song Setup function press the OK button If you decide to cancel press the Cancel button You will automatically move to Sequencer mode and the settings of the combination will be copied to a song The copy destination song will be the first unused song Content copied from a combination The same content will be copied as when you execute the Copy From Combi menu command with IFXs MFXs and TFX checked and Multi REC Standby checked For details please see Copy From Combi Copy from Combination on page 282 of the Parameter Guide Content that is copied from a program The copied content is the same as when you execute with the following settings in the menu command Copy From Program dialog box see PG page 282 Check TFXs MFXs and TEX and specify To as Track 01 Check KARMA and specify To as KARMA Module A Check with Drum Track and specify To as Drum Track Track 10 5 The M3 will automatically enter record ready mode and the metronome will begin sounding according to the Metronome setting Seq P0 1 Play REC Pref
291. e EXB FW and EXB RADIAS at the same time install the EXB FW first 1 Use your Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from cover A and remove cover A from the sound module 2 Make sure that the EXB RADIAS is oriented correctly and use the five screws to fasten it to the back of cover A 3 Connect the cable of the EXB RADIAS to the connector of the sound module as shown below amp Firmly push the cable all the way in so that it does not contact anything other than the connector on the circuit board 4 Attach cover A to the sound module 5 Fasten cover A using the two screws you removed in step 1 Installing options Installing the options and replacing the calendar battery 6 When you ve finished the entire procedure turn 4 Tighten the two screws attached to the EXB FW to on the power and verify that the EXB RADIAS firmly fasten it to the sound module was installed correctly See Verifying installation on page 203 a fox MS Refer to the procedure in Loading the preloaded data on page 201 When you execute this procedure Vie change step 3 so that instead of selecting Kind All Preload PCG you select RADIAS Formant Motion Data and All Alternatively refer to Restoring the formant motion data to the factory set state see page 18 in EXB RADIAS for M3 Owner s manual Installing the EXB FW 5 Tighten the two screws you remove
292. e You can turn looping on off adjust the tuning of the loop playback apply a 12 dB playback boost or reverse the playback e You can use the Time Slice function to automatically detect the attacks of kick and snare notes etc in a rhythm loop sample a looped sample containing a drum pattern and automatically slice the sample at the appropriate locations This function can automatically create performance data notes to play the divided samples at the appropriate moments letting you play this phrase in Sequencer mode at the desired tempo without affecting the pitch of the individual notes You can also do things like changing the pitch of just the snare drum replacing it with an entirely different sample or changing the playback timing of the phrase in the sequencer to transform the original rhythm loop into an entirely different rhythm loop Stereo samples are supported See Time Slice on page 359 of the Parameter Guide e You can use the Time Stretch function to modify the tempo without changing the sample s pitch When executing Time Stretch you can choose either Sustaining suitable for loops of sustained sounds such as strings or vocal or Slice suitable for loops of decay type sounds such as drums Stereo samples are supported See Time Stretch on page 363 of the Parameter Guide e Sometimes when looping a sample of pitched instruments such as strings or winds the looped portion may play b
293. e a multisample Sampling mode page structure Record sample a sample Select the sample or multisample to be recorded make detailed settings for recording make AUDIO INPUT settings and view the memory status Sample or edit the waveform etc of P1 Sample Edit samples you loaded into internal memory using Media mode Set playback parameters for samples such as start loop start end address P2 Loop Edit loop on off and reverse playback on off Perform editing operations such as Time Slice and Time Stretch Edit multisamples Edit settings such as sample assignments zones and original PO Recording RECORDING P3 Multisample key P4 Controllers Controller settings Setup P5 Audio CD Play back or rip from an audio CD Bus and master effect send level settings P8 IFX Insert effect routing selection and settings Master effect routing selection and P9 MFX TFX settings mene Total effect selection and settings For details on how to access each mode and page please see Basic operations on page 22 CONTROLLER amp AUDIO CD EFFECT Sampling can be performed in any page PO P9 of Sampling mode by using the SAMPLING REC switch and the START STOP switch Recording related settings such as input level are made by the parameters of PO Recording and these settings are valid for the other pages as well The selected multisample or sample can be played from the keyboard in any page allo
294. e also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty KORG INC 4015 2 Yanokuchi Inagi city Tokyo 206 0812 Japan 2007 KORG INC
295. e data dumps Media mode You can save or load data using a USB 2 0 compatible storage device You can e Save and load Programs Combinations Songs Samples and Global setup data e Format USB storage media copy and rename files etc SAMPLING MODE Write Audio CD Resampling S P DIF IN L S P DIF IN R WireFire L WireFire R Multisample Insert Master Final Effect IFX 1 MFX1 Sample Sample _ GLOBAL MODE DRUM KIT DS2 Drumsample Sample pss Drumsample Sample DS4 Drumsample Sample I key TH Assign ps Drumsample Sample Lt MEDIA MODE USB Strage commercially available WAVE FILES Multisample o Drum Kit Load Korg format AKAI SoundFont 2 0 AIFF and WAVE samples and export RAM samples in AIFF or WAVE formats Export and import sequences to and from SMF Standard MIDI Files You can use the Data Filer function to save or load MIDI System Exclusive data Edit WAVE files Place the WAVE files in the desired song order and use a USB CD R RW drive commercially available to create an audio CD Create and play back audio CDs f 9 Ww me e t PROGRAM Option EXB RADIAS Insert Master Final Effect IFX 1 MFX 1 TFX Corxs _ KARMA Module A
296. e filter frequency and resonance Controller Setup page For each program the function of Realtime Control sliders 5 8 and the KYBD 61 73 88 SW1 and SW2 switches can be assigned in the Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Controllers Setup page For details please see Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2 on page 198 Controlling Pitch Pitch bend The JS X and JS X settings specify the amount of pitch change in semitones that will occur when MIDI pitch bend messages are received or when the joystick is moved to left or right A setting of 12 allows the pitch to be controlled a maximum of one octave upward a setting of 12 allows the pitch to be controlled a maximum of one octave downward Ribbon specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones that will occur when MIDI control change 16 messages are received or when you move your finger left and right on the ribbon controller With a setting of 12 the pitch will be raised one octave at the far right of the ribbon controller and will be lowered by one octave at the far left of the ribbon controller PROG P2 05C Pitch OSC1 Pitch Pitch Pitch Slope 1 8 J5 BA Ribbon 8G JS x 82 M Pitch EG Intensity 88 88 AMS E J5 Y CC 0 Intensity 1 2 80 AMSG velocity Intensity 88 08 mPortamentom MLFO1 7 E Enable LF 1 Int 86 48 AMs amp After Touch _ Fingered J5 Y Int 00 00 Intensity 00
297. e location that you specified in step 3 Auto punch in First you must specify the area that will be re recorded Then recording will occur automatically at the specified area With this method the musical data previously on the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data 1 Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Setup to Auto Punch In MRecording Setup Q Overwrite O Auto Punch In Q Overdub Q Loop All Tracks Q Manual Punch In Maas EEE Muti REC 3 In M Auto Punch In Start Measure M Auto Punch In End Measure specify the area that you wish to record For example if you specify M005 M008 recording will occur only from measure 5 to measure 8 4 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording 5 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Playback will begin When you reach the starting location you specified in step 3 recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record your performance When you reach the ending location you specified in step 3 recording will end Playback will continue 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Playback will stop and you will return to the location you specified in step 4 Loop All Tracks This method le
298. e many other parameters in addition to those listed above Using the basic LFO 1 Access the Prog P5 LFO OSC1 LFO1 page Waveform PROG P5 LFO OSC1 LFO1 Square 000 Freq 7 AMS Int a O Stop AMS O ort m Key Sync Offset 00 Fade 8 Delay M iFrequency Modulation EE gt Note Number IntModAMs E off AMS2 vsev cctet MF requency MIDI Tempo Sync 1 MIDI Tempo Sync Base Note o f Times 2 Select the Waveform parameter 3 Use the Inc A and Dec V switches to scroll through the different waveforms and look at their shapes in the graphic display Intensity Intensity 06 Intensity E There are a number of waveforms to choose from Each are suited to different applications Triangle and Sine are the classic LFO shapes for vibrato tremolo panning and filter wah effects Square is useful for gated filter and amp effects and creates a police siren effect when modulating pitch The Guitar waveform is designed especially for guitar vibrato since it bends only upwards from the base value Saw and Exponential Saw Down are good for rhythmic filter and amp effects Random 1 S H creates the classic sample and hold effect which is great for modulating a resonant filter 4 After looking at the different waveforms select Triangle 5 Select t
299. e master effects or the total effect Off The output will not be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R or to INDIVIDUAL 1 4 Choose this if you want the signal to be series connected to the master effects at the send levels specified by Send 1 to MFX1 and Send 2 to MFX2 3 OSC MFX Send specifies the send level from each oscillator to the master effects This can be set only when Bus IFX Output Select is either L R or Off If Bus IFX Output Select is set to IFX1 5 the send level to the master effects is set by Send1 and Send2 Insert FX Setup page after the signal passes through the insert effects 4 FX Control Bus sends the oscillator 1 and 2 output to the FX Control bus Use this if you want the audio input to the effect to be controlled by a different sound You can use the two FX Control buses to control effects freely See FX Control Buses on page 443 of the Parameter Guide Routing effect settings Program Effects settings 5 AUX Bus sends the oscillator 1 and 2 output to the AUX buses In the PO Play Sampling Audio In page you can set the Sampling Setup Source Bus to a AUX bus and sample the signal being sent to the AUX bus Normally you will turn this Off since you will usually set Source Bus to L R when sampling the output of oscillator 1 and 2 Insert effects 6 Access the Prog P8 IFX Insert FX Setup page PROG P8 IFX Insert Fx Se
300. e of possibilities are available For details please see Program Effects settings on page 155 Basic oscillator settings Program type setting single double drum kit Here you can specify the type of program whether to use one oscillator two oscillators or a drum kit Use the Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Program Basic Oscillator Mode to specify the program type PROG P1 Basic OT Ctris Program Basic MOsciN ator Mode LS O single Double Q drums MyYoice Assign Mode M Poly _ Poly Legato Q Mana _ Single Trigger Half Damper Control m Enable Half Damper Program Keyone 0 UrumTrk Y Contro Pads Pads eset Per eaten oo Lane bias La Lea Single Programs have one oscillator and Double Programs have two oscillators Each oscillator is a multisample that is switched by a crossfade velocity switch You can use dual filters EG and LFO to create the sound Drums mode is a special variation of Single mode and uses a Drum Kit as created in Global mode instead of Multisamples Polyphony Polyphony is the number of notes that can be played simultaneously such as in a chord The polyphony depends on the program type Program type Polyphony Double o Note e Double Programs use twice as many voices as Single Programs e Stereo Multisamples use twice as many voices as Mono Multisamples e
301. e program bank for each track of a song PG p 399 e When saving the song it is best to use Save All or Save PCG amp SEQ so that the programs are saved together with the song Then when loading load both the PCG and the SEQ data p 143 Have you loaded the multisamples and samples used by the program Playback does not start when you press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch in Sequenc er mode Is the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI set to Internal or Auto PG p 380 Can t record in Sequencer mode Did you use Track Select to select the MIDI track that you want to record gt p 85 Is the Memory Protect Song check box Global P0 unchecked p 130 Is the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI set to Internal or Auto PG p 380 RADIAS programs of the optional EXB RADI AS don t sound correctly in a song Is the optional EXB RADIAS correctly installed in the M3 Is the R symbol shown for the track to which the RADIAS program is assigned e Turn Enable RADIAS Seq P2 EQ Option on checked A combination copied using Copy From Combi doesn t record via KARMA as it did when you were playing it in Combination mode Is Multi REC Seg P0 Play REC checked p 87 Are the settings in the Copy from Combination dialog box correct gt p 89 e In the Copy from Combination dialog box check the Multi REC standby option before you execute the copy This will cause the settings to be adjusted automatically
302. e sound or raise the resonance of the sound in conjunction with the phrase that s being generated Alternatively you might use this to control effects for example by turning on a delay effect in conjunction with a generated phrase Use CC Number to specify the MIDI control change number Choose one of the CC numbers in the 70 s which control the sound or an AMS or Dmod source see 7 1 4a CC Offset on page 80 of the Parameter Guide In the example shown in the preceding page CC 74 and CC 71 are controlling filter cutoff and resonance level KARMA module parameters In the Prog P7 1 KARMA1 Control and Trigger pages you can edit KARMA module parameters Here we will describe how to edit the most frequently used parameters For details on the other parameters please see 7 1 7 Control on page 85 of the Parameter Guide 173 174 Using KARMA PROG ee i moule Parameter Controll Contr ie aie O Root Position Force Range Off Clock Advance Mode Auto Hote Map Mode gt On Main Transpose AB _ Chord Track sete Lever Lowest Pan iee cont Troe Control Transpose Table Custom This lets you transpose the note data being input to the KARMA module in semitone steps This will control the pitch of the phrase or pattern generated by the KARMA module For example if you want to lower a bass phrase by one octave set this to 12
303. e to create track data at the same time e Increase the amount of free memory for example by deleting another song Now switching system clock source please wait Meaning If the EXB RADIAS is installed this message will appear when you switch the Global mode PO Basic Setup System Preference System Clock setting to S P DIF Please wait until the switch is completed O Obey copyright rules Oscillator Obey Copyright Rules Meaning When you execute the Media mode Make Audio CD Write to CD menu command or when you execute Destination in the Sampling mode Audio CD page Destination menu command Please read COPYRIGHT WARNING on page iii before you use this data Oscillator Mode conflicts Check PROG P1 Meaning In Sampling mode when you executed Convert MS To Program with Use Destination Program Parameters checked the conversion destination program Oscillator Mode setting did not match e In Program mode set the Oscillator Mode of the conversion destination program If converting a monaural multisample select Single If converting a stereo multisample select Double P Pattern Program Pattern conflicts with events Meaning It was not possible to execute the Bounce operation because one of the tracks contained a pattern and the same measure of the other track contained events or a pattern e Open the pattern Pattern exists across destination to end of measure or source from measure Meaning
304. e volume as desired If you check Hold Balance moving any one of the volume sliders volume values will cause the volume of the other timbres to change as well maintaining the volume balance between timbres 1 16 This is a convenient way to adjust the overall volume Note You can use the Control Surface sliders to adjust the volume of each timbre See Adjusting the volume of each timbre on page 68 Adjusting the pan of each timbre 1 Access the Combi P0 Play Mixer T01 08 page 2 Select the on screen Pan knob for Timbre 1 and edit its value as desired Timbre pan interacts with the pan stored in the Program A setting of C064 reproduces the Program s oscillator pan settings Adjusting the Timbre Pan will move the sound to left or right while preserving the pan relationship between the oscillators A setting of L001 is far left and R127 is far right Easy Combination editing Simple editing using the Sliders and Switches Simple editing using the Sliders and Switches You can use the Control Surface to perform a variety of editing For example you can adjust the volume of each timbre or change the cutoff or resonance You can also turn effects on off or adjust their depth or modify the phrases generated by KARMA Here we will explain how to control the volume mute and solo settings of each timbre For other types of editing refer to the explanations below e Using realti
305. e will be saved as a WAVE file You can load this sample WAVE file into the M3 s RAM memory and use it as a sound generator waveform Alternatively if you ve resampled a song you created on the sequencer you can use the resulting WAVE file to create an audio CD by using a USB CD R RW drive commercially available Since this data is an ordinary WAVE file you can also load it into your computer and use it for any purpose One sample file allows a maximum of 80 minutes mono approximately 440 Mbytes stereo approximately 879 Mbytes of user sampling whether mono or stereo Sampling resampling functionality in each mode Sampling mode 1 Analog audio signals from a mic or audio device connected to the AUDIO INPUT jacks can be converted into digital signals and sampled You can also apply effects while sampling 2 Digital audio signal from a digital audio device connected to the S P DIF jack can be sampled directly You can also apply effects while sampling The S P DIF input output jacks support sample rates of 48 kHz Note If the optional EXB FW is installed you can also sample from the FireWire connector 107 Sampling Open Sampling System 3 Digital audio signals from an audio CD in a USB A connected USB CD R RW drive commercially available can be sampled directly ripped 4 Samples can be processed through effects and internally sampled again resampled You can use either
306. eate phrases and patterns in which the tone color and note pitches change independently MIDI OUT USB B ONA Phrases or patterns Tone generator opoogoggoogog CLL LLCC MIX VOLUMES CT ne o Midi RESONANCE EG INTENSITY EG RELEASE USER 1 USER 2 USERS USER a 1916 164 Using KARMA The M3 provides a large number of GEs that can be used for a variety of instruments performance techniques and musical styles GE RTP Real Time Parameters AGE consists of over two hundred internal parameters In each GE up to 32 of these internal parameters are pre selected as the most suitable parameters for use in KARMA Program mode KARMA function KARMA module A MIDI IN USB B GE Generated Effect GE Real Time parameters 01 Rhythm Swing 02 Note Series Interval 03 Note Series Inversion 32 Repeat Repetitions JOODOO0O KARMA Combination Sequencer mode KARMA function KARMA module A 01ch Input Ch 01ch Input Ch 01ch Input Ch 01ch controlling the phrase or pattern These parameters are called the GE realtime parameters You can control the phrase or pattern by editing these pa
307. ected The timing will also be corrected when you realtime record automation data on an audio track Already recorded data will not be corrected For example let s suppose that you realtime recorded some eighth notes but your timing was not quite perfect as shown in part 1 of the illustration below If REC Resolution were set to J when you recorded the timing would automatically be corrected as shown in part 2 of the illustration If REC Resolution is set to Hi the notes will be recorded with the timing at which you play them 8 Make other settings as necessary Make settings for the KARMA function P7 KARMA MIDI filtering P5 MIDI Filter Zone etc See KARMA function settings in Sequencer mode on page 180 You may also wish to use Tone Adjust to adjust the sound See page 82 When you are finished making these settings the basic setup is complete Saving your song parameter settings The song parameter settings you make here can be saved as a template If you use these settings frequently you can simply load one of the templates you ve saved For details please see Save Template Song Save as User Template Song on page 281 of the Parameter Guide Using template songs Loading a template song is an easy way to make settings appropriate for a particular musical style You can also assign a drum pattern to a track at the same time 1 In the P0 1 Play REC page press the menu button and c
308. ecting a AUX bus as the Source Bus you can sample the signal that s being sent to the AUX bus Normally when sampling in this mode you will turn this Off since the Source Bus will be set to Land R Multisample sample routing If you want to apply an effect to a multisample sample and resample it use the P8 IFX Routing page Bus IFX Output Select setting to specify the bus 1 Access the Sampling P8 IFX Routing page Routing EE AGI Sterea Compressor 2 Gt Ho Effect 3 GE Ho Effect d Gt Ho Effect 1 GEE Ho Effect SAMPLING PE IFX Bus Select All OSCs to Bus IF X Output Select GR Fx Control Bus or AUX Bus or a MF x cmon 2 Use Bus IFX Output Select to specify the bus to which the multisample output will be routed For example if you want the multisample output to be routed to insert effect 1 choose IFX1 Note When you sample the Bus IFX Output Select setting will automatically be set to L R This setting is made automatically to prevent the IFX from being applied twice when you play back the sample that was sampled using IFX In the same way the MFX1 2 and TFX On Off settings will automatically be turned off Be aware of this when you sample again Insert effects 1 Access the P8 IFX Insert FX Setup page Insert FX Setup ME a FP8 IFX Inzert Effect Chain To Chair Pan 5 Bus w Ct Sendir 1j rez o I gt BET Stereo Compressor Ch d off
309. ed COMBI P3 Timbre Param MIDI Ta9 1 cE USER A HAG InitCombi Ane a a Hh T18 1 B691 Processed Kit Keyboar Drums Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar keyboar Keyboar Status aT Oo Oot n n On n n MIDI Channel Gal pe ae ae as ae Bank Select when Status EX2 W tes E gt om a 3 Access the Combi P1 DT XY Ctrls Drum Track page Specify the drum track s output MIDI channel Output Set this to match the MIDI Channel of the timbre you specified in step 2 187 188 Drum Track function AGI obese 6 S78 Drum Track Drum Pattern Pattern Preset Pass RocknRoll 1 145bpm Rock Shift A MIDI Channel Output ig Trigger Mode Start Immediately Sync E off 4 Select a Drum Track pattern Use Pattern Bank to select the preset or user bank and use Pattern No to select the pattern number Note If you select an empty pattern you won t be able to turn the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch on 5 Press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch to verify that the pattern sounds correctly The method of triggering will depend on the Trigger settings If Trigger Mode is Start Immediately the Drum Track pattern will start when you press the ON OFF switch For details on the Trigger settings please see Trigger settings for the Drum Track pattern on page 189 Drum Track function settings Drum Track function settings in Program mode Drum Track function sett
310. ed by a combination or exchange it with a different program number the sound of the combination will also change Using the Write menu command 1 Verify that the program or combination you want to save is selected 2 Select the menu command Write Program or Write Combination The Write Program or Write Combination dialog box will appear Note You can also access the same dialog box by holding down the ENTER switch and pressing the 0 switch See Shortcuts on page 200 Write Program AGaa T Stereo Grand 4 Way Category AG Keyboard Sub Category A A Piano To Program gt D SFiS Tale Tse eke Cancel OK This screenshot is for Program mode 3 Check the program combination name displayed in the upper line the writing source 4 If you wish to change the name of the program combination press the text edit button The text dialog box will appear Enter the name of the program combination See Editing names on page 197 After you have entered the name press the OK button to return to the Write Program Write Combination dialog box 5 In Category specify the category of the Program Combination 6 Select a Sub Category as well For combinations the category and sub category you specify here can be selected in the following pages Prog PO Play Category Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 09 16 Category Seq PO 1 Play REC Progra
311. ed correctly However please be aware that this message will also appear the first time you turn on the power after replacing the calendar battery If you have any questions regarding installation please contact Korg customer service 203 204 Appendices Installing the options and replacing the calendar battery Before you proceed please read the preceding Safety cautions and Cautions when installing option boards or memory The sound module must be removed from the keyboard assembly in order to perform these procedures For details on how to remove the sound module please see the Keyboard assembly Manual You will need a Phillips screwdriver and a cushioned surface to protect the sliders and knobs from damage You can also use a stack of magazines or the equivalent Place the magazines at the four corners of the sound module to protect the sliders and knobs from damage and place the sound module face down on them amp You must leave the AC power cable disconnected until you ve finished the entire installation process amp Be careful not to cut your hand on any metal parts of the sound module or option board oO we a ey A ve FEA Toucan aOo0o000000 View from below Cover B Cover A View from above Installing the EXB RADIAS amp If you are installing th
312. ed to calibrate the pedal using the Half Damper Calibration command in the Global menu For details please see Half Damper Calibration on page 399 of the Parameter Guide Damper and MIDI The Damper Pedal is sent and received as MIDI CC 64 In Combination and Sequencer modes you can filter CC 64 so that it only affects some of the sounds in the Combination or Song Playing Programs Using Controllers Foot Switch Assignable Foot Switch This lets you use a simple footswitch such as the Korg PS 1 as an assignable controller The footswitch can perform a wide variety of functions such as e An assignable source for modulating sounds and effects e Portamento on off e Program select up or down e Sequencer start stop or punch in out e Tap Tempo e KARMA on off Latch on off or Scene select e Switch the Drum Track on off e Switch X Y mode or X Y motion on off e Operate various M3 controls VALUE slider pads realtime control sliders KARMA sliders switches joystick ribbon controller SW1 SW2 etc The switch s function is set in Global mode Global P2 Controllers Foot Controllers page so that it always works the same regardless of the current Program Combination or Song For details please see Specifying the function of the Assignable Switch and Assignable Pedal on page 132 Assignable Foot Pedal This lets you use a continuous controller pedal such as the Korg EXP 2 foot c
313. ed to your computer can be used for a daisy chain connection with a FireWire device that your computer can recognize The M3 will not recognize this device If the M3 is powered off the daisy chained FireWire device cannot be detected from the connected computer e The EXB FW does not supply bus power e Don t connect the EXB FW to two computers simultaneously e Don t connect the EXB FW to two M3 units simultaneously e The EXB FW can handle MIDI and audio only within a host application in which M3 Plug In Editor is running e In order to use the dedicated editor via FireWire you must install the KORG FireWire Audio MIDI driver For details please see Installing the software on page 34 31 32 Setup e Each input output device can be used only from a single item of software Multi client operation is not supported e For applications such as sequencer software you may need to make audio and MIDI device settings For details refer to the manual of the software you re using 1 Use a FireWire cable to connect the M3 s FireWire connector to your computer s FireWire port 2 Make the necessary settings in the M3 s Global mode For details please see Global mode settings on the M3 on page 32 3 Make the necessary settings on your computer For details please see M3 Editor Plug In Editor Manual PDF Using the M3 Plug in Editor via a FireWire connection Here is an example of u
314. ed while the menu is open Make the following settings To set this up 1 Follow steps 1 4 under Assigning the footswitch to Program Up Down above 2 At the top of the page set the Foot Switch Assign parameter to Value Inc or Value Dec 3 Now the foot switch will act just like pressing the front panel Inc A or Dec V switches Note The footswitch will work like this for the entire M3 not just when the Program or Combination Select window is open Using MIDI Program Change You can send MIDI Program Change messages to M3 from external MIDI devices such as DAW software or other MIDI controllers In conjunction with MIDI Bank Select you can use these to select any Program from all 14 Banks If you use the included M3 Plug In Editor as a plug in inside your DAW software you ll be able to easily select M3 programs or combinations from a list within your DAW For details refer to the included M3 Editor Plug In Editor Manual PDF Transmit receive MIDI channel settings All transmission and reception of MIDI data in Program mode is performed on the Global MIDI Channel You can set this in Global mode on the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page See MIDI related settings for the entire M3 on page 131 Bank select settings You can specify the program and combination sound mapping for Bank Select control change messages CC 0 upper byte CC 32 lower byte Make these settings in Bank Map Glo
315. edit the Input settings of Global mode If this is not checked the Input settings of each program will be edited Since this is easy to verify here uncheck this item 5 Select the menu command Auto Sampling Setup to access the dialog box The various sampling related parameters will be set automatically You can use this as a guide when resampling the performance of a Program Combination or Song or when sampling an external audio source You can also use this to initialize the settings 6 Make the following settings Resample Program Play On Settings will be made for resampling the program s performance Save to RAM The resampled data will be written to RAM memory Convert to Program On Program as desired After resampling the data will automatically be converted to the program number you specify in Program _ tuto sampling Setup Q Initialize Resample Program Play C REC Audio Input E Ram m Convert to Program Save to Program gt E IntProgram ENGG Cancel 7 Press the OK button to execute the command OF Preparations for resampling have now been made Note Let s take a look at the content of the settings Input Each bus Off Turn all external inputs Off RECORDING LEVEL Recording Level 0 0 This is the default setting for resampling Sampling Setup Source Bus L R The sound sent to the L R bus will be resampled Trigger Note On Sampling wi
316. ee ie Montroi Parameter Trigger Contro m Guantize Trigger Delay Delay Start E off Hote Trigger Latch eu MOT Envelope Trigger Latch 1 any amp ort 2 any ort 3 any ort _ Update On Release Control Quantize Trigger This quantizes the timing of the triggering produced by the note data See Synchronizing the KARMA function on page 182 Off unchecked Triggering will occur the moment you play the key On checked Trigger timing will be quantized to 16th note intervals relative to the base tempo Note Trigger This specifies the triggering conditions for the phrase or pattern generated by the GE Try these out and see how they differ Any Triggering will occur each time you play a key and the phrase or pattern will play from the beginning AKR Triggering will occur only the first time you play a key after having released all notes on the keyboard Ist Triggering will occur only at the first note you play after turning on the KARMA function Dyn Playing the keyboard will not cause triggering Triggering will occur when you operate the controller specified by Dynamic MIDI GE Real Time Parameters Here you can edit the GE realtime parameters that are selected by the KARMA module You can also assign GE realtime parameters to the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches so that you can use them to control the phrase or pattern i
317. een them Then in Program mode you can make filter and amp settings and specify effects and routing to the audio output jacks See Editing Drum Kits on page 136 To use a drum kit in a Program set Oscillator Mode to Drums and choose one of the 144 user drum kits or the nine GM2 drum kits Selecting a drum kit 1 Access the Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Program Basic page 2 Set Oscillator Mode to Drums PROG P1 Basic DT Ctris Program Basic a a re MM Oscillator Mode Q Single Q Double Drums 3 Select a drum kit in the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 Basic page PROG P2 05C Pitch Wirum Kit O5C1 Basic _ HS1 CORity EER Studio Standard Kit Oct 6 Transpose 0 Tune 8888 Freq Ofs 00 6 Hz SEJ O CO 4 Specify the basic pitch of the oscillator For a drum kit set Octave to 0 8 53 54 Playing and editing Programs Using LFOs and Envelopes EGs Using LFOs Each Oscillator has two LFOs LFO1 and LFO2 There is also a single Common LFO shared by both Oscillators While LFO1 and LFO2 are separate for each voice the Common LFO is shared by all voices in the Program This makes it useful when you want all of the voices to have an identical LFO effect You can use these LFOs to modulate many different Program parameters including e Pitch for vibrato e Filters for wah effects e Volume for tremolo e Pan for auto panning The LFOs can modulat
318. efault values e Resample SEQ Play Make settings so that you can resample your keyboard playing in Sequencer mode e In Track Sampling Make settings to sample only an external audio signal using the In Track Sampling function e 2ch Mix to Media Make the appropriate settings for resampling a completed song to create a stereo two channel WAVE file on an external USB storage device such as a hard disk After creating the WAVE file you can use the Media mode Make Audio CD page to create an audio CD on an external USB CD R RW drive Creating and playing a Cue List Creating a cue list Creating and playing a Cue List A cue list allows you to play multiple songs in 3 Set the last step to End succession For example you can create a separate song for each portion introduction melody A melody B chorus and ending of a composition and use the cue list to specify the order of each portion and the number of a ne it will be a i complete the song If peng a A e you want to change the structure of the song the cue eram Pie eee DASO V ERSE tpa list lets you do so in an efficient way 5 Specify whether effect settings will also be switched when the song at each step is played back If you want to effect settings to change check the FX check box For this example check the FX check box for Step 01 which loads the effects If you set this to Continue to Step01 the cue list will play back repeatedly 4 In Re
319. el Sounds and Audio Devices Properties and click the Hardware tab If you are using Mac OS X go to Macintosh HD gt Application folder Utility folder gt Audio MIDI Settings select the MIDI Devices tab and check that the M3 has been detected amp Some computers may not recognize the M3 because of their hardware configuration Check the M3 s assignments and USB MIDI port settings The connected device or software may not support the messages you are transmitting Refer to the manual of the connected device or software to verify that it responds to the messages you are transmitting Error messages Error and confirmation messages A ADC Are You Sure ADC Overload Meaning If the ADC OVERLOAD indication appears above the Recording Level bar the signal is distorting because of an overload at the AUDIO INPUT stage To solve this problem e Adjust the MIC LINE gain select switch the LEVEL knob AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 only or the output level of your external audio source Are you sure Meaning This message asks you to confirm execution To execute press the OK button To cancel press the Cancel button B Buffer Buffer overrun error occurred Meaning When sampling to external USB media the processing could not keep up with the sampling To solve this problem e Execute the Media Utility menu command Check Medium Then try the sampling operation again If this does no
320. en you ve chosen the program you want to play press the OK button or the ENTER switch Bank Program Select gt JazzPere Organ eee BPM Dense Motiol A Full Brass Sectio Pank Genk I AGG2 Steel Ac Guitar l 6016 Vibrato Flute Hales I AGOS Stereo Strings Lel AG11 R amp B Planet cae I AGO4 Studio Standard FI AG12 Whale s World S nan Banko AGG5 attacking Synth AG1Z Huggy lead eae Acoustic Bass 1 I AG14 Space Gliders B y Mew Day Yoices l 4615 Morning Bells an acd ay Cancel 6 There are several other ways to select programs but here we ll explain how to select programs using categories such as keyboard organ bass or drums Press the Category Select popup button in the display This is the rectangular button located above the program name MODE VALUE dial PROG switches BANK SELECT A U G switches DAMPER KORA i T a Cat pe INT A gt 60 Keyboard J 105 50 Program T 81000 Stereo Grand 4 Way Select popup 5 SW 1 Octave Down button C 2 JS amp Ribbon a Ema C S RT Control ve GQOaY Ye m a ka toss zdl aa _ ro Preset P153 Funk Fusion 112bpm Std Program AGG4 Studio Standard Kit ET ee Pi TanchViawr EXIT switch E seu eu GLOBAL It HB o o
321. ent modulation effects For example you can create sophisticated effects such as using a single common LFO to synchronize the modulation frequency of a phaser and a flanger used on different timbres Effect dynamic modulation Dmod lets you control the sound or effects in a wide variety of ways ranging from the subtle to the dramatic Use the KARMA function Drum Track func tion Open Sampling System and 16 track MIDI sequencer to bring your ideas into com pletion in this seamless new production envi ronment The M3 provides many new functions that help you turn your ideas into songs quickly and intuitively The Drum Track function lets you listen to drum patterns while you construct the outline of your song You can easily select the M3 s built in patterns or patterns that you ve created and start the pattern from a specified region of the keyboard or by playing a velocity higher than a specified threshold This function is also useful for anything from realtime performance to generating sketches for song production The M3 also provides the amazing KARMA function giving you an enormous amount of musically expressive potential This provides a powerful boost to your music production power letting you can use up to four KARMA modules to create complex layered textures or produce natural performance gestures that are idiomatic to a wide range of instruments Sampling functionality is provided by the Open Sampling System whi
322. epeat these two steps 1 Press the Create button once to create an index 2 Record a sample The recorded sample will automatically be assigned to the index you created in step 1 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 This is an efficient way to record multiple samples Assigning samples to the pads By default pads 1 8 correspond to the C2 G2 keys For example the default Index setting for 001 008 sets OrigKey and Top Key to C2 The assigned sample will sound when you play the C2 key The same sample will also sound when you strike pad 1 Similarly if you assign samples to Index 002 008 the samples that sound when you play the C 2 G2 keys will also sound when you strike pads 2 8 amp In Sampling mode you can t use velocity to vary the volume even if PAD MODE is set to VELOCITY SENSITIVE For each pad you can change the note numbers used to play samples These settings are made in the Sampling P4 Controllers Pads 1 4 Setup or Pads 5 8 Setup page You could also assign the pads to pitch ranges that you are not likely to play To make the setting select the note number field and play the desired key while holding down the ENTER switch SAMPLING P4 Controllers Pads 1 4 Setup ELA eu es Bc MIES e2 fiz pz z ji27 1 0 2 pier zort bbe 2 0ff fee 2 Off japa zort lapa zort jepe zoff eee S0ff epa zoff eee 4o jepe lort eee jort lapa jort laoa gorf aoe Soff eee S Off lepa Sorf laoa ejor ja
323. eq Page Select page Press P11 Cue List in the uae SEQ P11 Cue List 0001 01 000 meter 4 4 1 120 00 on Y Auta gt 1C00 KARMA fied 8 Parts gt Track i by Stephen Kay I DATT Diss CLH controllerf STEP 81 69 SONG 465 E 1 Confrontation HYPad Length ai E Step Measure Repeat Load FR Poi meggi 5005 K1 Confrontation az Meads 5606 K2 Counter Pointe boas meosa S007 K3 Funk of the Fut ET a4 Meese sag8 k4 Temple of Maya Pas maiez 5099 K5 4aaoodtime c BT E gt Insert Cut Copy Current Step 1 2 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch You will hear the songs in the list in the assigned order If you want to stop playback before you reach the end of the list press the START STOP switch once again This completes our quick start Of the M3 s wide range of functionality this operation guide explains how to use some of the most typical operations We highly recommend that you take the time to read it completely Introduction to the M3 Main Features Rich and vivid sound produced by new EDS Enhanced Definition Synthesis sound gen erator The new EDS Enhanced Definition Synthesis sound generation system is based on PCM sources refined using Korg s proprietary voicing technology and delivers rich and vivid sounds Each voice has oscillators two oscillators allowing four stage velocity switching
324. er effect send level settings Insert effect routing selection and settings P8 2 IFX Bus settings for oscillator output Routing2 Common FX LFO 1 2 settings Master effect routing selection and settings Total effect selection and settings P6 Track Edit P8 1 IFX Routing1 P9 MFX TFX Pattern recording and editing P10 Pattern RPPR settings RPPR Converting a pattern to a Drum Track pattern Cue list settings Consecutive playback of multiple songs Converting to a song PATTERN amp CUE P11 Cue List For details on how to access each mode and page please see Basic operations on page 22 The MIDI transmit receive settings for each track are made in MIDI Channel P3 Track Param MIDI T01 08 T09 16 page Sampling or resampling can be performed in Sequencer mode For details please see Sampling in Program Combination and Sequencer modes on page 122 Since you can apply the M3 s internal effects to the external audio inputs a wide range of possibilities are available Overview Sequencer mode structure For details please see Using effects in Combinations and Songs on page 157 79 pa w WJ w ao v N 80 Creating songs Sequencer mode Playing Songs Playback In order to play back song data in the sequencer you must first record song data or load or dump it into the M3 Let s start by loading and playing the demo song data For deta
325. erence Metronome Setup 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to begin realtime recording When you ve finished recording press the START STOP switch once again See Recording MIDI in real time on page 85 Realtime recording using the KARMA func tion single track recording In the following example we ll use the KARMA function to record a drum pattern on track 1 1 Select the desired drum program for track 1 as described in the procedure for realtime recording a track and for preparing to record see page 85 Also make any other necessary settings for recording such as setting Track Select to T01 SEQ P 1 Play REC Program T81 68 661 01 p00 Meter 44 J 1 74 48 gt Manu O 000 NEW SONG gt Track i MIDI TRACK T 1I AGG4 Studio Standard Kit Reso Hi _ RPPR g Chat RPPR Hofissign Category gt 15 308 gt 09 gt 08 gt 00 gt a den d00 Drums Reuboar Reuboad Keyboar Reuboag Keyboar eyboad Kevboad Bank Program IHT IMT INT INT INT IMT IMT IMT SEE 2 Fono 2 Aoga 2 Agoa 2 Rogo 2 Aoga 2 Raoa 2 Aoao Studia 21 Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo b EG OD oo oe o EDEN 6 6 ETET ET F P H I F IF F IF a heie J ie J srie J ie J 3 18 Afudom rence KARMA function settings KARMA function settings in Sequencer mode 2 Access the Seq P7 1 KARMA1 GE Se
326. ern playback for a key with a Sync setting of SEQ will synchronize to the playback of the song See Sync on page 219 of the Parameter Guide Start the song playback and then press the key The pattern playback will start in synchronization with the measures of the song amp Synchronization will be lost if you use the lt lt REW or FF gt gt switches while a song is playing Note If you want RPPR pattern playback to begin at the moment that song playback begins it is a good idea to insert an empty measure containing no musical data before the song playback begins Note If the song is stopped the pattern will synchronize to the timing of the KARMA function Recording an RPPR performance You can record RPPR performances in real time If you are using only one track such as MIDI Track 01 set Track Select to the desired track and un check Multi Rec On the other hand even if RPPR uses only one track use multi track recording if you will be selecting another track in Track Select and recording its performance at the same time You should also select multi track recording if you specified the RPPR data using multiple tracks rather than just a single track and want to simultaneously record the performance of multiple tracks Note The RPPR pattern will be recorded as performance data on the tracks used by the pattern In this example we ll explain how you can record an RPPR performance and a keyboard perf
327. ert the new battery With the surface of the calendar battery facing P Oe oe eee A upward insert it diagonally into the battery holder cautions and Cautions when installing the calendar battery amp Be careful not to cut your hand on any metal parts of the sound module or option board amp You must leave the AC power cable disconnected until you ve finished the entire process of installing the calendar battery If you turn on the power when the calendar battery voltage is low the following message will appear in the display Please install a fresh battery The clock battery voltage is low Please do the following 5 Attach cover A to the sound module as described in steps 4 5 of Installing the EXB 1 Turn off power and replace the battery 2 Turn on power yy You will see this message one last time This is normal RADIAS 5 Set the date and time in Media mode 6 When you ve finished the entire procedure turn 4 Turn the power off and then on again on the power ok The message shown earlier will appear in the display once again but this is normal Go to Media mode and set the correct date and time 1 Remove cover A as described in step 1 of See Setting the date and time on page 148 Installing the EXB RADIAS 2 Verify the location in which you ll be installing the calendar battery 7 This completes the procedure but to ensure that the cale
328. es giving you a total of 1 536 programs Programs are organized into fourteen banks as shown in the following table Program bank contents Bank Prog No Explanation Factory Programs EXB INT F 000 127 RADIAS Programs Gam o01 128 programs GM2 001 128 variation programs g d 001 128 GM2 drum programs a a one Initialized USER F G nitialize Programs With the factory settings these banks contain a wide variety of preloaded programs that use multisamples effects and KARMA This can be selected if the optional EXB RADIAS is installed These banks contain 256 GM programs and nine GM drum programs that are compatible with the GM2 sound map The programs of these banks are read only Bank G contains the GM programs G lets you select 128 programs numbered from 001 128 and g 1 g d lets you select nine drum programs You can t write save data to these banks For these banks you can switch the bank type between EDS and EXB RADIAS Programs cannot be saved in a bank of a differing type Specify the bank type using the Global mode menu command Set Prog User Bank Type See PG page 398 For USER A E refer to the Explanation of INT A E above USER F is recommended as the bank for user sampling For details on the factory set programs refer to the Voice Name List on the included CD ROM gt Morning Bells In this illustrati
329. es not completely isolate this product from the power line so remove the plug from the socket if not using it for extended periods of time e Install this product near the wall socket and keep the power plug easily accessible e WARNING This apparatus shall be connected to a mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection e Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped e Do not install this equipment on the far position from wall outlet and or convenience receptacle e Do not install this equipment in a confined space such as a box for the conveyance or similar unit e Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine fire or the like e Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss e Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over LA ee TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DE CHO
330. es themselves Playing the pads 1 Use the PAD MODE switch located at the left of the pads to select how the pads will operate VELOCITY SENSITIVE The loudness will be affected by how strongly you strike the pads FIXED VELOCITY The note will be transmitted with the note number and velocity assigned to each pad regardless of how strongly you strike the pads When you specify notes using CHORD ASSIGN the stored note numbers and velocity balance will always be reproduced 2 Strike the pads to play sounds Assigning notes and chords to pads You can assign single notes and chords to the pads in three different ways Selecting the notes first 1 Play a single note or a chord of up to 8 notes 2 Press the CHORD ASSIGN switch 3 Press the pad to which you d like to assign the notes That s it The notes are now assigned to the pad PAD MODE Press CHORD ASSIGN and then play notes This method lets you create a chord out of widely spaced notes even if you can t play all of the notes simultaneously 1 Press the CHORD ASSIGN switch 2 Play a single note or a chord of up to 8 notes You can play a single note or a simple chord If you like you can also enter a chord by playing up to 8 notes as a legato phrase As long as you take care that the notes overlap each other the entire series of notes will be recorded as a single chord You can take as long as you like to play the phrase 3 Press the
331. ess the menu command Write Global Setting in Global P0 P4 Note Alternatively you can access the same dialog box by holding down the ENTER switch and pressing the 0 switch See Shortcuts on page 200 The Write Global Setting dialog box will appear Write Global Setting Cancel OF To write the Drum Kits the settings of Global PO P4 choose the menu command Write Drum Kits in Global P5 The Write Drum Kits dialog box will appear Write Drum Kits Cancel OK 2 To write the data press the OK button If you decide not to write press the Cancel button When you press the OK button the display will ask Are you sure Press the OK button once again to write the data Using the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch to write 1 In the following pages of Global mode press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch One of the following dialog boxes will appear according to the page P0 P4 Update Global Setting P5 Update Drum Kits 2 To write the data press the OK button If you decide not to write press the Cancel button Memory in Global mode When the power is turned on the Global mode data is called from internal memory into the Global mode memory area Then when you modify the parameters in Global mode the data in the memory area will be modified If you wish to save this modified data in internal memory you must Write it When you write this data the data in the memory area is w
332. etails please see Create Control Data on page 299 of the Parameter Guide Erase Control Data This command erases data such as control changes aftertouch pitch bend or tempo in the specified range For details please see Erase Control Data on page 300 of the Parameter Guide Quantize This command corrects the timing of MIDI data of the type you specify note data control change aftertouch pitch bend program change etc in the track You can also adjust for swing For details please see Quantize on page 300 of the Parameter Guide 95 pe w WJ S w og v N 96 Creating songs Sequencer mode Shift Erase Note This command shifts moves or erases the specified note numbers in a specified MIDI track and range of measures For details please see Shift Erase Note on page 301 of the Parameter Guide Modify Velocity This command modifies the velocity values of notes in the specified area so that they will change over time according to a selected curve For details please see Modify Velocity on page 302 of the Parameter Guide Pattern Step Recording Loop Type Here you can perform step recording into a pattern For details please see Step Recording Loop Type on page 305 of the Parameter Guide Event Edit Here you can edit individual events of the musical data in a pattern For details please see Event Edit on page 305 of the Parameter Guide Pattern Par
333. etails please see Creating audio CDs on page 150 1 Press the MODE SEQ switch to enter Sequencer mode 2 Select the song from which you want to create a WAVE file Either create a song or use Media mode to load a previously created song amp A maximum of 80 minutes for either mono or stereo can be written to media in one sampling operation mono approximately 440 MB stereo approximately 879 MB 3 Access the Seq P0 1 Play REC Sampling Audio In page 4 Audio Input Use Global Setting off 5 Choose the Auto Sampling Setup menu command A dialog box will appear 6 Choose 2ch Mix to Media auto Sampling Setup Initialize 2ch Mix to Media Q Resample SEQ Play Q In Track Sampling Cancel 7 Press the OK button to execute the command OF Preparations for WAVE resampling are now complete Analog S P DIF FireWire Input 1 2 Bus Select Off AUX Bus Off Turn off all input from INPUT 1 2 and S P DIF L R RECORDING LEVEL Recording Level 0 0 This is the default setting for resampling Sampling Setup Source Bus L R The sound sent to L R bus will be sampled Trigger Sequencer START SW Press the SAMPLING REC switch and START STOP switch to enter record standby mode Then press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to start recording Save to MEDIA The sample will be saved on the media you specified in Select Directory 127 128 Sampling Open Samplin
334. eter the parameter will operate in its last controlled state If you set Swing to 0 in MASTER and then switch to module A Swing will remain at 0 as long as you don t move slider 1 However Swing will change once you move slider 1 to control the parameter in the range of 50 100 1 Set MODULE CONTROL to MASTER and set slider 1 to the minimum position Swing operates at 0 2 Change MODULE CONTROL to A gt Swing operates at 0 KARMA Pere ee eT REALTIME C LTL CONTROLS _ SSS a insonne en wam eo anmne T usen dusen a lusena nosena MASTER MODULE O 070 0 gt 0 3 Move slider 1 to the maximum position gt Swing operates at 100 The internal settings are automatically controlled so that the phrase being generated does not change abruptly In the above example when you use MASTER to set Swing to 0 and then switch to module A the displayed indication is 50 100 but the parameter is actually operating at a value of 0 In this way you need to be aware that the displayed indication may not match the actual result KARMA function settings KARMA function settings in Combination mode Perf RTP Perf Real Time Parameters In the same way as for a program KARMA function parameters other than GE realtime pa
335. eturn Master Effect 1 2 OUTPUT Insert Effect 1 5 Total Effect L MONO R Return Master Effect 1 2 Insert Effect 1 5 Total Effect Sample Recording OUTPUT Total Effect L MONO R Routing effect settings The insert effects master effects and total effect have the same structure in all modes but the routing settings will determine how the oscillators of a program or the timbres of a combination or track of a song will be sent to each insert effect master effect or total effect In the pages that follow we will explain how you can make routing settings and effect settings in each mode Program Effects settings Routing 1 Access the Prog P8 IFX Routing page AGI Stereo Compressor 2 Gt Ho Effect 3 GE Ho Effect d Gt Ho Effect 1E Ho Effect PROG P8 IFX WBus Select All OSCs to Bus IF X Output Select GR FX Control Bus or AUX Bus or mosce MF x Sine fer sere ore per EAE GS GEE 2 Use Bus IFX Output Select to specify the bus to which the oscillator output will be sent If you want the oscillator output to be input to insert effect 1 choose IFX1 L R The output will not be sent to the total effect After passing through the total effect the sound will be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R IFX1 5 The output will be sent to insert effect IFX 1 5 1 4 1 2 3 4 The output will be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 It will not be sent to the insert effects th
336. eyboad Strings Motions Drums Drums Drums Drums Drums Bank Program INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT gt bade 2 Caas 2 Boes A Aaea A Aes 2 Bese A Roes gt ABS Stereo G String Fe Liquid Ev Tricki kil Tricki kid Electro F Tricki kid Tricki ki C C GD G3 G G3 G3 amp ee EL Note The Combi PO Play page will appear This is shown in the upper left of the display In Combination Program or Sequencer modes you will normally perform in this P0 Play page You can also make simple adjustments edits to the sound while you re in this page To make more detailed adjustments use page 1 Combi P1 DT XY Ctrls etc and following Selecting a page Using Page Select to move In Combination Program Global and Sequencer modes you can press the PAGE SELECT switch to view a list of the pages that make up that mode 1 Press the PAGE SELECT switch The page select menu will appear The page in which you were when you pressed the PAGE SELECT switch will be highlighted as an indication COMBI Page Select FLA Fa Flay EDIT Pi Po P3 Pa o o OT ay Ctrls EGlOption Timbre Param Zone Delay Raa Fa z2 MIDI Filter 1 MIDI Filter2 KARMA FPr i Pr 2 PT 3 Pr d KARMAT GESetup KARMAZ Module KARMAS GE RTP KARMAd Pert EFFECT P8 1 Pea 2 PS IFs Routel lt 1 5 IFs Routes MF TRS 2 Press the page that you want to view As an example here try selecting P4 Zone Delay The P4
337. f the amount of smoothing during the attack when the signal is increasing and decay when it s decreasing Low settings provide subtle controller smoothing creating more gradual aftertouch for instance Higher settings create auto fade effects transforming a quick gesture into a longer fade in and or fade out event Smoothing can also be used to alter the shape of programmable mod sources such as LFOs and EGs For instance you can turn a blip into a simple envelope shape as shown below AMS Mixer Smoothing examples Original AMS A Smoothing with Long Attack and Short Release ia Smoothing with Short Attack amp Long Release f Pe More AMS Mixer features There are more mixer Types including Offset Shape and Quantize which offer even more possibilities for creative programming For details please see 6 1 OSC1 AMS Mix1 on page 70 of the Parameter Guide Tips for using AMS When making settings for alternate modulation think of the effect that you wish to produce what type of modulation will be necessary to produce that effect and what parameter of the oscillator filter or amplifier needs to be controlled Next select a source AMS and set the Intensity If you proceed logically in this way you will achieve the desired effect For example in a guitar sound program where you want to use the joystick to control the feedback you would make assignments so that the joystick controls th
338. face that lets you operate the system by touching the display directly allowing efficient access to the M3 s enormous amount of parameters This display also operates as an X Y touchpad controller similar to Korg s KOASS technology allowing you to vary the volume balance or sound in realtime by moving your finger across the display X Y Mode You can also record the movements of your finger and play back these movements to vary the sound X Y Motion The eight multi pads can trigger single notes or chords up to eight notes and are a useful way to play drums chords or to control the KARMA performance You can easily assign notes or chords to the pads as desired The eight sliders and switches of the control surface provide a high degree of expressive operability and can be used to adjust the volume of oscillators or timbres tracks to control the realtime performance generated by KARMA or to modify your sounds via the Realtime Control or Tone Adjust functions You can also use these sliders and switches along with the pads as external controllers for your external MIDI equipment The keyboard assembly KYBD 61 73 88 features a joystick newly designed for ease of use as well as a convenient ribbon controller for detailed control over the nuances of your sound The 61 key and 73 key models provide a great feeling keyboard with aftertouch allowing expressive control over any type of sound The 88 key model features the
339. fer to the illustration below for the switches You will enter Combination mode 2 Access the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page This is shown in the top line of the display Page number and name Tab name Mode name Program 161 635 w Cat B Bank Bank INT A gt 00 Keyboard j 095 0 male 000 Towards The Sun l Category Select popup button Category number and name Combination Select Program number and name Combination Select popup button If a different page is shown press the EXIT switch several times to move to the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page 3 Make sure that Combination Select is selected If it is not press Combination Select in the display to highlight it 4 Select the combination you want to play You can use the following methods to select a combination e Usethe A or V switches e Turn the VALUE dial 4 Numeric keypads 5 BANK SELECT COMBI switches ENTER switch A U G switches STANDBY ACV ON COMBI P Play Progrim 161 68 WEZE J 095 00 21000 Towards The Sun T 1 I BGGG Stereo Grand 3 Way Category Bank INT A gt 60 Keyboard Ch Gch Category Keuboar Strings rotons ins Drums Grums_ Drums Drums k Program 2 Boag gt toas 2 EDES D Ages ADES gt Ba52 ADES ADES Stereo G String Pz Liquid Ev Tricki Kii Tricki Kil Electro F Tricki Kii Tricki Kii BOD a ED ED ED ED ED ED
340. file or directory or Open a directory to move down one level before executing once again S Sample S P DIF Sample data used in other sample s Continue Meaning Other sample s use the same sample data as the sample that you are editing To continue editing press the OK button Sample L and R are identical Meaning The edit operation could not be executed because the destination save location L and R sample numbers are identical e Select different sample numbers for L and R of the destination save location Sample length is shorter than minimum Meaning You attempted to execute an editing operation that would make the sample data shorter than 8 samples e Change the editing range so that the sample data will be longer than 8 samples Sample used in other multisample s Continue Meaning The sample you are editing is used by other multisamples To continue editing press the OK button Error messages Error and confirmation messages Selected file path is not correct Meaning When loading a divided PCG file you attempted to load a PCG file of the same name that was not divided or had differing contents e Load the correct PCG file Meaning When loading a KSF file that was split across multiple media the order in which you attempted to load the files was incorrect e Load the KSF file in the correct order To view the file number order in which the KSF files were saved you can check the Tran
341. for each timbre l ms P2 EQ Option f you re in the process of editing a Program in Program Settings for the EXB RADIAS option mode and you use the Program in a Combination Various parameter settings for each you ll hear the edited version in Combination mode as P3 Timbre Param timbre MIDI channel OSC selection well Pitch setting etc Key split and layer settings l Key zone and velocity zone K Time delay from note on to beginning of sound Overview of editing pages MIDI transmit receive filter 1 settings PO Play is where you select and play programs make MIDI transmit receive filter 2 settings quick edits using the Control Surface and adjust the P7 1 KARMA1 Overall KARMA settings KARMA settings The other pages let you modify the GE Setup sound in more detailed ways 2 y A ain Settings for each KARMA module Combination mode page structure etait P7 3 KARMA3 GE RTP KARMA GE realtime parameter settings Select and play combinations P7 4 KARMA4 l Program selection for each timbre Perf KARMA performance parameter settings ran and volume settings etc for each Oscillator output bus and master effect timbre P8 1 IFX Route1 send level settings Simple KARMA editing Insert effect routing selection and settings settings ai Bus settings for oscillator output Editing from the control surface 2 2 Bera ano Un ee Common FX LFO 1 2 settings Master effect routing selection and P9 MFX TFX set
342. format and then saving it in the other For details please see Save to Standard MIDI File on page 430 of the Parameter Guide and Save SEQ on page 429 of the Parameter Guide M3 Song format This is the native M3 sequencer format which is required to ensure that all M3 specific data is saved correctly Standard MIDI Files You can also load and save Standard MIDI Files SMF for compatibility with other sequencers Note that some M3 specific data may not be maintained when in SMF files GM XG and GS System Exclusive Data The M3 sequencer can record System Exclusive messages including XG or GS data For details please see System Exclusive events supported in Sequencer mode on page 311 of the Parameter Guide amp Note that GM XG and GS exclusive messages do not affect the M3 when they are played back The Compare function When you perform realtime recording step recording or track editing this function allows you to make before and after comparisons If you continue editing when the COMPARE switch is lit the switch will go dark This now becomes the musical data that will be selected when the COMPARE switch is dark Any previous unsaved edits will be lost Operations for which Compare is available In general MIDI track and pattern event data can not be returned to its original state Comparing song parameters is possible only during song editing when executing a menu command
343. fter you take your finger away 2 Lightly press the TAP TEMPO switch several times at the desired tempo Notice that the J in the upper right of the display will change to indicate the tempo at which you press the TAP TEMPO switch If you press the TAP TEMPO switch at slightly shorter intervals the playback tempo will become correspondingly faster amp You can use tap tempo control whenever the TEMPO knob can be operated For example in Sequencer mode tap tempo control will not be available if you are playing a song whose Tempo Mode setting is set to Auto See PG page 200 Note You can also use a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE FOOT SWITCH jack to control the tap tempo function see page 132 PG page 619 Resetting controller values The controllers of the control surface can be reset or switched to stored values If you want to reset a controller individually hold down the RESET CONTROLS switch and operate the control surface slider or switch that you want to reset If you want to reset all of the control surface sliders and switches in a CONTROL ASSIGN unit a tab within the Control Surface page in a single operation hold down the RESET CONTROLS switch and press the corresponding CONTROL ASSIGN switch CONTROL ASSIGN MIXER amp MODULATION You can use the front panel RESET CONTROLS switch to reset the desired slider or switch or the entire group of CONTROL ASSIGN settings Here s ho
344. functions Tip You can also control Play Rec Mute and Solo On Off from the Control Surface For details please see Adjusting the Volume Mute and Solo of each track on page 82 1 Use Song Select to select the song that you want to play back 2 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch 3 Press track 1 Play Rec Mute The display will change from Play to Mute and the playback of track 1 will no longer be heard In this way the mute function allows you to silence a specified track until the track is un muted Press track 2 Play Rec Mute The display will change and the playback of track 2 will also be muted To cancel muting press Play Rec Mute once again CO CO Prov YE Pies GT ET GT GE 4 Press track 1 Solo On Off Solo will be highlighted and this time only the performance of track 1 will be heard To play back only a specified track by itself in this way is known as soloing the track turning Solo on If both Mute and Solo are used the Solo function will be given priority Press track 2 Solo On Off The display will change and you will hear the playback of tracks 1 and 2 Solo On applies to all MIDI tracks 1 16 and audio input channels 1 2 S P DIF L R If as in this example you ve turned Solo on for only MIDI tracks 1 and 2 you will not hear MIDI tracks 3 16 or the audio input channels 1 2 5 P DIF L R COD CO Prav Pias GND
345. g Programs Selecting Programs There are several different ways to select Programs Each one is convenient in a different way e Using Program Select and the VALUE controllers Choose Program Select and then use the VALUE controllers to select a Program e Using the Bank Program Select menu In the display press the Program Select popup button and choose from the menu organized by bank e Using the Category Program Select menu In the display press the Category Select popup button and choose from the menu organized by categories such as piano or drums e Using a foot switch lets you change Programs even while both hands are busy playing on the keyboard convenient for live applications e MIDI program change messages let you select Programs remotely from either a MIDI sequencer or an external MIDI controller See below for details 4 A V switches 3 Program Select 2 PROG PO Play 4 VALUE dial DAMPER sequencer or from external computer based sequencers This section of the manual takes a quick look at playing Programs including tours of the front panel controllers and basic editing techniques Selecting a program using Program Select and the VALUE controllers 1 Press the MODE PROG switch The LED will light Refer to the illustration below for the switches You will enter Program mode 2 Access the Prog P0 Play Main page This is shown in the top li
346. g System Mode Stereo The sound of the internal L R channels will be sampled in stereo 8 Select the menu command Select Directory and specify the destination to which the WAVE file will be written Use Media Select and the Open and Up buttons to select the directory in which the WAVE file will be saved Press the text edit button to access the text edit dialog box and input a filename up to six characters Leave Take No checked The number at the right of Take No will be input as the last two characters of the filename This number will increment each time you sample ensuring that the filename will not be the same even if you sample repeatedly After you have made the settings press the Done button to close the dialog box 9 Set Sample Time to the length that you want to sample Set this to a length slightly greater than the length of the song 10 Set the recording level e Press the SAMPLING REC switch Note It will take between several seconds to nearly a minute from the moment you press the SAMPLING REC switch until the M3 enters standby mode i e until the SAMPLING REC switch changes from blinking to lit This time is required in order to allocate sufficient space on the media You must never remove the media while in this state Doing so may damage the media e Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to play back the song and adjust the sampling volume while you watch the level meters The defaul
347. g method Note Depending on the drive you are using it may not be possible to write at the specified speed We recommend that the first time you write you select Test to perform a writing test in order to determine the speed capabilities of your drive Test will not write data to the CD R RW media but will perform all other processing just as when data is actually written If an error occurs the display will indicate Error in writing to medium Press the OK button to execute the writing test After verifying that data can be written correctly at the specified speed select Write Execute finalize too specifies whether Finalization will be executed after the audio tracks have been written to the CD R RW media If finalization has been executed the disc can be played back on a CD player but it will no longer be possible to add more tracks Note If you only want to execute finalization execute Finalize Audio CD 5 When you are ready to write to the CD R RW media or to execute a writing test press the OK button To cancel without executing press the Cancel button amp When you press the OK button the Obey Copyright Rules dialog box will appear Carefully read COPYRIGHT WARNING on page iii and if you consent to the terms press the OK button to begin burning the CD If you do not consent to the terms press the Cancel button to cancel the operation g inorder to avoid causing errors
348. g points e The two jacks have the same function The connector to which your computer is not connected can be used as a daisy chain connector for a FireWire device that can be recognized by your computer The M3 will not recognize this device e The EXB FW does not supply bus power For details on installing the EXB FW into the M3 please see page 202 10 Fastening screws These are screws knurling screws M3x8 that fasten the M3 M to the keyboard assembly For details please see Keyboard assembly Manual Bottom panel 11 TO KYBD connector Use the included cable to connect the M3 to the keyboard assembly For details please see Keyboard assembly Manual 12 EXB option cover You ll need to open or close this cover when installing the EXB RADIAS EXB FW or EXB M256 separately sold options into the M3 or when replacing the calendar backup battery For details on installing please see page 202 Front and rear panels Objects in the display Objects in the display The M3 uses Korg s TouchView graphical user interface By touching on objects shown on the display you can select pages set parameter values rename programs and combinations write data and perform many other operations Ag If the X Y MODE switch is on you won t be able to select parameters in the display Turn this switch off when you want to modify the settings Ww So e t Note Reference
349. g the pitch of each key in the range of 99 cents you can raise or lower it by approximately one semitone relative to the normal pitch The user scales you create here can be used by specifying the scale for a program for each timbre of a combination or for each track of a song You can choose these scales from the following pages Page P1 Key Zone Scale Scale Combination P2 Other T01 08 TO9 16 Scale Use Program s Scale P3 Other T01 08 TO9 16 Scale Use Program s Scale Here is how to set the scale type for each timbre in Sequencer mode Sequencer 1 Create a user octave scale or a user all notes scale If you re creating a user octave scale use User Octave Scale Select to select the scale you want to create 2 Select a key and use the VALUE controllers to adjust the pitch The range of 99 raises or lowers the pitch approximately one semitone above or below the standard pitch Note You can also select a key by holding down the ENTER switch and playing the desired note on the keyboard Note You can copy one of the preset scales and edit it to create an original scale To do so use the menu command Copy Scale 133 134 Settings for the entire M3 Global mode GLOBAL F3 5cales User Octave Scale ERS aa et Bae 3 Press the MODE SEQ switch to enter Sequencer mode 4 Access the Seq P3 Track Param Other T01 08 or T09 16 page 5 If you want the Track to use the
350. g will be applied to the MIDI control data received by the KARMA module If an item is on checked the corresponding data will be received When the KARMA function is on MIDI control data received by the KARMA module is sent directly to the tone generator If this setting is off unchecked that data will not be sent to the tone generator In the example shown above damper pedal messages are enabled when the KARMA function is off and disabled when it is on Transmit MIDI filter This specifies whether filtering will be applied to the MIDI control data generated by the GE selected for the KARMA module If an item is on checked transmission is enabled Normally you will leave these items on If you don t want to use the pitch bend or other control change data generated by the selected GE turn these items off unchecked In the example shown above pitch bend data generated by the GE will not be transmitted KARMA module CC offset 1 Access the Prog P7 1 KARMAT1 CC Offset page CC Offset a PROG P 1 FARMAI De a as LALLA CC Offset 1 2 3 4 A CCH EE CC ri CEH Off CCH Off Value 874 Value B20 Yalue JAAA Value EEE CCO Drom Random control Trigger orizet J Track J Seeds J Control Trigger J CC Offset Use this if you want to control the effects or the sound of the program while the KARMA function is on For example you might use this to decrease the brightness of th
351. ge While you play the keyboard touch the display with your finger and make a motion The color of the display will change and you ll hear the volume balance or sound change simultaneously EG E Sid o Sid o Slid p Slid r If you hold down the MOTION switch the captured motion will be reproduced you ll see the display change color and hear the volume balance or sound change For details on operation and capturing motions please see X Y controller on page 43 amp If the X Y MODE switch is on the LED will light you won t be able to select parameters in the display If you need to select a program or combination or change a setting turn the X Y MODE switch off the LED will go dark 4 Located below the display are eight velocity sensitive trigger pads You can use these to trigger single notes or chords of up to eight notes This is a useful way to play drums chords or the KARMA function You can easily assign notes or chords to the pads see page 44 Performing with the KARMA function KARMA is an extremely powerful performance tool that allows a broad range of musical expression 1 Select Combination mode or Program mode 2 Press the KARMA ON OFF switch the LED will light 3 If you press the KARMA LATCH switch the LED will light the KARMA function will continue generating the pattern or phrase even after you stop playing the keyboard or pads or after all MIDI note on off messages
352. gin 5 As shown in the musical example printed above start by playing the C3 note of the keyboard to record the bass drum for one measure 6 Next play the E3 note of the keyboard to record the snare for one measure and then the F 3 note to record the hi hat 7 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to stop recording 8 Play back the result and listen to the drum performance you recorded Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch When you ve finished listening press the START STOP switch once again to stop playback 9 If you re not satisfied with the result press the COMPARE switch to return to the state prior to recording and then re record from step 4 Note When you re finished recording change the Recording Setup back to the normally used Overwrite P0 1 Play REC Preference page In addition access the P0 1 Play REC Play Loop T01 08 page check Track Play Loop for MIDI Track 01 and set the Loop Start Measure and Loop End Measure to 001 When you play back MIDI track 01 will repeatedly play the first measure pe w WJ S w og v N 88 Creating songs Sequencer mode Step recording Step recording is the recording method in which you specify the duration and strength of each note and use the keyboard to specify the pitch of each MIDI note You can use the Rest button and Tie button of the dialog box to input rests and ties Step recording is useful when you want to create
353. gram 51 Drum Track 185 On Off 185 187 Setting 189 Stop 130 Drum Track pattern Create 195 Select 186 187 Drum Track program Select 186 187 Dynamic MIDI 165 Dynamic modulation 161 E Edit 47 51 68 70 95 110 135 Edit buffer 141 Edit cell 17 EDS Enhanced Definition Synthesis 7 Effect 153 Bypass 130 In Out 153 On Off 155 157 Routing 155 157 158 159 Effect type 153 EG Envelope Generator 54 EQ 47 Error message 215 EXB FW 205 EXB M256 107 206 EXB RADIAS 38 204 Exclusive event Recording 91 Exclusive Group 137 Exclusive Solo 81 External control 131 F File AKAI 145 EXL 139 KCD 139 KSC KMP KSF 139 MID 139 PCG 139 SF2 145 SNG 139 WAV AIF 139 229 230 Appendices Filter 57 EG 58 Routing 57 Type 58 Finalized 152 FireWire Audio MIDI driver 36 Foot pedal 29 Foot switch 29 39 Format 148 Front panel 9 G GE 163 Select 169 172 GE Real Time Parameter 164 GERTP 165 Global MIDI channel 131 Grid 117 H Half Damper 45 High Pass filter 58 Hi hat 137 Index 110 Edit 119 Insert effect 155 158 159 Intensity 55 Internal memory 139 In Track Sampling 126 J Joystick 41 Delay level 161 Lock 41 Vibrato 56 Wah 59 K KARMA 163 172 Link 130 On Off 166 169 Setting 172 176 180 Stop 130 KARMA and Drum Track functions together 191 KARMA module 163 KARMA module parameter 165 Key Off 75 Keyboard 42 Keyboard assembly 9 Keybo
354. gt hrm gt Merri nrm gt emi Use Program s Scale a SE DE SE SE SE pE Scale Key E Type E Equal Temperament Random a EI Detailed Editing with Combinations Effects Delay You can set some Timbres so that they don t sound immediately at note on This can create cool effects and more dramatic layers You can specify the delay for each Timbre either in milliseconds ms or in rhythmic values which sync to the system tempo If you set the Delay to Key Off the Timbre will sound when the note is released COMBI P4 4one Delay F m s INT amp BBA Towards The Sun TA1 Baae Stereo Grand 3 Way _Delay 161 63 ae J 035 50 keyboar Strings Motion Drums Orums Orums Orums Drums Delay Time ms GEER Geo ppop ppoe punog popa tnpa anga Hii Tempo Sync a pE SE E SE SE SE Eea key e2 Ver Ea o EJEA Editing Programs with Tone Adjust Using Tone Adjust you can make detailed edits to Programs within the context of the Combination These edits will not affect the original Program or any other Combinations which use the Program To edit a Program with Tone Adjust 1 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN TONE ADJUST switch the LED will light 2 Access the PO Play Control Surface page This page mirrors the Control Surface It s very useful with Tone Adjust since it shows you the parameter assignments exact values and so on Control Surface ME
355. h is on or off based on their current states when the data is saved You can also make settings for Sampling mode as a whole You can set up Panel Switch Assign on the Controllers Setup or Setup page Mode Pae Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Combi P1 DT XY Ctrls Seq P1 DT XY Ctris Sampling mode Sampling P4 Controllers An example of settings in a Program PROG P1 Basic DT Ctris_ Controllers Setup j E Toggle Realtime Control Slider Anaig Slider 5 Slider Mod 5 CCHIT Slider Mod amp CC 19 Slider Mod 7 CC 20 Slider Mod amp CC 21 Slider 6 Slider r Slider 8 Program Feyzone L Basic 4 5cale AF When using SW1 2 for AMS or Dmod the default settings are SW1 Mod CC 80 and SW2 Mod CC 81 For an example see Using Dmod to change the feedback level via SW1 on page 161 For a complete list of the possible assignments see SW1 2 Assignments on page 617 of the Parameter Guide Note If you wish to keep these settings after the power is turned off you must save the Program Combination or Song Note that the settings for Sampling mode cannot be saved Setting the functions of Realtime Controls Slider 5 8 When the Control Surface CONTROL ASSIGN is set to REALTIME CONTROL the four sliders on the right function as Realtime Sliders 5 8 User 1 4 These can perform a number of different functions such as modulating s
356. h to enter record standby mode Then press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to start sampling Save to RAM The sample will be recorded to RAM memory Mode L Mono The sound of the internal L channels will be sampled in mono PROG P Play Sampling Audiu In Input _ Use Global Setting gt Analog liput Level Par Bus Select FA BUS AUA BUS Send Send2 pag 127 roas orr of ire aaa ooo garcia 127 FIZ O or of i72 p08 co Sampling Setup Source Bus AUK1 2 Trigger Sampling START SW ai R Metronome Precount O Ej a7 88 Save to RAM Mode L Mono a Sample Time 60 min 10 923 sec 36 a a Rre CS gurtace 10 Let s modify some of the settings recording Level dE Metronome Precount 4 When you press the SAMPLING REC switch to enter record standby mode and then press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to start sampling a four beat count will sound and then recording will begin The metronome will not sound during recording You may also wish to adjust the Input Pan 11 Play your guitar at the volume that you will be recording If the display indicates ADC OVERLOAD AD converter input overload turn the rear panel LEVEL knob toward MIN to adjust the level appropriately The best audio quality will be obtained at the highest possible level that does not cause an overload i e a level that is slightly below the point where A
357. hased the M3 M module by itself you can connect the included brackets and place the module at an angle on a tabletop or other surface Refer to the Connecting the brackets document included with the M3 M 2 Connect the included power cable First connect the included power cable to the M3 s power connector 3 Connect the M3 to your mix or monitor system Connect the M3 s AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks to your mixer or amplified monitor speakers If you re monitoring through headphones connect them to the headphone jack located on the rear of the M3 The headphones will output the same sound as the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks VOLUME MAIN slider H h eadphones zs ao Powered O O monitors INPUT INPUT all PHONES j MONO R M3 61 73 88 If you re using the M3 M by itself connect your MIDI master keyboard to it H h eadphones p oo Powered O O monitors inPuT INPUT lu l PHONES MONO AR oar M3 M MIDIIN a MIDI OUT mT MIDI master keyboard 4 Lower the M3 s VOLUME MAIN slider Turn on your audio monitor system and set the volume to a normal level 5 Turn on the M3 by pressing the power switch located on the rear panel 6 Raise the volume of the connected equipment to an appropriate level Then gradually raise the M3 s VOLUME MAIN slider to a
358. hat the M3 can load PG p 424 p 653 e Only 48 kHz or 44 1 kHz WAVE files can be inserted into the Track CD List in the Media mode Make Audio CD page Can t preview Is the WAVE file in a format that the M3 can load PG p 653 e You can t preview if the name of the WAVE file on external media is longer than eight characters Rename the file so that its name is eight characters or fewer Connections with a computer USB or FireWire optional EXB FW The M3 does not respond to MIDI data sent from outside Are all USB cables and FireWire IEEE 1394 cables connected correctly p 30 p 31 The computer does not detect the M3 Is the USB cables and the FireWire cable connected correctly gt p 30 p 31 It is possible that the operating system of your computer has become unstable Power off your computer and the M3 and then turn the power back on again An error occurs when you disconnect from the computer Never disconnect the M3 from the computer while your host application is in use While connected you are asked to install software or a device driver Does the operating system version of your computer support the M3 p 34 Can t correctly receive or transmit MIDI or au dio data via the EXB FW e Disconnect the FireWire IEEE1394 cable and then reconnect it If this does not solve the problem power off the M3 and then turn it on again e Has the M3 detected the EXB FW board The power
359. he Measure setting patterns will be handled in one measure units The second and subsequent patterns will start in sync with the end of previously played pattern If you change the Mode setting to Once the entire pattern will playback to the end even if you release your finger from the keyboard immediately e To stop playback either press the same key once again or press the C2 or lower key For details on Sync Mode and Shift please see PG page 276 e The assigned keys are also shown in the keyboard graphic in the display e Keys to which no pattern is assigned can be played normally Use Track Select to select the track you want to play For example you could assign backing patterns for drums or bass to keys C 2 B2 and use these keys to control the pattern playback while using the keys C3 and above to play a solo performance in realtime It s a good idea to keep your RPPR assignments within a specific range of keys 97 Vv WJ Y gt o Vv 7a 98 Creating songs Sequencer mode RPPR playback Let s use the RPPR you created to perform in the PO 1 Play REC Program T01 08 page 1 Access the P0 1 Play REC Program T01 08 page RPPR On SEQ P 1 Play REC Program 161 86 d 001 01 00H Meter 4 4 J 20 60 Manu 3000 NEW SONG Trakai MIDI TRACK amp 1 Tet Agb4 Studio Standard Kit Reso Hi E RPPR Ch 81 RPPR C 2 02 042 E2 Category 15
360. he Shape parameter and use the VALUE slider to move through its different settings from 99 to 99 Notice how the shape of the waveform becomes more curved and how 99 emphasizes the lower part of the shape and 99 emphasizes the upper part 6 Select the Phase parameter and use the VALUE slider to sweep through its range of values Notice how the waveform shifts from side to side Among other things this lets you offset the LFOs from one another in time which can create interesting organic effects 7 Use the Freq Frequency parameter to set the speed of the LFO 8 Use the Fade and Delay settings to control the way the LFO sounds at the beginning of the note For more information on LFOs please see PROG P5 LFO on page 66 of the Parameter Guide All of these parameters control the way that the LFO itself works In order for the LFO to actually affect the sound you can use the dedicated LFO routings on the Filter Pitch and Amp pages or use the LFOs as AMS sources for a wide variety of parameters Frequency Modulation AMS can be used to vary the LFO speed This lets you change the LFO speed by operating a controller or by the EG or Keyboard Track settings Frequency MIDI Tempo Sync If Frequency MIDI Tempo Sync is checked the Frequency setting will be ignored and the LFO will synchronize to the system tempo as set by the TEMPO knob or external MIDI clocks This lets you produce vibrato wah au
361. he display will change color 2 When you press the MOTION switch playback will begin 3 If you continue holding down the MOTION switch and touch the display recording will begin from that point Move your finger to record the motion 4 Recording will end when you release the MOTION switch or when the maximum event capacity is reached 43 Playing and editing Programs Playing back an X Y motion 1 When you press the MOTION switch once again the old events up to the point where you began re recording and the subsequently recorded events will play back Play the keyboard of the KYBD 61 73 88 or strike the pads Note If you turn on the X Y MODE switch and then turn on the MOTION switch you will see the change indicated by the color of the display Note You can use a foot switch to turn the MOTION switch on off Set Foot Switch Assign to X Y Motion For details please see Assigning the footswitch to Program Up Down on page 39 Deleting X Y motion data e While holding down the ENTER switch press the MOTION switch to delete the X Y motion data Drum amp Chord Pads There are eight velocity sensitive trigger pads below the display These look like drum machine pads and playing drum sounds is certainly one use for them However they can also play up to eight note chords on any sound not just drums The pads even remember the velocities of the individual notes within the chord as well as the not
362. he following point The conversion destination program s Oscillator Mode must be Single If this is not the case a message of Oscillator Mode conflicts will appear when you attempt to execute Please change the Oscillator Mode setting of the conversion destination program 5 Use the To Program field to specify the conversion destination program We recommend that you use bank USER F as the program bank for Sampling mode 6 Press the OK button to execute Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Using a sample in a drum kit 7 Press the MODE PROGRAM switch to enter Program mode select the converted program and try it out Note If you ve created a multisample in Sampling mode and want to use it ina program without using the menu command Convert MS to Program go to the Prog P2 OSC Pitch OSC1 2 Basic page and set the OSC1 2 Multisample Bank to RamM or RamS With these settings the multisample you created in Sampling mode will sound using the parameter settings of that program Using a sample in a drum kit Samples you create in Sampling mode can be used as drum kit instruments In the Global P5 Drum Kit Sample Setup page set the Drumsample Bank parameter to RamM or RamS Saving multisamples and samples If you want to keep the multisample and sample data you create you must save your data onto either the USB storage device commercially available In Sampling mode if you want to save on
363. he program and other settings of the selected track 4 Set Pattern Pattern Bank to User and set Pattern Select to U00 User patterns U00 U99 can be created for each song 5 Select the menu command Pattern Parameter A dialog box will appear MIDI recording Recording patterns Set Pattern Parameter of UBA Length Em Cancel Meter 44 OK 6 Set the number of measures in the pattern to a Length of 04 four measures and set Meter to a time signature of 4 4 Press the OK button 7 As necessary set REC Resolution to apply realtime quantization 8 Begin realtime recording You can record in the same way as you did when recording tracks with Loop All Tracks See Loop All Tracks on page 86 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch After the pre count pattern recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate the joystick and other controllers to record your performance When you reach the end of the pattern the sequencer will return to the beginning of the pattern and continue recording If you continue recording the newly recorded data will be added to the previously recorded data 9 If you want to delete specific data while you continue pattern recording you can press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch or check the Remove Data check box For details refer to step 6 of Loop All Tracks on page 86
364. he songs in a cue list into a single song For example you can use a cue list to create the backing convert the cue list to a song and then add solo phrases on unused tracks Sequencer mode page structure Page Maincontent Song selection playback and recording Program selection for each track Pan and volume settings etc for each track POSE Pay REC Track playback loop settings Audio input settings and resampling settings Recording method selection PO 2 Play REC Simple KARMA editing Control Editing from the control surface Drum Track settings X Y control settings SW1 2 and slider function settings Pad note and velocity settings l EQ settings for each track PR EQ OptION Settings forthe EXB RADIAS option Various parameter settings for each track MIDI channel OSC selection Pitch setting etc P1 DT XY Ctrls P3 Track Param Key split and layer settings Key zone and velocity zone Time delay from note on to beginning of sound P5 1 MIDI Filter1 MIDI transmit receive filter 1 settings P5 2 MIDI Filter2 MIDI transmit receive filter 2 settings P4 Zone Delay Step recording Event recording Copy delete and other track editing P7 1 KARMA1 GE Setup Overall KARMA settings Ey ea Ne Settings for each KARMA module Module P7 3 KARMA3 GE RTP KARMA GE realtime parameter settings ca Ranier KARMA performance parameter settings Oscillator output bus and mast
365. hese are the parameters that you can control via the KARMA sliders or KARMA switches If GE realtime parameters GE RTP and KARMA module parameters Perf RTP are assigned to the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches you ll be able to control them in realtime to modify the phrase or pattern while you play Dynamic MIDI Dynamic MIDI is a function that uses the M3 s controllers or MIDI control messages to control specific functions of the KARMA function For example this enables you to use the joystick to play strummed guitar chords use a foot switch to control the Run Mute status of a KARMA module or use the damper pedal to latch a KARMA module You ll be able to control them in realtime while you play 165 166 Using KARMA KARMA CONTROLS These are front panel controls used to control the KARMA function The settings of these controls can be saved independently for each Program Combination and Song see page 140 and page 142 ON OFF switch This switches the KARMA function on off LATCH switch If this is on the phrase or pattern will continue playing even after you remove your hand from the keyboard or pads 1 8 MODULE CONTROL switch In Combination or Sequencer mode this selects the module that will be controlled by the KARMA sliders 1 8 KARMA switch SWITCHES 1 8 and KARMA SCENE 1 8 switches MASTER Choose this setting if you want to control modules A B C and D simultaneously For example
366. hesis MMT Multi Modeling Technology sound generator can be added by installing the optional EXB RADIAS 120 voices max single mode 60 voices max double mode The actual maximum polyphony will vary depending on oscillator settings such as stereo multisamples and velocity crossfading 256 Mbytes when calculated as 16 bit linear data Preset PCM 1 077 multisamples including seven stereo 1 609 drum samples including 116 stereo EX USB PCM01 Brass and Woodwinds 1 approximately 128 Mbyte when calculated as 16 bit linear 59 multisamples including five stereo EX USB PCM02 Brass and Woodwinds 2 approximately 128 Mbyte when calculated as 16 bit linear 47 multisamples EX USB PCMO3 Stereo Grand Piano approximately 128 Mbyte when calculated as 16 bit linear 10 multisamples including five stereo These can be used by loading them into RAM memory The standard 64 Mbyte RAM memory allows only one title to be loaded If the EXB M256 option is installed the three titles can be used simultaneously 64 Mbyte is standard 512 bytes used by the system expandable to 320 Mbytes by installing the EXB M256 option OSC1 Single OSC1 2 Double Stereo multisamples are supported Oscillator i Ca Sound Engine 4 velocity zones per oscillator with switching crossfades and layers Maximum Polyphony PCM expansion options PCM RAM Four types of filter routing single serial parallel 24 dB Two multi mode filters pe
367. hift 86 T81 AGG4 Studia Standard Kit Chai Pattern Pattern Edit 4 Hame d E 8 Assign patterns to other keys For KEY press the A switch to select D2 9 Press the Revert button The Assign Pattern Bank Pattern Select and Track settings will be given the previously steps 5 7 specified values 10 Choose Pattern Select and press the A switch to select P01 By using Revert in this way you can work efficiently when assigning contiguous or nearby pattern numbers or tracks SEQ P18 Pattern RPPR S000 NEW SONG Track i MIDI TRACK B1 _ EEA SIRPPR Setup KE D2 E Assign Made Manual C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Syne gt Beat Fattern E Preset O ARAE Revert Track Track 1 MIDI TRACK G1 to last assigned RPPR Setup e fe 7H HG l 4884 Studia Standard Kit shift 8 T81 AGG4 Studia Standard Kit Chai Pattern Pattern Edit J Hame j e As described above assign several other patterns such as P03 and higher 11 Press the C 2 key The assigned pattern will play 12 Take your finger off the C 2 key and press the D2 key The pattern will change and playback will begin At this time the pattern operation will depend on the Sync and Mode setting 13 Set KEY to C 2 and set Sync to Measure Make the same setting for D2 See the diagram above Now press the notes consecutively Notice that the patterns operate in a different way With t
368. hoose Load Template Song A dialog box will appear Load Template Song From RAE m Copy Pattern to Track too Cancel OK 2 In the From field choose the template song you want to load 3 If you check Copy Pattern to Track too a dialog box for copying a pattern will automatically appear after you execute Load Template Song If you execute without checking this only the template song you selected in step 2 will be loaded 4 Press the OK button to load the template song or press the Cancel button if you decide to cancel When you execute this operation song settings other than MIDI Track Loop and RPPR will be copied If you executed this operation with Copy Pattern to Track too checked in step 3 the Copy Pattern To Track dialog box will appear MIDI recording Recording MIDI in real time Copy Pattern to Track Pattern Preset Pag Pop amp Balad 1 Std Track 1 Measure 461 Exit OK This dialog box is the same as the one that appears for the Copy To Track P10 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit menu command 5 In the Pattern field select the pattern that you want to copy You can press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to play back the selected pattern In the To Track field select the copy destination track In the Measure field specify the starting measure of the copy destination Following the pattern name for each of the 522
369. i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 lels mraz o rol 9 10 9 10 9 tolo fro 9 ro 9 If Play Intro is unchecked the specified region of measures will repeat as follows Measures 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Track 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 wraz o 10 9 10 9 10 9 folo fro 9 hole Global mode SEQ Mode setting In SEQ mode you will normally use the internal sequencer as the master that controls the internal sound generator and your external sound modules However you can also use SEQ Mode as a multi timbral sound module that simultaneously plays multiple tracks of performance data from your external MIDI sequencer Normally you ll use Combination mode if you want to use the M3 as a master keyboard So that you can change settings as appropriate for these two uses the M3 provides a SEQ Mode Track MIDI Out parameter which is located in the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page Master is the setting to choose if you re using the M3 s internal sequencer to control an external sound module or if you re using the M3 in Sequencer mode as a master keyboard In this case when you switch songs on the M3 tracks whose Status is set to EXT or BTH will transmit program changes and other MIDI messages to set up your external MIDI sound module External Sequencer is the setting to choose if you re using the M3 as a multi timbral sound module controlled by an external sequencer When you switch songs on the M3
370. ify the start address in Start the loop start address in Loop Start and the end address in End Select Start highlighted and use the VALUE dial or other VALUE controllers to modify the value The corresponding vertical line will move Set Loop Start and End in the same way In the example shown below Start is set immediately before the first waveform LoopS Loop Start is set immediately before the second waveform and End is set as desired i Start Red Loop Start Green End Blue ZOOM 4 By using the ZOOM button you can change the range that is displayed When Start is highlighted zoom will be performed from the start address start EEA E Loop O rev 1205 e Loop S G68848035 _ Loop Lock LoopTune 6 _ jeooo End Beear2se7 m Use Zero E Ea a Area a indicates the region within the entire sample that is shown in area b As you zoom in on the time axis this shows you where the zoomed region is located within the entire sample Use the Zoom buttons to specify how area b will show a magnified zoom in or reduced zoom out view of the waveform Use Zero If the Use Zero check box is checked only those addresses where the waveform data crosses the zero level will be found automatically when searching and can be set This lets you easily make address settings where noise is less likely to occur when looping Truncate 5 If necessary use the me
371. igned specifically for piano style damper control with the look and feel of an acoustic piano s sustain pedal It allows more subtle control of the damper than a simple switch the further down you press the pedal the more that the sound sustains For details please see Half Damper Pedal and Release Time on page 26 of the Parameter Guide You can also connect a simple footswitch which will work as a standard on off damper pedal In order to ensure that the pedal functions correctly please adjust the switch polarity see Damper Polarity on page 387 of the Parameter Guide and the half damper sensitivity see Half Damper Calibration on page 399 of the Parameter Guide ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack This lets you connect a simple on off footswitch such as the optional Korg PS 1 The footswitch can perform a wide variety of functions such as modulating sounds and effects tap tempo sequencer start stop etc The switch s function is set in Global mode on the Controller tab of the Controllers Scales page so that it always works the same regardless of the current Program Combination or Song For details please see Specifying the function of the Assignable Switch and Assignable Pedal on page 132 ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack This lets you connect a continuous controller pedal such as the Korg EXP 2 foot controller or Korg XVP 10 EXP VOL pedal to use as an assignable modulation source Like the ASSIGNABLE SW
372. igning MIDI CC s to KARMA X Y and Pad controllers In the Global P2 Controllers MIDI CC Assign page you can assign control change messages to the KARMA switches and sliders pads 1 8 and the X axis and Y axis of X Y control Pads 1 8 can be assigned either control change messages or note numbers You can assign control change messages or note numbers to pads 1 8 Normally you will use the default settings To restore the default settings execute the Reset Controller MIDI Assign menu command and choose Default Setting GLOBAL P2 Controler MIDI Assign ff MK ARHA Seal tebe on off EW Latch A31 Scene 830 Sw 5 IBE Slider1 822 Slider5 26 SwW6 1G Slider2 023 Sliders B27 Sw 7 188 Slider3 B24 Slider 7 028 Sw 8 789 Slider4 025 Sliders 029 Pads CC and Mote SW 1 I 2 Sw 3 1a4 SW 4 iyoy Mode M18 Pad 1G cc 110 Pad 5 cc i14 YOX Mode 119 Pad 2G CC 111 Pad 6 cc 15 Pad 3 cc 112 Pad 7G cc 1i6 Pad 4 CC 113 Pad 6 cc 117 Foot Controls Assign Creating user scales Creating an original scale and assigning it to a Program On the User Scale page you can create your own original scales These include sixteen different User Octave Scales in which the pitch of each note of the octave is repeated for all octaves and one User All Note Scale in which the pitch of each of the 128 notes can be specified independently By adjustin
373. ile watching the waveform You can use functions such as Zoom In Out Use Zero and Grid to edit the waveform efficiently e You can edit the sample waveform using a variety of commands such as cut copy mix insert normalize volume ramp and reverse See Cut on page 353 of the Parameter Guide e A Rate Convert function lets you lower the sampling frequency of the sample data in a range of 2 3 to 1 6 producing down sampled effects See Rate Convert on page 356 of the Parameter Guide e The Link function Link with crossfade lets you connect two samples into one When doing so you can apply a crossfade so that the sustained portion of the samples will change gradually to create a natural transition between the two samples See Link on page 357 of the Parameter Guide 1 Select the sample that you wish to edit Use Sample Sample Select or Index in the P1 Sample Edit page or the P0 Recording Recording page to select the sample amp If you use Sample Sample Select to select the sample be aware that the index assignment will also change 2 Access the P1 Sample Edit page Sample AAAA NEWFILE Edit Range Start BaGGG8000 _ Use Zero Edit Range End oanagag0 jzoom Sampling START plays edit range ET L The waveform data of the currently selected sample will be displayed Sample waveforms that were recorded with a Sample Mode of Stereo will be shown in t
374. ill require twice as many voices as mono Multisamples ROM Miultisamples are the built in factory sounds and are always available These are organized by category such as pianos guitars bells etc RAM Miultisamples include Akai AIFF WAVE or SoundFont files loaded from media and samples created in Sampling mode The EX multisample banks are available if optional EX USB PCM series multisamples are loaded The menu will show only the EX banks that are currently loaded 4 Press the Multisample popup for MS1 O05C1 Multisample sitet Roms Ofs iit Off Lvl E 7 Bottom Yel EE DAHAS Brass r afd We iD Lin Multisample popup button This brings up a list of Multisamples organized by category Use the tabs at the left of the display to browse through the different categories 5 Select a Multisample by touching its name in the list 6 Press the OK button to confirm your selection 7 Perform the same steps for MS2 selecting a different Multisample than for MS1 Now that you ve assigned Multisamples to MS1 and MS2 let s set up the velocity ranges and crossfades Set MS2 s Bottom Vel to 001 and its Xfade Range to 0 8 Set MS1 s Bottom Vel to 80 Now MS2 will sound when you play softly at velocities of 79 or less and MS1 will sound when you play harder with velocities of 80 or more Next set MS1 s Xfade Range to
375. ils please see Listening to the demo songs on page 5 1 Press the MODE SEQ switch to enter Sequencer mode The PO 1 Play REC Program T01 08 or T09 16 page will appear If this is not displayed press the EXIT switch three times 2 Use Song Select to select the song you want to play back You can press the Song Select popup button and choose from a list Meter Tempo SEQ P 1 Play REC Program ca Song Select 1001 01 000 Meter 4 4 J 691 88 auto Popup OSE Two On One Track Select 4 Track Percussion Reso Hi _ RPFR Chai RPPR Hoflssign T61 1 6036 Funk Kit Category Category 15 gt 15 Pag gt 05 PAG gt 06 gt i PAS Drums Drums Bass 5 Bass Reyboad Keyboa FastSun Strings Program Select Bank Program INT IHT IHT INT INT IHT IHT IHT amp Popup E0362 Aged 2 Aage A COSA A Raag A Caie 2 ALi 2 Bess Funk Kit Studio 51Fhone He Hard Syn Stereo G Custom E Warm An Analog Play Mute Rec sam L Play J solo ge Slo EL Solo Soto jf Soto Soto fh Solo Soto Frj meg Miner Mirer FlyLoop FlyLoop Sampling Frete neck 3 l ce Lei Lis Deris Die pe Jir cance rac Track 2 3 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch The song you selected in step 2 will begin playing The song will begin playing if you press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch in a page other than P10 Pattern RPPR If you
376. in 4 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch 5 For the track you want to record press Play Rec Mute to make it indicate Rec MIDI recording Recording MIDI in real time 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch With the default settings for Metronome Setup the metronome will sound for a two measure pre count and then recording will begin Now you can perform on the keyboard and controllers and use the KARMA or RPPR functions if desired 7 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Playback will stop and you will return to the location specified in step 3 An example of realtime recording In this example we ll assign a drum program to MIDI Track 01 and create the following one measure drum phrase Hi hat F 3 m l I J eae C3 Z ey y y y T 1 Create a new song and specify a drum program for MIDI Track 01 Use Track Select to select MIDI Track 01 and verify that you hear a drum program See page 83 2 Access the P0 1 Play REC Preference page In Recording Setup specify Loop All Tracks and set it to M001 M001 For details please see Loop All Tracks on page 86 With this setting measure 1 will be recorded repeatedly The newly recorded data will be added at each pass 3 Set REC Resolution to A See page 84 4 Press the SEQUENCE REC WRITE switch and then the START STOP switch The metronome will sound a two measure count down and then recording will be
377. in internal memory use Save All or Save PCG to save it to external media before you continue 1 Access the Global mode P0 Basic Setup Basic page Press the MODE GLOBAL switch to enter Global mode If the Global PO Basic Setup Basic page is not shown press the EXIT switch 2 Press the menu button and choose Load Preload Demo Data A dialog box will appear Load Preload Demo Data Kind MEEME Cancel 3 In the Kind field select All Preload PCG In addition to All Preload PCG you can also select All Preload PCG and Demo Songs All Demo Songs Program Combination Drumkit Global Setting Note Program Combination and Drumkit can load all a single bank or an individual item OF 4 Press the OK button to execute the load operation If you decide not to execute press the Cancel button When you press the OK button a dialog box will ask you for confirmation Press the OK button to execute loading Note While a dialog box is displayed the ENTER switch will perform the same function as the OK button About the data loaded by All Preload PCG When you execute All Preload PCG the following data will be loaded When you execute All Preload PCG and Demo Song the Demo Song data will be loaded in addition to the data of All Preload PCG If the EXB RADIAS is installed programs will be loaded into bank I F If the EXB RADIAS is not installed e Program Bank
378. inations Easy Combination editing You can edit any of the Combinations shipped with M3 You can create your own combinations by editing a preloaded combination or by starting from an initialized combination Even without moving to the various pages for detailed editing you can make effective changes just from within the Combi P0 Play page You can also edit using the switches and sliders of the front panel Control Surface Changing the programs within the Combination Changing the Program assigned to each timbre 1 16 is a quick way to dramatically alter the sound of the Combination Note Selection via MIDI program changes is limited to timbres whose status is INT Selecting programs from the front panel and display To change the Program assigned to a Timbre 1 Access the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 T09 16 page In this page you can view the program assigned to each timbre 1 16 and the play mute and solo status of each Select Timbre Info ret Bae8Steres Grand 2 Way Timbre No R EXB RADIAS Category He gt 03 lz 15 15 aL Erak Strings Motions Drums l Drums Bank Program IHT IHT IHT IHT IHT TRA EEE tess 2 Epes 2 Ages gt Ages Program Saleci Steed G String Pe Liquid Ev Tricki Kil Tricki Kii rome Pie Mie Gos Go Gm Solo On Off Category Timbre Program Select Bank Timbre Program Select 2 Use
379. ing realtime recording you can use the control surface to modify the pan EQ volume and tone adjust settings to record these changes so that they will be reflected during the playback Use multi track recording if you want to modify the settings of multiple tracks simultaneously Note Control you perform using the control surface is transmitted as control change messages and system exclusive messages In order for this data to be recorded the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Routing Enable Control Change and Enable Exclusive settings must be checked Go to Global mode and verify that these items are checked Note Use Param MIDI Out to specify whether control change messages or system exclusive messages will be transmitted when you edit the Pan CC 10 Volume CC 7 or Send 1 2 level CC 93 and CC 91 parameters In this case the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Routing settings Enable Control Change and Enable Exclusive must be checked respectively Recording patterns Recording and editing patterns You can record patterns in either of two ways realtime recording or step recording However pattern realtime recording differs from song realtime recording in that you can use only Loop type recording You can edit patterns by using Event Edit operations to modify the recorded data or insert new data You can also use the Get From Track menu command to convert a desired region of performance data from a MIDI track into a pattern Conversely
380. ings Drum Track function settings in Program mode In Program mode the drum track has its own dedicated track Drum Track function settings in Program mode are made in the Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Drum Trk Pattern page and the Drum Trk Program page Here we will explain how to make the most important parameter settings For details on the parameters please see 1 4 Drum Trk Program DrumTrack Program on page 29 of the Parameter Guide and following Switching the Drum Track function on off Each time you press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch the Drum Track function will be turned on or off When on the switch LED will be lit or blinking The lit or blinking state will depend on the Trigger Mode setting If the switch LED is blinking Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trig With the Wait KBD Trig setting the on off status of the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch is also saved when you save the program If the switch LED is lit Trigger Mode is set to Start Immediately With the Start Immediately setting the switch status is always saved as Off regardless of the on off status of the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch Selecting a Drum Track pattern Here s how to select the Drum Track pattern As explained earlier you can also select this in the Prog PO Play Main page see page 186 1 Access the Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Drum Trk Pattern page PROG P1 Basic DT Ctris DBrumTrk Pattern i Pattern O een F153 Funk Fusio
381. is is easy to verify here uncheck this item 7 Select the menu command Auto Sampling Setup to access the dialog box 8 Make the following settings REC Audio Input On Make settings for sampling an external audio source while you monitor the performance of a program Mono L Mono R Stereo Mono L If you re using analog input make settings so that the sound from Input 1 will be sampled to L MONO Save to RAM The resampled data will be written to RAM memory Convert to Program On Program as desired After resampling the data will automatically be converted to the program number you specify in Program O Initialize Q Resample Program Play REC Audio Input Source Audio ig Analog Ram m Convert to Program onm Save to Program 2 1l E001 InitProgram EGG Cancel OK 9 Press the OK button to execute the command Preparations for sampling have now been made Note Let s take a look at the content of the settings Analog INPUT1 AUX Bus 1 2 Other Bus Off The input from AUDIO INPUT 1 will be sent to the AUX Bus 1 2 RECORDING LEVEL Recording Level 0 0 This is the default setting for resampling Sampling Setup Source Bus L R 123 124 Sampling Open Sampling System The sound sent to AUX Bus 1 2 will be sampled The sound of the internal sound generator sent to the L R bus will not be sampled Trigger Sampling START SW Press the SAMPLING REC switc
382. isplay MIX PLAY MUTE SOLO D T k Om me O oe Text me O rx _ cn ee Tm mm mm 0 _ Play Mute CONTROLS Ss SO On Off SWITCHES 3 Sa 11 8 MIX VOLUMES VALUE o cuTorr RESONANCE EG IVTENSIV EGRELEASE USER USER USERS USERA T9 16 MIXER INPUTS T1 8 O REALTIME _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ m E p E GE CE GE DE E ote EXTERNAL 7 z z Drum Track Volume TONE gt SLIDERS 3 ADJUST Oo oO Oo 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 TRACK KARMA mo SCENES O1 4 5 8 lt gt PRESS KARMA 1 A O KARMA LINKED LED O mae DRUM TRACK ON OFF Performing with the Drum Track function Using the Drum Track function in Combination mode PROG P Play l gt HAI BPM Dense Motionations Control Assign E OSC Mix Control Surface a J 120 50 OSC Play Mute OsC1 DSE DrumTrck a oo OSC Volume E 127 127 TE 4 Operate slider 3 to adjust the volume of the drum track 5 If the display indicates OSC Play Mute pressing switch 3 will change the Play Mute status of the drum track 6 Press the menu command button in the upper right of the display and choose Panel SW Solo Mode The menu will close and the OSC Play Mute indication in the display will change to OSC Solo Alternatively you can switch between OSC Play Mute and OSC Solo by
383. isplay to make the M3 detect the media When the media has been detected information about the media will appear on the display Saving data Saving to media Media Save Scan USB devise Menu command Media Info NEW VOLUME scan USB device Drive Device ID Volume Labet Device Type Direct Access Device Product ID B4188 RAM Disk Format Type Ms bos Total Size 25 3 Free Size 1 3M Write Protect oft Supports Removable Yes Media ROD NEW YOLUME Select fasg Make Play Eor 7 If the media needs to be formatted execute the Format operation Media requiring formatting is indicated as Unformatted in Media Select For details please see Formatting media on page 148 How to save data As an example here we ll execute Save All to save the PCG SNG KSC KMP and KSF files Save All saves all internal memory Programs Combinations Drum Kits Global settings RADIAS Formant Motions if the optional EXB RADIAS is installed and drum track user patterns to media as a PCG file It also saves songs and cue lists as a SNG file and multisamples and samples created in Sampling mode as a KSC file This method is available only if the current directory is a DOS directory amp If you save this data to low capacity media you may need more than one media 1 Prepare the media on which you want to save the data See Media setup on page 143 2 Press the MODE MEDIA sw
384. itch on off each time it is pressed GB 0 Play Rec Mute button in Sequencer ED mode Solo On Off button in Sequencer mode ETD 1a On Off button for Effect 19 20 Introduction to the M3 Basic Information About the M3 s modes The M3 has numerous functions that let you play and edit programs or combinations record and play back sequence data edit samples and manage media These functions are grouped into modes The M3 has six modes Program mode Programs are the basic sounds of M3 In Program mode you can e Select and play Programs e You can use a maximum of one KARMA module to generate phrases e You can play back Drum Track patterns while you perform using a Program e Sample and resample For example you can sample an external audio source while listening to a performance generated by the KARMA function or you can play a Program and resample your performance e Edit Programs Make detailed settings for oscillators filters amps EGs LFOs effects KARMA X Y control etc EDS Enhanced Definition Synthesis sound generation system The oscillators can use the following multisamples e Preloaded 256 Mbyte 1 032 multisamples including seven stereo e RAM 64 Mbyte if the optional EXB M256 is installed a total of 320 Mbytes However 512 bytes are used by the system RAM multisamples sampled by the M3 or loaded in Media mode e Create drum programs using drum kits as c
385. itch to enter Media mode 3 Access the Media Save page Press the Save tab 4 Press Media Select to select the save destination drive 5 If the media contains directories select the directory in which you want to save the data Press the Open button to move to a lower level or press the Up button to move to an upper level Note If you are saving data on high capacity media we recommend that you create directories to organize the media into sections To create a new directory move to the level at which you want to create the directory and execute the Utility menu command Create Directory 6 Press the menu button to access the menu and press Save All A dialog box will appear The contents settings and operations for the dialog box will depend on the type of data that you are saving 143 144 Loading amp saving data and creating CDs Save All PCG SNG and KSC PCG 7 SNG 7 KSC To T NEWFILE Drum Kit Program Combination Selection Selection Selection AECODEFSG ABCOEFS ABGOEFG HT FESS Te 20 0 0 0 0 00 mT E USFEEEEESe ure urea m Global Setting m RADIAS Formant Motion m Drum Track User Pattern Cancel OK 7 Press the text edit button and input a filename for the file you want to save See page 197 8 Press each Selection button to access the dialog box and use the check boxes to uncheck any items that you do not need to save
386. ith the drum track Start the drum track to trigger KARMA p 179 211 212 Appendices Drum Track function Drum Track does not start Is the KARMA ON OFF switch turned on lit p 185 You pressed the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch but the drum track pattern did not start e Is the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch blinking Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trig The drum track pattern will start when you play the keyboard or receive a note on gt p 185 e Did you select a pattern that does not contain data If the drum track pattern fails to start in Combination mode is the Output Channel setting appropriate If the drum track pattern fails to start in Sequencer mode are the Input Channel and Output Channel settings appropriate p 185 p 191 Is MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI set to Internal or Auto PG p 380 In the Global P0 Basic Setup page is All KARMA DT Off checked p 130 When you switch the KARMA Master scene the drum track pattern is no longer heard e Have you checked the DT Run Drum Track Run check box of the KARMA Master scene gt p 192 X Y control Can t control the volume Is the Enable Volume Control check box checked PG p 32 p 141 p 220 Is the Combination or Sequencer mode X Y Assign setting appropriate PG p 143 p 222 Have you checked the Enable Program X Y Volume check box so that the volume control of a program can be reproduced in Combination or Sequen
387. just the amount of filter modulation produced by LFO1 8 Lower slider 2 slightly so that the display indicates about 6 9 Play a few more notes The pitch modulation has added some shimmer to the sound Now maybe it could use a bit more edge 10 Look at the assignments for switches 6 and 7 These are programmed to raise the Filter Cutoff and Filter Resonance respectively Switches are just on off but you can set a specific value for the On position notice the 10 and 40 in the switch s value boxes 11 Press each of the two switch buttons The sound now has a more interesting character due to the filters Since it s brighter we ve also restored some of the electric piano character Easy Program editing Using COMPARE Pretty easy huh Note depending on the parameter you may sometimes hear glitches in the sound as you move the control Changing parameter assignments The factory Programs include default assignments of Tone Adjust parameters to the sliders and switches If you like you can change any of the assignments To do SO 1 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN TONE ADJUST switch of the Prog P0 Play Control Surface page On this page you can see the parameter assignments for each controller such as Filter EG Attack Pitch Stretch Reverse and so on 2 Press the popup button located at the left of the assigned parameter A popup window will appear with a long menu of parameters You can
388. k 10k 24k Low resonance High resonance as 24 100 tk 1k 24k 2 24 160 tk 10k 24k Modulating the filters You can modulate the filter cutoff frequency using the Filter EG the LFOs keyboard tracking and other built in and MIDI controllers This is a great way to add a rich variety of tonal change to the sound Filter EG The Filter EG is a multi stage envelope which you can use to modulate the filter naturally as well as other Program parameters The EG itself is set up on the EG tab the way that it affects the filters is controlled by the Detailed Editing with Programs Using Filters parameters described below on the Filter1 2 Modulation page PROG P3 1 Filter1 Modulation M iFilter EG velocity to A 4 Intensity to a BER Ams Ribbon co 16 Velocity to B 88 Intensity to B 08 Intto A 66 to B 88 MFilter A B Modulation Filter AMS1 Common KTrki AMS2 Sw 1 cc sa Intensity 12 Filter B AMS14G Common KTrk2 AMS2 xy 4 88 Intensity 21 Intensity 72 ewe The Intensity to A and Intensity to B settings control the basic amount of EG modulation for filter frequencies A and B respectively before other modulation The Velocity to A and Velocity to B settings let you use velocity to scale the amount of EG modulation The AMS setting selects a AMS modulation source to scale the amount of the Filter EG applied to Filters A and B The two filters share a si
389. l zo Feedback C Delay 18 Sro sw 1 50 Amt z6 High Damp 98 ja Low Damp 98 5 Input Level Drod 38 188 Sre Js v 01 Spread 50 Wet Dry 5a 5a sro arr rt outa up J xt J ree J ireo J area J res Tories 4 Rotate the TEMPO knob and the delay time will change When you push the joystick away from yourself and press the SW switch the feedback level will rise and the delays will become longer 161 162 Using Effects 5 When you turn on the KARMA ON OFF switch KARMA will begin playing Select any desired KARMA GE When you rotate the TEMPO knob the delay time will change in synchronization with the changing tempo of the KARMA amp Depending on the specific delay effect you may hear a noise if you change the tempo while the delay is sounding This is because the delay sound becomes discontinuous and is not a malfunction MM For some effects you can synchronize the LFO frequency to the tempo Set the effect parameters MIDI Sync to On and BPM to MIDI For details please see Tempo Synchronization on page 442 of the Parameter Guide Common FX LFO Two Common FX LFOs are available for modulation effects such as choruses filters phasers etc In the P8 Common FX LFO page of Program Combination Sequencer or Sampling modes you can specify the reset conditions and speed of Common FX LFO 1 and pip Normally the LFOs of two or more modulation type effects used simu
390. l P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page and the MIDI Routing page you can make settings for the global MIDI channel the local on off setting MIDI clock MIDI routing and MIDI filtering You can also use a menu command in this page to transmit MIDI exclusive data dumps See PG page 400 GLOBAL P1 MIDI MIDI Basic ii Global MIDI MHMIIDI Setup channe Pasie MIDI Channel 6 E Note Receive All Local control on off Local Control On Convert Position PreMip MIDI Clock Internal Q External USB Auto External MID OQ External Firewire MIDI clock settings SEQ Mode Track MIDI Out for Master Param MIDI out Control Change DrumTrack Prog MIDI ch 168 E Prog MICI Out Global settings Audio input settings GLOBAL PLAID MIDI Routing x MIDI Out x y Q CC Control X Y control MIDI routing Pads MIDI Out C Pad CC Note Chord Notes e KARMA External M Enable KARMA Module to MIDI Out settings m Enable MIDI In to KARMA Module O Enable Start Stop Out in Prog Cormbi MIDI Filter Global MIDI m Enable Program Change filter settings m Bank Change m Combination Change m Enable After Touch m Enable Control Change m Enable Exclusive External control The M3 s external control capability lets you use the control surface switches 1 8 sliders 1 8 and pads 1 8 to control external MIDI devices Each of these control
391. lTy 4 Use the front panel KARMA SCENE 1 5 4 8 switches to choose a scene While the CONTROL ASSIGN KARMA Ceon switch is on pressing the KARMA switch FEE once again will make the 1 4 or 5 8 LED Bali Ll blink to indicate the next candidates for selection When you then press a 1 5 4 8 switch the corresponding KARMA scene will be selected When you switch scenes the sliders and switches will change to the settings saved in the selected scene Note If you press the CONTROL ASSIGN KARMA switch while either the 1 4 or 5 8 LED is still blinking the LED will stop blinking and the previous scene group 1 4 5 8 will still be selected Each of the eight scenes contains the values of sliders 1 8 and switches 1 8 By pressing one of the KARMA SCENE 1 5 4 8 switches and the CONTROL ASSIGN KARMA switch to choose a scene you can instantly recall settings for the eight sliders and eight switches Even if you switch scenes the changes you make using sliders 1 8 and switches 1 8 are remembered until you select another program When you write a program your slider and switch settings are saved in the respective scene 1 8 Restoring the state of the sliders and switches You can use the following methods to restore modified settings to their prior state For details see the corresponding reference page e Press the COMPARE switch to revert the settings of the entire program See COMPARE switch on page 23 e Use the RES
392. le for each connection Analog audio input Digital audio input output Digital recorder etc ee ee lo o Bosses See Pedal connections etc S P DIF i DIGITAL OUT OUT IN F ASSIGNABLE SWITCH If a passive type guitar a guitar without an internal preamp is connected it will not be possible to sample at an appropriate level due to the impedance mismatch Such instruments must be connected via a preamp or 1 l effect unit Connections to MIDI equipment Synthesizer MIDI OUT Effect unit a a MIDI IN MIDI cable LT lee i i j gt ASSIGNABLE F S P DIF a AUDIO INPUT a PL EVEL l DAMPER SWITCH PEDAL OUTwam IN Mic LINE 2 J h ia jm MUSIC WORKSTATION SAMPLER THRU OUT N msma R mmo Q Ce Ga Ga 5a 0E ryt 0 0 0 0 0 8 6 aver s US8 2 0 nmm swm S moni mal m AVER J SEMENT een sosai o Eeen base tal L L AC power supply AUDIO OUTPUT N INDIVIDUAL MAIN P itch 4321 R L MONO ower switc Power cable Included Option EXB FW etc FireWire PHONES IEEE 1394 Monitor OUTPUT O O Powered monitors ii etc INPUT to an AC outlet Connecting the power cable ba 7 CD R RW hard disk removable disks etc
393. le the song is playing you can press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch or a connected pedal switch at the desired location to start or stop recording With this method the musical data previously on the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data 1 Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Setup to Manual Punch In MiRecording ee O Overwrite Q Auto Punch In Q Ovwerdub Q Loop All Tracks Manual Punch In L_ Multi REC 3 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording 4 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Playback will begin 5 At the point at which you wish to begin recording press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch Recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record your performance 6 When you finish recording press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch Recording will end playback will continue Note Instead of pressing the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch in steps 5 and 6 you can use a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack Set the Global P2 Controllers page Foot Switch Assign to Song Punch In Out See Specifying the function of the Assignable Switch and Assignable Pedal on page 132 7 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Playback will stop and you will return to th
394. le utility functions will depend on the page you select For example the utility functions in Program mode let you write save the settings or let you perform convenient editing operations such as copying settings between oscillators or effects or a Sync function that lets you edit two EGs together 1 In the upper right of the display press the V button The menu command will appear 2 Select a menu command by pressing it with your finger A dialog box for the selected menu command will appear Check type commands will not display a dialog box their status will be switches and the list will close By holding down the ENTER switch and pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can access the dialog box for the first ten utility functions without going through the menu e If you want to close the list without selecting a command press the display somewhere other than the list or press the EXIT switch 3 For a parameter in a dialog box select it by pressing it with your finger and use the VALUE controllers e g VALUE dial or A V switches to enter its value When selecting a program or combination number in a dialog box you can also use the BANK SELECT switch to enter the bank as an alternative to using the VALUE controllers 4 To execute press the OK button or the ENTER switch If you decide not to execute press the Cancel button or the EXIT switch The dialog box will close 5 Writing saving After you e
395. lect menu on page 39 Refer there for details Category Combination Select menu Vintage Tremolo I 41 3 12 Bars In One M 19 I AGZ2 Across The Milkyl A112 Lake of Two Mould I AG4 amp Winter Walk LBGGG Safe from the Silt I AGE4 Tone Adjusted EFI BA1 Piano amp Matural 2 I 487S Electric Bell EP I BG 32 Piano amp Strings I AGS8 Dreaming withoull Be4s worship gt Pianophonix I B Ss Electus Grandus Jump to Sub Cancel OK Selecting Combinations using a footswitch You can select Combinations by using a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack By assigning the appropriate function you can increment or decrement the combination number in steps of one Combinations without using your hands great for quick Program changes in live performance situations For details please see Using a footswitch to select Programs on page 39 Selecting Combinations from MIDI You can send MIDI Program Change messages to M3 from external MIDI devices such as DAW software or other MIDI controllers In conjunction with MIDI Bank Select you can use these to select any Combination from all 14 Banks If you use the included M3 Plug In Editor as a plug in inside your DAW software you ll be able to easily select M3 programs or combinations from a list within your DAW For details refer to the included M3 Editor Plug In Editor Manual PDF Transmit receive MIDI channel settings
396. lect the EQ that you want to edit 3 Use the VALUE controllers e g VALUE slider to edit the value Low Adjusts the gain of the 80 Hz low shelving EQ in 0 5 dB steps Mid Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the mid sweepable EQ Mid Adjusts the gain of the mid sweepable EQ in 0 5 dB steps High Adjusts the gain of the 10 kHz high shelving EQ in 0 5 dB steps PROG P Play Bank INT A gt 13 NetionSunth 3 2050 001 BPM Dense Mouonatons S Swi Swi Mod CCHSOD E We JS Y Lack Eats Cg KARMA Pattern gt Freset gt P422 Drum n Bass 11 D n B Program E BHSe Electro Rock Kit ARIA TSamplinal Cont Ji R ie an i Controlling Volume Mute and Solo for Oscillators 1 2 and the Drum Track You can use the sliders and switches of the control surface to control volume mute and solo for the oscillators and drum track 1 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN MIXER switch to make the T1 8 LED light Control Assign Switches 1 8 Reset Controls Sliders 1 8 A _ SOLO as Hone Ee ee ee a LECETA CONTROL MIX VOLUMES ASSIGN T1 8 o BRUIT TEI EDEN EES Be ee BS Ee 19 16 Fu INPUTS fe cat CONTROL EXTERNAL ADJUST 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 715 8 16 MASTER BHITITITa Tttiild PHLTLLIatitltidid oOHITLITIIHITITIIgg PHEILITLLIGTILIG obllilraitiidld OHITTIIHITITIISG NE TLTLIGTILig obILITITIGITIItIG SCENES O1 4 5 8 lt PRESS KARMA
397. lers can transmit a specified MIDI control change on the specified MIDI channel There are 128 sets of control assignments With the factory settings the control sets contain preloaded data For example there are setups that let you control soft synthesizers such as the KORG Legacy Collection and other setups that let you control the level and pan of a DAW Digital Audio Workstation program in realtime Note See the M3 External Setups PDF for details on the control change CC settings assigned by the preloaded external control templates and the application settings to which they correspond Using external controls Note Before you continue adjust your settings so that the M3 can send MIDI data to your computer application or MIDI device 1 Press a MODE PROG switch the LED will light We ve selected Program mode as an example here but you are free to select Combination or Sequencer mode if you wish 2 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN EXTERNAL switch the LED will light 3 Access the Prog P0 Play Control Surface page This page shows and reflects the data of the control surface It s a convenient place for you to adjust the sound since you can view the parameter assignments and see the precise values Note Control via the control surface is active regardless of the page shown in the display 131 Settings for the entire M3 Global mode PROG P Play I A gt GOG Stereo Grand 4 Way Con
398. lete unnecessary measures Measure size over limit Meaning When loading a Standard MIDI File the number of events in a measure exceeded the maximum approximately 65 535 events Meaning The attempted edit operation would cause the maximum number of events in a measure approximately 65 535 to be exceeded To solve either of these problems e Use event editing etc to delete unwanted data Medium changed Meaning When executing the Copy command in the Media mode Utility page the media was exchanged or ejected and it was not possible to copy between separate media on the same drive Medium unavailable Meaning You selected a medium that does not allow writing Medium write protected Meaning The other writing destination media is write protected e Turn off write protect on the other media and execute the command once again Memory full Meaning In Sequencer mode when editing a song track or pattern the total data of all songs has used up all of the sequence data memory and further editing is not possible To solve this problem e Delete other song data etc to increase the amount of free memory Meaning While realtime recording in Sequencer mode there is no more free memory to accommodate the recorded data so recording has been forcibly halted To solve this problem e Delete other song data etc to increase the amount of free memory Memory overflow Meaning While receiving exclusive data in
399. ll start the moment you play the keyboard Save to RAM Sampling will occur to RAM memory Mode Stereo The sound of the internal L R channels will be sampled in stereo Sampling in Program Combination and Sequencer modes 8 Adjust the recording level Press the SAMPLING REC switch and use the Recording Level slider to adjust the level Play with the KARMA function turned on and use the VALUE slider to adjust the Recording Level slider as high as possible without allowing the CLIP indication to appear When you ve finished making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC switch Press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn the KARMA function off 9 Sample Press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn it on Press the SAMPLING REC switch Press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to put the M3 in record ready mode Play the keyboard Recording will start the moment you play the keyboard While recording continues all the sound you produce using the keyboard or controllers will be recorded Press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to stop recording 10 Listen to the sound you resampled Select the convert destination program bank and number When you play the C2 key you ll hear the resampled sound Sampling only an external guitar sound while listening to phrases generated by the KARMA function Here we ll explain how to sample just an external audio source while you listen to phrases generated by the M3 s KARMA
400. llation a dialog box regarding digital signatures appears with a message saying has not passed Windows logo testing simply click Continue to proceed Note If you are unable to proceed with the installation it may be that your computer has been set to prohibit installation of unsigned drivers Check the settings of your computer as described in Allowing installation of drivers that are not digitally signed 5 After you ve installed the KORG USB MIDI driver exit the installer If you are asked whether you want to restart choose Yes to restart your computer For more about installation setup or uninstallation of the KORG USB MIDI driver refer to the installation manual HTML To view the manual choose Start AIl Programs KORG KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools Installation Manual About the M3 and USB MIDI driver ports KEYBOARD port Applications on your computer use this port to receive MIDI messages from the M3 data from the keyboard and controllers SOUND port Applications on your computer use this port to send MIDI messages to the M3 s internal sound generator making it produce sound 35 Setup Installing the KORG FireWire Audio MIDI driver 1 Follow the on screen instructions to install the KORG FireWire Audio MIDI driver If during the installation a dialog box regarding digital signatures appears with a message saying has not passed Windows log
401. lobal mode Press the PAGE SELECT switch to access Global Page Select Press P2 Controllers then press the Foot Control tab in the display 4 Set Foot Switch Assign to either Program Up or Program Down If you choose Program Up the next higher program number will be selected each time you press the foot switch If you choose Program Down the next lower program number will be selected each time you press the foot switch 5 Set the Foot Switch Polarity to match the polarity of the pedal you ve connected If you ve connected the optional PS 1 pedal choose KORG Standard Now the foot switch will step through the Programs one by one 39 40 Playing and editing Programs 6 If you want to preserve this setting even when the power is turned off be sure to Write see page 141 7 Press the PROG switch to enter Prog P0 Play and press the foot switch to change the Program Note This setting applies to selecting Combinations as well Assigning the footswitch to Value Inc Dec This lets you use the Assignable Foot Switch to duplicate the functions of the front panel Inc A or Dec V switches This method is convenient if you want to open the Bank Program Select menu or Category Program Select menu and switch programs while viewing the program or combination menu With this setting the Program Up Down assign method will not function while the menu is open Program changes will be ignor
402. lock to Internal on one unit and to S P DIF on the other unit If you ve connected a consumer digital audio device via S P DIF IN and OUT set the M3 s System Clock to S P DIF Set System Clock in the Global P0 Basic Setup System Preference page Digital audio input S P DIF IN An audio system digital mixer MTR that can output audio at a sampling rate of 48 kHz can be input to the M3 s L and R channels and sampled to the hard disk or routed through the internal effects and sent to the OUTPUT jacks 1 Use an optical cable to connect the external optical digital output of your DAT or other device to the S P DIF IN jack of the M3 2 Set System Clock Global P0 Basic Setup System Preference page to S P DIF For details please see System Clock on page 375 of the Parameter Guide 3 After turning on the power use the Sampling Audio In page to set up the volume pan bus routing and send levels for the inputs as desired For details please see Bus Select on page 10 and page 377 of the Parameter Guide You can use the S P DIF inputs simultaneously with the four analog inputs Connections Connecting a damper pedal foot switch or foot pedal Connecting a damper pedal foot switch or foot pedal By connecting an optional damper pedal foot switch or foot pedal you can control even more functions and effects You can use the damper pedal to apply a damper effect while you play You c
403. losion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only the same or equivalent type e When handling an option never touch parts that are not related to the installation Doing so may cause electrocution or malfunctions e When handling an option be careful not to touch the leads on the back side of the circuit board the side opposite that on which the components are mounted The sharp points may cause injury e Do not allow the option or other device being installed to become wet and do not allow objects to be placed on top of it Doing so could cause malfunction e When installing an option be careful that screws or other parts do not fall into the device into which it is being installed Doing so could cause malfunction Korg Inc takes no responsibility for any malfunctions or damage that may occur from improper use or modification of this product Nor will Korg Inc be responsible for any damages resulting from the loss or destruction of data Cautions when installing an option board In order to install the board correctly please pay attention to the following points Be careful of static electricity which may damage components inside the product or on the board Before beginning the installation touch an unpainted metal part of the chassis or the grounding terminal of a grounded device to discharge any static electricity that may be present in your body Perform the installation according to the ste
404. low you to specify how the sound develops over time from its onset to its end The each EG stage attack decay slope and release giving you detailed control over how the tone and volume change over time and making it possible to program anything from simulated acoustic sounds to vintage synthesizer sounds in the utmost detail Korg s AMS Alternate Modulation Sources give you a rich array of modulation possibilities with 50 different modulation sources you can use to control the sound in complex ways The M3 takes this classic Korg feature even further via the AMS Mixers These let you create even more detailed modulation designs such as mixing two modulation sources together multiplying one modulation source by another or modifying the shape of the modulation source in various ways Programs Drum Tracks and each of the sixteen timbres tracks has its three band EQ letting you make detailed adjustments to the tonal character To let you shape the final character of the overall sound the effect section provides up to five insert effects two master effects and one total effect In addition to delay and reverb the total of 170 high quality effects includes modulation type effects such as chorus phaser and flanger dynamic type effects such as compressor and limiter and amp modeling effects generated using Korg s proprietary REMS modeling technology There are also two common LFOs that can be shared between differ
405. ltaneously will not have synchronized phase even if you set them to the identical Frequency since the LFOs are being generated independently However if you select Common 1 or Common 2 for the LFO Type parameter of a modulation type effect the effect will use not its own individual LFO but the Common LFO you specify here This allows you to use a single Common FX LFO to simultaneously control two or more modulation type effects such as flanger phaser or auto pan with the same phase Since you can make independent settings for LFO waveform and phase offset for each effect you are free to create complex combinations of effects Common FX LFO LFO Type Common Stereo Flanger Common FX LFO a Common FX LFO1 Waveform Triangle Phase Offset 0 deg Frequency Hz Reset Generate original LFO waveform Waveform Sine Phase Offset 0 deg Waveform Sine Phase Offset 90 deg PROG P amp lFz Common Fx LFO _ Sunet Reset Frequency Hz 6 50 m MIDI Tempo Sync BPM GEIR Base Note EP Times G4 Common Fx a _ Sunet Reset Frequency Hz 4 58 C MIDI Tempo Syne PROG P IFa Delay Time msec a p LFO Waveform Triangle LFO Shape 3 LFO Fhase degree 1868 LFO Frequency Hz a50 sro orr Amt aaa MIDI Sync Off BPM MIDI Base Note J Times x1 LFO Type Common 1 CronLFO Offset deg 8 Depth 58 Feedback 56 High Damp 98 ja Wet Dry 50 56
406. ly When you turn it off the pattern will stop If the LED is blinking the Drum Track pattern will be in ready mode it will start when you play the keyboard or receive a MIDI note on message 4 KARMA KARMA stands for Kay Algorithmic Realtime Music Architecture It s an immensely powerful recording and live performance tool which can provide a wide range of musical effects including e Arpeggiation e Drum and instrument grooves e Complex CC gestures as if it was automatically moving sliders or joysticks for you e Musical phrase generation such as piano flourishes e Gated and chopped dance production effects e Any combination of the above e and much more ON OFF switch This switches the KARMA function on and off As with the other KARMA switches the switch s LED will light up to show you that it is turned on LINKED LED This will light if Link to DT of each KARMA module is on If this is lit the KARMA function on off status will be controlled in synchronization with the on off status of the Drum Track function LATCH switch When LATCH is turned on KARMA will continue to play even after you ve stopped holding notes on the keyboard drum chord pads or MIDI In This is convenient when you want to play on top of a KARMA generated groove for instance MODULE CONTROL switch In Combination and Sequencer modes KARMA has four independent Modules each of which can be generating a different mu
407. ly perform record broadcast sell and duplicate or in connection with activities which constitute fair use under copyright law If you are not the copyright holder have not received permission from the copyright holder or have not engaged in fair use of the works you may be violating copyright law and may be liable for damages and penalties If you are unsure about your rights to a work please consult a copyright attorney KORG TAKES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY INFRINGEMENT COMMITTED THROUGH USE OF KORG PRODUCTS KARMA Kay Algorithmic Realtime Music Architecture Technology has been licensed from Stephen Kay and is protected by U S Patents 5 486 647 5 521 327 6 084 171 6 087 578 6 103 964 6 121 532 6 121 533 6 326 538 6 639 141 and 7 169 997 Other patents pending KARMA and the KARMA Logo are registered trade marks and Generated Effect GE Melodic Repeat Direct Index Manual Advance SmartScan Freeze Randomize Random Capture Random FF REW and Scene Matrix are trademarks of Stephen Kay Karma Lab LLC This manual copyright 1994 2004 by KORG Inc and Stephen Kay All rights reserved Screen shots from the KARMA software that appear throughout this guide are 1994 2004 by Stephen Kay Karma Lab LLC Used by permission All rights reserved KARMA Technology can be located on the internet at www karma lab com This product uses the T Kernel source code in compliance
408. ly the multisamples and samples you can execute the Save Sample Data menu command in the Media Save page If you have converted a multisample into a program or if you are using multisamples or samples that you created in Combination or Sequencer mode or a drum kit you created in Sampling mode we recommend that you save your data using Save All in order to ensure that it will be reproduced correctly the next time you load it In Program Combination or Sequencer modes we also recommend that you use Save All amp Unless you save to media see page 142 any sample or multisample data you create will be lost when you turn off the power For details please see Media that can be used with the M3 on page 223 121 122 Sampling Open Sampling System Sampling in Program Combination and Sequencer modes In addition to using Sampling mode you can also sample both external audio sources and internal sounds in Program Combination and Sequencer modes You can also resample the performance in each mode while remaining in the internal digital domain For instance you can resample a performance that uses the M3 s full range of features including filters effects and KARMA You can even sample a full multitimbral sequence played either from the internal sequencer or an external MIDI sequencer You can also sample the M3 s performance together with audio from an external input source or monitor the performan
409. m T01 08 09 16 Category For Programs the category sub category you specify here can be selected in the following pages Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 09 16 Category 7 Use To to specify the bank and number of the writing destination program combination Use the VALUE controllers or the BANK switches to make your selection 8 To execute the Write operation press the OK button To cancel without executing press the Cancel button When you press the OK button the display will ask Are you sure When you press the OK button once again the data will be written The ENTER switch corresponds to the OK button and the EXIT switch corresponds to the Cancel button You can execute these operations by pressing the appropriate switch Using the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch to write This method can only be used to write the selected program combination number 1 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch The following Update Program Update Combination dialog box will appear Update Program ABBE Stereo Grand 4 ay Are you sure 7 Cancel OK This screenshot is for Program mode 2 To write the data press the OK button To cancel without writing press the Cancel button The ENTER switch corresponds to the OK button and the EXIT switch corresponds to the Cancel button You can execute these operations by pressing the appropriate switch Writing while X Y MODE is on Yo
410. m Track function while realtime recording a song track or pattern The note on off data transmitted by the Drum Track pattern can be recorded as events in a track or pattern amp You can t use note data from the internal sequencer as a trigger to start patterns for the Drum Track function When you ve used the Drum Track function with a program or combination to come up with an idea for a song you can then use the Auto Song Setup function to immediately start realtime recording see page 180 MIDI transmission and reception for the drum track In Sequencer mode the Drum Track function transmits and receives on the following MIDI channels Receive The drum track will receive on the MIDI channel specified by the Drum Pattern Input setting of each song Normally you ll set this to Tch and use the M3 s keyboard to control the triggering Transmit The drum track will transmit on the MIDI channel specified by the Drum Pattern Output setting of each song Set this to match the MIDI channel of the MIDI track for which you ve assigned the drum program If the track s Status is BTH EXT or EX2 note data etc of the Drum Track pattern will be transmitted Using the KARMA and Drum Track functions together If you re using the Drum Track function and KARMA function together you can link the start stop operation of both and specify whether the Drum Track pattern will operate for each KARMA scene Settings in
411. mal RTC Models In this case the assignment of RTC Controls is left up to the sound designer of the specific Program or Combination An example is 2073 VJS Motion If you load this GE it clears all RTC Model assignments when the GE Load Options are set to the default setting With such GEs it s generally best to copy the Module from an existing Program so that you have an example of how to map the controls Auto RTC Setup This is a convenient function that automatically makes KARMA sliders and KARMA switches assignments according to the RTC Model setting of a GE Use the Load GE Options dialog box to make these settings automatically Here you can choose whether you want KARMA controller assignments to be made automatically when you use the GE Select parameter to select a GE If you ve chosen Auto RTC Setup in this dialog box the assignments will be made automatically each time you change the GE This means that regardless of the type of GE that s selected you will immediately be able to use the standard KARMA CONTROL assignments See PG page 4 KARMA module parameters These are the parameters that control the phrases and patterns generated by a KARMA module You can set these parameters independently for each KARMA module These parameters include the GE selection MIDI input output channel key zone MIDI filtering and triggering GE RTP GE Real Time Parameters Perf RTP Perf Real Time Parameters T
412. mat SMF formats 0 and 1 supported In Track Sampling function Auto Song Setup function 225 226 Appendices Load Save Utility Make Audio CD Play Audio CD Data Filer functionality Save and Load MIDI System Exclusive Data Media CD ROM R RW UDF Format read write Record amp Play audio CDs CD DA ISO9660 Level 1 WAVE file editing functionality CD ROM R RW can be used if a commercially available USB drive is connected Velocity sensitive drum pads and chord triggers Pads 1 8 PAD MODE switch selects velocity sensitive or fixed velocity operation CHORD ASSIGN switch CONTROL ASSIGN MIXER 11 8 T9 16 INPUTS REALTIME CONTROL Switches EXTERNAL TONE ADJUST KARMA RESET CONTROL Switch MIXER PLAY MUTE SOLO REALTIME CONTROL IFX1 5 MFX1 MFX2 TFX on off ACRES EXTERNAL External mode External MIDI control TONE ADJUST Control the Tone Adjust functions Control Surface KARMA KARMA control Controllers MIXER Volume REALTIME CONTROL Realtime modulation 8 Sliders EXTERNAL External mode External MIDI control TONE ADJUST Control the Tone Adjust functions KARMA KARMA control In External mode the eight sliders eight switches and eight pads can be used as MIDI controllers 128 setups can be stored 102 are preloaded These allow you to control software synthesizers or DAW software Switches ON OFF LATCH MODULE CONTROL Master A B C D SCENES 1 KARMA A Switches X Y MODE HO
413. mber of the specified bank If you select another program or combination without writing the data of the newly selected program or combination will be called into the edit buffer and your changes will be lost Note When you press the COMPARE switch in Program mode or Combination mode the data from memoty i e the contents that were written into memory will be temporarily called into the edit buffer This allows you to compare the settings you are editing with the original un edited settings Editing applies to the data in the edit buffer Programs or combinations will play according to the data in the edit buffer f lt Edit When you write the Edit Buffer program or combination When you select a program settings will be saved in or combination its data is Write Select internal memory called from internal memory into the edit buffer Internal Memory NTA 0 127 ogram I A 0 127 Writing Global settings user Drum Kits The settings you edit in Global mode can be written into internal memory This is done using the operations Write Global Setting and Write User Drum Kits If you wish to use these edited settings after you turn the power off be sure to write the data first There are two ways to write global settings user Drum Kits 141 142 Loading amp saving data and creating CDs Using a menu command to write 1 To write global settings the various settings in Global P0 P4 pr
414. mbinations The LEDs in the switches light up to show the current bank In Program mode these switches select the Program bank In Combination mode these switches have two functions e When you re selecting Combinations they choose the Combination bank e When you re assigning a Program to a timbre within the Combination they select the Program bank In Sequencer mode when a track s Program name is selected these switches change the Program bank TEMPO knob TAP TEMPO switch You can set the tempo by turning the TEMPO knob or by repeatedly pressing the TAP TEMPO switch Control surface For details on using the control surface to edit values please see page 42 COMPARE switch Use this when you wish to compare the edits you have made to a program or combination s sound with the un edited original i e the sound that is written into memory When editing a program or combination press this switch The LED will light and the last written settings for that program number or combination number will be recalled When you press the COMPARE switch once again the LED will go dark and you will return to the settings that you were editing If you edit the settings that are recalled by pressing the COMPARE switch i e the settings that are written into memory the LED will go dark and it will not be f Ww me e t 23 24 Introduction to the M3 possible to return to the
415. me control to edit sounds or effects on page 48 e Editing Programs with Tone Adjust on page 75 Adjusting the volume mute and solo of each timbre You can also edit the mixer parameters directly from the Control Surface eight Timbres at a time 1 Press the MIXER switch under CONTROL ASSIGN so that the T1 8 LED lights up The switch has two LEDs one for T1 8 T9 16 and INPUT These correspond to Timbres 1 8 Timbres 9 16 and the audio inputs Control Assign Switches 1 8 Reset Controls Sliders 1 8 MIX PL4 MUTE SOLO 2 ce a a 1 ee E CONTROL sai MIX VOLUMES x lt KRANNN_ o curorr RESONANCE PEGINTENSITY EGRELEASE USER J Usen E USERA T9 16 F INPUTS eo REALTIME CONTROL EXTERNAL TONE ADJUST DRUM MASTER TRACK KARMA SCENES O1 4 5 8 lt PRESS KARMA LINKED ON OFF O a 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 0 2 Access the Combi P0 Play Control Surface page EililiiHiIliliIiE NEIIIIHIILIIM oHlLILLIatititida PEHEILITLLIATITLIa obllilrmaititida oObILITITIGTILIG NE TLTPIGTITLIG ombILITITIBITIITIG 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 715 8 16 MODULE CONTROL LATCH O20 This page displays and reflects the control surface data It s a convenient place to adjust the sound since you can view the actual parameter assignments and the exact data values Note You can use the Control Surface for control
416. menu command Update System Software to load the system update data 147 148 Loading amp saving data and creating CDs Media utility File copying deleting and formatting Media Utility Here we ll explain how to format media and how to set the date and time that are written into the file when you save data For other media utility functions please see 0 3 Utility Menu Command on page 432 of the Parameter Guide Formatting media Newly purchased media or media that has been used by another device cannot be used as is you must format the media before you can use it with the M3 Note When creating audio CDs you don t need to format the CD R RW media amp When you format all data saved on that media will be erased If you had used a computer etc to set up that drive so that it can be used as multiple drives partitions this data will also be erased Be sure to double check before you format amp After formatting it is not possible to press the COMPARE switch to return to the previous state 1 Make sure that the media you want to format is inserted See Media setup on page 143 2 Access the Media Utility page Press the Utility tab 3 Press Media Select and choose the drive that you want to format 4 Press the menu button to access the menu and press Format to open the dialog box Format Volume Label T NEW VOLUME i Quick Format FATIS Cancel
417. meters are set in the Media mode Play Audio CD page or the Sampling mode Audio In Setup page PG p 367 p 411 e Is the Volume slider raised Media mode Play Audio CD page Sampling P5 Audio CD Ripping page PG p 367 p 411 Troubleshooting Audio input and output Has the CD been finalized e A CD R RW disc that you wrote using the Media mode Make Audio CD page cannot be played in the Media mode Play Audio CD page or in Sampling mode until you also finalize the disc Execute the menu command Finalize Audio CD to finalize the disc PG p 436 Noise Distortion and other audio problems Noise and distortion occur in the input sound or the recorded sound If you are recording from audio inputs 1 and or 2 are the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob and Recording Level setting appropriate e If Recording Level indicates ADC OVERLOAD adjust the LEVEL knob If CLIP is displayed adjust the Recording Level slider p 211 If you are inputting to the S P DIF IN jack is the level of the output device and the Recording Level set appropriately e If CLIP appears adjust the Recording Level slider Is the system clock set correctly e If cyclic click noise is occurring check that you have selected the System Clock that is being input PG p 375 Noise or oscillation is heard When using an effect on the external audio source being input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 oscillation may occur depending on
418. mmon FX LFO sssssessssesesoooe 161 Dynamic modulation Dmod 05 161 COMMON A LFO enirir iien NARA 162 Using KARMA esesesesese 163 OVGIVICW ceive cones sostctwcanawoewswan 163 What is KARMA c cece cece ee eeneeees 163 The structure of the KARMA function 163 Performing with KARMA e06 167 Performing with KARMA in Program mode 167 Performing with the KARMA function in Combination Mode cece cece eee neces 169 KARMA function settings seeee 172 KARMA function settings in Program mode 172 KARMA function settings in Combination mode 176 KARMA function settings in Sequencer mode 180 Synchronizing the KARMA function 182 Drum Track function 185 Performing with the Drum Track function 185 Using the Drum Track function in Program MOdE ccc cece cee iien 185 Using the Drum Track function in Combination Mode cc cece cece eeees 187 Drum Track function settings 189 Drum Track function settings in Program MOdEe 0 cece ccc eee eeeeenes 189 Drum Track function settings in Combination Mode cccee cece eeeees 190 Drum Track function settings in Sequencer MOdE cc cece cece eect eens 191 Using the KARMA and Drum Track functions LOGGINED neroian iana bao tei weds AAE 191 Synchronizing the Drum Track function 193 Creating a Drum Track pattern
419. multaneously You can use the four KARMA modules together with the sixteen timbre programs in a wide variety of ways for example by using them to independently play phrases and patterns for separate programs such as drums bass guitar and strings Selecting a combination and turning the KARMA function on off 1 Press the MODE COMBI switch to enter Combination mode and select the desired combination See Selecting Combinations on page 65 COMBI P Play Program 141 43 Bank INT A gt 68 Reuboard 3 03557 6000 Towards The Sun TA1 I BGGG Steres Grand 3 Way E E EY 5 Category gt Aa gt 03 gt 12 gt 15 gt 15 gt 15 gt 15 gt 15 feanen fin nation Drums Orums Drums Drums Drums Bank Program INT INT INT INT IHT IHT IHT IHT hang A 0a35 4 Bees 2 Aaga 4 AES 4 Bosz 4 Ages 2 Raes Stereo G String Pe Liquid Ev Tricki Kil Tricki Kil Electro F Tricki Kil Tricki Kill Pie J h 3 16 a 1 8 J l l Audion Surface As you step through the combinations you will notice that the KARMA ON OFF switch LED is lit for some combinations With these combinations the KARMA function will begin playing when you play the keyboard or pads 1 8 Note If the Drum Track function is on when Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trig the drum track will start playing simultaneously Even for other combinations you can press the KARMA ON OFF switch the LED will light to t
420. n amp If the calendar backup battery runs low a message of The clock battery voltage is low will appear on the display If the calendar backup battery runs down completely the calendar will be initialized and the date and time will not be recorded correctly Note You can replace the calendar backup battery by yourself For details please see Specifications and options on page 224 149 150 Loading amp saving data and creating CDs Creating audio CDs Creating and playing audio CDs Media Make Audio CD Play Audio CD You can use Sequencer mode to create WAVE files by resampling your songs see page 127 and place these WAVE files in the desired order to create an audio CD Note You ll need a commercially available USB CD R RW drive and media Connecting your USB CD R RW drive and USB storage device 1 Using a USB cable connect the USB storage device containing your WAVE files to the M3 s USB A connector Using another USB cable connect your CD R RW drive to the M3 s other USB A connector Note The M3 s USB A connectors support hot plugging you can connect or disconnect the USB cable while the power is on However in order to do so your USB storage device must also support hot plugging 2 Turn on the power of the M3 3 Turn on the power of your USB storage device and use a USB cable to connect the USB port of your USB storage device to the USB A connector of the M3
421. n 11 2bpm Std OrumTrk Fatter 2 Use Pattern Bank to select the preset or user bank and use Pattern No to select the pattern number If you change the Shift value the Drum Track pattern will be shifted in semitone steps causing different instruments of the drum kit to play Trigger settings for the Drum Track pattern Here s how to specify how the Drum Track pattern will be triggered 1 Access the Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Drum Trk Pattern page 2 Trigger Mode specifies how the Drum Track pattern will be triggered Start Immediately When you press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch to turn it on the LED will light and the Drum Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting It will stop when you turn off the switch Wait KBD Trig When you press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch to turn it on the LED will blink and the Drum Track pattern will wait to start When you play the keyboard or receive a MIDI note on the Drum Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting 3 Specify the Sync setting Off The Drum Track pattern will not synchronize to the currently running KARMA but will start immediately On The Drum Track pattern will synchronize to the currently running KARMA PROG Pi Basic DT Ctris DrumTrk Pattern L Drom Patte r Pattern Preset P153 Funk Fusion 11 2bpm Std Shift 66 ET rigger Mode O M Latch on cone Keyboard Bottom EE 1 Top
422. n be used as individual mono outputs stereo pairs or any combination of the two Almost any signal source can be routed to these outputs including e Each note ina Drum Kit e Insert Effect outputs e Each Program in a Combination or Song e Audio inputs You can use these to isolate or group together sounds for recording or for complex live performance setups 1 Connect the INDIVIDUAL 1 4 outputs to the your amp or mixer inputs Connections Connecting audio equipment 2 Use the Bus Select parameters to send the desired sounds audio tracks inputs or effects to the individual outputs as either mono 1 4 or stereo 1 2 3 4 signals If the signal is going through one or more insert effects the output is set at the last IFX in the chain via the Bus Select parameter on the P8 Insert FX Setup page If a Program Timbre or Track is not going through any insert effects the output is set using the Bus Select parameters on the P8 1 or 8 2 Routing page To assign audio inputs directly to outputs use Bus Select parameters in the P0 Audio Input Sampling page In Global mode the Audio page L R Bus Indiv Assign setting lets you mirror the MAIN stereo L R output on any pair of individual outputs You can use this to create a private monitoring setup in live and studio environments For details please see L R Bus Indiv Assign Assign to L R and Indiv Out on page 378 of the Parameter Guide Note You can t u
423. n or program In this example we ll explain how to set up a song based on a combination Note Make sure that the global MIDI channel Global P1 MIDI MIDI Basic page MIDI Channel is set to 01 1 Create a new song For details please see Creating a Song on page 83 2 Select the menu command Copy From Combi A dialog box will appear Copy from Combination Combination gt EpC CCAD a mae m Fs mF m TF E Multi REC Standby Cancel OF Select the program or combination that you want to copy i e the copy source We will copy the effect settings of the combination as well so check the IFXs MFXs and TFX check boxes Check Multi REC Standby The Status will be automatically set to REC for the MIDI tracks needed to record that combination Press the OK button to execute the copy Notice that when you execute this command the Play Rec Mute setting of each track will be set automatically The Multi REC check box will be checked 3 Begin recording Press the LOCATE switch to set the location to 001 01 000 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Note If you play the keyboard during the pre count before recording the phrase generated by the Drum Track function and KARMA function will start playing the moment recording begins Record your performance 4 When you are finished performing press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch
424. n realtime while you perform Note If you use the Auto RTC Setup function of Load GE Options the standard KARMA sliders and KARMA switches assignments for the RTC Model of that GE will automatically be made when you select a GE See Selecting a GE on page 172 1 Access the Prog P7 2 KARMA2 GE RTP page PROG P 2 KARMA Z 8335 Pad Helper 65 m 9 16 17 24 25 32 J 180 80 VALUE ASSIGN FOL Eee IE a 100 204 8008 0102 8858 SLi 2 Rhythm Templte Restore E 6015 0058 0032 SL 03 Duration Duration Walue CE 8081 8288 8188 slz 8888 a4aa E288 s15 ooga 0004 iew2 P 8812 B888 Sw Rir J mor Names oe Use GE RTC Select to switch the set of GE realtime parameters you want to see 1 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 These buttons display GE realtime parameters 1 8 9 16 17 24 or 25 32 The number and type of GE realtime parameters you can edit here will differ depending on the selected GE There will be a maximum of 32 In each GE the parameters most useful for controlling the phrase or pattern are provided as presets Note RTC Model Every GE contains an internal setting that indicates its RTC Model Based on the type or purpose of the GE the RTC Model provides a certain degree of standardization to the over 200 internal parameters of the GE By default GEs that have the same RTC Model will be preset with the sam
425. n the P0 Recording Recording page assign the sample that you want to resample to Sample Sample Select When the power is first turned on the assigned sample will be set to Orig Key C2 2 Select the menu command Auto Sampling Setup A dialog box will appear 3 Choose Auto Resample through IFX In IFX select the effect you want to use Initialize C REC audio Input O Auto Resample through IF Cancel OF 4 Press the OK button to execute the command Settings for sampling have now been made 5 In the P0 Recording Audio In Setup page use Key to specify the sample that you want to resample Normally you will set this to match the Orig Key of the Recording page SAMPLING P Recording Audio In Setup ia E analog Level Pari BUS Select Fe But AUS BUS Sendi Send nut Ega 127 L086 orf of or pan ana Fa eT TET on of or pan jana Sampling Setup Source Bus gt L R Trigger Sampling START Sw Metronome Precaunt Ott Resample Auto Key m Fre Trigger REC 888 rms ERS i n 6 In the P0 Recording Preference page make sure that Auto 12 dB On is checked 7 In the P8 IFX Insert FX Setup page set IFX1 to 070 Reverb Hall and turn IFX On Off ON SAMPLING PE IFX Insert FX Setup MEEA ME a a Chain To Chair Fan 8 Bus gt TEE Effect 3j O ra gt GG6 No Effect 4 gt G8 Mo Effect 5 we BGe No Effect
426. nal MIDI sequencer or computer and then echoed back to play the M3 tone generator When you play the M3 s keyboard or strike the pads 1 8 performance data will be sent to your external MIDI sequencer or computer and the echo back from that device will play the M3 s sound generator In other words by turning Local Control Off you can prevent notes from being sounded in duplicate as would otherwise occur if a note were sounded by the M3 s own keyboard and again by the data that was echoed back The default setting for Local Control is On To turn off Local Control the Local Control On Global P1 MIDI page check box to uncheck it When using the M3 by itself leave Local Control turned on If this is off when M3 is used by itself playing the keyboard will not produce sound For details please see page 131 and PG page 379 Note The M3 s Local Control setting can be turned Off by the Local Control Off message sent from the editor when you start up M3 Editor Plug In Editor Note If the EXB FW is installed the FireWire connector will behave in the same way FENI ees Local Sequencer oooo0000 ae Estas OFF Record A sera one gt ON Generator M3 If you re using the M3 M by itself the controllers of the keyboard assembly are not included Enable KARMA Module o MIDIIN to MIDI Out Enable MIDI In to KARMA Module OFF o MIDI OUT O ie ON When playing
427. nal memory so that the box is unchecked Saving to media Media Save For details on the data that can be saved on storage media See Types of data that can be saved on page 139 amp Song data in the M3 s Sequencer mode as well as multisamples and samples cannot be written into internal memory This data will disappear when the power is turned off In order to keep this data you must write it to the USB storage device commercially available hard disk removable disk When you ve come up with settings you like it s a good idea to save them so that even if you subsequently edit those settings you ll always be able to reload the previous settings if desired Types of media you can use USB storage device e Hard disks e Removable disks Hard disks and removable disks in MS DOS format FAT16 or FAT32 are supported Capacity recognized FAT32 up to 2 terabytes 2 000 Gigabytes GB FAT16 up to 4 GB e CD R RW UDF format is supported UDF format CD R RW discs can be written and read See CD R RW disks on the M3 on page 660 Recording playback of CD DA audio data and reading of I509660 level 1 format is also supported e Floppy disks MS DOS format 3 5 inch 2HD and 2DD floppy disks can be used The formatted capacity of the floppy disks will be 1 44 MB 18 sectors track for 2HD and 720 KB 9 sectors track for 2DD For details on connecting devices to the USB A connectors please see page
428. nd EQ settings that are loaded automatically These adjustments are applied relative to the original settings of the program MIDI transmission and reception for the drum track In Program mode the Drum Track function transmits and receives on the following MIDI channels Receive If you re controlling the triggering by playing the keyboard the drum track will receive on the global MIDI channel Transmit The drum track will transmit on the MIDI channel specified by Drum Track Prog MIDI Ch default channel 10 Note data etc of the Drum Track program will be transmitted Note MIDI transmission of the pattern data is enabled if Drum Track Prog MIDI Out Global 1 1a is selected The default setting is off unselected The Drum Track program does not transmit or receive program changes Drum Track function settings in Combination mode Unlike Program mode Combination mode does not have a dedicated track for the Drum Track function You ll need to specify a timbre 1 16 as the one for use by the Drum Track program Then set the drum track s output MIDI channel Output to match the timbre s MIDI channel MIDI Channel so that the Drum Track program can be played For details please see Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum Track program on page 186 MIDI transmission and reception for the drum track In Combination mode the Drum Track function transmits and receives on the following MIDI channels Receive
429. ndar battery was installed correctly turn off the power and wait a few seconds Calendar battery Then turn on the power again and verify that the message shown in the illustration at the upper left does not appear With cover A removed 3 Remove the old calendar battery Press the battery in the location shown in the illustration below free it from the battery holder tab and lift the battery out to remove it amp Be careful not to drop the battery into an opening in the unit Fa MG Press this part of the battery 5 J 207 208 Appendices Troubleshooting If you experience problems please see the relevant item and take the appropriate measures Power supply Power does not turn on Is the power cable connected to an outlet p 26 Is the rear panel POWER switch turned on gt p 25 Display The power is turned on but nothing is shown on the display The M3 functions normally when you play the keyboard or perform oth er operations Use the rear panel Contrast adjustment knob to adjust the contrast of the display p 12 The power is turned on but the display does not work normally or an error message is dis played There is no sound when you play the keyboard and the M3 does not function nor mally This
430. nds of mono sampling or approximately 23 minutes 18 seconds of stereo sampling RAM1 RAM2 Total 320 Mbytes allowing up to approximately 58 minutes 15 Sampling seconds of mono sampling or approximately 29 minutes 7 seconds of stereo sampling Continuous sampling across RAM1 and RAM2 is not possible ee Maximum sampling time to a USB storage device is a maximum of Sampling time MEDIA approximately 80 minutes for one sample file for either mono or stereo This occupies approximately 440 Mbytes for mono or 879 Mbytes for stereo NUP ob zamp es 4 000 Samples 1 000 Multisamples Max 128 indexes per Multisample multisamples Sample directly from audio CDs CD DA Load AIFF WAVE AKAI S1000 S3000 SoundFont 2 0 KORG Format sample data Time Stretch Time Slice Crossfade Loop and other standard editing features 5 Insert Effects In line processing stereo in stereo out 2 Master Effects Two effects sends stereo in stereo out For overall processing on the main outputs such as compression limiting 1 Total Toalete p g p p g rotate FY EQ stereo in stereo out High low and sweepable mid band Per Program in Program Mode per 3 band Track EQ Timbre in Combination mode 16 total and per Track in Sequencer mode 16 Effects total 170 types Usable for insert master or total effects However double size effects cannot be used as the total effect X Y Control finger movements can be recorded in re
431. ne of the display Mode name Tab name Main ae Oe ed EL Page number and name Category Bank Bank INT A gt 00 Keyboard ly 000 Stereo Grand 4 W ee Program Select Program number and name Program Select popup button Category Select popup button Category number and name If a different page is shown press the EXIT switch several times to move to the Prog P0 Play Main page 3 Make sure that Program Select is selected If it is not press Program Select in the display to highlight it 4 Select the program you want to play You can use the following methods to select a program e Use the A or V switches e Turn the VALUE dial e Use numeric keys 0 9 to enter the program number and press the ENTER switch 5 Press a BANK SELECT I A U G switch to switch banks 1 MODE PROG switches 5 BANK SELECT A U G switches 4 Numeric keypads ENTER switch T 23 PROG P Play Cat T Bank INT A gt 60 Keyboard J 100 00 C SW Octave Down C W2 JS amp Ribbon Loc Bete C S RT Control 9999 03 0 1 25k 03 0 02 5 Pattern gt Preset P153 Funk Fusion 112bpm Std Program amp amp l 4004 Studio Standard Kit Main pi a6 El TouchView MODE BANK SELECT EXIT PAGE REC SELECT WRITE START STOP 37 38
432. ne or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the user s authority to operate this equipment Notice regarding disposal for EU lf this crossed out wheeled bin symbol is shown on the product or in the operating manual you must dispose of Dz the product in an appropriate way Do not dispose of this mmm product along with your household trash By disposing of this product correctly you can avoid environmental harm or health risk The correct method of disposal will depend on your locality so please contact the appropriate local authorities for details Handling of this product This product contains precision components and may malfunction if you fail to observe the following precautions e Do not subject this product to vibration or impact Doing so may damage internal components and cause malfunctions e Do not use or store this product in locations of extremely low or high temperatures such as outdoors in winter or in direct sunlight in summer Avoid moving this product between locations of dramatically different temperatures If a temperature difference occurs water droplets
433. ng Open Sampling System Sampling Overview About sampling The M3 features Korg s Open Sampling System which allows you to perform sampling and resampling not only in Sampling mode but also in Program Combination and Sequencer modes with functionality that is optimized for each different mode e Audio signals from an external source connected to the AUDIO INPUT jacks or S P DIF IN jacks will be sampled in stereo with 48 kHz 16 bit resolution Analog signals will be converted into digital data when they are sampled Digital signals will remain in the digital domain as they are sampled Note If the optional EXB FW is installed you ll be able to input digital signals from M3 Plug In Editor running in your host application For details refer to the M3 Editor Plug In Editor Manual PDF e Performances using the M3 s filters effects KARMA function and sequencer can be resampled e Audio signals from an audio CD can be extracted ripped directly in the digital domain These sampling resampling operations can be performed into the M3 s RAM memory or into a USB storage device such as a commercially available hard disk connected to the USB A connector Sampling to RAM memory or a USB storage device Sampling to RAM memory If you want to use the sampled resampled multisample or sample as a sound generator waveform in an EDS program or a drum kit you should sample to RAM memory The M3 comes with
434. ng the LOCATE setting is automatically initialized to 001 01 000 For details please see Set Location Set Location for Locate Key on page 281 of the Parameter Guide Loop playback When recording or playing back a song you can individually loop the MIDI tracks that are playing In the P0 1 Play REC Play Loop T01 08 or T09 16 page check Track Play Loop for the MIDI tracks you want to loop and use Loop Start Measure and Loop End Measure to specify the starting and ending measure of the region that will play back as a loop If you check Play Intro the measures preceding the loop will be played back as an introduction before the loop begins Playing Songs Playback SEQ P 1 Play REC Play Loop T41 8 001 01 800 Meter 44 J 120 00 man S000 NEW SONG Trackat MIDI TRACK 61 Reso gt Hi lt Tez COs6 Brazilian Perc Kit Ch 62 RPPER Nofssign Drums Drums Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Track Play Track Play Loop or pee ogaao Loop Start Loop Start Measure Measure r aa EEE Loop End II Measure Ea aia Loop End Measure Flay Intro Play Intro K ll FlyLoop mu ig doie J 1s Jani i 1e S16 psalm renee d If you play back from the first measure with the settings shown in the screenshot above the specified region of measures will repeat as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Measures maw
435. ng to its structure At this time the maximum number of M3 programs resulting from this conversion is limited to 16 which is the maximum number of programs that can be used in a combination To solve this problem e Load the AKAI programs individually and edit them on the M3 e Instead of using Advanced Conversion Load load the multisamples or samples and edit them on the M3 Error messages Error and confirmation messages Meaning You exceeded sixteen programs while loading a SoundFont 2 0 file According to the structure of the sound data in a SoundFont 2 0 file the data being loaded will be converted into multiple programs and one combination At this time the maximum number of programs within the M3 following the conversion are limited to the sixteen programs that can be used by a combination This sound will not play correctly F File Front File already exists Meaning When executing a Create Directory or File Rename operation a directory or file of the same name already exists on the media Meaning When executing the Media mode Utility Copy command without using wild cards the copy destination contained a file of the same name as the copy source Meaning When you executed the Media mode Utility Save Sampling Data for All All Multisamples All Samples or One Multisample a directory already existed on the media with the same name as the directory that you attempted to create on the M3 Meaning When sam
436. ngle AMS source with separate intensity Into A or to B settings LFO modulation You can modulate the filter via LFO1 LFO2 and the Common LFO Among other applications LFO modulation of the filter can produce the classic auto wah effect The Filter1 2 LFO Mod page lets you set up the following parameters separately for each LFO PROG P3 1 Filter1 MLFOIs2 LFOW Intensity to A Intensity to B J5 Intensity ta A 06 JS Intensity to B 06 AMS sy 468 Int to 4 46 Int to 99 LFO Intensity to A 88 Intensity to B JS Intensity to A 00 JS Intensity to B ams amp After Touch Int to A B Int to B 00 Intensity to B 88 JS Intensity to A 6 J5 Y Intensity to B H AMS AMS Mixer Int to A 22 Int to B 00 Intensity to A Intensity to A and Intensity to B specify how much the LFO changes the tone JS Y Intensity to A and JS Y Intensity to B specify the depth of the wah effect produced by the LFO when the KYBD 61 73 88 s joystick is moved toward yourself or when CC 2 is received The AMS setting selects a AMS modulation source to scale the amount of the LFO applied to Filters A and B The two filters share a single AMS source with separate intensity settings For example if AMS is set to After Touch applying pressure to the keyboard produces an auto wah effect Keyboard Track Most acoustic instruments get brighter as you play higher pitches At its mos
437. nput level of the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks After setting the MIC LEVEL switch appropriately use this knob to adjust the gain MIC LINE switches These set the input s nominal signal level Set these switches according to the type of device that you re connecting and then use the LEVEL knobs described below to optimize the gain Use the LINE setting when connecting to mixers computer audio systems signal processors or other synthesizers Use the MIC setting only when connecting a microphone 7 AUDIO OUTPUTS All of the analog audio outputs use unbalanced 1 4 phone jacks referenced to a 4dBu signal level Connect these outputs to the input jacks of your amp or mixer In addition to the L MONO and R main stereo audio outputs the M3 provides eight individual audio outputs The sound from each oscillator drum timbre track or insert effect can be freely routed to any output Additionally you can route the metronome sound to an individual output to separate it from the stereo mix For details please see Routing effect settings on page 155 MAIN L MONO R These are the main stereo outputs their volume is controlled by the VOLUME MAIN slider All of the factory Programs and Combinations are programmed to play through these outputs When editing sounds or when setting up a Song in Sequencer mode you can access the main outputs by setting Bus Select to L R If no cable is connected to the R output
438. ns the KARMA function effects drum track and drum kits This also explains items you should check before suspecting a malfunction error messages specifications and installation of EXB options M3 Parameter Guide This explains details of the M3 s parameters organized by mode and page Refer to this guide when you want to learn more about an unfamiliar parameter M3 Voice Name List This lists the names of the multisamples drum samples the factory set combinations programs drum kits and KARMA settings Refer to this list when you want to learn about this preloaded content Keyboard Assembly Operation Manual Using the M3 M Brackets Keyboard Assembly Manual is included with the M3 61 73 88 It explains how to tilt the M3 M sound generator module upward from the keyboard assembly and how to remove or attach the M3 M Using the M3 M Brackets is included only with the M3 M sold by itself It explains how to attach the brackets to the M3 M so that it can be placed on a table or other surface at a comfortable angle M3 Editor Plug In Editor Manual This explains setup and use of M3 Editor and M3 Plug In Editor EXB RADIAS for M3 Manual This explains details of the parameters available when the optional EXB RADIAS installed in the M3 organized by mode and page Conventions in this manual References to the M3 The M3 is available as several models the 88 key M3 88 the 73 key M3 73 the 61 ke
439. nt to use a certain program in Program mode for the vocoder effect you would uncheck Use Global Setting and make input settings individually for that program The settings in Media mode are the same as the settings in Global mode Routing 1 Access the Global P0 Basic Setup Audio page Note You must move to Global mode from the mode other than Sampling mode in which you want to input the external audio signals If you move from Sampling mode to Global mode the Audio Input settings of Sampling mode will be maintained and you wont be able to view the settings of this page These settings are not used in Sampling mode Audio input settings for Sampling mode are made in the Sampling P0 Recording Audio In Setup page amp When applying effects to the signals from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 and S P DIE IN jacks oscillation may occur depending on the effect type and parameter settings If so adjust the input level output level and effect parameters In particular use caution when using high gain effects GLOBAL P8 Basic Setup liput Level Far Bus Select Fe Bus AUS Eus Sendi Send Input 1 127 Laas O GE oF or _S0L0_ Input 2 fz27 Riz Gor or Gor aaa pan SOLO l Output LR Bus Indiv Out Assign gt Off 2 Use Input to select the input source and set Bus Select Send 1 and Send 2 appropriately For details please see Routing of an external input on page 158 159 16
440. nu command Truncate to delete unwanted data that falls outside the start or loop start and end addresses Select the Front amp End radio button In this example we will not change the settings of the Save to No and Overwrite check boxes so press the OK button to execute When you execute this operation the truncated sample data will automatically be assigned to the index Truncate Sample 4688 Range Start HAAR 21 End Haw Pe see Front amp End Frot End Save to Ho Jangi Cancel O Overwrite OF G amp In the dialog boxes of some menu there is a Save to No setting that lets you specify the sample number to which the edited sample will be saved At this time a vacant sample number will be selected automatically so you will change the setting only if you want to specify the save destination number If you check Overwrite in the dialog box of the command the data prior to editing will be deleted and will be overwritten by the edited data Normally you will execute the Write operation without checking this so that the unedited data is preserved When you are completely finished with your editing you can use the menu command Delete Sample to delete unneeded samples Using the grid to make loop settings Grid overlays a grid on the waveform display to indicate the tempo BPM This helps you make loop settings that match the tempo You can also view the grid in the P1 Sample Edit page
441. o testing simply click Continue to proceed Note If you are unable to proceed with the installation it may be that your computer has been set to prohibit installation of unsigned drivers Check the settings of your computer as described in Allowing installation of drivers that are not digitally signed 2 When a dialog box such as the following appears while you re installing the KORG FireWire Audio MIDI driver connect the FireWire IEEE 1394 cable and power on the M3 3 After you ve installed the KORG FireWire Audio MIDI driver exit the installer If you are asked whether you want to restart choose Yes to restart your computer Setting up the M3 Editor Plug In Editor For details on setting up and using the M3 Editor Plug In Editor please see M3 Editor Plug In Editor Manual PDF Allowing installation of drivers that are not digitally signed If the computer you re using has been set to forbid the installation of any drivers that are not digitally signed you wont be able to install the KORG USB MIDI driver or the FireWire Audio MIDI driver Proceed as follows to change this setting so that you ll be able to install the drivers 1 From the taskbar click Start Control Panel to access the control panel 2 In the control panel double click System and then click the Hardware tab 3 In Drivers click Driver Signing System Properties System Restore Automatic Upd
442. o the original electric piano sound The table below shows the standard assignments of the RT Control sliders Real Time slider functions Slider MIDI CC Normally controls 1 74 Filter Cutoff Frequency 2 7 FilterResonance 1 Filter Resonance fF 3 79 Filter EG Intensity CC 79 a 72 kGReleaseTime 8 Often Revere Depth but can vary per Program Saving the edits you made by moving the sliders The Real Time sliders are great for modulating sounds in performance or for recording If you like you can also save the edited version of the sound using the normal Write Program command see Saving your edits on page 50 However for sliders 5 8 the edited settings can be saved only if you ve assigned CC 70 79 Internally a single slider usually affects several different parameters When you write a Program the edits are saved into the individual parameters and not to the slider itself After writing the Program you ll notice that the sliders have returned to their center positions since the old edited values are now the new saved values Using Tone Adjust The Tone Adjust function lets you use the Control Surface sliders and switches to edit program parameters The controllers will be assigned the program parameters that are most effective for editing 1 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN TONE ADJUST switch the LED will light 2 Access the Prog P0 Play Control Surface page
443. o your Programs Combinations Songs or other user data AC Power connector Connect the included power cable here 2 USB 2 0 USB A connector for connecting Hard Disk CD R RW drive etc This connector lets you connect external USB devices You can use a USB hard disk or CD R RW drive to save or load M3 data such as PCG or SNG files or WAVE files USB B connector for connecting to computer This connector lets you send and receive MIDI between the M3 and your computer What is USB USB stands for Universal Serial Bus and is an interface for transferring data between a computer and or peripheral devices 3 MIDI Connect these connectors between the M3 and external MIDI devices or a computer that is connected via a MIDI interface MIDI allows you to send and receive performance data such as note messages as well as sound settings MIDI THRU connector MIDI data received at the MIDI IN connector is re transmitted You can use this to chain multiple MIDI devices together MIDI OUT connector This connector transmits MIDI data Use this to control external MIDI devices or to record into an external sequencer Use this to play the M3 from another MIDI device or from an external sequencer 4 Pedals DAMPER jack For the damper also known as the sustain pedal you can connect either a standard footswitch or Korg s special half damper pedal the optional DS 1H The DS 1H is a continuous pedal des
444. odS Slid Mod Sid Mod Sld Mode ae Control In Program mode you can select one of five different functions MIXER OSC Mix Adjust the volume Play Mute and Solo On Off status for oscillators 1 and 2 and the drum track In Combination mode and Sequencer mode use the switch to move between timbres or tracks 1 8 or 9 16 Mixer Input Adjust the volume Play Mute and Solo On Off status for the analog inputs and the S P DIF and FireWire if the EXB FW is installed audio inputs The Solo On Off status is linked for the OSC MIX and Mixer Input REALTIME CONTROL RT Control Use the sliders to modify the sound or effects Use the switches to turn effects on off EXTERNAL Use the sliders and switches to transmit MIDI messages to external MIDI devices You can assign these functions in the Global P1 MIDI External Mode 1 2 pages TONE ADJUST Use the sliders and switches to directly edit program parameters KARMA Use the sliders and switches to control the KARMA function You can freely switch between these functions without losing the contents of your editing 2 Operate switches 1 8 and sliders 1 8 to control the selected functions For examples of using REALTIME CONTROL TONE ADJUST and KARMA please see page 48 page 49 and page 168 Resetting controls to their saved values The front panel RESET CONTROLS switch lets you recall the stored settings for any slider or
445. ode you can hold down the ENTER switch and press the LOCATE switch to operate the menu command Set Location 12 COMPARE COMPARE switch Use this switch to compare the sound of the Program or Combination that you are currently editing with the saved un edited version of the sound You can also use this switch to make before and after comparisons when recording or editing in Sequencer mode For details please see COMPARE switch on page 23 9 Ww me e t 13 PAGE SELECT Here you can select pages within each mode PAGE SELECT switch Press this switch when you want to move to another page When you press this switch a list of the pages within the mode will appear in the display Press the button of the desired page Alternatively you can move to a page by holding down this button and pressing a numeric key 0 9 EXIT switch If you re in a page other than page 0 e g Prog PO Play of each mode pressing this switch will take you to page 0 This switch makes it easy to return to the main page of the current mode e Press it once to go to the previously selected tab on the main PO page e Press it again to go to the first tab on the main PO page such as the main Program Play page If you had previously selected a parameter on this page that parameter will be selected e Press it a third time to select the main parameter on the PO page such as the Program name in Program mo
446. ogram INT IMT IMT IMT IMT IMT INT IMT 2 Boge 2 Ce35 9 Baes 2 Raes A Aaea 2 Bose 4 Aaea A AS Stereo G String Pe Liquid Ev Tricki Kil Tricki Rid Electro F Tricki Kit Tricki Kid To oS oe ee Ge oo Frog Miser Miser 7PlyLoop PlyLoop Sampling Frete aie L E J arte JU TE A S 18 Juin rence 4 Set the tracks you re not recording to either Play or Mute However if you re recording the performance of a combination and none of the tracks have already been recorded it s ok to leave all tracks set to REC 6 Press the REC WRITE switch and then the START STOP switch to begin realtime recording See Recording MIDI in real time on page 85 While you record you can operate the KARMA sliders KARMA switches and KARMA SCENE switches to vary the pattern or sound The changes you create will be recorded just as you make them amp The song tempo and KARMA function tempo cannot be set independently Synchronizing the KARMA function The Quantize Trigger parameter The trigger timing of a KARMA module will depend on the setting of its Quantize Trigger parameter On checked The trigger timing of a KARMA module will be quantized to a sixteenth note interval of the base tempo Off unchecked The KARMA module will be triggered at the timing at which you play the keyboard For details please see Quantize Trigger on page
447. ogram will play polyphonically Poly or monophonically Mono When this is set to Poly you can play both chords and melody lines When this is set to Mono only one note will sound even if you play a chord Normally you ll set this to Poly but Mono is useful when playing sounds such as synth basses synth leads and other solo instruments Try switching between Poly and Mono and listen to the results Working with Multisamples What is a multisample A sample is a digital recording of a particular instrument or waveform or other natural or artificially processed sound recorded at a specific pitch A multisample is a collection of similarly voiced samples used to create the same type of sound piano bass guitar strings organ across the entire keyboard as the basis of a program The oscillators of single and double programs use multisamples There are 1 032 multisamples available in this instrument You can assign up to four multisamples to each oscillator and switch between them by velocity Multisamples and Drum Kits Multisamples and Drum Kits allow you to play samples in different ways e Multisamples lay out one or more samples across the keyboard If we use the example of a simple guitar multisample one sample could be assigned for each string so that the multisample would consist of six samples e As the name suggests Drum Kits are optimized for playing drumsamples Velocity splits crossfades an
448. ograms Play the keyboard or strike the pads to hear the sound Note If you moved to another page etc by pressing the display pressing the EXIT switch a maximum of three times will take you back to the program name selection 3 The large characters in the upper part of the display will be highlighted These are the program number and program name Program Select In this state you can press the A switch or V switch to select the next or previously numbered program You can turn the VALUE dial to rapidly scroll through the programs 4 Use the BANK SELECT I A I G and U A U G switches to select other banks of programs A V switches PROG PO Play Bank Program Select number Category Select popup button With the factory settings numbers 0 127 of INT A INT D contain preloaded programs Select and play these programs to hear their sounds For details on the programs in each bank please see Overview Program Banks on page 38 5 Press the popup button located at the left of Program Select in the display A list of the programs in each bank will appear Use the tabs located at the left and right to select the desired bank Then press a program within the menu to select it By using the scroll bar located below the menu you can view the other programs in that bank that are not currently displayed You can press the A switch or V switch to select the program of the previous or next number Wh
449. ol the EG attack for the filter and amp Note If you wish to keep these settings after the power is turned off you must save the Program Combination or Song see page 140 Note that the settings for Sampling mode cannot be saved Using tap tempo Using tap tempo You can set the tempo of the KARMA function or Drum Track function in Program Combination and Sequencer modes by lightly pressing the TAP TEMPO switch several times in succession In Sequencer mode you can control the song tempo in this way In Sampling mode you can set Grid to the desired BPM value by lightly pressing the TAP TEMPO switch while the sample plays back To enter the tempo use your finger to gently tap the TAP TEMPO switch The tempo will be entered when you press the switch twice but you should tap several times in order to increase the precision The average of the last sixteen taps will be specified as the tempo During playback lightly press the TAP TEMPO switch several times at the desired tempo The tempo will follow your tapping in realtime This is a convenient way to match the tempo in realtime to the beat of a different source As an example here s the procedure for using tap tempo to set the speed of the KARMA 1 In Program mode or Combination mode start the KARMA function running Turn on the KARMA ON OFF switch and play a key or a pad If you press the LATCH switch the KARMA function will continue playing even a
450. on bank Bank INT A is selected The menu the Programs contained in that bank 2 Press the tabs in the left and right of the display to select banks 3 Press one of the program names in the center area to select a program The selected program will be highlighted and the program will change Alternatively you can use the A V switches to switch programs Play the keyboard or strike the pads to hear the program you selected 4 If you selected Bank GM the Variation button is shown By repeatedly pressing this Variation button you can cycle through the banks in the same way as by pressing the front panel INT G switch 5 When you are satisfied with the selected Program press the OK button to close the menu If you press the Cancel button the selection you made here will be discarded and you will return to the program that had been selected before you opened the menu Playing Programs Selecting Programs Selecting by Category Program Select menu You can select Programs from within a category such as keyboard organ bass and drums When shipped from the factory the preloaded Programs are organized into 16 categories each with several sub categories There are also 2 more categories initially named User 16 and User 17 which you can use and rename as desired 1 Press the Category Select popup button The Category Program Select menu appears Category Program Select menu Vox Organ SW2 1 sever
451. on display will indicate whether the M3 has detected it e If the problem still occurs even though the M3 has detected the EXB FW board disconnect and then reconnect the flat cable that connects the EXB FW to the M3 Be sure to push the connector all the way in Included CD ROM Can t install the driver Is the USB cable connected correctly Is the CD ROM inserted in your CD drive e Make sure that the CD ROM is inserted correctly Is the lens of your CD drive dirty e Use acommercially available lens cleaner to clean the lens Are you able to use USB e If you are using Windows XP go to Control Panel System and select the Hardware tab In Device Manager check the settings for Universal Serial Bus Controller and USB Root Hub Has the M3 been detected as an unknown device e If you are using Windows XP go to Control Panel System select the Hardware tab and check Device Manager If the M3 has not been detected correctly it will be displayed in Other devices or Unknown devices Reconnect the USB cable if the M3 is again displayed as an Unknown device the computer has failed to detect it correctly Delete the Unknown device entry and reinstall the driver p 34 Your software does not respond to the M3 Is the USB cable connected correctly Did you install the driver Has your computer detected the connected M3 e If you are using Windows XP go to Control Pan
452. on off data generated by KARMA modules A B C and D and the key zone settings of the KARMA modules T cerNote A EE EEE ET en E n CEAT Note Chord detection is affected by the KARMA module s key zone settings see 7 1 1b GE Setup on page 163 of the Parameter Guide Transpose see 7 2 1a Module Parameter Control on page 172 of the Parameter Guide and Dynamic MIDI Destination Combi 7 4 2 Chord Scan and Smart Scan See PG page 624 Using the KARMA controllers You can operate the KARMA controllers to control the phrase or pattern generated by each KARMA module In Combination mode you can choose the KARMA module that you want to control Note The state of the KARMA controllers is saved when you write the combination 1 Access the Combi P0 Play KARMA RTC page The lower part of the display shows the names of the sliders and switches that are assigned in this combination In the pre loaded combinations the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches have already been assigned 2 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN KARMA switch Sliders 1 8 and switches 1 8 of the control surface will operate as KARMA sliders and KARMA switches 3 Use the front panel MODULE CONTROL switch to select the module that you want to control If you select MASTER you will be controlling all four KARMA modules simultaneously If you select A D you will be controlling the corresponding KARMA module 4 Operate the front
453. one of the modules A D the front panel LINKED LED will light Note You can also make this setting using the Prog P7 1 KARMA1 GE Setup A B C D page Link to DT Link To Drum Trk parameter 3 When you turn the KARMA ON OFF switch on and play the keyboard or receive a note on the KARMA modules whose Link to DT is off will be triggered and will start KARMA modules whose Link to DT is on will not be triggered 4 When you turn the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch on the KARMA modules whose Link to DT is on will start at the timing that the drum track starts If Trigger Mode is set to Start Immediately KARMA will be triggered when you turn the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch on and will begin operating if KARMA LATCH is on If Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trig it will begin operating when you play the keyboard or receive a note on If you turn the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch off while KARMA is operating KARMA will also stop if KARMA LATCH is off 5 Make settings so that the beat will match synchronize to the operating KARMA modules In the Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Drum Track page turn Trigger Sync on Drum Track function settings Synchronizing the Drum Track function COMBI Pi b s Ctris Drum Track Drum Pattern Pattern Preset Pads RocknAoll 1 145bpm Rock Shift k MIDI Channel Output E Syne ol 6 Make settings so that the KARMA modules will synchronize to
454. ong The new song will be the first unused song 5 You will automatically enter record ready mode and the metronome will begin sounding according to the settings in P0 1 Play REC Preference page 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch and realtime recording will begin When you re finished recording press the START STOP switch once again Settings that are automatically copied from the combination The settings that will be automatically copied will be the same settings as if you had executed the menu command Copy From Combi and had made the following settings in the dialog box e IFXs MFXs and TFX checked e Multi REC Standby checked Settings that are automatically copied from the program The settings that will be automatically copied will be the same settings as if you had executed the menu command Copy From Program and had made the following settings in the dialog box e IFXs MFXs and TFX checked e KARMA checked 89 pe w WJ S w og v N 90 Creating songs Sequencer mode e To set to MIDI Track 01 e KARMA Module set to A e with Drum Track set to Track 10 e RADIAS Vocoder checked For details please see Copy from Program on page 282 of the Parameter Guide Setup in Sequencer mode Copy From Combination Copy From Pro gram In Sequencer mode you can use the Copy From Combi and Copy From Program menu commands to set up a sequencer song based on a combinatio
455. ontroller or Korg XVP 10 EXP VOL pedal as an assignable controller Like the Assignable Foot Switch described above the Foot Pedal can be used for many different functions including e Master Volume e Channel Volume Pan or Expression e Assignable sound modulation as several different AMS or Dmod sources e Effects Send level control e Operate various M3 M KYBD 61 73 88 controls VALUE slider realtime control sliders KARMA sliders switches Joystick Ribbon controller SW1 SW2 etc The pedal s function is set globally on the Global P2 Controllers Foot Controllers page so that it always works the same regardless of the current Program Combination or Song For details please see Specifying the function of the Assignable Switch and Assignable Pedal on page 132 45 46 Playing and editing Programs Controller settings for the program The Prog P0 Play Main page lets you view the following information SW1 SW2 Indicates the functions controlled by the SW1 SW2 switches of the KYBD 61 73 88 C S Indicates the currently selected control assign setting Control via the control surface is active in all pages FILTER 1 2 Indicates the filter type setting for filter 1 and 2 AMP EG 1 2 Indicates the EG setting for amp 1 and 2 EQ Low Mid Hz Mid High Indicates the 3 band EQ settings You can use the VALUE controller to edit the values PROG P Play SW1 SW2 V
456. onverting a multisample to a program on page 120 Sampling from the S P DIF input In general sampling from the S P DIF inputs is very similar to sampling from the analog inputs For instance to record a stereo sample from the S P DIF inputs set up the sampling parameters as below Source Bus S P DIFIN L R 113 114 Sampling Open Sampling System Resample Manual Recording Level dB as desired Mode Stereo Important Whenever using the digital inputs and outputs make sure that the Global System Clock parameter is set correctly For details please see System Clock on page 375 of the Parameter Guide Sampling external audio through insert effects In this example we ll apply an insert effect to the sound from a mic connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack and sample the processed sound in stereo Connect a mic and adjust the input level 1 Connect your mic to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 jack and adjust the input level See Connect a mic and adjust the input level on page 112 Execute the sampling setup 1 In the Sampling P0 Recording Audio In Setup page choose the menu command Auto Sampling Setup to display the dialog box auto Sampling Setup Initialize REC Audio Input Q Auto Resample through IF Source Audi im gt Analog E Ran x OHE gt Steren Save to OF 2 Select REC Audio Input Settings will be made for sampling an external audio sou
457. or instance a very simple guitar Multisample might have six Samples one for each string Each Sample is contained in an Index which includes parameters for the key range original Sample pitch tuning level and so on Multisamples can have up to 128 Indexes Using multisamples When sampling an instrument that is able to produce a wide range of pitches such as a piano recording just one sample and applying it playing it back over the entire pitch range will not produce a natural sounding result By using a multisample you can record separate samples for each pitch range and assign these samples to their respective pitch ranges to avoid any unnatural sounds during playback All of the instrumental sounds in the M3 s internal preset multisamples are constructed in this way For example you might record one sample per octave and assign each of these samples to an index keyboard area By assigning multiple samples such as phrase samples or rhythm loops to a multisample and arranging them across the keyboard you can play multiple samples simultaneously You can assign different phrases to each key or pad Alternatively these samples could be assigned at one octave intervals and played as phrase variations with different playback pitches The M3 can hold a maximum of 1 000 multisamples in its internal memory A multisample can be selected as the oscillator for a program and played as a program In a combination the
458. or other USB storage device to the M3 s USB A connector and use it to save or load M3 data such as PCG or SNG files or WAVE files If you connect a USB CD R RW drive you ll be able to make an audio CD from songs you created on the M3 and converted to WAV files To make the connections e Connect the M3 s USB A connector to the USB connector of your USB device The maximum supported capacity depends upon the format of the USB device With FAT16 format the maximum capacity is 4 GB with FAT32 the maximum is 2 Terabytes 2 000 GB 1 Use a USB cable to connect your external USB device to one of the M3 s USB A ports Standard USB cables have a different connector at each end Plug the flat rectangular connector into the M3 and plug the square ish connector into the external USB storage device Note If the device you are using does not support hot plugging make connections with the device powered off and then turn on the power of your device 2 Execute the Media mode Utility menu command Scan USB Device 3 Use the Media mode Media Select screen to check the connection For more information see Loading amp saving data and creating CDs on page 139 peneem CD R RW g hard disk removable disk etc USB 2 0 amp _ USB cable Type B Type A USB hub Hot plugging The M3 supports USB hot plugging This means that you can connect or disconnect the USB ca
459. or out over a range of keys In the example above you could set the Bottom Key of timbre 1 to G3 and set the Top Key of timbre 2 to G4 so that these two timbres overlap Next if you set the Bottom Slope of timbre 1 to 12 and set the Top Slope of timbre 2 to 12 the sound will change gradually instead of changing suddenly Creating Velocity Switches Next let s create a simple velocity switched Combination like the diagram below 1 switch 1 Access the Combi P0 Play Program T01 08 page 2 Select a brass sound for Timbre 1 and a strings sound for Timbre 2 3 Access the P3 Timbre Param MIDI T01 08 page 4 For Timbres 1 and 2 set Status to INT and MIDI Channel to Gch the Global Channel 5 Access the P4 Zone Delay Vel Z T01 08 page 6 Set Timbre 1 s Top Velocity to 127 and its Bottom Velocity to 64 You can also enter a velocity value by selecting the parameter and then playing a note on the keyboard while holding down the ENTER switch COMBI P4 fone Delay Lo Brass Strings Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Yel Z THI TE USER gt AAR InitCombi ABAH TA1 1 4869 Full Brass Section Top Velocity 127 1 ZT 127 127 P A 7 Set Timbre 2 to a Top Velocity of 63 and a Bottom Velocity of 1 Velocity Zone Slope Similar to Key Zone Slopes as described above these let you fade in and fade out sounds gradually over a velocity range instead of a simple hard switch
460. or pads 1 8 MIDI Channel specifies the MIDI channel on which each pad will transmit Note CC specifies the note or MIDI control change that each slider or switch will transmit Fixed Velocity specifies the velocity value that will be used if the front panel PAD MODE switch is set to FIXED VELOCITY when the same velocity value will always be transmitted regardless of how strongly you strike the pads Assigning aname It s a good idea to name any external control setups that you create so that you can remember its purpose Use the Rename External Setup utility to assign a name For more details please see Editing names on page 197 Pedal and other controller settings In the Global P2 Controllers Foot Controllers page you can make the following settings Specifying the function of the Assignable Switch and Assignable Pedal GLOBAL P2 Controllers Foot Controllers MF oot Switch amp Pedal Z Damper O Foot Pedal Assign or Foot Switch Assign i KORG Standard E KORG Standard Damper Polarity Foot Switch Polarity Assignable Switch Foot Switch Assign lets you assign a function to a footswitch such as the optional Korg PS 1 connected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack e This is set by Foot Switch Assign You can choose from the following functions Alternate modulation source Effect dynamic modulation source Global settings Assigning MIDI
461. or the KARMA function in each mode For details on how to perform using the KARMA function please see Performing with KARMA on page 167 KARMA function settings in Program mode In Program mode you can use only one KARMA module module A KARMA function settings for a program are made in the various pages of Prog P7 KARMA Here we will explain how to use the major parameters such as selecting a GE For other parameters please see PROG P7 KARMA on page 77 of the Parameter Guide Switching the KARMA function on off Each time you press the KARMA ON OFF switch the KARMA function will be turned on or off When on the switch LED will be lit The on off status is saved when you write the program Selecting a GE Here s how to select the GE used by the KARMA module 1 Access the Prog P7 1 KARMAT1 GE Setup page PROG P 1 KARMAI Load GE Options Load GE Opt Tempo d 1 maa MULLILLLILLOLLLILLILLLILLOLLLOLLOLLAILLILLLILLELLLELLILLLILLILLLILLILLLOLLILE GE Category GE Setup Select _ Harmonie CLI Comp Lead Bim C 1 Top Gg 0 FREES LJTthruin2 Trans 04 _ Link to OT _ Thru Out 2 Trans 88 Select MID cc Drum Random J Fiter Jottset Track J Seeds pomeely Triger J 2 Press Load GE Opt Load GE Options to access the dialog box turn Auto RTC Setup on and check the User RTC Model and Reset Scenes options
462. ord in real time please see System Exclusive events supported in Sequencer mode on page 311 of the Parameter Guide 3 Stop recording Note Exclusive messages are always recorded on the current track selected by Track Select In this example they are recorded on MIDI track 9 Note In the MIDI event edit page you can view the recorded exclusive events and their location Exclusive events are displayed as EXCL To view these events go to the P6 Track Edit Track Edit page and select the menu command MIDI Event Edit Then in the Set Event Filters dialog box check Exclusive and press the OK button amp Exclusive events cannot be changed to a different type of event Nor can other events be changed into exclusive events 4 If you go to the page e g P8 1 IFX that shows the parameters you adjusted in realtime you can watch the recorded changes be reproduced while the song plays back Exclusive messages that can be recorded in real time The following exclusive messages can be recorded in real time e Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI device e Parameter changes in Sequencer mode see System Exclusive events supported in Sequencer mode on page 311 of the Parameter Guide e Master Volume universal exclusive messages assigned to the foot pedal or a slider Using the control surface to record changes in the pan EQ volume and tone adjust settings of a MIDI track While perform
463. ording and while the Song is stopped In Media mode this switch fast forwards the audio CD LOCATE switch In Sequencer mode this switch will advance or rewind the song to the specified locate point This lets you jump immediately to any point in the current Song The default locate point is the first beat of measure 1 To set the locate point to the current position hold down ENTER switch and then press LOCATE switch You can also set the Locate point directly via the display menu REC WRITE switch In Sequencer mode pressing this switch will enter record ready mode Once you re in record ready mode shown by the switch s lit LED you can begin recording by pressing the SEQUENCER START STOP switch For details please see Recording MIDI in real time on page 85 In Program Combination and Global modes pressing REC WRITE switch will open the Update dialog box For details please see Using the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch to write on page 140 In Program and Combination modes you can hold down the ENTER switch and press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch to use the Auto Song Setup function This imports the current Program or Combination into Sequencer mode for quick and easy recording For details please see Recording the sound of a Combination or Program on page 89 START STOP switch This starts or stops recording and playback in Sequencer mode In Media and Sampling modes this switch starts an
464. ording method you want to use SEQ P 1 Play REC __ Preference MECA 1001 01 000 Metr 474 4 12055 Man Ciso00 NEW SONG Trakai MIDI TRACK 61 Reso Hi C RPPR T 1 AGGG Steres Grand 4 Way Chl RPPR Ho ssin Recording Setup Overwrite O Auto Punch In Q Overdub Loop All Tracks Manual Punch In C Multi REC Mthetronome Setup Sound E gt Only REC Busi Output Select E L R Lewel 127 Precount Measure B Frog Frog Mirer Mirer PlyLoop Hg Aa Prete Ais Ke ea f ea h 3 16 Audion i Overwrite With this method the musical data previously recorded on a track is overwritten by the newly recorded data When you perform overwrite recording on a previously recorded track its musical data will be deleted and replaced by the newly recorded data Normally you will use this method to record and then modify the results by using other types of realtime recording or MIDI event editing 1 Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Setup to Overwrite Recording Setup O Overwrite Q Overdub Q Manual Punch In Q Auto Punch In Q Loop All Tracks _ Multi REC 3 In Location specify the location at which you wish to begin recording 4 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch If the Metronome Setup is still set to the default settings the metronome will sound for a two measure
465. ormance at the same time Before you continue use the P0 1 Play REC Program T01 08 page to assign a drum program to MIDI track 1 and a bass program to MIDI track 2 1 Assign several keys starting with C 2 to preset patterns Check the C 2 Assign setting and set Pattern Bank to Preset and Pattern Select to the desired preset pattern For Track Name select MIDI track 1 T01 to which you assigned a drum program 2 For each RPPR pattern set Sync to SEQ With a setting of SEQ patterns played by the RPPR function while the sequencer is playing or recording will start in synchronization with the measures of the sequencer Sync settings Key1on Key2on Key 1 off madd A EEEEEEEE EEE Patterns 1 and 2 are set to Mode Manual and have identical Sync settings Sync Off parem EEPPEEEIY T IDUN wm Ld EEE TE E RE E Sync Measure aen Tid we dee Sync SEQ T bididial aen IIIT SS oo Using RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Record SEQ P18 Pattern RPPR E 5000 NEW SONG E Tracka1 MIDI TRACK 01 RPPR Setup ae J 126 06 l 4884 Studia Standard Kit _ EAT RPPR Setup shift 8 KEY C 2 m Assign Mode E Manual C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync Oomlm Pattern Preset Paa1 Pop amp Balad 1 Std Revert Track Track i1 MIDI TRACK a1 eke TO1 AGG4Studio Standard Kit Ch l 3 Access the P0 1 Play REC Program T01 08 page 4 Check the RPPR
466. ormant motions user Drum Track patterns and global settings from internal memory SNG file Sequencer song data cue list and user patterns KSC file A file that lists the multisamples and samples Saving yoursong Converting a cue list into a song Directory The multisamples KMP files and samples KSF files listed in the KSC file are stored within a directory on the media The data will be saved to the media you specified and you will return to the Save page The time required for saving will depend on the amount of data If the media contains an identically named file you will be asked whether you want to overwrite the existing data Press the OK button if you want to overwrite the data that s already on the media If you don t want to overwrite the existing data press the Cancel button return to step 6 rename the data in step 7 and save it again Saving a template song If you want the programs track parameters effect settings and KARMA settings etc used by a song to be saved as a Template song use the Save Template Song menu command to save these settings 103 w WJ S w og v N 104 Creating songs Sequencer mode Cautions and other functions in Sequencer mode M3 sequencer file formats The M3 sequencer supports both the proprietary M3 Song format and Standard MIDI Files If you like you can convert data between the two formats simply by loading the data in one
467. ounds or effects adjusting effects send levels and so on Each Program Combination and Song stores its own settings for what the sliders will do You can also make settings for Sampling mode as a whole When using the sliders for AMS or Dmod it s important to understand that assignment is a two step process First you assign the slider to send a MIDI controller such as Slider Mod 1 CC 17 Second you assign that MIDI controller to modulate one or more Program or effects parameters For the first part of the above use the mode s Controllers Setup or Setup page See Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2 above The default assignments for Sliders 5 8 are Slider Mod 5 CC 17 Slider Mod 6 CC 19 Slider Mod 7 CC 20 and Slider Mod 8 CC 21 respectively For a complete list of the possible assignments see Realtime Control Slider 5 8 Assignments on page 618 of the Parameter Guide Here s an example of how to set up Slider 5 User 1 to control a Program s filter and amp EG attack time 1 Press the MODE PROG switch to enter Program mode 2 Access the P1 Basic DT Ctrls Controllers Setup page Press the PAGE SELECT switch to access Page Select and choose P1 Basic DT Ctrls 3 Press the Realtime Control Slider Assign Slider 5 popup button and choose F A Attack CC 73 4 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN REALTIME CONTROL switch the LED will light 5 Operate slider 5 USER 1 to contr
468. ource of this effect set to FX Control 1 or FX Control 2 and the Modulator High Mix set to other than 0 209 210 Appendices If the EXB RADIAS oscillator output is sent through an insert effect and then sent to both the AUX bus and the FX Control bus the effect settings described above will produce a feedback loop possibly producing a loud noise Please use caution It is also possible that a DC component will be output at the maximum level producing silence Notes do not stop In Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Key Zone Scale select the Program Basic page make sure that the Hold check box is unchecked p 138 PG p 27 Did you use Tone Adjust to turn Hold on gt PG p 22 In Global P2 Controller make sure that Damper Polarity or Foot Switch Polarity is set correctly PG p 387 Programs and Combinations Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed Make sure that the Oscillator Mode Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls parameter is set to Double p 51 Program does not sound Have you loaded the multisample or sample that the program uses RADIAS program does not sound If the oscillator output of the optional EXB RADIAS or the oscillator output after passing through an insert effect is sent via the AUX bus to the input of the EXB RADIAS oscillator or the vocoder a feedback loop will be created If this occurs the input signal will be automatically cut internally to prevent a loop from occurring Be awa
469. p After your cue list is finished and you convert it into a song the track settings program pan volume etc of each step will be converted into playback data and will be reproduced but if the MIDI channel settings from song to song do not match it may not be possible to convert the playback state of the cue list into a song Using a foot switch to switch the Step You can use a foot switch to switch the Step If you set Repeat to FS a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack will control the timing at which the song stops repeating Set Foot Switch Assign Global P2 Controllers page to Cue Repeat Control Converting a cue list into a song Although it is not possible to record additional material onto tracks in a cue list you can convert a cue list to a song and then record solos etc on vacant tracks You will also need to convert a cue list to a song if you wish to save it on a media as SMF data 1 Select the menu command Convert to Song A dialog box will appear 2 In To Song specify the destination song number for the converted data The cue list name will automatically be assigned as the song name of the converted data For details and cautions regarding Convert to Song please see Convert to Song Convert Cue List to Song on page 308 of the Parameter Guide If you select a new song as the conversion destination it is not necessary to specify Set Length in the dialog box
470. pa jort leoa lort joao efort jona Toff Bee voff eee vort lapa vort laoa gorf lt eo sjort eee sjort lapa sjort lapa n m ER ram llers 111 112 Sampling Open Sampling System Basic sampling procedure Sampling your voice from a mic and playing it back as a one shot sample In this example we will use a mic connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack to sample your voice in monaural Connect a mic and adjust the input level 1 Connect a mic to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 jack 2 Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to the MIC position turn the LEVEL knob to MIN connect your mic and then set the LEVEL knob to about the center position r S P DIF gt r AUDIO INPUT r LEVEL a OUT main MIC LINE MAX MIN Has og Sampling setup 1 Access the Sampling P0 Recording Audio In Setup page Press the MODE SAMPLING switch to enter Sampling mode Make sure that the Sampling P0 Recording page is displayed If this page is not displayed press the EXIT switch to make the page appear and then press the Audio In Setup tab 2 Choose the menu command Auto Sampling Setup the dialog box will appear Auto Sampling Setup automatically sets the parameters necessary for sampling in each mode You ll want to use these settings as a guideline when sampling auto Sampling Setup Q Initialize REC Audio Input Q Auto Resample through IF Source Audi im g
471. page 4 For each key set the Enable Note Off Receive parameter as desired If this parameter is unchecked the key will be held If it is checked the key will not be held If you turn off Hold in the Program no keys will be held regardless of their Enable Note Off Receive setting Controlling effects for each key Drum Kits have their own built in mixers For each key you can control the Insert Effects bussing Master Effects sends and pan To use separate bus settings for each key 1 Access the Prog P8 IFX Routing page 2 Make sure that the Use DKit Setting check box is checked When Use DKit Setting is on the Program will use the Bus Select and Effects Send settings for each key of the Drum Kit When Use DKit Setting is off the Program will ignore the Drum Kit s Bus Select and Effects Send settings 3 Access the Global P5 Drum Kit Voice Mixer page 4 Use the Bus IFX Output Select parameter to send drum sounds through their own Insert effects or to the individual outputs If you like you can send each note to its own Insert effect or to the individual audio outputs in addition to the main L R outputs For example you might send all snare sounds to IFX1 all kick sounds to IFX2 and the remaining sounds to L R Tip In most preloaded drumkits the drum instruments have the same Bus IFX Output Select settings according to their type as follows Snares IFX1 Kicks IFX2 Other
472. panel KARMA sliders 1 8 and KARMA switches 1 8 The sliders and switches will control the pattern or phrase generated by the KARMA module selected by the MODULE CONTROL switch If you ve selected MASTER you ll be able to control the module on off status and vary the patterns and phrases generated by all of the KARMA modules You can also operate the sliders and switches in the display or using the VALUE controller just as in Program mode The KARMA module and the type or value of the parameter being controlled by the sliders and switches is Shown in the KARMA Module Info KARMA Value field This lets you see the KARMA module and parameters that are being affected by your slider or switch operations HAS 33 Afd 33 KARMA module Value Parameter 5 Use the front panel KARMA SCENE 1 5 4 8 switches to choose a scene When you press the CONTROL ASSIGN KARMA switch the 1 4 or 5 8 LED will light to indicate the candidates for the next selection Then when you press the 1 5 4 8 switch the corresponding KARMA scene will be selected When you switch scenes the scene will change for the KARMA module selected by the MODULE CONTROL switch If Module Control is set to MASTER each KARMA module will change to the scene that is saved as the master setting Each of the eight scenes contains the values of KARMA sliders and KARMA switches By pressing one of the KARMA SCENE 1 5 4 8 switches and the CONTROL ASSIGN KARMA switch
473. peat specify the number of times that the You can also use this as a jukebox function that will playback completed songs in the order you specify Cue List Step Song Repeat o sooo mro oz mo mmo A A E feror S001 A 02 002 B 7 Chorus A A B Chorus Chorus dude aca Mi A Solo Chorus Chorus Chorus Ending Ending S001 A 02 S002 B 01 S003 Chorus o2 S001 A Solo 01 S003 Chorus 03 S004 Ending 6 To play back at the tempo that was specified for each song set Tempo Mode to Auto If this is set to Manu Manual playback will use the tempo specified by J SEQ Pi1 Cue List 0001 01 00O meter 474 4 726 By C00 NEW CUELIST 00 7 gt Trackai MIDI TRACK amp 1 Apa4 Studio Standard Kit T STEP G1 G3S0NG G0NTRO gt Step CMeasurel 5 a p i bat mego s000 INTRO Creating a cue list boz megos E S001 YERSE Each unit in a cue list is called a step and each step b 93 ima04i s002 CHORUS contains a song number and the number of repeats bos Maes E End For example suppose you ve created the songs S000 bas INTRO S001 VERSE and S002 CHORUS Let s use a cue list to connect these songs together 1 Access the Seq P11 Cue List page 7 When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch playback will begin from the step that is With the default settings song S000 will be selected for spe
474. phrases and patterns The KARMA sliders and KARMA switches are assigned to the parameters that will be most effective in varying the phrases and patterns The KARMA SCENES 1 5 4 8 switches can select either KARMA scenes 1 4 or scenes 5 8 When you press the CONTROL ASSIGN KARMA switch that is already lit the 1 4 or 5 8 LED will blink to indicate the scene that will be selected next Then press one of the 1 5 4 8 switches to select the corresponding KARMA scene see page 11 6 You can view the KARMA scene settings in the display Press the EXIT switch three times to access the PO Play page and press the Control Surface tab located in the lower right of the display Then press the CONTROL ASSIGN KARMA switch 7 By operating SLIDERS 1 8 and SWITCHES 1 8 of the control surface you can edit the parameters assigned to the KARMA switches and KARMA sliders of a KARMA scene in realtime The parameters that are assigned will differ depending on the Program or Combination Note You can load previously saved settings by holding down the RESET CONTROLS switch and operating a control surface slider or switch or pressing a CONTROL ASSIGN switch see page 199 Press the COMPARE switch the LED will light to recall the saved settings from before you modified the sound Press the COMPARE switch once again and you ll return to your modified settings the LED will go dark 8 The KARMA GE page and KARMA RTC page within the P0 Play
475. pled been assigned to the keyboard and selected for Key p 115 Is the Source Bus setting correct If a buffer overrun error occurred message is displayed frequently when you are sampling to hard disk execute the menu command Check Medium Media Utility page to find and correct any errors on the selected MS DOS format media gt PG p 434 A stereo sample can t be played in stereo Is the multisample actually stereo e Execute the menu command MS Mono To Stereo to convert the multisample to stereo gt PG p 349 Is the sample name assigned correctly gt PG p 319 Volume of a recorded sample is too low too high Samples that you resampled at a Recording Level of approximately 0 0 dB have a lower volume than when you resampled them e Did you turn on the Auto 12 dB On setting when you resampled PG p 284 p 323 e If you resampled with Auto 12 dB On turned off turn on 12 dB Sampling mode Loop Edit page for that sample gt PG p 331 Song or CD playback stops temporarily when you sample Is Auto Optimize RAM checked e If this is checked RAM will be optimized automatically when sampling ends meaning that the sound will stop when sampling ends If a song is being played in Sequencer mode or if a CD is being played back the playback will stop When Recording Level is set to 0 dB CLIP does not appear even though the in put sound is distorted When the Recording Level set
476. pling to the hard media an identically named file exists in the save destination e Either delete the existing directory or file or specify a different name File contains unsupported data Meaning You attempted to load an AIFF WAVE KSF KEP or data file that was in a format not supported by the M3 For example 24 bit WAV AIFF etc e Inthe case of a AIFF or WAVE file use a computer if possible to convert the file into a format that is supported on the M3 and then load it File is read only protected Meaning You attempted to write to a file or to delete a file that had a read only attribute Meaning You attempted to save a file to media that contained a read only file of the same name e Save the file with a different name File unavailable Meaning You attempted to load or open a file whose format was incorrect Meaning The data in the KEP file was invalid It is possible that the KEP file has been corrupted e Restore the backed up KEP file into a USB device File path not found Meaning When loading a sample file in Media mode the specified file does not exist Alternatively the specified filename does not exist in the location you selected in a dialog box for choosing another directory level or other media Meaning When executing the Delete command in the Media mode Utility page the specified file did not exist Meaning When executing the Copy command in the Media mode Utility page and you
477. preset patterns the musical style and the name of the most suitable Drums category program are partially displayed By loading a drums track and the corresponding preset pattern you can instantly set up a drum track appropriate for each preset template song 6 To execute press the OK button When you execute this operation Measure will count up automatically showing how many measures of the selected pattern have been placed in the selected song You can then copy another pattern if desired or add more measures of the same pattern When you re finished press the Exit button Recording MIDI in real time When you ve finished with Preparations for recording you can start recording This is a method of recording in which your playing on the keyboard and your operations of controllers such as the joystick are recorded in realtime This method of recording is normally used one track at a time and is called single track recording As an alternative multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record multiple channels of data onto multiple tracks This is the method you will use when using the Drum Track function the RPPR function and the KARMA function to record multiple tracks of musical data at once or when you playback existing sequence data on an external sequencer and record it onto M3 s sequencer in realtime Recording setup In P0 1 Play REC Preference page Recording Setup select the realtime rec
478. press this switch while you re in P10 Pattern RPPR the currently selected pattern will begin playing In P11 Cue List the songs of the cue list will be played 4 During playback you can press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to stop playback If you press the START STOP switch once again playback will resume from where you stopped e Press the LOCATE switch to move to the assigned location e Press the PAUSE switch to pause playback Press the PAUSE switch once again to resume playback e Press the lt lt REW or FF gt gt switches to rewind or fast forward You can use this during playback or while stopped You can use the FF REW SPEED menu command to specify the rewind and fast forward speeds e To set the tempo turn the TEMPO knob or press the TAP TEMPO switch at the desired interval TEMPO SEQUENCER 40 300 TAP Muting just a specific track Monitoring just a specific track Mute Solo functions REC f START LOCATE write IIl STOP The M3 provides a Mute function that lets you silence specified MIDI tracks 1 16 or audio input channels 1 2 S P DIF L R and a Solo function that lets you hear the specified track or channel by itself These functions can be used in various ways For example you can intentionally mute or solo specific tracks or listen only to the rhythm section of the previously recorded tracks while you record new tracks Let s try out the Mute and Solo
479. ps given in the directions making sure that the board is installed correctly and in the correct orientation When installing or removing the board be careful not to drop parts or the option board into the instrument Handle the board with care Subjecting it to physical shock by dropping or pressing it may cause damage or malfunctions Be careful not to touch any exposed metal portions of the circuit board or any parts that are not essential to the installation process Available option boards for the M3 You can enhance the M3 s capabilities by installing any or all of the following options EXB RADIAS RADIAS Synthesizer Board Based on the MMT Multiple Modeling Technology synth engine that powers the RADIAS and R3 the EXB RADIAS synthesizer vocoder option provides up to 24 voices of polyphony and offers a wide range of tonal variations EXB FW FireWire Board The EXB FW FireWire Interface allows you to transmit both MIDI and Audio messages to and from your computer The EXB FW also allows the M3 to behave as a virtual instrument Virtualized Hardware by using the M3 Plug In Editor inside a host application The EXB FW provides two FireWire connectors so that you can daisy chain compatible devices EXB M256 Sample Memory Expansion You can expand the user sample memory by installing this dedicated 256MB megabyte memory board in your M3 Calendar battery Calendar battery The calenda
480. ptheps t0 441 Repeat Transpose RptTran fate ne Jar Ham Here you can select names for the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches You can save these settings independently for each program The M3 provides suitable preset names for the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches Note Auto Assign RTC Name An appropriate name for each KARMA sliders and KARMA switches will be determined based on the GE RTP or Perf RTP being controlled and will be assigned automatically See Auto Assign RTC Name on page 118 of the Parameter Guide Linking KARMA settings to Program changes KARMA settings can be saved individually for each Program Normally when you select a new Program its KARMA settings will be loaded as well In some cases however you may wish to try out different Programs while keeping the KARMA settings the same The Global Basic page Load KARMA when changing Global 0 1c parameters let you select between these two behaviors There are separate settings for Programs Combinations and Songs To set this up 1 Go to the Global Basic page 2 Under Load KARMA setting when changing set the Programs check box as desired Check the box to load the individual Programs KARMA settings Un check the box to keep KARMA settings the same even when changing Programs For details please see Load KARMA when changing on page 373 of the Parameter Guide 175 176 Using KARMA
481. r CPU Apple G4 1 4 GHz or better Intel Mac is supported G5 or Core Duo or better is recommended Memory 1 GB or more 2 GB or more is recommended Monitor 1 024 x 768 pixels 32 000 colors or better An Apple Macintosh with a FireWire port that satisfies the requirements of Mac OS X e Operating system Mac OS X version 10 4 9 or later Without audio capabilities EXB FW not installed or not in use Windows e Computer CPU Pentium III 1 GHz or better Pentium D or Core Duo more is recommended Memory 512 MB or more 1 GB or more is recommended Monitor 1 024 x 768 pixels 16 bit color or better A computer with a USB port that satisfies the requirements of Windows XP e Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition or Professional Service Pack 3 or later Microsoft Windows Vista Pack 1 or any later edition excepting 64 bit versions Macintosh e Computer CPU Apple G4 800 MHz or better Intel Mac is supported G5 or Core Duo or better is recommended Memory 512 MB or more 1 GB or more is recommended Monitor 1 024 x 768 pixels 32 000 colors or better An Apple Macintosh with a USB port that satisfies the requirements of Mac OS X Connections Installing the software e Operating system Mac OS X version 10 4 9 or later Formats supported by the M3 Plug In Editor Windows VST RTAS Macintosh VST Audio Unit RTAS M3 Plug In Editor must also satisfy the operating requirements of the
482. r Cho Fln Phaser on page 478 of the Parameter Guide e Modulation and Pitch Shift Mod P Shift on page 485 of the Parameter Guide e Delay on page 496 of the Parameter Guide e Reverb and Early Reflections Reverb ER on page 506 of the Parameter Guide e Mono Mono Serial Mono Mono on page 508 of the Parameter Guide e Mono Mono Parallel Mono Mono on page 524 of the Parameter Guide e Double Size on page 534 of the Parameter Guide Double size effects Double size effects 154 St Mltband Limiter 170 Early Reflections use twice as much space as other effects You can use double size effects for insert effects IFX1 IFX4 and master effect MFX1 However the effect of the number that follows it will be unavailable For example if you ve selected a double size effect for IFX1 you won t be able to use IFX2 If you ve selected a double size effect for MFX1 you won t be able to use MFX2 An example of when a double size effect is selected for IFX1 and IFX4 PROG PS IFX Insert FX Setup Insert Effect Chain To Chain AUS Ctr Sendi2 1 as E res gt 15700 Hyper Gain Wah Fan 8 Bus 3 Err 2 16 Stereo Decimator Off 4 o ENL T O EOL iE haJ 161 Multitap Cho Delay cad off 127 Master effects 12 The input levels to the master effects are set by the Send 1 2 levels step 3 or 10 If Send 1 2 are
483. r Sampling START SW Press the SAMPLING REC switch to enter record standby mode Then press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to start sampling Sampling a mix of the phrases generated by the KARMA Metronome Precount 4 There will be a four beat countdown Save to RAM The sample will be recorded to RAM memory Mode Stereo The sound of the internal LR channels will be sampled in stereo 8 Adjust the volume of the guitar and the drum phrase that you ll be recording and then sample the sound Refer to steps 11 17 of the procedure above See page 124 9 Listen to the sound that was sampled If you ve been following along with the earlier examples the convert destination program bank and number are still specified Select that program and play the C 2 note and you ll hear the sampled sound If you re not using the Auto Sampling Setup Convert to Program option audition the sound in Sampling mode In the Sampling P0 Recording Recording page use Sample Sample Select to assign the sample To audition the sampled sound play the key of the index you assigned 125 126 Sampling Open Sampling System In Track Sampling In Track Sampling creates note data at the appropriate timing when you sample an external audio source while playing back a song in the Sequencer mode When you then play back the song the sample will be triggered by this note data In other words this function plays back the sample a
484. r Plug In Editor via the FireWire port you must install the KORG FireWire Audio MIDI Driver Tools 3 When you ve installed all of the selected software exit the installer 4 If necessary install the KORG USB MIDI driver For details on installation please see Installing the KORG USB MIDI driver below Installing the KORG USB MIDI driver If you intend to use the M3 Editor Plug In Editor via the USB port you must install the KORG USB MIDI driver in your computer Use the KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools to install the KORG USB MIDI driver 1 Before you continue you must first finish installing the KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools in your computer 2 Use a USB cable to connect your computer s USB port to the M3 s USB B connector Then power on the M3 When your computer first detects that the M3 is connected the Windows default driver will be installed automatically This is not the KORG USB MIDI driver Note The driver must be installed separately for each USB port If you connect the M3 to a USB port other than the one for which you installed the KORG USB MIDI driver you ll need to install the KORG USB MIDI driver again using the same procedure 3 From the taskbar click Start AIl Programs KORG KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools Install KORG USB MIDI device The setup utility will start 4 Follow the on screen instructions to install the KORG USB MIDI driver If during the insta
485. r amounts increase the bass boost and will also intensify the effect of the Drive parameter X Y control settings For details about turning X Y control on off or recording X Y motion please see X Y controller on page 43 What does X Y control Modulation generally works by moving a single control like a slider in a straight line At one end of the control the modulation is at its minimum at the other end it s at its maximum X Y control is a little different It works by moving around a point on a two dimensional plane both left right and up down You can think of this point as being positioned on two different lines at once a left right line the X axis and an up down line the Y axis The X Y position consists not of a single value as a slider but of two values X value and Y value Refer to the following illustration X Y position and X and Y axis values X Y position 127 Y value 50 Y Axis 0O 127 0 1 X Axis X value 90 You can move the position of the point not only by directly moving the point in the display X Y Mode but also automatically using X Y motion as shown below X Y motion moving the X Y position 127 127 0 127 Volume Control and CC Control The X Y control does two main things it can control the relative volume of the two Oscillators in Program mode or of up to 16 Programs at once in Combination mode The other is to generate CC MIDI control
486. r battery maintains the time and date that are recorded each time you save data The M3 uses a CR2032 battery CR2032 batteries that are compatible with the M3 e CR2032 batteries made by Sony or Panasonic Installing options Available option boards for the M3 Verifying installation When you power on the M3 the display will show the option boards and memory that are currently installed MUSIC WORKSTATION SAMPLER Wersions 41 8 8 Options EXB M256 EXB RADIAS EXB Fiy After installing memory or an option board you must turn on the power and verify that the name of the item you installed is shown in the display EXB RADIAS The EXB RADIAS is installed EXB FW The EXB FW is installed EXB M256 The EXB M256 is installed If it is not shown the item may not have been installed correctly Check once again to ensure that the item is correctly installed Servicing the calendar battery If the calendar battery is not installed correctly or if the battery voltage is too low the following message will appear in the display when you turn on the power The clock battery voltage is low Please do the following 1 Turn off power and replace the battery 2 Turn on power You will see this message one last time This is normal 3 Set the date and time in Media mode 4 Turn the power off and then on again OF Make sure that you are not using a battery that has run down and that the battery is install
487. r by installing an EXB RADIAS analog modeling synthesizer board one timbre maximum 24 voice polyphony by adding the EXB M256 to expand the internal PCM multisample and sampling capacity to 320 Mbytes 64 Mbytes internal 256 Mbytes the EXB FW that allows single cable FireWire IEEE 1394 connection for creating a virtualized hardware environment and EX USB PCM series libraries that will become available in the future Front and rear panels Front panel M3 Front panel The M3 music workstation sampler uses the KORG Komponent System with the KYBD 61 73 88 keyboard assembly and the M3 M sound module in a detachable configuration 1 SW1 and SW2 2 Joystick 4 TO KYBD connector TO MODULE connector Front and rear panels Front panel A M3 M sound module section KORG CL e oas a ae aan aa O voume coWRoL p CEEE 1 MAN uror resonance ee wrens exncicase usent Dusena Dusena pusere re
488. r each Program and Combination so try them out to hear what happens For details on these controllers please see Using Controllers on page 41 2 At the left side of the M3 M the M3 s sound module there is a group of sliders and switches that looks somewhat like a mixer This is called the control surface and lets you perform various types of control such as editing X Y MODE switch MOTION switch M3 M REALTIME CONTROL switch JE SW1 and SW2 Joystick Ribbon controller Keyboard assembly KYBD 61 73 88 The diagram shown is for M3 61 Quick Start sounds ope
489. r oscillators and audio inputs e You can apply modulation to sounds or edit them e You can control the KARMA function e You can control external MIDI devices 1 Use the CONTROL ASSIGN MIXER KARMA switches to select the function you want to control Alternatively you can use the Prog P0 Play Control Surface page Control Assign parameter to select a function Press the Control Surface tab in the lower line of the display to access this page Since this parameter is linked with the front panel switches a change you make to one will be reflected by the other 2 Switches Sliders 1 8 Reset Controls MIX PLAY MUTE SOLO Ee eee O IFx3 MFX2 TFX RESET 7 CONTROLS TROL alts T1 8 MIX VOLUMES o MGnay EEIIES EX Le Fu O REALTIME CONTROL 1 Control EXTERNAL Assign TONE ADJUST 119 BITLTITiriiiidg PHLLITLTiiriiidg oHLILIT IGT iia PHELILIITELiliga omliliragiriiidg OBLTLITIGTILIG oe ee omlLITIaiiiia 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 TAS 8 16 MASTER gt SCENES O1 4 5 8 lt PRESS KARMA oor fe owo owor LATCH A sail S us fl 2 M sz fa O Ov0 PROG P Play l gt BAI BPH Dense Motionations J 120 50 Control Assign RT Control ES Filter Resonance 1 2 Effect On Off IF IFs IFs IFrd IFs MFx1 MFs2 TFA STD STD SID SD STB SID KD oD Realtime Control Flt Fe Fit Reso Fit EG EG Rel Sld M
490. r settings You can use MIDI filters to specify whether program changes and bank select messages will be transmitted and or received Make these settings in the Global P1 MIDI MIDI Routing page See PG page 383 Performing with KARMA and the Drum Track Based on your keyboard playing or on the note data received from MIDI IN the KARMA function automatically generates a diverse variety of phrases or patterns such as guitar or keyboard backing riffs bass phrases or drum patterns You can use the KARMA sliders and the KARMA switches to freely modify these phrases or patterns For more about the KARMA function please see page 163 The Drum Track function uses a rich variety of drum patterns to play the M3 s high quality drum programs You can perform along with the drum patterns or synchronize Drum Track patterns with the phrases generated by KARMA For more about the Drum Track function please see page 185 5 2 D Using controllers to modify the sound The M3 provides a Control Surface with sliders and switches an X Y control function and pads giving you a wide range of ways in which to vary the sound In addition to a keyboard the M3 KYBD 61 73 88 provides a joystick ribbon controller and SW1 SW2 switches to let you control the sound For details please see the corresponding explanation for Programs Using Controllers on page 41 67 68 Playing and editing Comb
491. r voice low pass high pass band pass band reject Programs EDS Driver Per voice nonlinear driver and low boost EQ Three bands with sweepable mid For each voice two envelope generators Filter amp Amp two LFOs two key Modulation tracking generators Filter amp Amp and two AMS mixers In addition pitch EG common LFO and two common key tracking generators Up to sixteen timbres keyboard and velocity split layer crossfade and 16 Timbres i i i i a modifications to the program setting via the Tone Adjust function Combinations Toca Raveena i 7 p4 k These allow you to control external MIDI devices functionality Dunit Stereo and mono drumsamples 4 way velocity switches with crossfades and adjustable crossfade shapes Linear Power Layer The number of 1 792 Combinations 416 Preload see User Programs 1 664 Programs 1 344 EDS 1 216 RADIAS 128 Preload Combinations User Drum Kits 144 Drum Kits 32 Preload Programs Drum Kits Preset Programs 256 GM2 Programs 9 GM2 Drum Programs Filters Specifications and options Specifications Open Sampling System 16bit 48kHz Stereo Mono Sampling RAM1 64 Mbytes installed as standard allows up to approximately 11 minutes 39 seconds of mono sampling or approximately 5 minutes 49 seconds of stereo sampling 512 bytes are used by the system RAM2 256 Mbytes when the EXB M256 is installed allows up to Sampling time RAM approximately 46 minutes 36 seco
492. rameters e g KARMA module parameters can also be assigned to controllers These settings are valid when MODULE CONTROL is set to MASTER 1 Access the Combi P7 4 KARMA4 Perf RTP page COMBI P7 4 KARMA4 Perf RTP a USER A BAA InitCombi AAGA J 125 86 Perf RIP 1 2 Select az 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 croup E Param E Run Min 0888 Max 8081 m 4 Ljc Bi Assign Swi Polarity Faran Fur 2 Group oO Mix fin 8808 Max 8001 m B Q C E D Assign Swe Polarity RE OD ee a Mo ok A EB OU cl hd on Map In the same way as for a program set Group Parameter Min Max Value Assign and Polarity Ina combination you can use the four KARMA modules A B C and D Turn on check the A B C and or D boxes to select the module s you want to control In the above example KARMA switches 1 2 3 and 4 are controlling the Run Mute setting of modules A B C and D respectively Dynamic MIDI settings You can make these settings in the same way as for a program For details please see Dynamic MIDI Sources amp Destinations on page 621 of the Parameter Guide Naming the KARMA sliders 1 8 and KARMA switches 1 8 for MASTER and module A D In the same way as for a program you can select names for the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches These settings are saved as part of the combination COMBI P 7 4 KARMA4 Names Master _ F IKARMA RTC Name RTP oA MID n Ok A OR OE OU O
493. rameters or by assigning them to the KARMA sliders or KARMA switches and operating these during your performance KARMA module parameters Key Zone Bottom Key Zone Top Receive MIDI Filter Transmit MIDI Filter Transpose Note Trigger Env1 Trigger Piere GE RTP Perf RTP Real Time Parameters GE Parm 01 Rhythm Swing a C Module Parm Env1 Trigger KARMA REALTIME CONTROLS I TAEAE J T laa ANN sei Pe EEE na l aE 1 o BE ES A Ee D InputCh GE 0010 Drums1 m 2 3 ae am 4 Us 6 ana 78 on KARMA module parameters module parameters GE RTP Perf RTP Real Time Parameters Le Er GE Parm 01 Rhythm Swing Module Parm Pa E Env1 Trigger Dynamic MIDI Output Ch Output Ch Output Ch Output Ch 05ch Dynamic MIDI ONA Phrases or patterns Drums Pattern Bass Riff rity E Guitar Riff THE E Piano Phrase Overview The structure of the KARMA function RTC Model All of the preset GEs have an internally specified RTC Model The RTC Model i
494. rating the KARMA function or sending MIDI messages to external devices For example go ahead and press the CONTROL ASSIGN REALTIME CONTROL switch the LED will light Now you can use the switches of the control surface to turn the effects on off Operating the sliders will control the frequency cutoff resonance and intensity or any other parameters you specify The display can show the function and values of the control surface To view this press the Control Surface tab located in the lower right of the display When you operate the controllers the objects in the display will move accordingly PROG Pa Play I A gt 881 BPM Dense Motionations Control Surface aw J 120 50 Control Assign RT Control ES Filter Resonance 1 2 Effect On Off IF IF rd IFs IFsd IFs MFs1 MFs2 TFA cI CE UI C EN Realtime Control Fit i Fit m Fit F ep Gop ep ep apepep A Note You can load previously saved settings by holding down the RESET CONTROLS switch and operating a control surface slider or switch or pressing a CONTROL ASSIGN switch see page 199 3 X Y control is a particularly interesting capability of the M3 This lets you modify the volume balance or sound by sliding your finger across the display You can also capture this motion and play it back during your performance to modify the volume balance or sound Press the X Y MODE switch the LED will light The color of the display will chan
495. rce Cancel 3 Set Source Audio to Analog You ll be sampling the analog audio output of an instrument or other external audio device connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks 4 Set Mono L Mono R Stereo to Stereo The input from the INPUT 1 2 jacks will be sent to the internal L R channels and sampled in stereo 5 Select RAM in the Save to field The sampled data will be written into RAM memory 6 Set IFX to IFX1 You ll be applying insert effect 1 while you sample 7 Press the OK button to execute the command Settings for sampling have now been made Note Take a look at the settings that were made Input 1 BUS Select IFX1 The input level pan and send destination of the signal from the INPUT 1 jack are set to the IFX1 bus Sampling Mode Stereo You ll be sampling the sound of the internal L R channels in stereo Other settings are the same as step 8 of Sampling your voice from a mic and playing it back as a one shot sample on page 112 8 We ll make some minor changes to the settings Set the Input 1 Pan to C64 This places the input signal in the center In addition set Trigger to Threshold Level to 30 dB and Pre Trigger to 005 ms Audio In Setup MEEA Bus select FA BUS AURA BUS Sendi Sends SAMPLING PS Recording Input 2 passa 127 Rize GD F gt oft orr SoLo Sampling Setup Source Bus gt L R Trigger gt Threshold L R Level
496. rce and destination To solve this problem e Select a different song track or pattern for the source and destination Destination from measure within the limits of source Meaning When executing the Move Measure command for all tracks or within the same track the specified destination measure is within the source range To solve this problem 215 216 Appendices e Set a destination measure that is outside of the source range Destination is empty Meaning When editing the track or pattern that was specified as the destination contains no musical data To solve this problem e Select a track or pattern that contains musical data Destination measure is empty Meaning The measure that was specified as the destination contains no data e Specify a destination measure that contains data Destination multisample already exists Meaning A multisample already exists at the destination save location multisample e Either delete the multisample at the destination save location or change the save destination multisample number Destination multisample and source multisample are identical Meaning The same multisample is selected for the source and destination e Select different multisamples for the source and destination Destination sample already exists Meaning A sample already exists at the destination save location e Either delete the sample at the destination save location or
497. rd Audio ing Prete Memory ontra ee 2 2 In Input Recording Level a select the input source 3 Use Bus Select to specify the bus to which each audio input will be sent For example if you want the output of the device connected to AUDIO INPUT 1 to be routed to insert effect 1 set Input to Analog and set the INPUT 1 Bus Select to IFX1 4 Use Send1 and Send2 to specify the send level of each timbre to the master effects This can be set only if Bus Select is set to L R or Off If Bus Select is set to IFX1 5 the send levels to the master effects are set by Send1 and Send2 Insert FX Setup page following the insert effects 5 Use Pan to set the panning of the audio input If you re inputting a stereo audio source you will normally set the inputs to L000 and R127 respectively 6 Use Level to adjust the level of the audio input Normally you will leave this at 127 7 FX Control Bus sends the output of the timbre to an FX Control bus The FX Control Buses lets you create effects sidechains Sidechains let you control an effect with one audio signal the sidechain while the effect processes a completely different audio signal This is convenient for use with vocoders compressors and limiters gates etc For details please see FX Control Buses on page 443 of the Parameter Guide 8 AUX Bus sends the audio input to a AUX bus By sel
498. rd or play back either of the tracks 5 Adjust the effect settings Make settings for each effect in P8 IFX and P9 MFX TEX For details please see Using effects in Combinations and Songs on page 157 6 Set the tempo and time signature e To set the tempo you can turn the TEMPO knob or press the TAP TEMPO switch at the desired interval Alternatively you can select J Tempo in the P0 1 Play REC Program T01 08 page or similar page and use the VALUE controllers to set the tempo Set Tempo Mode to Manual e Next you will set the time signature In this example we ll explain how to set the time signature using the Meter field Normally you specify the time signature before recording the first track and then begin recording a Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch and set Meter to b Press to highlight it and use the VALUE controllers to set the time signature c Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to begin recording When the pre count has ended and Locate reaches 0001 01 000 press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to stop recording The time signature you specified has been recorded on the Master track If you press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch during the pre count the time signature won t be recorded 7 Set the REC Resolution if necessary When you realtime record on a MIDI track this parameter specifies how the timing of the recorded MIDI data will be corr
499. re that in this case there will be no sound A combination does not play correctly after you load data In the dialog box when you saved the data did you check the items that you wanted to save gt p 143 Are the bank numbers of the programs used by the combination the same as when the combination was created e If you have switched program banks you can use the Change all bank references menu command to change the program bank for each timbre of a combination gt PG p 399 Can t write a Program You can t write EDS programs into bank INT F Likewise RADIAS programs of the optional EXB RADIAS cannot be written to banks INT A E With the factory settings the bank type for USER A G banks are all set to EDS programs so you won t be able to write RADIAS programs e The bank type for banks USER A G can be changed to store either RADIAS or EDS programs by using the Global mode menu command Set Prog User Bank Type You ll need to change this setting if you want to write RADIAS programs PG p 398 Is the Memory Protect Program checkbox Global PO cleared p 130 Songs Song does not play correctly after being loaded In the dialog box when you saved the data did you check all of the items that you wanted to save gt p 143 Are the programs used by the song the same as when the song was created e If you have switched program banks you can use the menu command Change all bank references to change th
500. re you input the note However if you want to extend the length tie of the note press the Tie button At this time the previously input note will be extended by the Step Time length e To delete a note or rest that you input press the Step Back button The previously input note will be deleted e To input a chord simultaneously press the notes of the desired chord Even if you do not press them simultaneously notes that are pressed before you fully remove your hand from all keys on the keyboard will be input at the same location e If you want to verify the pitch of the note that you will input next press the PAUSE switch In this state playing a key will produce a sound but will not input a note Press the PAUSE switch once again to cancel the record pause state and resume inputting notes Select 3 Beat Tick es a o l ee o a Sf Gey 00101360 si a Rest button 001 02 000 C4 C4 key 001 02 240 E Rest button 001 02 360 C4 C4 key 001 03 120 D D3 key 001 03 240 Eb3 key 001 04 000 EN E3 key 001 04 240 F3 F3 key 002 01 000 zee Rest button 002 01 120 C3 C3 key 002 01 360 Rest button 002 02 000 FQ F2 key 002 02 240 i Tie button 002 03 000 ee F2 key 002 03 240 E Rest button 002 03 360 A2 key 002 04 000 A3 A3 key 002 04 240 Rest button 002 04 360 m n m IIA A wl wl Ziwa Sa mia om NIiopIN ee gt W Restbutton 001 02 000
501. reated in Global mode When the optional EXB RADIAS is installed The MMT Multiple Modeling Technology sound generation system will be available for performance and editing Combination mode Combinations are sets of up to 16 programs that can be played simultaneously letting you create sounds more complex than a single Program In Combination mode you can e Select and play Combinations e Use a maximum of four KARMA modules to generate phrases e Use one timbre to play back Drum Track patterns e Use M3 as a 16 track multitimbral tone generator e Sample or resample For example you can sample an external audio source while listening to the performance of the KARMA or resample a performance you play using a combination e Edit Combinations Assign Programs to each of the 16 Timbres each with separate volume pan EQ and keyboard and velocity zones make settings for effects X Y control and KARMA Sequencer mode Sequencer mode lets you record play back and edit MIDI tracks You can e Select and play Songs e Edit Songs Assign Programs to each of the 16 MIDI Tracks each with separate volume pan EQ and keyboard and velocity zones make settings for effects X Y control and KARMA edit MIDI data e Record up to sixteen MIDI tracks simultaneously e Control and play up to four KARMA modules e Sample or resample You can sample an external audio input source while playing a song and use In Track Sampling
502. regardless of the page that is shown in the display 3 Use sliders 1 8 to adjust the volumes of Timbres 1 8 respectively 4 While the display shows Timbre Play Mute switches 1 8 will change the Play Mute status of timbres 1 8 5 Press the menu button to select Panel SW Solo Mode The menu will close and the indication of Timbre Play Mute in the display will change to Timbre Solo Alternatively you can hold down the ENTER switch and press numeric key 1 to switch between Timbre Play Mute and Timbre Solo 6 While the display shows Timbre Solo switches 1 8 will turn Solo on off for timbres 1 8 Note Solo On Off applies to the timbres and the audio inputs Saving a Combination you ve edited Once you ve tweaked the sound to perfection you ll want to save your work To save your edits please see Saving your edits on page 50 and Writing to internal memory on page 139 S Q f UV 69 70 Playing and editing Combinations Detailed Editing with Combinations You can edit the preloaded combinations Banks A B and C with which the M3 is shipped or start with an Drum Track settings initialized Combination to create your own original X Y control settings d P1 DT XY Ctrls sounas SW1 2 and slider function settings You can use the factory Programs to create new Pad note and velocity settings Combinations or use your own custom Programs If EQ settings
503. ritten into the global settings If you turn off the power without writing the modified data in the memory area will be lost Editing will affect the data that has been called into the memory area lt Edit Memory Area f When you Write the When the power is various Global mode turned on the settings settings will be savedin Write PowerOn are called into the memory area internal memory Internal Memory Global Setting Drum Kits PO P4 P5 Memory protect To prevent Programs Combinations Songs Drum Kits and KARMA GE from being overwritten accidentally the M3 provides a Memory Protect setting that prohibits writing to memory Before you save edited data or load data from media use the following procedure to turn the memory protect off uncheck the appropriate check box You must also turn memory protect off before loading the above data from media or via a MIDI data dump or before recording in Sequencer mode 1 Press the MODE GLOBAL switch to enter Global mode 2 Access the Global P0 Basic Setup Basic page GLOBAL P Basic Setup System Preference i System Preference Bank Map gt Internal Reset System Clock Power On Mode m Beep Enable _ Auto Optimize RAM Memory Protect _ Program _ Combination C Song _ Drum kit C KARMA GE u _ Ea 3 Press the Memory Protect check box for the type of data you wish to write to inter
504. rns The note on off data and MIDI control data generated by a KARMA module can be recorded as events in a track or pattern At this time you can use the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches to control the phrase in realtime while you record it You can also copy the settings from a combination and use multi track recording to realtime record your keyboard performance amp Data from the internal sequencer is not input to the KARMA module and therefore you cannot use note data from the internal sequencer to trigger a KARMA module so that it generates phrases etc Here we ll explain how to use the Auto Song Setup function to get started with realtime recording We will also describe the procedure for realtime recording single track recording using the KARMA function and for realtime recording multi track recording by copying the settings from a combination Auto Song Setup The Auto Song Setup function automatically copies the settings of a program or combination into a song and then puts the M3 in record ready mode You can then begin recording immediately just by pressing the SEQUENCER START STOP switch This lets you seamlessly move from playing a program or combination into producing a song so that phrases or ideas for a song that occur to you while using the KARMA function can be immediately turned into a song Procedure using the example of Combination mode 1 Enter Combination mode 2 In the Combi P0 Play pag
505. ry that would exceed the maximum path name length 76 characters for the full path name Unable to save file Meaning When executing the Media mode Utility menu command Copy the copy destination path length exceeded 76 characters Meaning When saving a file in Media mode the save destination path exceeded 76 characters Meaning When you executed the Media mode Utility menu command Copy the file management data exceeded the size of the management area Meaning When sampling to media the save destination path for the WAVE file exceeded 76 characters USB HUB Power exceeded Please disconnect USB device Meaning The power consumption of your USB devices has exceeded the capacity of the hub to which they are connected The USB hub will not be recognized correctly in this state To solve this problem e If you re using a USB hub or device that is capable of being self powered use it in self powered mode 222 Appendices If you are using more than one USB hub you may be able to solve the problem by reconnecting a device to a different USB hub After you ve reconnected your device s execute Scan USB Device W Wave WAVE file size over limit Meaning When using the Media mode Edit WAVE command you exceeded the maximum sample length of 230 400 000 samples 80 minutes at the 48 kHz sample rate that can be used for a WAVE file e Edit WAVE cannot edit a WAVE file that is longer than 230 400
506. s etc in realtime while you play The controllers of the M3 KYBD 61 73 88 SWI sw2 LOL Im SW2 Lock i function Y Joystick T Ribbon Controller Joystick The joystick moves in four directions left right up away from yourself and down towards yourself Each of the four directions can be used to control a different function such as modulating Program or effects parameters These assignments can be different for every Program but generally they do the following Standard Joystick functions Controller Move the joystick Normally controls Name Pich bend down Down towards yourself JS Y Filter LFO wah Joystick Lock The joystick will automatically return to the center position when you release it You can use the KYBD 61 73 88 s SW1 SW2 switches or a foot switch connected to the M3 M to lock the current position so that the effect will continue even after you return the joystick to the center position For details please see Using the Lock function on page 41 Playing Programs Using Controllers Ribbon Controller Move your finger to the left and right on the ribbon controller to apply an effect Normally this is used to control pitch volume or filter etc You can use the Lock function of SW1 or SW2 switches to hold the effect even after you release your finger from the ribbon controller For more details please see
507. s see page 12 to input the number To execute press the OK button To cancel without executing press the Cancel button The operation will occur when you press and release the button The dialog box will close The EXIT switch corresponds to the Cancel button Done button and Exit button Text edit button AGGG V Towards The Sun Category gt AG Keyboard Sub Category gt A Piana Cancel button OK button Front and rear panels Objects in the display Text edit button When you press this button the text edit dialog box appears for changing the names of Programs Combinations Songs etc For details please see Editing names on page 197 j Radio buttons Press a radio button to select one value from two or more choices W So e i PROG P1 Basic DT Ctris Program Basic Oscillator Mode ee j Radio buttons Single Q Double O Drums Yoice Assign Mode ee Poly m Poly Legato _ Single Trigger e Check box k Other objects To modify the parameter value of an object shaped like a slider or knob first touch the object and then use the VALUE controllers to modify the value There are also buttons which execute an operation when they are pressed and released such as Done Copy and Insert similar to the OK and Cancel buttons explained under Dialog box above Toggle buttons This type of button will change its function or sw
508. s 1 and 2 These are best suited to effects such as reverbs and delays You can use any type of effect but double size effects can be used only in master effect 1 When using a double size effect master effect 2 cannot be used For details please see Master effects on page 156 Total Effect The Total Effect is dedicated to processing the main L R outputs The Total Effect is suitable for use with effect types that are applied to the entire mix such as compressor limiter or EQ You can use effects other than double size effects For details please see Total Effect on page 157 Automatically importing a Combination into Sequencer mode The Auto Song Setup feature automatically applies the settings of the current Combination to a song If inspiration for a phrase or song strikes you while you re playing a program or combination you can use this function to start recording immediately Hold down the ENTER switch and press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch The Setup to Record dialog box will open and ask Are you sure Press OK You will automatically enter Sequencer mode and will be in the record ready state Press the START STOP switch to start the sequencer and begin recording S 2 v 75 76 Playing and editing Combinations Creating songs Sequencer mode Overview Immediately after the power is turned on M3 will About the M3 s Seq uencer no
509. s a certain standardization of the more than two hundred internal parameters of the GE based on the type and purpose of that GE GEs for which the same RTC Model has been specified will by default have the same parameters assigned as their GE realtime parameters This means that even if you re switching through various GEs that have the same RTC Model you will be able to control them in a uniform manner and make valid comparisons between them since their default state will be the same Of course you are free to edit the GE realtime parameters In the pre loaded programs and combinations the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches are assigned in a uniform manner depending on the RTC Model for the GE used by each module For example if a KARMA module used by a program or combination uses a GE of the Drum Percussion category the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches will be assigned so that Slider 1 controls the swing and Slider 2 controls the pattern variation Of course you are also free to edit the KARMA sliders and KARMA switches assignments Each GE is assigned one of the following RTC Models e DP1 Drum Perc e BL1 Bass Lead e DM1 Drum Melodic e GV1 Gated Vel Pattern e GC1 Gated CCs e CL1 Comp Lead e WS1 WaveSeq 1 e WS2 WaveSeq 2 e EG1 Dual Env Gen e LF1 Dual LFOs e MRI Melodic Repeat e MBI Mel Rpt Bend e RB1 Real Time Bend e Custom a few GEs may require special RTC setups outside of the nor
510. s in the M3 s manual to the button or tab please see objects shown on the display References to the switch knob dial or Slider please see controls on the front or rear panel of the M3 e Check box h Menu command g Popup button 2 a Current page f Popup button 1 Control EM COMBI P Play yo 35a Control Assign Tone Adjust Timbre 6 m Auto Load BEJI 0501 Transpose 12 d Edit cell c Parameter b Tab a Current page This indicates the current page within the selected mode From the left this area shows the mode name page number name and tab name Mode name Page number Tab name COMBI P Play ontrol Surface b Tab Most pages are divided into two or more tabs c Parameters The parameters for various settings are displayed in the display d Edit cell When you touch a parameter on the display the parameter or parameter value will usually be highlighted displayed in inverse video This is called the edit cell and the highlighted item will be subject to editing For details on how to edit the value please see 3 Selecting a parameter and editing the value on page 23 17 18 Introduction to the M3 e Check box Each time you press a check box it alternates between the checked red and unchecked states The parameter will be active if it is checked and inactive if it is unchecked
511. s of the KARMA sliders KARMA switches and scenes will be copied to Module Control A 2 Press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn on the KARMA function When you play the keyboard the KARMA function will generate a drum pattern just as it did for the program 3 Use the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch and the START STOP switch to realtime record on track 1 See Recording MIDI in real time on page 85 You can operate the KARMA sliders switches and the SCENE switches while recording and the changes in the pattern or sound that occur will be recorded just as they occur amp The song tempo and the KARMA function tempo cannot be set independently 4 If you want the KARMA module to be in synchronization with the sequencer during recording check the Quantize Trigger option Access the Seq P7 2 KARMA2 Trigger A page SEQ Pf 2 KARMA 2 Mrodule Parameter Trigger Control m Guantize Trigger Delay Delay Start ort Hote Trigger Latch ist Oo Envelope Trigger Latch 1O any amp off 2 any or 3 amp any or _ Update On Release Module Trigger Trigger By Module Off Cutoff Module Ls OF Oe Oe hea n z e a E E iM S A A AA E 1 The trigger timing will be synchronized to sixteenth note intervals of the sequencer beat See Synchronizing the KARMA function on page 182 5 You can synchronize the KARMA module to the start timing of the sequencer e While KARMA i
512. s on the KARMA module s you specify here will operate 1 Access the Combi P7 1 KARMA1 GE Setup A page COMBI P 1 KARMAI GE Setup A MEZ a 95 06 ARPRRRULLOLLLELLOLARERRILLLELLOLLLALLERRRIRLELLLOLLOLLATRRPLLEILLOLLLELLOLE GE Setup Fl gt drum DP1 Drum Perc Btm c 1 Top Gg E 1777 SyncoPop AT Kits Thru in Trans 66 Run E Run _ Solo _ Link to DT Thrudut2 Trans 00 170 Ir Gch Out DE e Gch b az b a4 ice E Solo Hlcsh By sch ee a ad e el l A E E E Cg h Ottset j Matris J Seeds 4 2 Use Run and Solo to specify whether KARMA module A will sound when KARMA is on KARMA modules whose Run setting is On checked will operate If you turn Solo On checked only that KARMA module will sound This is useful when you are selecting a GE or when you want to audition the phrase that a module is generating Modules whose Solo is On checked will sound even if Run is Off unchecked Note If Run is not shown in the display it has been assigned as a performance realtime parameter Use a KARMA switch etc to control the Run parameter See Perf RTP Perf Real Time Parameters on page 179 amp The Solo setting is cleared when you switch to another combination It is not saved when you write the combination 3 Use the Combi P7 1 KARMA1 GE Setup B C and D pages to set the Run and Solo settings for KARMA modules B C and D
513. s running press the START STOP switch the KARMA function will synchronize to the synthesizer timing e If you again press the START STOP switch the sequencer and the KARMA function will both stop If you want to stop only the KARMA function press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn it off e If you want the KARMA function to start at the moment recording begins press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn it on and then play the keyboard during the pre count before recording The KARMA module will not be triggered immediately but will be triggered in synchronization with the sequencer when recording begins See Synchronizing the KARMA function on page 182 Realtime multi track recording using set tings copied from a combination The pre loaded combinations include a diverse array of combinations that take full advantage of the KARMA function You can play these combinations to stimulate ideas for songs and record your playing to create basic tracks Many of these combinations consist of timbres and KARMA modules with differing MIDI channel settings In the example below we ll show how you can use multi track recording to record a performance consisting of multiple MIDI channels 1 We ll start by copying the settings of a combination into a song Access the Seq P0 1 Play REC Program T01 08 page 2 In the upper left of the display press the menu button to open the menu and choose Copy From Combi 181 Using
514. se the VOLUME MAIN slider to adjust the volume of the individual outputs oom o Powered O O monitors INPUT INPUT Mixer panaan aad om 1 A l Headphones Headphones 1 If you re using headphones connect them to the M3 s headphone jack 2 Use the VOLUME MAIN slider to adjust the volume of the headphones The M3 s headphone jack outputs the same signal as the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks Note To monitor the INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 4 signals use an external mixer 27 28 Setup Analog audio input Here s how to input external analog audio sources into the M3 so that they can be sampled or processed through the internal effects AUDIO INPUT 1 2 These two inputs use unbalanced 1 4 phone jacks They also include preamps with adjustable gain You can use these for 1 Connect your mics or the output jacks of your external audio sources to the INPUT 1 and 2 jacks These are unbalanced 1 4 phone jacks 2 Set the MIC LINE switch as appropriate for the device you ve connected and use the LEVEL knob to adjust the gain Use the LINE setting if you re inputting from a mixer an audio system or another synthesizer Choose the MIC setting switch in the outward position if you ve connected a mic 3 Adjust the output level on your external device 4 After turning on the power use
515. selected sample This switch is also used to play back WAV files from the media You can play back WAV files in the directory window of various Media mode pages in the Media mode Make Audio CD page in the Sequencer mode audio track editing dialog boxes and in the Select Directory menu dialog box of the Program Combination Sequencer and Sampling modes 15 SEQUENCER switches Most of the switches in this section apply only to Sequencer mode and audio CD playback in Media Mode REC WRITE is the exception it has special functions in Program Combination and Global modes as described below PAUSE switch In Sequencer mode this switch pauses the playback of the song When paused the switch s LED will light up Press PAUSE once again to resume playback and the LED will turn off In Media and Sampling modes this switch pauses audio CD playback lt lt REW switch In Sequencer mode when the Song is playing or paused this switch will rewind the song When you press and hold this switch its LED will light up and the playback will rewind Rewind is disabled during recording and while the Song is stopped In Media and Sampling modes this switch rewinds the audio CD FF gt gt switch In Sequencer mode when the Song is playing or paused this switch will fast forward the song When you press and hold this switch the switch will light and the playback will fast forward Fast forward is disabled during rec
516. sical effect When used to control KARMA the Control Surface sliders and switches are five layers deep one for each Module A D and then a Master Layer which controls selected parameters from all of the Modules at once The MODULE CONTROL switch selects whether the KARMA Sliders Switches and Scenes will control either a single Module independently or the Master Layer In Program mode only a single Module is available and the Master Layer is used to control it you cannot select other settings SCENES SWITCHES 1 5 4 8 These switches select KARMA scenes 1 8 When you press the CONTROL ASSIGN KARMA switch the 1 4 or 5 8 LED will blink to indicate the candidates for the selection you are about to make When you then press a switch 1 5 4 8 the corresponding KARMA scene will be selected If you once again press the KARMA ON OFF switch while 1 4 or 5 8 are blinking the blinking state will be cancelled 9 Ww me e t 5 Drum Chord Pads PAD 1 8 These velocity sensitive pads can trigger single notes or chords of up to eight notes each You can use them for playing or programming drums for triggering chords especially useful in conjunction with KARMA or for selecting chords to play from the keyboard in Chord mode For information about Chord mode please see Assigning notes and chords to pads on page 44 Assigning notes to the pads is fast and easy see CHORD ASSIGN switch
517. sing the M3 Plug In Editor with a FireWire connection You can use the M3 as though it were plug in software apply plug in effects to the M3 s audio signals or control the M3 s audio signals within your host application together with the data of other audio tracks You can also apply the M3 s effects to audio signals such as audio tracks of your host application Make settings as appropriate for the host application you re using The following illustrations show examples of connections and settings loos oo Powered one Cc Cc Eo ee i INPUT INPUT M3 s audio signals a p gt Other audio signals MIDI signals i p44 1 1 L 2 Audio interface 4 Computer One or two channels of audio tracks etc from ee your DAW software y The M3 s channels L R and 1 4 Y For the l ae computer Global mode settings on the M3 Local Control On settings Turn on the Echo Back function of the external MIDI USB sequencer or computer so that data received at MIDI IN will be re transmitted from MIDI OUT USB and turn off the M3 s Local Control setting so that M3 s keyboard and tone generator will be internally disconnected When you play the keyboard or the pads 1 8 of the M3 the musical data will be transmitted to the exter
518. slation menu command The sample name and number of the first KSF file will be displayed Can t divide Meaning When using the Sampling mode Time Slice or Time Stretch commands the Slice setting would divide the sample into more samples than the maximum possible number 1000 and thus Divide cannot be executed Slice point over limit e Use Link to connect any Index that you do not require and then execute Divide Source file is not 44100Hz or 48000Hz Can t convert Meaning When executing the Media mode Utility menu command Rate Convert you selected a WAVE file of a sampling rate other than 44 1 kHz 48 kHz e You cannot convert WAVE files other than 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz Source is empty Meaning No data exists in the track or pattern that you specified as the source e Specify a track or pattern that contains musical data Source sample is empty Meaning When executing Insert Mix or Paste the source sample is empty e Execute the Copy operation before executing Insert Mix or Paste S P DIF CLOCK ERROR Meaning The clock was not detected correctly when you set System Clock to S P DIF or Word Clock in Global mode e Make sure that your external device is correctly transmitting a digital signal The M3 can accept sampling frequencies of 48 kHz e Make sure that there is no problem with the optical cable T The clock Track The clock battery voltage is low Please do the following 1
519. ss the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to begin playback Saving Track Lists The track list will be lost when the power is turned off If you want to keep this data you must save it 1 In the Save page select the directory in which you want to save the track list 2 Select the menu command Save Audio CD Track List to open the dialog box 3 Press the OK button to save the data or press the Cancel button to cancel without saving Viewing information about media Media Info This displays information about the media selected in Media Select Mounting USB storage devices Use the Media Info menu command Scan USB device to mount a device connected via USB A For details please see Scan USB device on page 439 of the Parameter Guide An overview of the M3 s effects For effects processing the M3 provides five insert effects two master effects and one total effect together with a mixer section that controls the routing of these effects All of these are stereo in out Specific parameters of these effects can also be controlled in real time from the M3 s controllers or via MIDI messages using Dynamic Modulation Dmod by MIDI Tempo Sync or by using a common LFO to apply synchronized change to differing modulation effects Effect types You can choose from 170 different full digital effects The effects are categorized as follows Classification of 170 effects 0
520. ss the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch during loop recording all musical data will be removed from the currently selected track as long as you continue pressing the switch By checking the Remove Data check box you can erase only the specified data During loop recording press the note that you wish to delete and only the data of that note number will be deleted from the keyboard as long as you continue pressing that note Similarly bender data will be deleted as long as you tilt the joystick in the X horizontal direction and aftertouch data will be deleted as long as you apply pressure to the keyboard When you are once again ready to record musical data uncheck the Remove Data check box 7 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Playback will end and you will return to the recording start location that you specified in step 4 If Loop All Tracks is selected normal playback will be looped as well Multi multitrack recording Multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record onto multiple tracks each with a different channel 1 Make the desired Recording Setup settings You can record using Overwrite Overdub Manual Punch In or Auto Punch In 2 In Recording Setup check Multi REC MRecordin 5 m es Overw rite Q Auto Punch In Q Overdub Q Manual Punch In m Multi REC 3 Use Location to specify the measure at which recording will beg
521. t to select the GE used by the KARMA module MIDI I O channel settings You can specify the MIDI input and output channels for each of the four KARMA modules used by a combination The MIDI input output channel setting for each KARMA module and the MIDI channel setting for each timbre will determine the routing that specifies how the KARMA modules play the timbres These are the most important settings when using multiple KARMA modules in a combination 1 Access the Combi P7 1 KARMA1 GE Setup A D page 2 Specify the In Input Channel and Out Output Channel of each KARMA module In Input Channel For a combination you will normally set this to Gch so that your keyboard playing will control the KARMA module Out Output Channel Set this to the MIDI channel of the timbre s that should be played by this KARMA module Gch Gch Also This option is available if Input Channel is set to other than Gch If you select check this option a module that would normally be triggered only by the Input Channel will also be triggered by the Gch Gch see PG page 379 Thru Timbre Thru If this option is on checked timbres differing from the global MIDI channel will sound when the KARMA function is off Setting example 1 This example shows how the Gch Gch Also option works 1 Set MIDI Channel for the following timbres as follows Timbre 1 G ch Timbre 2 2 ch Timbre 3 3 ch Timbre 4 4 ch Timbre 5
522. t Analog E Ram IF x or orm Save to Cancel OF 3 Select REC Audio Input This will make settings for sampling an external audio source 4 Set Source Audio to Analog This means that the instrument or other external audio input source connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks will be sampled 5 Set Mono L Mono R Stereo to Mono L With this setting the input from the INPUT 1 jack will be sent to the internal L channel and sampled in monaural 6 For the Save to field select RAM The sampled data will be written into RAM memory 7 Turn IFX Off You will be sampling without applying an insert effect 8 Press the OK button to execute the command You have now made the settings necessary for sampling Audio In Setup Analog Bus Select FA BUS AUX BUS Sendi Send SAMPLING PS Recording F Level Pan Le ggah 1008 ire of of pan ana of or pan aaa ese mg 127 Rizr E LAR Sampling Setup Source BUS L R Trigger Sampling START SW Metronome Precaunt gt Ott Resample Manual Pre Trigger REC 86 ms Record Tusio Inf 7 ing fr a Surface Control Note Take a look at the settings that have been made Analog Input Level 127 Pan L000 BUS Select L R Specify the input level from the INPUT 1 jack set the pan and choose the L R bus as the destination Source BUS L R The sound sent to the L R bus
523. t basic keyboard tracking re creates this effect by increasing the cutoff frequency of a lowpass filter as you play higher on the keyboard Usually some amount of key tracking is necessary in order to make the timbre consistent across the entire range The M3 keyboard tracking can also be much more complex since it allows you to create different rates of change over up to four different parts of the keyboard For instance you can e Make the filter cutoff increase very quickly over the middle of the keyboard and then open more slowly or not at all in the higher octaves e Make the cutoff increase as you play lower on the keyboard e Create abrupt changes at certain keys for split like effects How Key Track works Keys and Ramps The keyboard tracking works by creating four ramps or slopes between five keys on the keyboard The bottom and top keys are fixed at the bottom and top of the MIDI range respectively You can set the other three keys named Low Break Center and High Break to be anywhere in between The four Ramp values control the rate of change between each pair of keys For instance if the Low Center Ramp is set to 0 the value will stay the same between the Low Break key and the Center key You can think of the resulting shape as being like two folding doors attached to a hinge in the center At the Center key the main hinge the keyboard tracking has no effect The two folding doors swing out from
524. t contain any song data so if you wish to play a song on the sequencer you must first load data The M3 s sequencer is a 16 track MIDI sequencer that from media or receive a MIDI data dump from a can hold up to 128 songs and 210 000 MIDI events MIDI filer For details please see Loading data You can record and play back MIDI data using sixteen on page 145 and Receiving SysEx data dumps MIDI tracks and one master track containing tempo on page 401 of the Parameter Guide data etc to control the internal sound generator and your external sound modules The M3 also provides an In Track Sampling function Se q uencer mode structu re that automatically creates the appropriate note data in a track if you sample an external audio source while Sequencer mode is structured as follows your song plays You can connect a USB CD R RW drive commercially Sonas available and create an audio CD of your completed g songs See page 127 and page 150 A song consists of MIDI tracks 1 16 a master track S With its broad range of capabilities such as its In track song parameters such as the song name X Y control g Sampling function Time Stretch Slice function KARMA function Drum Track function effect and a KARMA function high quality effects and controllers RPPR parameters and 100 user patterns ne the M3 is the ideal environment for music production A maximum of 128 such songs can be created on M3 or live performance MIDI tracks 1 16 e
525. t resolve the problem copy several files from that media to other media delete those files and then try the sampling operation again Note Sampling may not be possible because of the media you re using Please use the recommended types of media See Media that can be used with the M3 on page 223 Note If the Buffer overrun error occurred error message appears the data up to the point the error occurred has been sampled but the data at the point the error occurred may not play back correctly Buffer underrun error occurred Meaning When playing back a WAVE file from external USB media the data could not be read fast enough for playback processing e Copy the file you want to play into another folder and then execute the operation again Note Playback may not be possible because of the media you re using Please use the recommended types of media See Media that can be used with the M3 on page 223 C Can t calibrate Completed Can t calibrate Meaning Calibration could not be performed correctly e Try again Error messages Error and confirmation messages Can t copy swap double size effect Meaning When copying or swapping an insertion effect or master effect you attempted to place a double size effect in IFX5 and MEFX2 e Modify your settings so that a double size effect is not moved to IFX5 or MFX2 and execute again Can t load divided PCG file Meaning The menu command Loa
526. t setting is 0 0 dB If the level is too low use the VALUE controller to raise the level as high as possible without causing the CLIP indicator to appear e When you finish making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC switch e Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to stop the song playback Then press the LOCATE switch 11 Start sampling e Press the SAMPLING REC switch and then the SAMPLING START STOP switch to enter recording standby mode e Press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch to play back the song Sampling will begin at the same time 12 When the song finishes playing back press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to stop sampling 13 Use the menu command Select Directory to verify that the WAVE file was created Select the file and press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to listen to the sound that was sampled Settings for the entire M3 Global mode How Global mode is structured For details on how to access each mode and page please see Basic operations on page 22 In Global mode you can make overall settings that apply to the entire M3 such as master tuning key transpose effect global switch global MIDI channel amp The edits you perform in Global mode will be and system clock In addition you can create user drum kits and scales make settings for the damper pedal and assignable foot switches pedals and specify category names for programs combinations and KARMA GE Global mode page struc
527. t the same moment in the song at which you recorded it In this example we ll show the sound of a guitar connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack can be added to your song 1 Press the MODE SEQ switch to enter Sequencer mode 2 Select the song to which you want to add the guitar sound You can either create a song or use Media mode to load a previously created song 3 Connect your guitar to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 jack See page 123 4 Access the P0 1 Play REC Sampling Audio In page 5 The Input Use Global Setting off 6 Choose the Auto Sampling Setup menu command A dialog box will appear 7 Choose In Track Sampling O Initialize oO Resample SEQ Play O In Track Sampling Source Audio E Analog ol To gt Tracka MIDI TRACK HS Program gt E 2 IntProgram EG Cancel OF 8 Make the following settings for In Track Sampling Source Audio Analog Mono L Mono R Stereo Mono L If you re using analog input make settings so that the sound from Input 1 is sampled to L MONO To as desired The track you want to use for In Track Sampling MIDI note data to trigger the sample will be recorded in the track you selected Program as desired The convert destination program number When sampling is completed a new multisample will be automatically created converted to a program and assigned as the program for the track 9 Press the OK button to execute the
528. t to ISO9660 Format Media mode The native M3 CD R RW format is UDF which allows you to write repeatedly to the same CD UDF is a standard format but you can also convert such disks to the more common but less flexible ISO9660 format USB HD USB RM USB CD R RW USB CD R RW BU E Disk E S Disk B Write A Save R O E E OE O E E E OE Sampling S r supported X not supported not applicable 1 Use USB 2 0 compatible devices for other than save load 2 Sampling resampling to an MO larger than 640 MB is not possible CD DA audio CDs can be ripped in Sampling mode Note If you have any questions regarding the media that can be used please contact your local Korg distributor You may also check the Korg website http www korg com 223 224 Appendices Specifications and options Specifications Operating temperature 0 40 C KYBD 61 73 88 keyboard assembly System System KKS KORG Komponent System 88 key Real Weighted Hammer Action RH3 The key weight of the RH3 keyboard differs in four stages across the pitch range with low notes being Keyboard heavier and high notes being lighter delivering a playing feel similar to that of a grand piano 73 Semi weighted a Joystick Ribbon Controller SW1 SW2 TO MODULE for connection with the M3XP M sound module TO MODULE 2nd 73 key and 88 key only M3XP M sound module EDS Enhanced Definition Synt
529. t ways to select Combinations Each one is convenient in a different way e Using Combination Select and the VALUE controllers Choose Combination Select and then use the VALUE controllers to select a program e Using the Bank Combination Select menu In the display press the Combination Select popup button and choose from the menu organized by bank e Using the Category Program Select menu In the display press the Category Select popup button and choose from the menu organized by categories such as piano or drums e Using a foot switch lets you change Combinations even while both hands are busy playing on the keyboard convenient for live applications e MIDI program change messages let you select Combinations remotely from either a MIDI sequencer or an external MIDI controller See below for details 3 Combination Select 2 COMBI PO Play 4 A V switches 4 VALUE dial 1 MODE DAMPER MN As with Programs each Combination has five insert effects two master effects and one total effect for shaping and transforming the sounds of the individual Timbres This section of the manual takes a quick look at playing Combinations including tours of the front panel controllers and basic editing techniques Selecting a program using Combination Select and the VALUE controllers ad 2 o W 1 Press the MODE COMBI switch The LED will light Re
530. take the pitch to change As this value is increased the pitch will change over a longer time With a value of 000 there will be no portamento You can turn Portamento on and off via SW1 or SW2 by assigning them to Porta SW CC 65 Detailed Editing with Programs Using Filters Using Filters The filters allows you to diminish or emphasize specified frequency areas of the sound The tone of the sound will depend significantly on the filter settings The basic filter settings including the routing type cutoff frequency and resonance are set on the P3 1 Filter1 or P3 2 Filter2 page Filter Routing Each oscillator has two filters Filter A and Filter B The Filter Routing parameter controls whether one or both of the filters are used and if both are used it controls how they are connected to each other The Single routing uses only Filter A as a single 2 pole 12dB octave filter 6dB for Band Pass and Band Reject The Serial routing uses both Filter A and Filter B The oscillator first goes through Filter A and then the output of Filter A is processed through Filter B Parallel also uses both Filter A and Filter B The oscillator feeds both filters directly and the outputs of the two filters are then summed together The 24dB 4Pole routing merges both filters to create a single 4 pole 24dB octave filter 12dB for Band Pass and Band Reject In comparison to Single this option produces a sharper roll off
531. tch off while KARMA is operating KARMA will also stop ped tes E gt om a 191 192 Drum Track function Specifying whether the drum track will oper ate for each KARMA scene Here s how to specify whether the drum track will operate for each KARMA scene 1 Access the Prog P7 KARMA1 Drum Track Control page PROG P7 1 KARMA1 WiScene Drum Tracki 1 E 0 MDI Drum Random i setup J Liter Jortcet J Trask sends Control Taser 2 In DT Run Drum Track Run clear the check box of each scene for which you don t want the drum track to operate For example you might turn this on selected for scene 1 and off cleared for scene 2 3 Press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn it on Verify that the SCENES 1 4 LED is lit and then press the SCENES 1 5 switch to select scene 1 see page 168 4 Press the DRUM TRACK ON OFF switch If Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trig play the keyboard or transmit a note on Verify that KARMA and the Drum Track pattern are playing 5 Press the SCENES 2 6 switch to select scene 2 You ll stop hearing the Drum Track pattern If you press the SCENES 1 5 switch you ll hear the Drum Track pattern again 6 Press the SCENES 2 6 switch once again to select scene 2 If you now press the KARMA ON OFF switch to turn it off you will no longer hear the drum track To retrigger the drum track turn the DRUM TRACK
532. ted into a program In Program mode you can make filter amp and effect settings etc and play the sample as a program The resulting Program can be used in a Combination or Song 1 Use Multisample Select MS to select the multisample that you want to convert to a program 2 Choose Convert MS To Program to open the dialog box Convert Multisample 68 Stereo T MewMS ADA L Use Destination Program Parameters To Program gt gto TSR TG a tee SL Cancel OK 3 Press the text edit button to open the text edit dialog box and input a new program name up to 24 characters By default this will be the name of the multisample 4 Use Destination Program Parameters unchecked When you execute the multisample of the conversion destination program will be replaced by the multisample you select here and the other program parameters will be initialized The program will reproduce the sound you heard in Sampling mode The program will be converted with an Oscillator Mode Prog P1 of Single Use Destination Program Parameters checked When you execute the multisample of the conversion destination program will be replaced by the multisample you select here but the other program parameters will not be initialized Choose this if you want to use the parameter settings of an existing program amp If you check Use Destination Program Parameters please be aware of t
533. tem Clock cannot be switched to S P DIF unless a 48 kHz system clock is being input e Please input a 48 kHz system clock from your S P DIF Optical format compatible device into the M3 s S P DIF IN jack Only 48 kHz is supported After this is input you ll be able to switch System Clock to S P DIP No data Meaning When loading a Standard MIDI File the file contained no events Meaning When you executed Samples in One Multisample in Export Smpl as AIFF WAVE command in the Media mode Save page there were no samples To solve either of these problems e Create sample data Error messages Error and confirmation messages No medium Meaning When executing a command in Media mode no media was inserted in the drive To solve this problem e Insert media such as a mount the drive No recording track specified Meaning When performing realtime multi track recording you attempted to begin recording with no tracks set to REC To solve this problem e Set the desired tracks for recording to REC No space available on medium Meaning When you attempted to save or copy a file or to create a directory there was not enough free space on the other medium To solve this problem e Either delete an existing file or exchange the medium with one that has sufficient free space No space available on medium Do you want to make a divided file Meaning When saving a PCG or KSF file there was insufficient free sp
534. terface or with audio signals from another sound module make connections as shown below Loos oos Powered cS Co Co inpur INPUT i B M3 s audio signals gt Other audio signals gt MIDI signals Computer en M3 If you want to apply a plug in effect to the M3 s audio signals or to control the M3 s audio signals in your host application together with the audio data from the KORG Legacy Collection or other audio tracks make connections as shown below Make settings as appropriate for the host application you re using ooa oos Powered pe e Computer gt M3 s audio signals gt Other audio signals MIDI signals M3 Connecting your computer via the MIDI connectors You can use a commercially available MIDI interface to connect the M3 to your computer 1 Connect the M3 s MIDI OUT connector and MIDI IN connector to the MIDI IN port and MIDI OUT port of your MIDI interface For details refer to the manual included with your MIDI interface amp Some USB MIDI interfaces may be unable to transmit or receive the M3 s MIDI exclusive messages Connections Connecting a computer Connection for the M3 6 1
535. that appears The number of measures in the converted song will be used Press the OK button and the Convert Cue List dialog box will appear Convert Cue List CA to Song To Song EERE SENT Te Cancel OF 3 Press the OK button The cue list will be converted into a song Access the P0 1 Play REC page select the song number that you specified as the conversion destination and check the results SEQ P 1 Play REC Program 161 63 EEA 001 61 800 Metr 44 J 120 05 Auto Oe NEW CUELIST 00 Trackat MIDI TRACK A Reso E Hi Em RFFR oe I AG4 Studia Standard Kit Ch 61 RPPR its De AE E2 E 4 B Categori F REE EE Hl 0 HH HH HH Drums Bass 8 Keyboar Organ Brass Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Sella roay o INT gt Adda gt Anoe gt Abed gt Coas gt Aaaa gt Aaa gt Aoga gt Aago Studia 1 Acoustic Stereo G Ballade C Full Bras Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G 3 G3 GO GO GD GD GD Piar 1 Frog finer Mirer PlyLoop FlyLoop Sampling Prefe Saving your song Here we will explain how to save your song on a USB storage device commercially available connected to the USB A connector To ensure that your data will be reproduced perfectly we recommend that you use Save All to save your song amp When you turn off the power the Sequencer mode settings the recorded songs and the user pattern data will be lost
536. the song to create a WAVE file For details on creating a WAVE file refer to Resampling a song to create a WAVE file 3 Repeat the steps above for all of the Songs that you d like to burn to the CD and then proceed to Part 2 below Part 2 Making the CD 1 Access the Media Make Audio CD page Press the Make Audio CD tab In the default state the WAVE File area will show only End Make Audio CD Total G 00 Free Track WAVE File Size Time End Insert 2 To the track list add the WAVE files that you want to write to the CD Select End it will be highlighted and press the Insert button The Insert Track dialog box will appear Insert Track cl aa MEWFILE Wat NEW SBHH w Aw At NE WS G 1 W AW 188K 41 61 2008 66 06 08 26K 41 61 2008 66 06 08 41 61 2008 66 66 08 _ newsaaae Sampling START STOP plays selected file E RDD NEW YOLUME Exit Insert All Insert Creating audio CDs Creating audio CDs Use media select and the Open and Up buttons to access the directory that contains the WAVE file and select the WAVE file that you want to add to the list If you want to audition the file you can press the SAMPLING START STOP switch to play back the sample amp If you have selected a WAVE file with a sampling frequency other than 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz it will not be possible to
537. the ribbon controller 4 Release the joystick and lift your finger up from the ribbon The effects of both the ribbon and the joystick will be maintained until you press SW2 again to release the lock Lock can also be applied to aftertouch by assigning SW1 or SW2 to After Touch Lock For details on the functions that you can assign to SW1 and SW2 please see SW1 2 Assignments on page 617 of the Parameter Guide Keyboard Velocity Velocity is a measure of how hard you play a note on the keyboard This can be used to modulate many different aspects of the sound such as volume brightness or the character of the attack Aftertouch The keyboard can also measure how hard you press down after you play a note hence the term aftertouch You can use this to shape notes over time controlling for instance volume or vibrato amount Note Number Sounds can be programmed to change in character based on the note being played As you play higher or lower on the keyboard the note number can modulate the timbre such as becoming brighter as you play higher Envelopes may also become faster or slower the volume may change and so on The controllers of the M3 M Control Surface sliders amp switches The control surface consists of eight sliders eight switches and control assign switches that select the functions to be controlled e You can control mixer functions such as volume mute and solo on off fo
538. this center point to create changes in the higher and lower ranges of the keyboard Keyboard Track Shape and Intensity Intensity 99 Original Shape Intensity 50 Less Effect SEE 16k Rien Intensity 0 No Effect oeoo Intensity 99 Inv rted Low Break Key Center Key High Break Key 59 60 Playing and editing Programs PROG P3 1 Filter1 Keyboard Track Intensity to A H ALOLLEILLELLRILEILERILLILLLELLELE REL GILLI RILLRELE ALLL LE OLE EL LAL LRELLILE co C1 m ca fet cS CB cy cea Og Center cs Key High CE Ramp BtmLo 58 LoCent 5 CentHi 99 HiTop 25 Keyboard Track Key Key Lov ee Intensity to A and Intensity to B adjust the effect that keyboard tracking will have on filters A and B For details please see 3 1 2 Keyboard Track on page 49 of the Parameter Guide AMS Modulation In addition to the EG LFOs and Key Track you can use two AMS sources to modulate the filters For instance you could use the ribbon to change the brightness Using the Amp section The Amp section includes controls for volume pan and the driver circuit You can control the volume using the Amp EG LFO 1 2 Key Track and velocity along with other AMS sources Each Oscillator has its own Amp section Amp1 for OSC1 and Amp2 for OSC2 Background what does Amp mean Different sounds have characteristic shapes to their volume levels For example the
539. this will be the piano sound produced by timbre 1 Ch 01 177 178 Using KARMA If Thru Timbre Thru is on checked you ll be able to play timbres that differ from the global channel when the KARMA function is off For KARMA module A turn Thru Timbre Thru on checked When the KARMA function is off playing the keyboard will sound the piano of timbre 1 Ch 01 as well as the bass of timbre 2 Ch 02 Editing the parameters of each KARMA module You can specify the keyboard zone in which each KARMA module operates make MIDI filter settings and edit KARMA module parameters Just as for a program these parameters can be specified independently for each KARMA module GE Real Time Parameters Here s how to edit the parameters of the GE selected for each KARMA module 1 Access the Combi P7 3 KARMA3 GE RTP M A page COMBI P 3 KARMA3 i Bae Arp Model 61 Up Dn J 120 50 4 8 9 16 17 24 25 32 He GE RT FARAM MIH Max VALUE ASSIGN FOL 83 Duration Duration Value CEJ d Velocity Scale CBI Bo Hote Series Replications HE Hote Series Hote Type OT Mote Series Input Sort 09 Hote Series Inversion 2 Set MIN MAX VALUE ASSIGN and POL POLARITY In the Master tabs specifying ASSIGN lets you edit the MIN MAX VALUE and POL POLARITY settings 3 Use the Combi P7 3 KARMA3 GE RTP M B C an
540. ting is 0 dB and the signal of an internal bus L R AUX 1 2 AUX 3 4 Indiv 1 2 Indiv 3 4 is set to Source Bus the CLIP indication will not appear even if the input signal from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks or the S P DIF jack is at a level that causes distortion This is due to the way in which the internal level is calculated If the Source Bus selection is Analog Input 1 2 or S P DIF IN L R the signal will not be routed through the internal bus and thus the level of the input signal will be sampled without change If the input signal is distorted due to clipping the CLIP indication will appear if Recording Level is higher than 0 dB When the Recording Level is set to 0 dB and the sounds played by the M3 are clipping and distorting and you are resampling these signals via an internal bus the CLIP indication will not appear in this case either again due to the way in which internal levels are calculated KARMA function KARMA does not start Is the KARMA ON OFF switch turned on lit p 167 Ifa KARMA module does not start in Combination or Sequencer mode is the Run Check Box checked for that module Also are the Input Channel and Output Channel settings appropriate p 171 p 176 Is MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI set to Internal or Auto PG p 380 In the Global P0 Basic Setup page is All KARMA DT Off checked p 130 Is the KARMA LINKED LED lit e The KARMA function is linked w
541. tings Total effect selection and settings Audio input settings and resampling For details on how to access each mode and page please see Basic operations on page 22 Sampling or resampling can be performed in Program mode For details please see Sampling in Program Combination and Sequencer modes on page 122 Combination structure and corresponding pages X Y P1 2 3 4 5 Controllers P1 6 DrumTrk Prog P1 1 Audio Input PO 7 Timbre1 Routing P8 1 2 KARMA P7 Pads P1 7 8 Tone Adjust P0 8 Insert AUDIO OUTPUT 1 5 P8 Insert Effects Master Effects AUDIO OUTPUT Individual Outputs INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 AUX Bus 3Band EQ FX Control Bus P1 1 P2 2 etc indicate the on screen pages and tabs used when editing on the M3 Detailed Editing with Combinations A suggested approach for editing Since you can apply the M3 s internal effects to the external audio inputs a wide range of possibilities are available For details please see Using effects in Combinations and Songs on page 157 A suggested approach for editing First select a Program for each Timbre on the PO Play Program T01 08 or T09 16 page Note that you don t have to use all 16 Timbres Next create any desired keyboard or velocity splits layers or crossfades between the different Timbres You can do this on the P4 Zone Delay Keyboard Zones page After this adjust the volumes of the Timbres
542. tion and Sequencer modes on page 122 e Multisample etc you create can be played back in Sequencer mode together with internal programs The Time Slice function of Sampling mode lets you divide up a rhythm loop sample and create playback data that triggers the divided samples at the appropriate timing You can play back this performance data in Sequencer mode and adjust the playback tempo without affecting the pitch of the rhythm loop sample You can even exchange the note numbers of the performance data or change its timing to transform the original rhythm loop sample into a completely new rhythm loop For details please see Time Slice on page 359 of the Parameter Guide e The In Track Sampling function lets you sample an external audio source that s playing along with the song playback and automatically create note data in the track to play this sample at the correct time e You can resample your completed songs to WAVE files and create an audio CD by burning those WAVE files in Media mode For details please see In Track Sampling on page 126 Settings for sampling resampling The menu command Auto Sampling Setup lets you automatically make the necessary settings for sampling resampling e g In Track Sampling or for a two channel mix for creating an audio CD For details please see Tip Auto Song Setup on page 196 of the Parameter Guide e Initialize Set parameters related to sampling to their d
543. tions contained in the included CD ROM can be downloaded from the Korg website http www korg com Please note before use Copyright to all software included in this product is the property of Korg Inc The license agreement for this software is provided separately You must read this license agreement before you install this software Your installation of this software will be taken to indicate your acceptance of this agreement Operating requirements KORG USB MIDI driver Windows Computer USB port required a USB host controller made by Intel is recommended Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Professional x64 Edition Service Pack 2 or later the MIDI driver for the x64 Edition is a Beta version All editions of Microsoft Windows Vista the MIDI driver for the 64 bit Edition is a Beta version Macintosh Computer USB port required Operating system Mac OS X 10 3 9 or later M3 Editor and M3 Plug In Editor With audio capabilities EXB FW installed and connected via FireWire cable Windows e Computer CPU Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or better Pentium D or Core Duo more is recommended Memory 1 GB or more 2 GB or more is recommended Monitor 1 024 x 768 pixels 16 bit color or better A computer with a IEEE 1394 FireWire port that satisfies the requirements of Windows XP e Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition or Professional Service Pack 3 or later Macintosh e Compute
544. to automatically create a note event that triggers the sample at the same time as it was recorded You can also resample an entire song and then use Media mode to create an audio CD e Use M3 as a 16 track multitimbral tone generator e Record patterns and assign them to individual keys using RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording e Create user Drum Track patterns Sampling mode Sampling mode lets you record and edit user samples and multisamples For example you can e Sample external audio sources i e record samples including sampling through effects e Edit waveform data you sampled or loaded in from media and set loop points etc e Create and edit multisamples which consist of one or more samples spread out across the keyboard e Quickly convert multisamples into Programs e Directly sample or rip digital audio from an audio CD in a USB CD R RW drive commercially available You can also play back audio CDs Basic Information About the M3 s modes Global mode Global mode lets you make overall settings for the entire M3 and edit drum kits For instance you can e Make settings that affect the entire M3 such as master tune and global MIDI channel e Create user drum kits and user scales e Create drum kits using ROM or RAM drumsamples e Rename program combination and KARMA GE categories e Set the function of the assignable pedals and assignable switches e Transmit MIDI System Exclusiv
545. to enter a note number or velocity value in a dialog box that contains an OK button ENTER switch LOCATE switch e In Sequencer mode sets the current location as the Location equivalent to the Set Location menu command CONTROL ASSIGN KARMA switch the LED will light KARMA MODULE CONTROL switch In Combination or Sequencer mode sets Module Control to Master This is the same operation as selecting Module Control M in PO Control Surface Control Assign KARMA ENTER switch While a dialog box is displayed this switch performs the same operation as the OK button PAGE SELECT switch numeric key 0 9 By holding down the PAGE SELECT switch and pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can jump to the corresponding page Note In pages that contain multiple sub pages the first page e g P3 1 or P7 1 will be selected EXIT switch This button makes it easy to return to the main page of the current mode 1 Press it once to go to the previously selected tab on the main P0 page 2 Press the EXIT switch You will move to the previously selected parameter of the P0 top page Prog Main Combi Seq Program T01 08 3 Press the EXIT switch You will move to the first tab of the P0 top page and the corresponding parameter will be selected From any page you need only press the EXIT switch a maximum of three times to be able to select a Program Combination or Song using the numeric keys or A V switches
546. to L R the signal will be input to the total effect The output from the master effects is input to the total effect via the Return 1 and Return 2 settings of the Prog P9 MFX TFX Routing page After being processed through the total effect the signal is output from the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R outputs 19 Access the Prog P9 MFX TFX Routing page 20 Choose the desired total effect for TFX The procedure is the same as when selecting an insert effect See step 7 You can t use a double size effect as the total effect See Double size effects on page 156 of the Parameter Guide 21 Press the On Off button to turn the total effect on The total effect will be switched on off each time you press the button If this is Off the result will be the same as if 000 No Effect is selected The input sound will be output without change 22 Access the TFX page and edit the parameters of each effect to adjust the final sound as desired For details on the Program Effects settings step 11 Using effects in Combinations and Songs In Combination and Sequencer modes you can specify the routing of each timbre track to the insert effects master effects and total effect These settings are made in the same way in each of these modes We will be using the example of Combination mode in our explanation here Routing 1 Access the Combi P8 1 IFX Routing1 T01 08 page COMBI P8 1 1FX
547. to close the menu If you press the Cancel button your selection will be discarded and you will return to the program that had been selected when you opened the popup menu Using a footswitch to select Programs You can select programs by using a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack By assigning the appropriate function you can increment or decrement the program number in steps of one This lets you change Programs without using your hands great for quick Program changes in live performance situations There are two ways of doing this by assigning the footswitch to Program Up Down or to Value Inc Dec Each of these is suited to a particular application as described below Assigning the footswitch to Program Up Down Assigning the footswitch to Program Up or Program Down lets you directly control Program changes from the footswitch For most situations this is the more straightforward method To set this up 1 Connect a foot switch to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH input Use a optional PS 1 pedal switch 2 Access the Global P2 Controllers Foot Controllers page GLOBAL P2 Controllers Foot Controllers Foot Switch amp Pedal Dane TT Program Up Foot Pedal Assign ort Foot Switch Assign gt KORG Standard KORG Standard Damper Polarity Foot Switch Polarity Proceed as follows 3 Press the MODE GLOBAL switch to enter G
548. to install them one at a time 1 Insert the included CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of your computer 2 In the CD ROM double click the software installer pkg to start up the installer Each installer is located in the following folder e KORG USB MIDI driver KORG USB MIDI DRIVER folder KORG USB MIDI DRIVER pkg e M3 Editor M3 Editor folder gt M3 Editor pkg 3 Follow the on screen instructions to install each item of software such as the KORG USB MIDI driver and M3 Editor Note If you intend to use M3 Editor via the USB port you ll need to install the KORG USB MIDI driver on your computer 4 When you ve finished installing the software exit the installer About the M3 and USB MIDI driver ports KEYBOARD port Applications on your computer use this port to receive MIDI messages from the M3 data from the keyboard and controllers SOUND port Applications on your computer use this port to send MIDI messages to the M3 s internal sound generator making it produce sound Setting up the M3 Editor Plug In Editor For details on setting up and using the M3 Editor Plug In Editor please see M3 Editor Plug In Editor Manual PDF Playing and editing Programs About the M3 s Programs Programs are the basic sounds of the M3 You can play them by themselves layer them together in Combinations or play a different Program on each of the 16 MIDI tracks either from the internal Playin
549. to load an EXL file from media other than the USB storage media memory for temporary use could not be allocated on the USB storage media To solve either of these problems e On the USB storage media create free space that is larger than the EXL file Not enough memory to load Meaning When you attempted to load a SNG file or a standard MIDI file in Media mode there was insufficient free memory in the sequence memory To solve this problem e Delete other song data etc to increase the amount of free memory Not enough memory to open pattern Meaning There was insufficient sequencer memory to open the pattern so editing is not possible e Either delete unwanted data such as a song track or pattern or do not open the pattern Not enough multisample memory Meaning There is insufficient multisample memory The number of multisamples would exceed the maximum of 1 000 To solve this problem e Delete multisamples to increase the amount of free memory Not enough pattern locations available Meaning When executing Load Drum Track Pattern the attempted load operation would exceed the remaining number of user patterns in the selected song e Create a new song and reload the data into the user patterns of that song You can load up to 100 user patterns into each song If you have more drum track patterns than this to load you can divide them between two or more songs Not enough relative parameter memory
550. to pan or tremolo effects that lock to KARMA Drum Track the internal sequencer or external MIDI sequencers EGs Envelope Generators An envelope creates a modulation signal by moving from one level to another over a specified time and then moving to another level over another period of time and so on The Program includes three EGs for Pitch Filter and Amp These produce time varying changes in pitch tone and volume respectively They can also be used to modulate a number of other Program parameters via AMS note on Attack Level note off Y Break Level y Level Release e at ecs Time Release Time Decay Time Slope Time Attack Time Start Level Detailed Editing with Programs Using Alternate Modulation AMS and the AMS Mixers Using Alternate Modulation AMS and the AMS Mixers Alternate Modulation AMS Alternate Modulation Source refers to any of the assignable modulation sources in M3 including e KYBD 61 73 88 controllers such as the joystick or ribbon controller e Built in physical controllers such as the Real Time Sliders e Incoming MIDI controllers or MIDI controllers generated by KARMA or the X Y control e Modulators such as the Filter Pitch and Amp EGs the LFOs or the AMS Mixers Intensity is a parameter that sets the degree speed depth amount etc to which AMS will control the modulation A number of frequently used modulation routings such as using the K
551. to record onto a MIDI track that already contains data set the P0 1 Play REC Preference page Recording Setup to Overdub as described on page 86 SEQ P 1 Play REC Program 149 16 EEA 001 01 000 Meter 444 J 020 00 E Manu 3000 NEW SONG gt Trackf9 MIDI TRACK amp 9 TOS AGGESteres Grand 4 way Reso Hi _ RPPR Ch RPPR Hofssign Category Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Bank Program 2 figa gt Auda gt Augo 2 hese 2 Aaaa 2 Aada gt Aoga gt Auaa Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G Stereo G ry c Go Gm ies sss Us nE e Select Track 09 in Track Select Then press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch and then the START STOP switch and begin recording e At the appropriate time while recording adjust the parameter s that you want to realtime record Select another effect for IFX1 in the P8 1 IFX Insert FX Setup page and edit the effect parameter values or use the P0 2 Play REC Control Surface page Tone Adjust controls to edit the sound in realtime Insert FX Setup SEQ P amp 1 1Fa e ee Track s MIDI TRACK 9 Insert Effect Chain To Ch ir Fan 2 Bus JED Ore gt BRE St Parametric 4E 2EB Ors gt H49 Detune rs 3EB gt GEENo Effect 4 gt GEE No Effect 5EB gt BEE No Effect o R Note For details on the effects parameters that you can rec
552. tor speakers or stereo amp down to zero 2 Turn off the power of your powered monitor or stereo amp 3 Press the rear panel Power switch to turn off the power amp Never turn off the power while data is being written into internal memory If the power is turned off while processing is being performed memory write operations will not be completed correctly If this occurs M3 will automatically initialize its internal memory so that it will operate correctly This is not a malfunction While data is being written the display will indicate Now writing into internal memory Data is written into internal memory by the following operations e When writing Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kits RADIAS Formant Motion data or converting to a user Drum Track pattern update e When loading Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kit or RADIAS Formant Motion preload data e When receiving a MIDI data dump of Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kit RADIAS Formant Motion or user Drum Track pattern data 25 26 Setup Connections amp Connections must be made with the power turned off Please be aware that careless operation may damage your speaker system or cause malfunctions amp You can tilt the M3 M sound module upward for use if desired For the procedure refer to the included manual The following illustration is an example of connections Be sure you use the correct type of cab
553. tory sounds and are always available These are organized by category such as bass drums snares hats etc Ram Drumsamples include AKAI AIFF WAV or SoundFont 2 0 files loaded from media and samples created in Sampling mode EX Drumsample banks are EX USB PCM expansion sets created especially for the M3 Each has its own unique number for instance the EX and the EX USB PCM01 is EX1 Only the currently loaded EX banks will appear on this menu 4 Press the Drumsample popup for DS1 This brings up a list of Drumsamples organized by category Use the tabs at the left of the display to browse through the different categories For a list of the Drumsample names please see the Voice Name List 5 Select a Drumsample by touching its name in the list 6 Press the OK button to confirm your selection 7 Do the same for DS2 Now that you ve assigned Drumsamples to DS1 and DS2 let s set up the velocity ranges and crossfades 8 Access the P5 Drum Kit Velocity Split page The following settings can also be made from the Sample Setup page but the graphic in the right side of this page provides a visual indication of the settings 9 Set DS2 s Bottom Velocity to 001 and its Xfade Range to Off 10 Set DS1 s Bottom Velocity to 80 Now DS2 will sound when you play softly at velocities of 79 or less and DS1 will sound when you play harder with velocities of 80 or more 11 Next set DS1 s Xfade R
554. tputs to an external mixer and are using an external effect processor to apply reverb or chorus to the sound you can turn off the M3 s master effects and total effect Linking KARMA to Programs and Combinations You can specify whether the KARMA settings written to a Program or Combination will also be selected when you select that program or combination or whether the KARMA settings will not change when you switch the Program or Combination When the M3 is shipped from the factory the former setting is selected You can use the latter setting if you want to use the same KARMA settings to generate phrases and patterns while you select and try out different Programs and Combinations If the Load KARMA Settings When Changing Program or Combination boxes are selected selecting a Program or Combination respectively will also select the KARMA settings that are written in that Program or Combination If you check All KARMA DT Off all KARMA functionality and the Drum Track function will be off Even if the KARMA ON OFF switch is on the KARMA function will not operate Tuning and REDBULL Br ea ee transpose iBasic settings Master Tune ees 4G GHz Key Transpose Velocity Yelocity Curve 4 aftertouch After Touch Curve oO 3 curve settings Effect Global oy i EARMA Drum Track E C IFx1 5 off C all KARMA DT Off Effect bypass settings O MHFX1 8 amp 2 Off Load KARMA
555. track does Return 1 or Return 2 from the master effect need to be raised PG p 104 p 186 p 272 Alternatively has Send 1 or Send 2 for each oscillator of the program used by the timbre track been lowered PG p 181 p 266 Note The actual send level is determined by multiplying the send setting of each oscillator in the program with the send setting of the timbre track Have you routed the output to an insert effect PG p 10 p 30 p 99 p 101 p 131 p 180 p 181 p 184 p 206 p 208 p 266 p 268 MIDI The M3 does not respond to incoming MIDI data Are all MIDI cables or USB cables connected correctly p 30 p 33 Is the MIDI data being received on the channel on which it is being transmitted PG p 639 The M3 does not respond correctly to incom ing MIDI data Are the Global P1 MIDI settings MIDI Filter Enable Program Change Enable Bank Change Enable Control Change Enable AfterTouch and Enable Exclusive each checked PG p 383 Does the M3 support the types of messages that are being sent to it gt PG p 639 Incorrect response to program change messages Is the Bank Map setting correct PG p 374 Troubleshooting Pads or damper pedal do not respond correctly Pads or damper pedal do not respond correctly Pad response is wrong Execute the menu command Pad Calibration Global PO Basic Setup to correctly calibrate the pad sensitivity PG p 399 Damper response is wrong E
556. trol Surface E J 100 00 Control Assign External Setup ERENT ott EB Off EM ori Em oft Em ofr ot Gort Gey ort za a a me mee ak a em oat ae D Ce Sy ED me D ea ae m ee la 7 a Audiolny 4 Choose Setup Setup Select and select the external control set that you want to use The set list is shown in the lower portion of the page showing the functions that are currently assigned to the switches and sliders 5 When you operate the control surface switches 1 8 sliders 1 8 and pads 1 8 MIDI control change CC messages will be transmitted on the assigned MIDI channel Note The M3 s keyboard and other controllers will operate as usual 6 Use Program Select to switch programs 7 Press the CONTROL ASSIGN EXTERNAL switch and operate the various controllers You can use external control without losing the settings you ve made Changing programs in Program mode or switching to Combination mode etc will not affect the control set This means you can select another sound on the M3 without changing the way you re controlling an external MIDI device or conversely you can change the way you re controlling an external MIDI device without switching sounds on the M3 External control setups You will use Global mode to create external control setups amp The content that
557. ts you continue recording as you add musical data The specified region can be recorded repeatedly This is ideal when recording drum phrases etc Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 1 Set the Recording Setup to Loop All Tracks 2 If Multi REC is checked it will not be possible to select Loop All Tracks MRecording Setup re Q Overwrite Q Auto Punch In Overdub Loop All Tracks MaG5 EA Q Manual Punch In F 3 In M Loop Start Measure M Loop End Measure specify the area that you wish to record For example if you specify M004 M008 recording will occur repeatedly as a loop from measure 4 to measure 8 4 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording 5 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP switch Playback will begin When you reach the starting location you specified in step 3 recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record your performance When you reach the ending location you specified in step 3 you will return to the starting location and continue recording 6 The musical data that is loop recorded will be added to the previously recorded data You can also erase specific data even while you continue loop recording If you pre
558. tup i Insert Effect Chain To Chain i Ore gt 007 5t Graphic TEQ zam Ors gt B26 Stereo Chorus am Orxa Fan 8 Bus gt 647 5t Phaser Trml 4 oo gt ABA Ao Effect 5 O oF p N ELR ar ar Pens 7 Choose the effect type that you want to use for each insert effect IFX1 5 When you press the popup button all effects will be displayed organized into ten categories Use the pages located at the left and right to select a category and select an effect from that category on the display You can use the Copy Insert Effect menu command to copy effect settings from another program etc Also you can use Swap Insert Effect to exchange for example IFX1 and IFX5 8 Press the On Off button to turn on the insert effect Each time you press the button the insert effect will be switched on off When Off the result will be the same as when 000 No Effect is selected The input sound will be output without change 9 Make Chain settings If the Chain check box is checked the insert effect will be connected in series Since the output of the oscillator is being sent to IFX1 in step 2 making settings as shown in the diagram step 6 would connect all five insertion effects IFX1 IFX2 IFX3 in series so that these effects would be inserted into the output of the oscillator 10 Make settings for Pan 8 Bus Bus Select Send 1 Send 2
559. tup A page Make MIDI I O settings for the KARMA modules so that KARMA module A will play track 1 See KARMA function settings in Combination mode on page 176 For KARMA module A set the In Input Channel and Out Output Channel to 01 and 01 respectively Setting them to Tch and Tch will have the same result For details please see 7 1 1c MIDI I O on page 253 of the Parameter Guide EMICO Iri Teh Out alo co mee gre ae Oe oes es m As specified by the MIDI track s MIDI Channel setting and the KARMA module s Out Channel setting the MIDI track played by the KARMA module is displayed in red 3 Select a GE for KARMA module A and set its parameters You are free to select a GE and make settings as desired but in this example we ll use the Copy KARMA Module menu command to copy all of the program s KARMA function settings This is an easy way to set up and record the phrase or pattern that the program s KARMA function is generating 1 Use the menu button located in the top left of the display to open the menu and choose Copy KARMA Module Copy KARMA Module F rom gt Program A8 4 Studio Standard Kit m GE RTP Control amp Scenes m Perf RTP amp Panel Settings _ Pads Oa Cancel OF Specify the copy source program Turn on check GE RTP Control amp Scenes and Perf RTP amp Panel Settings Press OK to execute the copy The setting
560. ture Basic overall settings and audio input settings used when not in Sampling mode for User Global Setting P1 MIDI MIDI settings for the M3 External Mode settings Basic settings for the entire M3 and controller settings such as the pedals connected to the rear panel CC assignments for KARMA X Y and Pad PO Basic Setup P2 Controllers GLOBAL PARAMETERS Scale settings created by the user You can specify 16 types of octave scale and one full range scale Edit category names for programs and P5 Drum Kit Edit drum kits P3 Scales DRUM KIT Global settings Basic setup In the Global PO Basic Setup Basic page you can make the following settings Tuning to another instrument Transposing Master Tune adjusts the overall pitch Edit this setting when you are playing the M3 with other instruments or when playing along with music on CD or tape You can adjust the pitch in a range of 50 cents one semitone 100 cents If this is at 0 middle A is tuned to 440 Hz Key Transpose shifts the pitch in semitone steps Edit this setting when you want to transpose the sound of the entire M3 You can adjust the transposition in a range of 1 octave preserved until the power is turned off but will not be preserved after the power is turned off unless you first save your settings Two types of data are handled in Global mode user drum kit settings Global P5 and all other global settings Glob
561. type of Tone Adjust parameter affects other Tone Adjust parameters It does not affect program parameters directly If you ve adjusted an absolute or a relative Tone Adjust parameter the result of your adjustment will be written as follows Program mode e The settings of relative type Tone Adjust parameters are automatically applied to the program parameters when you write the program The Tone Adjust values will be reset to zero Saving data Writing to internal memory e The settings of absolute type Tone Adjust parameters are written as themselves i e as the settings of those Tone Adjust parameters Combination mode e The settings of both relative type and absolute type Tone Adjust parameters are written and preserved as the Tone Adjust settings for each timbre For details please see Tone Adjust on page 19 page 137 of the Parameter Guide About the Program and Combination edit buffer When you select a program in Prog P0 Play ora combination in Combi P0 Play the program or combination data is called into the M3 s edit buffer When you then use the various Program or Combination pages or each pages to edit the parameters your changes will affect the data in the edit buffer If you wish to save this modified data into internal memory you must perform the Write operation When you perform the Write operation the data in the edit buffer is written to the specified program or combination nu
562. u can t perform operations in the display while X Y MODE is on If you need to write data while X Y MODE is on you must use the method described above in Using the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch to write e Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE switch to access the dialog box and then press the ENTER switch About the Tone Adjust settings that are saved There are three types of Tone Adjust parameters as listed below The way in which settings are written will depend on the type e Absolute This type of Tone Adjust parameter controls a single program parameter The Program parameter and the Tone Adjust parameter reflect each other exactly If you edit one the other parameter will reflect the identical change This type of Tone Adjust parameter absolutely controls the program parameter itself e Relative This type of Tone Adjust parameter controls two or more program parameters simultaneously For example Filter Amp EG Attack Time controls a total of six program parameters The value of a relative parameter indicates the amount of change that is applied to the value of each program parameter it s affecting When a relative parameter is at zero i e when its slider is in the center position the program parameters it controls will function according to their original settings Raising or lowering the value of a relative parameter will indirectly raise or lower the value of these program parameters e Meta This
563. u can use up to four Drumsamples with velocity crossfades e Each note has separate settings for the most important sound parameters including volume filter cutoff and resonance envelope attack and decay pitch drive and low boost and gain for each band of the Program EQ For instance you could combine high drive and low cutoff frequency to create a lo fi effect on only a few sounds while the rest of the sounds remained clear and pristine e Each note can be routed to different Insert Effects or have separate FX Send amounts For instance you can send a snare sound through a dedicated compressor You can use Drum Kits only in Programs whose Oscillator Mode is set to Drums Note The EX banks can be used if you ve loaded optional EXB USB PCM series drumsamples Drum Kit memory structure The M3 has 153 Drum Kits divided into Internal User and GM General MIDI groups as shown below You can edit or write into any of the locations except for the GM bank which cannot be erased Drum kit banks No Bank User drum kits 144 GM 152 GM GM bank The 9 Drum Kits in the GM bank are compatible with the GM2 sound map The other Drum Kits may use different mappings where appropriate Drum Kit Programs and Oscillator Mode The Program s Oscillator Mode setting on the Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Program Basic page sets whether the Program is used to play Drum Kits or to play normal Multisamples such as
564. u want to delete and press the Cut button Subsequent tracks will be moved forward in the list Note For more details on other editing operations please see 0 4c Media Select Command buttons on page 410 of the Parameter Guide and Swap Track on page 435 of the Parameter Guide 3 Insert a blank CD R or CD RW media into the drive In the Make Audio CD page use Media Select to select the internal CD R RW drive or an external USB CD R RW drive commercially available The CD R RW drive is shown as CDD Blank Disc amp An audio CD cannot be created on a disc that contains data other than audio e g files In this case it will not be possible to select the menu commands Write to CD or Finalize Audio CD Note Even when the recommended CD R RW media is used some audio CD players may be unable to play back the disc Also since some audio CD players are unable to play back CD RW media we recommend that you use CD R media 4 Select the menu command Write to CD to access the dialog box and specify how the CD will be written Mode write C Execute finalize too Cancel OK Use Speed to set the writing speed This will indicate the speeds supported by the CD R RW drive you are using Here you should set Speed to the lowest speed that can be selected amp Be aware that if you use a faster writing speed ina slower system writing errors will occur Use Mode to specify the writin
565. ually for each Combination Normally when you select a new Combination its KARMA settings will be loaded as well In some cases however you may wish to try out different Combinations while keeping the KARMA settings the same The Global Basic page Load KARMA when changing parameters let you select between these two behaviors There are separate settings for Programs Combinations and Songs To set this up 1 Go to the Global Basic page 2 Under Load KARMA setting when changing set the Combinations check box as desired Check the box to load the individual Combinations KARMA settings Un check the box to keep KARMA settings the same even when changing Combinations For details please see Load KARMA when changing on page 373 of the Parameter Guide 179 180 Using KARMA KARMA function settings in Sequencer mode In Sequencer mode you can use four KARMA modules modules A B C and D As in a combination you can use the KARMA modules to generate independent phrases or patterns that play for example drum bass guitar and strings programs or you can combine the four KARMA modules and the sixteen track programs in a wide variety of ways The structure of the KARMA related parameters is the same as in Combination mode See KARMA function settings in Combination mode on page 176 In Sequencer mode you can use the KARMA function while realtime recording song tracks or patte
566. udio MIDI IN USB B SEAL LA Ae NN KARMA function GE KARMA module Generated Effect parameters The structure of the KARMA function The KARMA function consists of the following major parts KARMA modules A KARMA module uses a GE to generate phrases or patterns In Program mode only one KARMA module A is used In Combination or Sequencer modes four KARMA modules A B C D can be used For example each module might be used to generate phrases and patterns for a separate sound such as drums bass guitar and piano M In Program mode the KARMA module transmits and receives all MIDI data on the Global MIDI channel specified by MIDI Channel In Combination and Sequencer modes the MIDI data from each KARMA module is transmitted and received on the In Input Channel and Out Output Channel specified for each module GE Generated Effect The phrases and patterns produced by a KARMA module are generated by the GE Note data from the keyboard will affect how note data will be developed and how rhythm chord structure and velocity etc will be controlled to generate a phrase or pattern MIDI control changes and pitch bend data can also be generated in synchronization with the phrase or pattern As a capability unique to the M3 the KARMA function can generate MIDI exclusive messages to control wave sequencing which switches between multisamples etc of a program in realtime This lets you cr
567. ule B Input Ch G ch Out Ch 03 The timbres played by the KARMA modules are shown in red as specified by the timbre s MIDI channel setting and the KARMA module s Out Channel setting MIDI IZ0 Iti Gch out A EE b e2 BEE E 3 For KARMA modules A and B turn Run on checked and set GE Select to GE See Run and Solo settings on page 176 KARMA module A select a bass phrase as the GE KARMA module B select a drum phrase as the GE When the KARMA function is on your playing on the keyboard will sound a piano on timbre 1 and will simultaneously be sent to KARMA modules A and B The bass phrase generated by module A is sent on MIDI channel 02 to play timbre 2 The drum phrase generated by module B is sent on MIDI channel 03 to play timbre 3 4 Use Thru Timbre Thru to specify what will sound when the KARMA function is off GE Setup E EEA COMBI P7 1 KARMA1 Load GE Opt d 24 68 WMOLARPRAULLLERRULLLOLRELALOLEIRRAULGORRRULLOLERALLOLLEALRILLLOLRELLLOLLILE GE Setup E gt Orum DP1 Drum Pere Btm C 1 Top Gy JThruinZ Trans 88 P1083 16 Beat 1 ANI Kits m Run _ Solo _ Link to DT _ Thru Gut 2 Trans 88 MIDI Lo Ir Gch out Heic b a2 gee p gee p D BiG b et g When the KARMA function is off playing the keyboard will normally sound only the timbres that match the global MIDI channel Ch 01 In this example
568. umber and velocity to determine which Timbres will sound The Programs assigned to each Timbre can sound in three ways as part of a layer a split or a velocity switch A Combination can be set to use any one of these methods or to use two or more of these methods simultaneously Layer Layers cause two or more Programs to sound simultaneously when a note is played Program B T T Se 5 2 D Split Splits cause different Programs to sound on different areas of the keyboard E Split Different programs will sound in different areas of the keyboard Velocity Switch Velocity Switches cause different Programs to sound depending on the velocity how hard you play the notes Strong Keyboard playing Program A Soft dynamics UTE different programs On M3 you can use a different Program for each of up to sixteen Timbres and combine two or more of the above methods to create even more complex setups program 6 Strong Keyboard playing Program C Soft dynamics AUT e layered In the higher keyboard range C and D are switched by velocity and layered with A As an additional possibility you can set the slope for a key zone or velocity zone so that the volume diminishes gradually This lets you change a split into a keyboard crossfade or a velocity switch into a velocity crossfade Keyboard X Fade keyboard Se ienliansen IUCN e Program B 7 72
569. ups to make one drum sound cut off another drum sound such as closed and open hi hats For example let s say that you ve assigned an open hi hat and a closed hi hat to the same exclusive group e Play the open hi hat sound e While it s still ringing play the closed hi hat e The open hi hat sound will be cut off simulating the action of a physical hi hat 137 138 Settings for the entire M3 Global mode GLOBAL PS Drum Kit Yoice Mixer j 932 U a Drumkit UAS F 3 E Assign AE E EEEE TE EA T MYoice Assign Mode m _ Single Trigger m Enable Note On Receive Exclusive Group EEN O Enable Mote Off Receive Fan C064 Busi F xr Output Select E L R Send 1 ta MFX1 B06 of Sendz to MFX2 o08 Fx Control Bus Using Hold The Program Hold parameter can be especially useful for drum programs since it lets the samples ring out naturally regardless of how long you hold down the note The way that this works depends on settings in both the Program and the Drum Kit as described below To enable Hold 1 Access the Prog P1 Basic DT Ctrls Key Zone Scale page 2 Under Key Zone make sure that the Hold check box is checked Once you ve turned on Hold for the Program the function is controlled on a note by note basis according to settings within the Drum Kit 3 Access the Global P5 Drum Kit Voice Mixer
570. urn on the KARMA function Adjusting the performance tempo In the same way as for a program you can use the TEMPO knob or the TAP TEMPO switch to adjust the performance tempo Changing the tempo will affect the tempo of all KARMA modules that are operating See page 167 amp You can t adjust the performance tempo of each KARMA module individually 169 170 Using KARMA Checking note on off and key zone The screenshot shown below is a realtime display of the note data received from the keyboard pads 1 8 and MIDI IN or USB B and the note on off data generated by KARMA modules A B C and D together with the name of the chord that was detected 1 Access the Combi P0 Play KARMA RIC page KARMA RTC I COMBI P Play EEJ MULTI ABS 99 C25 9 Rhythm Complesity KARMA Value on on or or ott ott ott ott ModRur ModRun ModRun ModRUn RAYMUIT Octave Octave Octaved i E E CERE a e When you play the keyboard or strike a pad 1 8 the name of the chord detected by each KARMA module will appear in the Chord field of KARMA Module Info The displayed chord name is the chord that is detected by the module selected by the front panel MODULE CONTROL switch The way in which chords are detected will depend on the settings of the KARMA module E Master Ee omr_s The CC Notes area shows the status of the control data and note
571. uts out all parts of the sound both highs and lows except for the region around the cutoff frequency Since this filter cuts out both high and low frequencies its effect can change dramatically depending on the cutoff setting and the oscillator s multisample With low resonance settings you can use the Band Pass filter to create telephone or vintage phonograph sounds With higher resonance settings it can create buzzy or nasal timbres Band Reject 6dB oct This filter type also called a notch filter cuts only the parts of the sound directly around the cutoff frequency Try modulating the cutoff with an LFO to create phaser like effects Filter Types and Cutoff Frequency Low Pass ad 12 24 High Pass 1 12 24 l Band Pass g Band Reject a 24 160 1 18k 24k Cutoff Frequency Resonance Resonance emphasizes the frequencies around the cutoff frequency as shown in the diagram below When this is set to 0 there is no emphasis and frequencies beyond the cutoff will simply diminish smoothly At medium settings the resonance will alter the timbre of the filter making it sound more nasal or more extreme At very high settings the resonance can be heard as a separate whistling pitch To make the resonance track the keyboard pitch please see Key Follow on page 50 of the Parameter Guide B B 12 12 24 24 as 24 160 tk 10k 24k 2 24 100 t
572. volume of a piano note begins at a high volume the instant you play the note and then decreases gradually The volume of an organ note on the other hand remains constant as long as you continue pressing the key The volume of a note on a violin or wind instrument can be varied during the note by the musician i e by regulating the amount of pressure on the bow or the force of the breath Volume Piano Volume Organ Volume remains constant Volume decays gradually until note is released Time Time Pan PROG P4 Amp EG Amp1 Driver O Drive r _ Bypass Drive Vt Low Boost 4 AMS off AMS off Intensity 68 Intensity 00 pe Level EE Amp Level GEG E AMS G Note Number Intensity 00 T Ampie Ampe Ameo en ormer row ee E Pan The main Pan parameter controls the stereo position after the signal has passed through the oscillator filter and amp Normally you ll set this to C064 so that the sound is centered equally between the left and right speakers To create a stereo effect when Oscillator Mode is set to Double set the Amp1 Driver 1 page Pan to L001 and the Amp2 Driver2 page Pan R127 This will make OSC1 go to the left speaker and OSC2 go to the right speaker With a setting of Random the pan will change randomly each time you play a note on M3 producing an interesting effect Detailed Editing with Programs Using the Amp se
573. w to reset an individual slider or switch 1 While holding down the RESET CONTROLS switch operate the slider 1 8 or switch 1 8 that you want to reset 2 When you ve reset the controller release the RESET CONTROLS switch Here s how to reset an entire group CONTROL ASSIGN of sliders or switches e While holding down the RESET CONTROLS switch press the CONTROL ASSIGN MIXER KARMA switch that s shown in the display i e whose LED is lit The program or combination will be reset to the values that are written For a sequencer song the values will be reset to the state in which you entered the mode or selected the song or the state immediately after you executed Copy From Combi etc Note When you reset CONTROL ASSIGN REALTIME CONTROL each slider will be at the center value 064 Note For CONTROL ASSIGN TONE ADJUST the values will be reset as follows depending on the parameters that are assigned For a program absolute type values will be reset to the specified value and relative type values will be reset to the center For a combination the values will be reset to the written values For a sequencer song the values will be reset to the state in which you entered the mode or selected the song or the state immediately after you executed Copy From Combi etc KARMA MODULE CONTROL switch e You can reset the sliders switches and scene settings of the currently lit KARMA module While holding down the RES
574. wing you to hear the results of your editing in each page Creating multisample indexes and sampling PO Recording Here s how to create indexes in a multisample and assign a sample to each index 1 Press the MODE SAMPLING switch to enter Sampling mode 2 Access the P0 Recording Recording page Index Multisample SE SAMPLING P Recording Popup i BAG NewhS PTT 111 Keyboard THUG TTT MT TINT INT In Zindex le AAA ATALA ULALE Sample sample aay SSS aene Origkey C2 TopKey C2 Range C 1 EREC Sample Setup recordi Save to GRAM Bank E Rant Recording S m TEA nie 001 ans Sample Time AB min 18 925 sec Sample Mode gt Steren Create 3 Select Multisample Select and create a multisample To create a new multisample press the Multisample Select popup button Then press a Multisample No in the list for which no name has been entered or use the numeric keys 0 9 to input a number and then press the ENTER switch A dialog box will appear Create Hew Multisample 662 _ Stereo Cancel OK If you want to create a stereo multisample check the Stereo box and press the OK button If you want to create a monaural multisample uncheck the Stereo box and press the OK button 4 Press the Create button to create an index Immediately after the power is turned on
575. wo lines The upper line is the L channel waveform and the lower line is the R channel waveform 3 Use Edit Range Start and Edit Range End to specify the range that you wish to edit The selected range will be highlighted Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Multisample editing P3 Multisample Edit SAMPLING P1 Sample Edit nnn m A HAA L Index 4a aas If you want to audition the selected region press the SAMPLING START STOP switch The selected region will play at the pitch of the base key the blue key in the keyboard display You can specify the base key by holding down the ENTER switch and playing a note on the keyboard When you play a key to which the sample is assigned the highlighted range of the keyboard displayed in Keyboard amp Index the sample will be played back according to its loop settings The procedure for using the ZOOM and Use Zero check boxes is the same as for P2 Loop Edit 4 From the list of menu select the desired editing command Make the appropriate settings in the dialog box and press the OK button to execute For details on the many sample editing features please see Sampling Menu Command on page 345 of the Parameter Guide Multisample editing P3 Multisample Edit Editing a multisample is accomplished with a number of operations i e creating indexes for the multisample and assigning a sample to each index editing operations such as deleting
576. xecute the menu command Half Damper Calibration Global PO Basic Setup to correctly calibrate the half damper pedal sensitivity PG p 399 USB Media and CD The date of the data is wrong The files you saved or WAVE files you sampled have the incorrect date e Use the menu command Set Date Time Media Utility page to specify the correct current date and time p 148 External USB devices The drive of a connected USB device is not detected Has the media been formatted gt PG p 433 Is the external device connected correctly gt p 33 You may have turned on the power of the USB device after powering on the M3 e Execute the menu command Scan USB device Media Media Information to re mount the USB device PG p 439 Error in writing to medium occurs frequently when saving data to the external device Execute the menu command Check Medium Media Utility page to detect and repair errors on the media PG p 434 CD media in a USB CD R RW drive is not de tected Did you touch the display CD R RW drive Can t write If you are unable to save data such as PCG or SNG files has the disc been formatted If you are writing WAVE file to create an audio CD it is not necessary to format the disc Are you using the recommended media for your drive If you are writing from an external USB drive to CD R RW it is possible that the transfer speed is insufficient e Writing may be suc
577. y M3 61 and the sound module by itself as the M3 M References in these manuals to the M3 refer to all of these models collectively Abbreviations for the manuals OG PG In the documentation references to the manuals are abbreviated as follows OG Operation Guide PG Parameter Guide Procedure steps 1 2 3 These indicate the steps of a procedure Symbols 4 W Note Tips These symbols respectively indicate a caution a MIDI related explanation a supplementary note or a tip Example screen displays The parameter values shown in the example screens of this manual are only for explanatory purposes and may not necessary match the values that appear in the Display of your instrument MIDI related explanations CC is an abbreviation for Control Change Number In explanations of MIDI messages numbers in square brackets always indicate hexadecimal numbers What is REMs 4VEMS f7 mMs Resonant structure and Electronic circuit Modeling System is Korg s proprietary technology for digitally recreating the numerous factors that produce and influence a sound ranging from the sound production mechanisms of acoustic instruments and electric electronic musical instruments to the resonances of an instrument body or speaker cabinet the sound field in which the instrument is played the propagation route of the sound the electrical and acoustic response of mics and speakers and the changes produced
578. y can be combined with preset programs They can be used with the KARMA function to produce interesting results for example by using the KARMA function to automatically play sound effects or spoken samples Sampling Overview Compare Multisample Index002 Index003 Index004 Top Key Top Key Top Key Top Key HT Index 001 0000 Sample A Index001 Index 002 0001 Sample B Index 003 Index 004 0002 0003 Sample C Sample D Multisample Program OSC Single Double Program OSC Drums In Sampling mode there is no Compare function that lets you return to the state prior to editing If you want to preserve the state prior to editing use a function such as Copy Sample or Copy MS to copy the multisample or sample before you begin editing For details please see Copy Sample on page 346 of the Parameter Guide and Copy MS Copy Multisample on page 348 of the Parameter Guide In some of the menu commands on the Sample Edit and Loop Edit pages you can execute with the Overwrite option unchecked in the dialog box so that the sample data prior to editing will be preserved 109 Sampling Open Sampling System Sampling and editing in Sampling mode In Sampling mode you can record samples and edit sample data that you sampled or loaded from media including WAVE and AIFF formats You can also assign the edited samples to indexes zones to creat
579. you can manage them together with the programs and combinations Preparing a user pattern You ll first need to prepare the user pattern that you want to convert to a Drum Track pattern To create a user pattern you can realtime record it in the Seq P10 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page or step record it see page 93 PG page 274 Alternatively performance data from a track can be imported into a pattern meaning that performance data you ve created in a track or SMF data you ve loaded in Media mode can be used as a user pattern To do this execute the Get From Track menu command in the Seq P10 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page see PG page 274 Converting to a Drum Track pattern 1 Press the MODE SEQ switch to enter Sequencer mode 2 Access the Seq P10 Patern RPPR Pattern Edit page SEQ Pi Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit a 61 3900 NEW SONG Trackat MIDI TRACK i I BG26 Hip Hop Kit TERE E All Patterns available in Song ABB m Note Only Cancel OK Use the To Drum Track Pattern Select field to specify the user Drum Track pattern number that will hold the converted data When you execute the command the data will be overwritten onto this number If you select the All Patterns available in Song option all patterns in the song that contain note data will be converted starting with the number you specified in step 4 If you execute this command with Note
580. you can use the Put to Track or Copy to Track menu commands to place or copy the performance data from a pattern into a MIDI track Recording patterns in real time Here s how you can use realtime recording to create a pattern User patterns can be accessed by the RPPR function in the same way as preset patterns and can be copied to or placed in a song Playback data from a track can also be copied to a pattern In addition you can use the menu command Convert to Drum Trk Pattern to convert a user pattern to a user Drum Track pattern for use with the Drum Track function See Pattern on page 96 When realtime recording a pattern a pattern of the specified number of measures will playback repeatedly allowing you to continue adding musical data to it 1 Create a new song and as described in Preparations for recording on page 83 set the track to the program that will be used by the pattern 2 Access the P10 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page Pattern Select REC Resolution SEQ P18 Pattern RPPR Pattern Eq t iG i 3900 NEW SONG Trackat MIDI TRACK 01 Pattern User O EMATE dJ 120 00 Ony REC Reso hi MEUSED IN SONG TRACK es a Se eS SS eee ee l 4664 Stidio Standard Kit MUSED IN RPP R ee eS ES SS SS ES ES Se Sere 3 Use Track Select to select the track that you will use to record the pattern The pattern will sound with t
581. ysically formatted yet To solve this problem e Execute the Media mode Utility menu command Format to physically format the media full format E Error Exceeded Error in formatting medium Meaning An error occurred while performing a physical format full format or high level format quick format of the media To solve this problem e Use other media Meaning When executing the Media mode Utility menu command Convert to 509660 Format an error occurred while rewriting the UDF area To solve this problem e Use other media Error in reading from medium Meaning An error occurred while reading data from media This error may also appear when data is being written to media by a Save or Copy operation To solve this problem e Execute the reading operation once again If the same error occurs it is possible that the data on the media has been damaged Error in writing to medium Meaning A verification error occurred while writing data to a medium To solve this problem e Itis possible that the media has been physically damaged Try another media Avoid using the media that produced the error e When using external USB media execute the Media mode Utility menu command Check Medium Exceeded 16 Programs some data not loaded Meaning You exceeded 16 programs while performing Advanced Conversion Load When an AKAI Program is loaded it will be converted into multiple programs and one combination accordi

M3 Operation Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents